Global TOP SLB

GlobalTOPS Reference Manual
- Volume 1: Generalities and

Accessories
Reference: 275253781
Version: 2.4
Release Date: 16-Nov-2006
EDMS UID: 275253781
Produced: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50
Owner: SRPC Doc-TBT
Author: SRPC Doc-TBT
Private TOPS, Wir eline Handbook
Copyright © 2006 Schlumberger, Unpublished Work. All rights reserved.

GlobalTOPS Reference Manual
- Volume 1: Generalities and
Accessories
Reference: 275253781
Version: 2.4
Release Date: 16-Nov-2006
EDMS UID: 275253781
Published: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50
Owner: SRPC Doc-TBT
Private TOPS, Wir eline Handbook
Copyright © 2006 Sophia, Unpublished Work. All rights reserved.

Intentionally Blank
Private
GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Legal Information
Legal Information
This work contains the confidential and proprietary trade secrets of Schlumberger
and may not be copied or stored in an information retrieval system, transferred,
used, distributed, translated or retransmitted in any form or by any means,
electronic or mechanical, in whole or in part, without the express written
permission of the copyright owner.
Trademarks & Service marks
Schlumberger, the Schlumberger logotype, and other words or symbols used

SRPC Doc-TBT\SRPC Doc-TBT\275253781\2.4\Release Date:16-Nov-2006\EDMS UID: 275253781\Produced: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50
to identify the products and services described herein are either trademarks,
trade names or service marks of Schlumberger and its licensors, or are the
property of their respective owners. These marks may not be copied, imitated
or used, in whole or in part, without the express prior written permission of
Schlumberger. In addition, covers, page headers, custom graphics, icons, and
other design elements may be service marks, trademarks, and/or trade dress
of Schlumberger, and may not be copied, imitated, or used, in whole or in part,
without the express prior written permission of Schlumberger.
A complete list of Schlumberger marks may be viewed at the Schlumberger

Oilfield Services Marks page: http://www.hub.slb.com/index.cfm?id=id32083
Marks of Schlumberger include but may not be limited to Vectorene.
Private
GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Document Control
Document Control
Owner: SRPC Doc-TBT
Reviewer: SRPC Doc-TBT
Approver: SRPC Doc-TBT
Contact Information
Name: SRPC Doc-TBT
LDAP Alias: SRPCDoc-TBT
Revision History
Rev Effective Date Description Prepared by
2.0 08-Sep-2004 EDMS Conversion + Updating SRPC Doc-TBT
2.1 10-Oct-2004 Manual upgrade. Patrick Stirling
2.2 04-Apr-2005 Upgrade of the title of the manual. Patrick CHAIGNE
2.3 15-Jun-2006 Update image “Collector Safety Patricia Quéré
Switch wiring diagram” following
InTouch ticket # 4171968
2.4 16-Nov-2006 Minor modifications (Miss spelling) P. Chaigne
and update of the Title
Private
SRPC Doc-TBT\SRPC Doc-TBT\275253781\2.4\Release Date: 16-Nov-2006\EDMS UID: 275253781\Produced: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50 GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Document Control
Intentionally Blank
Private
v GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Table of Contents v
Table of Contents
FOREWORD ____________________________________________________ xvii
1 Health, safety, and environment

1.1 Personnel safety _____________________________________________ 1-1
1.2 Schlumberger SLB-QHSE-POLICY ___________________________ 1-2
1.3 Handling and stepping _______________________________________ 1-8
1.4 Driving safety ________________________________________________ 1-9
1.5 Shop safety ________________________________________________ 1-18
1.6 Wellsite requirements _______________________________________ 1-22
1.7 Installation Hot Work - “Permit to Work” _______________________ 1-24
1.8 Explosive operations safety procedures ______________________ 1-25

1.9 Pressure control safety ______________________________________ 1-28
2 Operation management system

2.1 Introduction to cell concept ___________________________________ 2-1
2.2 Cell structure ________________________________________________ 2-4
2.3 Responsibility ________________________________________________ 2-5
2.4 Accountability ________________________________________________ 2-7
2.5 Cell control and reporting _____________________________________ 2-7
2.6 RITE maintenance system ____________________________________ 2-8
3 Meters
3.1 Reference document _________________________________________ 3-2
3.2 Overview of multimeters ______________________________________ 3-2
3.3 Standard meter symbols ______________________________________ 3-2
3.4 Multimeter operating instructions ______________________________ 3-3
3.5 Safety meter ________________________________________________ 3-12
3.6 Megohmmeter ______________________________________________ 3-16
3.7 Common FIT terms _________________________________________ 3-17
3.8 Rig to casing monitor ________________________________________ 3-18
4 O-rings
4.1 O-rings basics _______________________________________________ 4-1
4.2 Causes of O-rings seal failures _______________________________ 4-2
4.3 Standard operating procedure ________________________________ 4-3
5 Cables
5.1 Safety and precautions _______________________________________ 5-2
5.2 Cable description ____________________________________________ 5-6
5.3 Hepta cable construction _____________________________________ 5-7
5.4 Monocable construction ______________________________________ 5-7
5.5 Coaxial cable construction ____________________________________ 5-8
Private
vi GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Table of Contents vi
5.6 Material properties __________________________________________ 5-10

5.7 Voltage and current ratings __________________________________ 5-19
5.8 Cable Maintenance _________________________________________ 5-19
5.9 Electrical maintenance ______________________________________ 5-20
5.10 Check for remaining life and ductility _________________________ 5-22
5.11 Prolonging cable life ________________________________________ 5-22
6 Logging accessories
6.1 Adapter heads (AH) __________________________________________ 6-2
6.2 Casing collar locators _______________________________________ 6-12
6.3 Flexible joint adapters _______________________________________ 6-18
6.4 Swivel adapter heads _______________________________________ 6-23
6.5 EQF weights ________________________________________________ 6-32
6.6 Centralizers and standoffs ___________________________________ 6-39
7 Collectors
7.1 Description __________________________________________________ 7-2
8 Rig-up equipment
8.1 Health, safety and environmental _____________________________ 8-2
8.2 Equipment description _______________________________________ 8-12
9 Logging Units
9.1 Common logging units _______________________________________ 9-1
9.2 Maintenance policy _________________________________________ 9-32
9.3 Operator qualification _______________________________________ 9-35
10 Rope sockets
10.1 Rope socket parts on a logging cable ________________________ 10-1
10.2 Assembly ___________________________________________________ 10-2
11 CMTD
11.1 Cable Mounted Tension Device ______________________________ 11-1
12 Wireline logging heads

12.1 Logging equipment head ____________________________________ 12-2
12.2 LEH-QT, 3-3/8-in, 31-pin logging tension head (H701460) _____ 12-3
12.3 Perforating Equipment Head (PEH) _________________________ 12-15
12.4 Monocable Heads (MH) ____________________________________ 12-16
12.5 Weakpoints ________________________________________________ 12-32
12.6 ECRD (Electronically Controlled Release Device) ____________ 12-36
12.7 BCC boots ________________________________________________ 12-39
13 Bridles
13.1 Description _________________________________________________ 13-2
Private
vii GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Table of Contents vii
13.2 Standard bridles ____________________________________________ 13-4

13.3 Bridles for LEH-Q heads _____________________________________ 13-5
13.4 Maintenance end re-swaging ________________________________ 13-5
13.5 Head end re-swaging _______________________________________ 13-7
13.6 Cable end re-swaging _______________________________________ 13-8
13.7 Electrode TRIM _____________________________________________ 13-9
13.8 BCC boot kits _______________________________________________ 13-9
13.9 Bridle construction _________________________________________ 13-10
13.10 Swaging terminal upper end (H026246) _____________________ 13-20
13.11 Bridle BCC’s _______________________________________________ 13-21
14 Integrated Depth Dual Wheel Spooler (IDW)

14.1 Content Overview ___________________________________________ 14-1
14.2 Description _________________________________________________ 14-1
14.3 General information _________________________________________ 14-3

14.4 Removal modules from an IDW ______________________________ 14-5
14.5 Disassembly of IDW modules ________________________________ 14-6
14.6 RITE maintenance _________________________________________ 14-23
15 Fishing
15.1 Safety ______________________________________________________ 15-2
15.2 Sticking causes _____________________________________________ 15-3
15.3 Avoiding getting stuck _______________________________________ 15-4
15.4 Action to be taken when stuck _______________________________ 15-5
15.5 Fishing equipment __________________________________________ 15-6
15.6 Equipment Assembly _______________________________________ 15-10
15.7 Fishing procedure __________________________________________ 15-19
15.8 Side-door overshot technique _______________________________ 15-21
15.9 Freeing at the weakpoint ___________________________________ 15-24
15.10 Procedure _________________________________________________ 15-25
Appendix
A Useful links
A.1 InTouchSupport ______________________________________________ A-1
A.2 InTouch reference pages _____________________________________ A-2
A.3 Product Center web pages ___________________________________ A-3
Private
SRPC Doc-TBT\SRPC Doc-TBT\275253781\2.4\Release Date: 16-Nov-2006\EDMS UID: 275253781\Produced: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50 viii GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Table of Contents viii
Intentionally Blank
Private
ix GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / List of Figures ix
List of Figures
1-1 Safety loop ________________________________________________________ 1-8

1-2 “Explosives: Schlumberger Field Safety Procedures” placard ________ 1-27
2-1 The wrong approach _______________________________________________ 2-2
2-2 The right approach ________________________________________________ 2-2
2-3 The FE cell organization ___________________________________________ 2-3
3-1 Schlumberger safety multimeter H622622 ___________________________ 3-2
3-2 Mechanical zero adjustment ________________________________________ 3-4
3-3 Electrical zero adjustment __________________________________________ 3-5
3-4 VOM setting for high resistance measurements______________________ 3-7
3-5 VOM setting for low resistance measurements_______________________ 3-8
3-6 Measuring AC voltage _____________________________________________ 3-9

3-7 Measuring DC voltage ____________________________________________ 3-11
3-8 Measuring DC current ____________________________________________ 3-12
3-9 Checking a dual diode plug or dual diode switch ____________________ 3-14
3-10 Megohmmeter____________________________________________________ 3-17
4-1 Effect of pressure on O-ring activation ______________________________ 4-2
5-1 Hepta cable construction ___________________________________________ 5-7
5-2 Monocable construction ____________________________________________ 5-8
5-3 Coaxial cable construction _________________________________________ 5-8
5-4 Common insulation and jacket component ratings __________________ 5-11
5-5 Mechanical properties of standard cables __________________________ 5-12
5-6 Mechanical properties of special order cables ______________________ 5-14
5-7 Electrical properties of standard cables ____________________________ 5-16
5-8 Electrical properties of special order cables_________________________ 5-18
5-9 Point of leak determination ________________________________________ 5-21
5-10 Sheave diameters ________________________________________________ 5-23
6-1 Example adapter head AH-38 - assembly drawing ___________________ 6-4
6-2 CAL-B assembly _________________________________________________ 6-14
6-3 AH-107 assembly drawing ________________________________________ 6-19
6-4 SAH-F assembly drawing, DP693362 ______________________________ 6-25
6-5 SAH-F circuit diagram ____________________________________________ 6-28
6-6 High density EQF weights (ends only drawing) _____________________ 6-34
6-7 EQF weights - bill of material ______________________________________ 6-35
6-8 EQF steel weights (ends only drawing)_____________________________ 6-36
6-9 EQF steel weights - bill of material _________________________________ 6-37
6-10 Common tool standoffs ___________________________________________ 6-40
6-11 Tool standoff position _____________________________________________ 6-41
6-12 Gemco reference table____________________________________________ 6-42
6-13 CME-ZC assembly drawing J966300 ______________________________ 6-43
7-1 COL-ZA 8-ring collector ____________________________________________ 7-2
7-2 COL-Z mechanical and electrical contact drawing ___________________ 7-4
7-3 COL-Z open collector with clip holder stacks removed________________ 7-5
7-4 COL-ZA collector with cable _______________________________________ 7-6
7-5 COL-ZC collector with cable ________________________________________ 7-8
Private
x GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / List of Figures x
7-6 Installing gasket (460) ____________________________________________ 7-11

7-7 Mounting the collector on the winch drum __________________________ 7-12
7-8 COL-Z electrical assembly ________________________________________ 7-13
7-9 Cable gland components __________________________________________ 7-14
7-10 Preparing the wireline cable end ___________________________________ 7-15
7-11 Ground wire wrapping completed __________________________________ 7-16
7-12 Inner wires bent out_______________________________________________ 7-16
7-13 Conductors unwrapped ___________________________________________ 7-17
7-14 Cable end repositioned ___________________________________________ 7-18
7-15 Cable conductor measurement lengths_____________________________ 7-19
7-16 Pin diagram ______________________________________________________ 7-20
7-17 Collector Safety Switch wiring diagram _____________________________ 7-21
7-18 SWPT MCM safety switch wiring __________________________________ 7-22
7-19 MSLC MCM safety switch wiring___________________________________ 7-23
7-20 Wiring diagram showing the collector, safety switch, and unit ________ 7-24
8-1 Aluminum sheave ________________________________________________ 8-14
8-2 Heavy duty 36-inch DNV sheave __________________________________ 8-15
8-3 Heavy duty 13-inch DNV sheave __________________________________ 8-16
8-4 Nylon composite sheave __________________________________________ 8-17
8-5 Sheave and crown block assembly on SWPT_______________________ 8-17
8-6 Heavy duty nylon sheaves ________________________________________ 8-18
8-7 Rite maintenance and retirement schedule for aluminum sheaves ___ 8-20
8-8 Rite maintenance and retirement schedule for stainless steel DNV certified
sheaves _________________________________________________________ 8-22
8-9 Rite maintenance and retirement schedule for standard duty nylon composite
sheaves _________________________________________________________ 8-24
8-10 Rite maintenance and retirement schedule for swpt and dop-b
sheaves _________________________________________________________ 8-26
8-11 Bridle guards _____________________________________________________ 8-27
8-12 Rig-Up yoke______________________________________________________ 8-27
8-13 Floor stand _______________________________________________________ 8-28
8-14 Hand guards _____________________________________________________ 8-28
8-15 Sheave hanger ___________________________________________________ 8-29
8-16 Sheave hanger adapter ___________________________________________ 8-30
8-17 Alternative sheave hanger_________________________________________ 8-30
8-18 Adapter axle to connect alternative sheave hanger on nylon sheaves 8-30
8-19 Rite maintenance and retirement policy for sheave hangers and
adapters _________________________________________________________ 8-32
8-20 Heavy duty make-up plate_________________________________________ 8-33
8-21 Mdt make-up plate________________________________________________ 8-34
8-22 Cone and mini make-up plate _____________________________________ 8-35
8-23 Top hat being load tested _________________________________________ 8-36
8-24 Rite maintenance and retirement schedule for make-up plates and
top-hats __________________________________________________________ 8-38
8-25 Tie-down chain ___________________________________________________ 8-39
8-26 Heavy duty tie-down chain ________________________________________ 8-40
8-27 Rite maintenance and retirement schedule or tie-down chains _______ 8-41
8-28 Thread protector for 3-3/8-in tool___________________________________ 8-42
Private
xi GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / List of Figures xi
8-29 Female lifting cap_________________________________________________ 8-43

8-30 Male lifting cap ___________________________________________________ 8-43
8-31 Liftings sub_______________________________________________________ 8-43
8-32 Rite maintenance and retirement schedule for lifting caps, subs and thread
protectors ________________________________________________________ 8-45
8-33 Wire rope fishing sling ____________________________________________ 8-46
8-34 Synthetic fishing sling _____________________________________________ 8-47
8-35 Rite maintenance and retirement schedule for slings ________________ 8-49
8-36 Clevis and machine bolt for aluminium sheaves_____________________ 8-50
8-37 Anchor shackle for wire rope fishing sling and lifting caps ___________ 8-51
8-38 Sling saver shackle _______________________________________________ 8-51
8-39 Rite maintenance and retirement schedules for shackles ____________ 8-53
8-40 Gooseneck_______________________________________________________ 8-54
8-41 Standard duty dual hook device ___________________________________ 8-55
8-42 Rite maintenance and retirement schedules for dual hook devices ___ 8-56
8-43 Top drive compensating sheave adapter ___________________________ 8-58
8-44 Shear pin assembly_______________________________________________ 8-58
8-45 Rite maintenance and retirement schedule for tdcsa ________________ 8-60
8-46 Air line wiper _____________________________________________________ 8-61
9-1 Optimum Service Land Carrier (OSLC-A/B) _________________________ 9-2
9-2 OSLC-EC, Foden 6x4 alpha model, euro certified, right hand drive
version____________________________________________________________ 9-4
9-3 OSLC-F, Renault 6x6 Kerax model, Euro3 Certified, Left Hand Drive
version____________________________________________________________ 9-8
9-4 MSLC-BA (MAXIS Express) _______________________________________ 9-12
9-5 SWPT-GBB, Internaltional 7300 4x4 chassis, integrated mast option _ 9-15
9-6 Views of the offshore unit electric drive (OSU-ME )__________________ 9-19
9-7 Interior views of the ONCC-A ______________________________________ 9-20
9-8 Typical MONU configuration _______________________________________ 9-21
9-9 WDDS-B front, right and left views _________________________________ 9-22
9-10 WDDS-B rear view showing the winch drive (left) and typical MONU setup
(right) ____________________________________________________________ 9-23
9-11 EHPS-D/E external views _________________________________________ 9-28
9-12 EHPS-D interior view (left) and MCB with cover removed (right) _____ 9-29
9-13 Driver qualification process________________________________________ 9-36
9-14 Safe winch operations placard_____________________________________ 9-38
10-1 Rope socket parts on a logging cable ______________________________ 10-2
10-2 Rope socket parts and accessories ________________________________ 10-4
10-3 Cable preparation ________________________________________________ 10-6
10-4 Installing the cable into the split jig section _________________________ 10-6
10-5 Installing the intermediate cone ____________________________________ 10-8
10-6 Properly seated intermediate cone with evenly spaced outer armors _ 10-9
10-7 7-52 rope socket cone positions __________________________________ 10-10
10-8 Exposed inner armors ___________________________________________ 10-11
10-9 Installing the inner cone __________________________________________ 10-12
10-10 Properly set inner cone with cut and filed inner armors _____________ 10-13
10-11 Removed outer insulation ________________________________________ 10-14
10-12 Cleaned and straightened conductor wires (filler and tape removed) 10-15
Private
xii GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / List of Figures xii
10-13 Preparing the conductor wires ____________________________________ 10-16

10-14 Completed rope socket __________________________________________ 10-17
10-15 Flare and birdcage examples _____________________________________ 10-17
10-16 Sequence of parts installation on the cable ________________________ 10-19
10-17 Preparing outer armors __________________________________________ 10-20
10-18 Preparing remaining inner armors for two inch cut _________________ 10-27
10-19 Ground wire and conductor preparation __________________________ 10-27
10-20 Applying torque to clamp nut _____________________________________ 10-28
11-1 CMTD-B device __________________________________________________ 11-2
11-2 Physics of measurement __________________________________________ 11-3
11-3 CMTD cable/roller selection _______________________________________ 11-5
11-4 Installation on OSU-FE, 2600 and 9900 series trucks, FSLC and
MSLC____________________________________________________________ 11-7
11-5 CMTD / TDC-C calibration setup___________________________________ 11-8
11-6 Tension device calibrator drawing with load cell _____________________ 11-9
11-7 WFDD display ___________________________________________________ 11-11
11-8 Component locations ____________________________________________ 11-12
11-9 CMTD exploded view ____________________________________________ 11-14
12-1 LEH-QT exploded view, (H701460) ________________________________ 12-3
12-2 Loadcell (H352106) mounting in head (H701315) ___________________ 12-6
12-3 Plastic feedthrough connectors and loadcell installed _______________ 12-7
12-4 Loctite application to loadcell ring (H701311) _______________________ 12-8
12-5 Installation of head leads on to feedthroughs _______________________ 12-9
12-6 Housing extension (H701310) _____________________________________ 12-9
12-7 LEH-QT with loadcell, weakpoint and weakpoint adapter installed___ 12-10
12-8 Bulkhead to head adapter in SFT-121 _____________________________ 12-11
12-9 Asembled LEH-QT (H701460)____________________________________ 12-11
12-10 LEH-QT assembly drawing _______________________________________ 12-12
12-11 Loadcell assembly _______________________________________________ 12-13
12-12 Sequence of parts installation on cable____________________________ 12-19
12-13 MH-22 assembly drawing - H030796______________________________ 12-21
12-14 Monocable head conductor assembly drawing - H42060 ___________ 12-22
12-15 Conductor and ground wire make-up______________________________ 12-24
12-16 Lower head assembly____________________________________________ 12-25
12-17 Preparing the lower head for installation___________________________ 12-25
12-18 Bell housing make-up to lower head ______________________________ 12-26
12-19 Installation of hex collar, key and fishing head _____________________ 12-27
12-20 MH-32 assembly drawing - H353637______________________________ 12-31
12-21 ECRD installed in LEH-QT _______________________________________ 12-37
12-22 Major sections of the ECRD ______________________________________ 12-38
12-23 Female boot_____________________________________________________ 12-42
12-24 Male Kalrez and Viton boot (insulator series) ______________________ 12-43
12-25 Male Kalrez and Viton boot (non-insulator series) __________________ 12-44
12-26 Large wire boot__________________________________________________ 12-45
12-27 Stripping conductors after boot and liner installation________________ 12-48
12-28 Properly crimped connector ______________________________________ 12-48
12-29 Inspect the crimp ________________________________________________ 12-49
12-30 Winchester crimping tool and Daniels crimping tool ________________ 12-49
Private
xiii GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / List of Figures xiii
12-31 Completed male and female conductor terminations _______________ 12-49

12-32 BCC disconnect tool (H245789) __________________________________ 12-52
13-1 Bridle cable ready for swaging-LEH-Q head _______________________ 13-10
13-2 Head end parts assembly for LEH-Q heads _______________________ 13-11
13-3 Swaging the head end for LEH-Q heads __________________________ 13-12
13-4 Swage assembly to mass isolation assembly ______________________ 13-12
13-5 Swage assembly with tape applied________________________________ 13-13
13-6 Viton tubing in place with transition smoothed _____________________ 13-13
13-7 Head end assembly completed ___________________________________ 13-14
13-8 Head end assembly with conductors trimmed and ready for
termination ______________________________________________________ 13-14
13-9 Electrode layout and dimensions _________________________________ 13-15
13-10 Lead and conductor wires stripped and trimmed ___________________ 13-15
13-11 Insert wires into parallel connector ________________________________ 13-16
13-12 After crimping - smoothing the joint with lefton tape ________________ 13-16
13-13 Sealing the joint with teflon tape __________________________________ 13-16
13-14 Cable end prepared for swaging __________________________________ 13-19
13-15 Smoothing the cable to swage junction____________________________ 13-19
13-16 Bridle cable to swage junction sealed with four layers of teflon tape and
string-tied _______________________________________________________ 13-19
13-17 Conductors in place and ready for termination _____________________ 13-20
14-1 IDW major assemblies ____________________________________________ 14-2
14-2 IDW bottom view _________________________________________________ 14-2
14-3 Longitudinal and transverse tubes - IDW-B _________________________ 14-3
14-4 Measuring wheel assemblies on traversal tubes (longitudinal tubes
removed) ________________________________________________________ 14-4
14-5 Removal of front end modules _____________________________________ 14-5
14-6 Removal of rear (winch side) modules _____________________________ 14-6
14-7 Track module_____________________________________________________ 14-7
14-8 Roller sub-system removed from track module______________________ 14-7
14-9 Disassembled roller sub-assembly _________________________________ 14-8
14-10 Equipped roller support and cylinder assembly _____________________ 14-9
14-11 Orientation of the lever handle_____________________________________ 14-9
14-12 Cylinder assembly _______________________________________________ 14-11
14-13 Disassembly of the roller sub-assembly ___________________________ 14-12
14-14 Intallation of the retaining ring (B024453)__________________________ 14-13
14-15 Installation of the bearing (B024457) ______________________________ 14-13
14-16 Installation of the bearing and axle assembly ______________________ 14-14
14-17 Installation of the bearing ________________________________________ 14-15
14-18 Polyurethane caps on the cross traverse __________________________ 14-16
14-19 Axle and spring removal _________________________________________ 14-16
14-20 Springs and components _________________________________________ 14-17
14-21 Workbench view - bottom of measuring wheel assembly ___________ 14-17
14-22 Retainer screw removal __________________________________________ 14-18
14-23 Disassembly of measuring wheel assembly _______________________ 14-18
14-24 Anchoring device ________________________________________________ 14-20
14-25 Cable guide equipped end - parts and part numbers _______________ 14-21
14-26 Bridg equipped end - parts and part numbers ______________________ 14-21
Private
xiv GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / List of Figures xiv
14-27 Exploded view of the pushing assembly ___________________________ 14-22

14-28 Location of electrical connections and caps________________________ 14-23
14-29 IDW lubrication __________________________________________________ 14-24
14-30 Track module inspection _________________________________________ 14-24
14-31 Scraper and wheel lock inspection ________________________________ 14-25
14-32 Line wiper assembly _____________________________________________ 14-26
15-1 Rope socket kit __________________________________________________ 15-10
15-2 Circulating sub __________________________________________________ 15-11
15-3 Overshot kit _____________________________________________________ 15-12
15-4 Cable hanger kit and optional equipment __________________________ 15-14
15-5 Bowen wireline swivel____________________________________________ 15-15
15-6 Bowen spear head overshot #11810 (H39520)_____________________ 15-16
15-7 Cone type rope socket (H113238) ________________________________ 15-17
15-8 Guides for series 105 overshot ___________________________________ 15-18
15-9 Adapters chart___________________________________________________ 15-19

15-10 Bowen side-door overshot________________________________________ 15-24
Private
xv GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / List of Tables xv
List of Tables
1-1 Explosives Training Requirements _________________________________ 1-25

5-1 Tension Limits for Common Wireline Cables _________________________ 5-5
5-2 Armor Tensile Ranges ____________________________________________ 5-11
5-3 Problem Preventative Measure ____________________________________ 5-19
5-4 Cable Speed Guidelines __________________________________________ 5-24
6-1 AH-38 Electrical Checks ___________________________________________ 6-5
6-2 AH-38 Bill of Material ______________________________________________ 6-5
6-3 Adapter Head Group Listing (Includes Flex Joints) ___________________ 6-7
6-4 Collar Locator Group Listing _______________________________________ 6-16
6-5 AH-107 Bill of Material ____________________________________________ 6-20
6-6 AH-107 Electrical Checks _________________________________________ 6-21

6-7 SAH-F Electrical Checks __________________________________________ 6-30
6-8 SAH Group Listing________________________________________________ 6-31
6-9 EQF Weight Group Listing ________________________________________ 6-38
6-10 Centralizers Group Listing_________________________________________ 6-44
7-1 COL-Z Specifications ______________________________________________ 7-6
7-2 COL-ZC Specifications_____________________________________________ 7-9
7-3 Wireline Cable Glands ____________________________________________ 7-13
8-1 Aluminium Sheaves_______________________________________________ 8-19
8-2 DNV certified stainless steel sheaves ______________________________ 8-21
8-3 Nylon Sheaves Specification ______________________________________ 8-23
8-4 SWPT Crown Block Assemblies ___________________________________ 8-25
8-5 Sheave Hangers and Adapters ____________________________________ 8-31
8-6 Make-up plate and top-hat specifications ___________________________ 8-37
8-7 Tie-down chain specifications _____________________________________ 8-40
8-8 Specifications for Lifting Caps, Subs, and Thread Protectors ________ 8-44
8-9 Specifications for slings ___________________________________________ 8-48
8-10 Specifications for Shackles ________________________________________ 8-52
8-11 Specification for Dual Hook Devices _______________________________ 8-55
8-12 Specifications for TDCSA _________________________________________ 8-59
8-13 Specifications for Shear Pin Assembly _____________________________ 8-59
9-1 Operating Specifications for OSLC-A/B _____________________________ 9-3
9-2 Chassis and Associated Equipment_________________________________ 9-4
9-3 General Operating Specifications ___________________________________ 9-5
9-4 Abridged Chassis Specifications ____________________________________ 9-6
9-5 Open Hole Module Operating Specifications_________________________ 9-7
9-6 Cased Hole Module Operating Specifications ________________________ 9-7
9-7 General Operating Specifications ___________________________________ 9-9
9-8 Abridged Chassis Specifications ___________________________________ 9-10
9-9 Open Hole Module Operating Specifications________________________ 9-11
9-10 Cased Hole Module Operating Specifications _______________________ 9-11
9-11 Operating Specifications __________________________________________ 9-13
9-12 Abridged Chassis Specifications ___________________________________ 9-16
9-13 SWPT-GB Operating Specifications________________________________ 9-17
Private
xvi GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / List of Tables xvi
9-14 Operating Specifications __________________________________________ 9-20

9-15 Cabin Specifications ______________________________________________ 9-21
9-16 WDDS-B General Specifications___________________________________ 9-24
9-17 WDDS-B Performance Figures ____________________________________ 9-26
9-18 WDDS-B Weights and SWL _______________________________________ 9-26
9-19 EHPS-D and EHPS-E General Specifications ______________________ 9-29
9-20 EHPS-D and EHPS-E Electrical Specifications _____________________ 9-32
10-1 Cable Fishing Sub-assemblies ___________________________________ 10-18
10-2 Feedthrough Assemblies and Insulators for MH-22 Lower Head ____ 10-19
10-3 Spider Weak Point Strengths _____________________________________ 10-23
11-1 Cable and Roller Reference Chart _________________________________ 11-4
11-2 CMTD Assembly Options _________________________________________ 11-5
11-3 CMTD Calibration Tolerances ____________________________________ 11-11
11-4 CMTD Continuity and Insulation Checks __________________________ 11-13
12-1 LEH-QT Failure Symptoms and Probable Causes __________________ 12-6

12-2 MH-22 Specifications and Combinations __________________________ 12-18
12-3 MH-32 Specificatons_____________________________________________ 12-29
12-4 MH-32 Special Tools _____________________________________________ 12-30
12-5 Specialty Weakpoints ___________________________________________ 12-33
12-6 PEH Weakpoints ________________________________________________ 12-34
12-7 Modular Weakpoints _____________________________________________ 12-35
12-8 Cable Types and Conductor Insulation Outer Diameters____________ 12-41
12-9 Female Boot Selection ___________________________________________ 12-42
12-10 Male Kalrez and Viton Boots (Insulator Series) ____________________ 12-43
12-11 Male Kalrez and new Viton Selection (non-insulator) _______________ 12-44
12-12 Large Wire Boot Selection – Viton and Kalrez _____________________ 12-45
12-13 Female Boot and Liner Dimensions _______________________________ 12-45
13-1 Bridle Configurations______________________________________________ 13-4
13-2 Parts Needing Replacement - LEH-Q Heads _______________________ 13-7
13-3 Parts Needing Replacement - EQCS-26 Torpedoes _________________ 13-8
13-4 Parts Needing Replacement - EQCS-41 Torpedoes _________________ 13-8
13-5 Available BCC Boot Kits __________________________________________ 13-9
14-1 Roller Assembly Selection_________________________________________ 14-9
15-1 Rope Socket Kit (Including Circulating Sub) _______________________ 15-11
15-2 Overshot Kit Parts _______________________________________________ 15-12
15-3 Bowen Wireline Swivel Parts _____________________________________ 15-14
15-4 Bowen Wireline Swivel Parts _____________________________________ 15-15
15-5 Bowen Spear Head Overshot (H039520) __________________________ 15-16
15-6 Cone Type Rope Socket Parts____________________________________ 15-17
Private
xvii GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / FOREWORD xvii
FOREWORD CMTD, TOPS
The purpose of this manual is to provide a general reference for common wireline
equipment and procedures, to operators in training under the Global TOPS
program. Detailed information on assembly, disassembly and maintenance is
provided for equipment that demands involved and regular attention. Material
which is too in-depth or beyond the scope of this manual has been referenced
via web-link to InTouch Support or Integrated Productivity and Conveyance
Center (IPC) content. Useful web-links, located in the appendices, are provided
to ensure reference to the most current and complete resources available to
an operator in training.
Private
SRPC Doc-TBT\SRPC Doc-TBT\275253781\2.4\Release Date: 16-Nov-2006\EDMS UID: 275253781\Produced: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50 xviii GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / FOREWORD xviii
Intentionally Blank
Private
1-i GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Health, safety, and environment 1-i
1 Health, safety, and environment

1.1 Personnel safety _______________________________________________ 1-1
1.1.1 Frontier situations ____________________________________________ 1-2
1.2 Schlumberger SLB-QHSE-POLICY _____________________________ 1-2
1.2.1 Vision _______________________________________________________ 1-3
1.2.2 Mission ______________________________________________________ 1-3
1.2.3 Culture ______________________________________________________ 1-3
1.2.4 Strategy _____________________________________________________ 1-3
1.2.5 QHSE management system __________________________________ 1-4
1.2.6 Safe attitude _________________________________________________ 1-5
1.2.7 Training _____________________________________________________ 1-5
1.2.8 Strict compliance ____________________________________________ 1-5
1.2.9 Redundant safety practices ___________________________________ 1-6

1.2.10 Properly maintained equipment and tools ______________________ 1-6
1.2.11 Safety monitoring ____________________________________________ 1-6
1.3 Handling and stepping _________________________________________ 1-8
1.3.1 SIPP Schlumberger Injury Prevention Program ________________ 1-9
1.4 Driving safety __________________________________________________ 1-9
1.4.1 Statement of standard ________________________________________ 1-9
1.4.2 Objective ____________________________________________________ 1-9
1.4.3 Implementation and monitoring ______________________________ 1-10
1.4.3.1 Definitions ______________________________________________ 1-10
1.4.3.2 Responsibilities _________________________________________ 1-10
1.4.3.3 Driver training ___________________________________________ 1-11
1.4.3.4 Seatbelts _______________________________________________ 1-12
1.4.3.5 Journey management procedures ________________________ 1-13
1.4.3.6 Driver improvement monitoring ___________________________ 1-16
1.4.3.7 Alcohol and drug abuse __________________________________ 1-17
1.4.3.8 Physical and mental condition ____________________________ 1-17
1.4.3.9 Mobile telephones _______________________________________ 1-17
1.5 Shop safety ___________________________________________________ 1-18
1.5.1 Emergency exits ____________________________________________ 1-18
1.5.2 Sight/lighting ________________________________________________ 1-19
1.5.3 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) ________________________ 1-19
1.5.4 Housekeeping _____________________________________________ 1-19
1.5.5 Electrical hazards ___________________________________________ 1-20
1.5.6 First aid ____________________________________________________ 1-20
1.5.7 Welding hazards ____________________________________________ 1-20
1.5.8 Air nozzles _________________________________________________ 1-20
1.5.9 Pressure testing ____________________________________________ 1-20
1.5.10 Explosives __________________________________________________ 1-21
1.5.11 Radioactive sources ________________________________________ 1-21
1.5.12 Lifting ______________________________________________________ 1-21
1.5.13 Fitness _____________________________________________________ 1-21
1.5.14 No horseplay _______________________________________________ 1-21
Private
1-ii GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Health, safety, and environment 1-ii
1.5.15 Grinding equipment _________________________________________ 1-21

1.5.16 Flammable liquids ___________________________________________ 1-22
1.5.17 Forklift operations ___________________________________________ 1-22
1.6 Wellsite requirements _________________________________________ 1-22
1.6.1 General land and offshore ___________________________________ 1-22
1.6.1.1 Smoking ________________________________________________ 1-23
1.6.1.2 Personal protective equipment ___________________________ 1-23
1.6.1.3 Cleanliness _____________________________________________ 1-23
1.6.1.4 Watch your step _________________________________________ 1-23
1.6.1.5 Lifting operations ________________________________________ 1-23
1.6.1.6 Rig machinery ___________________________________________ 1-24
1.6.1.7 Lighting _________________________________________________ 1-24
1.6.1.8 Weather ________________________________________________ 1-24
1.6.1.9 Spot safety briefing _____________________________________ 1-24
1.7 Installation Hot Work - “Permit to Work” _______________________ 1-24

1.8 Explosive operations safety procedures _______________________ 1-25
1.8.1 Training ____________________________________________________ 1-25
1.8.2 Explosives safety placard ____________________________________ 1-26
1.9 Pressure control safety _______________________________________ 1-28
1.9.1 Statement of standard _______________________________________ 1-28
1.9.2 Training ____________________________________________________ 1-28
1.9.3 Basic safety ________________________________________________ 1-28
1.9.4 Responsibility _______________________________________________ 1-28
1.9.5 General ____________________________________________________ 1-29
1.9.6 Pre-departure _______________________________________________ 1-29
1.9.7 On location _________________________________________________ 1-30
1.9.8 Rigging-Up _________________________________________________ 1-30
1.9.9 Rigging down _______________________________________________ 1-30
1.9.10 After job ____________________________________________________ 1-31
Private
1-1 GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Health, safety, and environment 1-1
1 Health, safety, and environment safety precautions introduction
Schlumberger’s QHSE Policy objective is to prevent accidents. This policy

is relevant not only to the safety of Schlumberger employees, but also to the
safety of clients, contractors, sub-contractors and the general public. This
section discusses the following:
• Review of Schlumberger’s QHSE policy

• Safety loop
• Safety training steps

• Handling and stepping
• Road safety
• Schlumberger shop safety
• Land and offshore wellsite safety requirements
• Offshore safety requirements
• Explosive operations safety
• Pressure operations safety.
Note
This chapter is for orientation purposes only. It presents the basic level of safety
training that you will receive in your training and career. However, it will provide
you with the basic tools to begin a safe career and proceed to more detailed
safety training.
For additional information on any of the topics in this chapter please refer to
QHSE Reference Page.
1.1 Personnel safety

Personnel safety is of utmost importance. Read the following information before
operating or testing the tool.
As an Operator, you will be exposed to several types of risk:
• Frontier situations
Private
• Handling and stepping

• Driving
• Radioactivity
• Explosives
• Electricity
• Shop
• Land and Offshore Wellsite
• High pressure
• H2 S
• Toxic/corrosive materials.
1.1.1 Frontier situations

Every Junior Operator is scheduled to attend a survival course. The course
will cover the following:
• First aid
• Helicopter safety
• Fire fighting
• Rig abandonment
• Offshore survival.
1.2 Schlumberger SLB-QHSE-POLICY

Schlumberger places safety at the highest level of priority.
The long-term business success of Schlumberger depends on our ability to

continuously improve our products and services while protecting our people and
the environment in which they work and live. It is a commitment which is in the
best interests of our customers, our employees and our stockholders.
QHSE is the responsibility of line management, with the active commitment and
support of all employees. We will strive to:
• ensure the Quality of our products and services,

• protect the Health, Safety and property of our employees, our customers, our
contractors and third parties,
Private
• protect the Environment in the communities where we work and live.
We are committed to the proactive integration of QHSE objectives into our

management systems at all levels, actively reinforced by our reward and
recognition programs. This is critical to our business success because it reduces
risk and adds value to our products and services.
1.2.1 Vision
We envision a quality and service culture that enables us to exceed customer
expectations, actively involve and empower all employees in the continuous
improvement process, and enhance profitable growth.
To enact this vision, we will:
• define and respond to customer expectations,

• adapt to changing and expanding business conditions and market
opportunities,
• differentiate our service capability from the competition,
• be a recognized industry leader in QHSE.
1.2.2 Mission
Our QHSE mission is to ensure that quality, health, safety, security and
environmental considerations remain top priorities for management and for all
employees. Prevention of accidental risk and loss from process failure becomes
a recognized, integral part of our continuous improvement culture.
1.2.3 Culture
QHSE, a line management responsibility, requires visible commitment,
leadership and involvement. Our proactive QHSE culture shall be understood,
shared and practiced by all employees as an integral part of everyday business.
Fundamental to this culture is our belief that all losses of people, property and
process result from management failure and are preventable.
1.2.4 Strategy
We will strive for a zero defect culture:
• no accidents,
Private
• no loss to process,
• no harmful emissions,
• no health-related incidents,
• no lapses in security.
This zero defect culture shall be attained through:
• visible commitment, leadership and involvement of line management tied to

incentive objectives,
• standards of mandatory QHSE training for all personnel,
• QHSE training provided through state-of-the-art learning techniques,
• maximized efficiency and synergy through sharing of resources,

• QHSE integration in all product development,
• proactive participation in global industry initiatives and recognition by our
customers that we are a leader in QHSE,
• creation of a QHSE career ladder.
1.2.5 QHSE management system

The Schlumberger Oilfield Services QHSE Management System defines the
principles by which we conduct our operations worldwide with regard to the
quality of our services and products; the health and safety of our customers,
employees, contractors and communities where we work; and protection of
the environment.
This QHSE philosophy shall be communicated to all employees, customers,

contractors and third parties associated with our business, and each Oilfield
Services product group must provide positive evidence of conformance to this
Management System.
The QHSE Management System model comprises eight interrelated

components:
• commitment and leadership,

• policies and objectives,
• organization and resources,
• contractor and supplier management,
• risk management,
• design and planning,
Private
• implementation and monitoring,

• assessment and continuous improvement.
These are continuously improved by conformance verification checks:
• on day-to-day standards and procedures (controls),

• on the management system (correction),
• and through modification to the management system (improvement).
1.2.6 Safe attitude

Schlumberger employees are expected to be vigilant in all job situations

relating to safety. Awareness and a good "safety" attitude are key factors in
Schlumberger’s management philosophy. A serious safety attitude is essential
for all personnel who work on an oil rig. The lives and safety of people and the
protection of tremendously expensive investments depends on a caring attitude
from every person working on a rig. Your attitude towards safety is the best tool
you have to protect you and those around you.
1.2.7 Training
Schlumberger makes the commitment to provide you with the training, safety
rules and regulations required for you to perform your job safely. You will not be
asked to perform a job that you have not had proper training. Some wellsite
operations require special training and certification before you can do them.
The TOPS training program is designed for you to receive the necessary safety
training as you develop in your job.
Wherever possible, professional driver training will be provided before you drive
a Schlumberger vehicle.
1.2.8 Strict compliance

As a condition of employment, you must strictly comply with Schlumberger’s
safety policies, the client’s safety policies and those of governmental agencies.
Although Schlumberger provides you with training programs, rules and
regulations it is your responsibility to understand and follow them. Failure to
observe all safety policies and regulations can lead to dismissal. Every effort
must be made to prevent accidents. If you consider any work situation to be a
safety hazard, it is compulsory that you inform your direct supervisor without
delay.
Private
All employees are responsible to maintain a safe working environment. It is

the specific responsibility of management to ensure that safety is a primary
consideration at all times through instruction and control. Constant action is
needed in order to run safe operations.
1.2.9 Redundant safety practices

Redundant safety practices are established wherever possible, particularly
when using potentially lethal devices such as perforating guns, core guns or
nuclear tools. Job assignments for engineers and operators are designed to
back each other up. Certain tasks, such as loading a nuclear source, can only
be performed by the Engineer. If these type rules are broken, both the engineer
and operator are subject to termination. Your training will inform you what job
tasks an Operator can and cannot do.
Adequate safety factors must be defined for working with hazardous materials
and their efficiency monitored routinely. Personnel who face such hazards must
be trained to deal with them safely. Close supervision must be made of the
inventory and safe storage of radioactive materials, explosives, lithium products,
mercury and sample bottles under high pressure to prevent loss, theft, misuse
or contamination.
1.2.10 Properly maintained equipment and tools

Properly maintained equipment and tools are essential to a safe working
environment. Schlumberger equipment maintenance policies are not only
geared to reliable customer service, but also to safe operation. Inspect the safety
features of all equipment before transport or going in the hole. Following the FIT
procedures before each job is the first step to ensure equipment is safe.
All Schlumberger vehicles (and logging units) must be adequately maintained.

The driver is responsible for inspecting the safety features (brakes, tires, brake
lights and turn signals) of their vehicle.
1.2.11 Safety monitoring

Schlumberger has developed an active safety program supported by
management. In order to continually improve its safety program, Schlumberger
monitors the results of its safety program. Two types of incidents are reported
and reviewed; Near Miss and Accident. A Near Miss is an incident, which under
different circumstances, could have caused an Accident. Revise safety rules
and procedures to reduce, or eliminate, the risk of a Near Miss becoming an
Accident.
Private
All Schlumberger employees are responsible for maintaining a safe working

environment. Through instruction and control, management is responsible to
ensure that safety is a primary consideration at all times. Constant action is
needed in order to run safe operations.
Figure 1-1 Safety loop summarizes Schlumberger’s active safety program. This
program identifies unusual hazards and establishes procedures to neutralize
them. Unsafe situations and hazards must be recognized, brought to the
attention of those responsible, and eliminated. Safety items to consider include:
• The correct profile.

• Radioactive badge.
• Safety awareness.
• Right tools for the job.
• Working clothes.
• Spot safety meetings.
• Hard hat.
• Cleanliness and tidiness.
• Safety boots.
• Report hazards.
• Gloves.
• Report failures.
• Eye protection.
Private
. Training
. Modification of Design
. Change of Procedures Action
Removal
of
Causes
Analysis
of
Causes
Safe
Operation
Detection
of
Causes
. Safety Hazard
. Near Misss
Awareness . Accident Control
Figure 1-1: Safety loop
1.3 Handling and stepping

Seventy per cent of the lost time injuries suffered by Schlumberger employees
are related to Stepping, Handling and Lifting. To reduce these injuries, the
Injury Prevention Procedures discussed in SLB QHSE Standard S017 (Injury
Prevention) shall be implemented, as a minimum, at all OFS locations.
Private
The purpose of this standard is to reduce the OFS Lost Time Injury rate due to
injuries related to Stepping, Handling and Lifting and to ensure that all OFS
locations have an effective Injury Prevention Program in place.
1.3.1 SIPP Schlumberger Injury Prevention Program

SIPP is a process oriented program aimed at providing proper Stepping Handling
& Lifting techniques and minimizing risks both in the field and in the office. SIPP
is mandatory for all Schlumberger personnel and must be completed within the
first 90 days of employment.
Note
You can damage your spine in one single lifting or falling accident. However,
most back surgeries result from accumulative damage to the spine. Do not take
the attitude that proper lifting is not necessary because your back feels fine now.
If you continue to lift improperly, you will eventually damage your back. Dot not
jeopardize your future quality of life by being careless today!
Please link to the following page for information on SIPP Schlumberger Injury
Prevention Program or to view SLB QHSE Standard S017 (Injury Prevention):
Injury Prevention Reference Page.
1.4 Driving safety

For detailed information on any of the subjects in this section please refer to the
InTouch Support: Driving (Land Transport) Reference Page.
1.4.1 Statement of standard

Driving is the greatest safety risk faced by any Schlumberger Oilfield Services
employee. To combat this risk, the following journey management procedures
shall be implemented, as a minimum, at all OFS locations.
1.4.2 Objective
To carefully manage all phases of the transportation process to eliminate hazards
and unnecessary exposure, reduce the residual risk through the proper selection
and preparation of people, equipment and routes, in order to ultimately eliminate
driving fatalities and injuries to all OFS employees, families, contractors and third
parties and minimize damage to equipment.
Private
1.4.3 Implementation and monitoring
1.4.3.1 Definitions
OFS Employee
Any regular or part-time OFS employee, consultant, temporary hire or contractor.
OFS vehicle
Any vehicle owned, leased, rented or contracted by OFS, and additionally any
vehicle for which a regular transportation allowance or mileage reimbursement

is being received.
1.4.3.2 Responsibilities
Line Management and QHSE staff
Line management and QHSE staff at all levels shall demonstrate active, visible
leadership and personal participation in all aspects of journey management by:
• Setting the example in wearing their seatbelts and following the "Five Seeing
Habits".
• Keeping their Defensive Driving Training up-to-date and taking regular
Commentary Drives.
• Posting the "OFS Driving Policy" in their office and on bulletin boards at
all OFS locations.
• Actively and visibly enforcing the "OFS Driving Policy" and this standard.
• Emphasizing driving risks in all appropriate meetings.
• Promoting driving awareness and OFS initiatives.
• Reviewing driving improvement monitor data (their own and those of
their direct reports). Page 2 of 7 “OFS Journey Management and Driving
Standard”.
• Having their personal driving improvement monitor data frequently reviewed
by their own manager and published for all employees at the location.
• Minimizing night driving and the total number of miles driven.
• Always searching for safer means of transportation other than driving.
Private
• Ensuring that all OFS vehicles are equipped with adequate safety equipment
including ABS, airbags, and rollover protection wherever practical.
• Insisting that everyone under their responsibility demonstrates similar
leadership.
OFS Employees
Any employee that drives an OFS vehicle is responsible for:
• Ensuring their own personal compliance with the "OFS Driving Policy".
• Ensuring that all passengers in their vehicle are wearing a seat belt.
• Practicing the "Five Seeing Habits".
• Conducting regular downloads of data from their driving improvement monitor

and for reviewing that data with their supervisor.
• Actively participating in pre-trip briefings.
• Complying with pre-trip plans and all other procedures detailed in this
standard.
1.4.3.3 Driver training

New Hires
Before any newly hired employee is issued an OFS vehicle, drives a vehicle on
company business, or receives a regular transportation allowance, he or she
must receive Level 1 Defensive Driving Training ("Five Seeing Habits") and
conduct a Commentary Drive with a certified Driver Trainer.
Wherever legally permissible, OFS managers, with support from the personnel
function, shall check the driving record of potential new employees, and shall not
hire individuals with a record of repeated citations or accidents.
Refresher Training
In accordance with the "OFS Driving Policy", all employees who drive, or have
the possibility of driving, an OFS vehicle must:
• renew their Level 1 Defensive Driving Training (Five Seeing Habits) once
every three years,
• conduct a Commentary Drive and a review of local driving hazards and
standards, with a certified Driver Trainer, at least once every 12 months.
Private
Drivers are encouraged to have Commentary Drives more frequently than

annually. These additional Commentary Drives can be carried out by the driver’s
supervisor, or anyone from management or the QHSE function. However, unless
performed by a certified Driver Trainer, the Commentary Drive does not count
towards compliance with the "OFS Driving Policy".
All Commentary Drives shall be recorded in the employee’s OFS QHSE passport
- Page 3 of 7 "OFS Journey Management and Driving Standard". Location
managers are responsible to develop and publish local standards to ensure that
particular local driving hazards (terrain, weather conditions, driving culture, etc.)
are addressed through specific training courses at a defined frequency.
Spouses are encouraged to participate in the same level of driver training as

OFS employees, and OFS managers shall make their best effort to provide Level
1 "Light Vehicle Training" to spouses at no cost to the employee or spouse.
Reassignments and temporary assignments
The senior OFS manager shall ensure that every OFS location has a specific
plan addressing new arrivals (permanent transfers, temporary transfers and
visitors). This plan shall be adhered to before the employee is allowed to drive
an OFS vehicle. As a minimum, the plan shall include an orientation briefing
on local driving risks, verification of the employee’s current driving training
compliance, and a Commentary Drive.
The Commentary Drive should be performed by a certified driver trainer.

Whenever this is not practical the Supervisor may give the briefing, conduct the
Commentary Drive, and record it in the new employee’s QHSE passport, as
long as the Supervisor is current in his/her refresher training. In this case, the
Commentary Drive shall be repeated with a certified Driving Instructor within
90 days of arrival in the new location.
The plan should address the particular case of employees transferred from a
country where they were driving on the opposite side of the road.
Exceptions to the above are allowed only with the written approval of the
GeoMarket manager.
1.4.3.4 Seatbelts
All OFS employees shall wear their seatbelt, and ensure that everyone in the
vehicle is wearing their seatbelt. This is considered a condition of employment.
OFS reserves the right to terminate the employment of any employee who does
not comply fully with this procedure.
Private
All employees who are considered physically able to undergo seatbelt training on
a Schlumberger "Convincer" shall be encouraged to do so on a voluntary basis.
1.4.3.5 Journey management procedures

Management Review of Trip Necessity
Managers at every level shall question the need for all journeys, always
searching for a way to eliminate the journey or find an alternative means of
achieving the trip objective. Rail, ferry, or air travel shall be considered whenever
a hazard assessment shows that the risk is lower than driving. Where driving
is unavoidable, alternatives such as combining trips and using approved
transportation contractors, especially for "hotshot" trips, shall always be explored.
Assignment of Equipment and Personnel
Appropriate equipment and qualified personnel shall be assigned. The selection

is not only a function of technical specifications for the requested service, but
shall also take into account any special considerations for the journey (terrain,
weather...). Whether special equipment, Page 4 of 7 "OFS Journey Management
and Driving Standard", is used or not, the Supervisor shall verify that the
assigned driver holds a current certification for that particular vehicle type. All
motorbikes (two, three and four wheel) are banned from OFS operations.
Trip Planning and Execution
Once it is determined that a trip is unavoidable, line managers, with the support
of the LPT (Lost Prevention Team), shall ensure that:
• A formal pre-trip briefing is held involving everyone involved in the journey,

their supervisor and the dispatcher.
• The route is clearly defined.
• Potential driving hazards, especially dangerous intersections, are identified in
advance, taking into consideration the terrain, weather, known dangerous
routes, speed limits, holidays (especially those which involve fasting), etc.
• Appropriate vehicles are assigned to the journey taking into account the
hazards identified.
• Only qualified drivers are assigned and that their certification is current for
the type of vehicles to be used.
• Drivers and passengers are fully briefed on the journey: route, hazards,
planned stops, etc.
Private
• Vehicles are inspected using an appropriate check list before the journey
begins.
• "Schlumberger’s 24 Hour Lifestyle" training is followed regarding scheduling
and rest stops.
Convoying
Properly implemented convoys reduce accidents, help to control speeds and

ensure help is readily available in case of need. Whenever more than one OFS
vehicle is traveling to the same destination at the same time, they shall travel in
convoy. Single vehicle trips should be kept to the minimum practically possible,
and such trips treated as a single vehicle convoy with all the following convoying
procedures still followed: managers shall ensure that location employees
understand this OFS convoying standard and comply with it.
Supervisors shall ensure that:
• All convoys have a designated convoy leader. The first vehicle shall be
designated by the convoy leader.
• For any drivers working before the trip, the working time is included in the
total driving hours, and shall not exceed 16 hours in one day.
• Adequate drivers are provided for the trip taking into account the estimated
driving, working and return driving time.
• The speed of the convoy is defined before the start of the trip and is controlled
by the first vehicle. The speed shall match vehicle type, driver experience,
road and weather conditions, traffic conditions, etc.
• Vehicle-to-vehicle communication using two-way radios or CB radios shall be
available unless prohibited by local regulations. Mobile telephones are not
acceptable vehicle-to-vehicle communication in OFS convoys.
The convoy leader shall ensure that:
• No convoy vehicle passes another vehicle in the convoy.

• The correct distance to follow a vehicle is reviewed by all drivers. This
distance is normally 8 to 10 seconds for vehicles under good conditions.
"Page 5 of 7 OFS Journey Management and Driving Standard".
• Rest stops are planned and conducted every two hours.
• The possibility of the convoy becoming separated when driving in towns
or traffic is reviewed during the trip planning, and safe stopping points are
defined where the leader can wait for other vehicles. The planned rest stops
can be used for this purpose.
Private
• At all times visual contact is maintained with the vehicle in front. If one
vehicle stops, all vehicles shall stop. When making turns, each vehicle shall
have visual contact with the vehicle behind it before proceeding out of sight,
to ensure the trailing vehicle knows where the turn is located.
• Unless not permitted by local traffic regulations, OFS vehicles drive with
their lights illuminated at all times.
• Two or more convoys shall not join together during the trip, nor shall a convoy
split up during a trip. If either of these two scenarios becomes necessary,
then a new convoy planning meeting shall take place to address the new
convoy requirements. The trip plan shall be followed, or amended.
• Driving hours are limited to local transport regulations, and shall not exceed
16 hours in one day.
• If the driver was working on the job before the trip, the working time is
included in the total driving hours, and shall not exceed 16 hours in one day.
Night Driving
A prominent national safety council reports that mileage-based death rates are
four times higher at night than during the day. Night driving should always be
minimized through prior planning and close coordination with our Clients.
All night trips shall be systematically subject to formal management approval

before they begin. Wherever night driving occurs, locations shall put in place
a site-specific Night Driving Standard based on a careful assessment of local
night driving risks.
The frequency of night driving should be reviewed as a routine part of any client
service quality reviews, and serious attempts made to work with the Client
to avoid night driving.
Vehicle Safety Equipment
All OFS vehicles shall be equipped with safety belts for the driver and all
passengers. Lap belts shall be gradually phased out and replaced with three
point belts for forward seating and four point belts for lateral seating not later than
1 January 2001. If the vehicle frame allows such a retrofit to be easily made,
management is expected to implement the change more swiftly.
OFS Managers at all levels are responsible for notifying OFS transportation
contractors of this requirement before they submit a quotation or enter into
negotiations with OFS for their services.
Whenever practical, OFS vehicles shall be equipped with ABS and dual airbags.
Private
For Light vehicles, wherever the LPT assesses that there is an enhanced risk
of roll-overs, either due to the terrain or due to the vehicle type (pick-up, 4x4
vehicles, high center of gravity vehicles), confirmation shall be obtained that the
Vehicle has a frame specified to protect the occupants in the case of a full 360
degree roll-over. If this protection is not integral to the frame. Page 6 of 7 "OFS
Journey Management and Driving Standard" of the vehicle, then an approved
design protection system shall be fitted not later than 30 June 1999.
A rollover protection system must be provided on all heavy duty vehicles.

The rollover protection system can either be part of the vehicle cab structure
as provided by the manufacturer or an add on system. Such a system is not
required when the deck equipment provides rollover protection to the driver
and passenger.
To view SLB QHSE Standard S001 (Schlumberger Journey Management and

Driving Standard) please link to Intouch Support: WGL-QHSE - Driving (Journey
Management) Reference Page.
1.4.3.6 Driver improvement monitoring

All OFS vehicles shall be equipped with an electronic driver improvement
monitor. The only exceptions to this are:
• Personal vehicles for which mileage reimbursement is received. For such

vehicles, OFS management shall encourage the installation of monitors and
provide them at no cost to employees that elect to do so.
• Contracted vehicles where the duration of the contracted services is less
than 3 months Monitoring and driver improvement programs shall be defined
by the senior OFS manager at each site and adapted to the local risks.
All OFS managers and Supervisors shall in particular ensure that:
• Their driver improvement monitor, and those of their direct reports, are
installed and working properly, with alarms set to levels recommended by
the manufacturer, or to stricter levels.
• The LPT establishes common alarm levels for all OFS employees at the site.
• Data from the monitors is used to establish team performance goals and that
these are published.
• Recent data from their driver improvement monitors, and recent data from
the monitors of their direct reports, is downloaded, analyzed, and published
at a minimum frequency of once every month.
Private
• Recognition and reward is given out for team members showing the best
improvement, including a record in the OFS QHSE passport.
• They conduct personal coaching sessions with any of their direct reports
whose monitor data shows consistent abrupt braking, acceleration, or speed
above the legal or locally defined OFS limit. Should bad habits still persist,
withdrawal of driving privileges or more severe disciplinary action shall be
taken.
1.4.3.7 Alcohol and drug abuse

Driving an OFS vehicle while under the influence of alcohol or any drugs
or narcotics, is strictly prohibited and subject to disciplinary action including
termination of employment.
1.4.3.8 Physical and mental condition

The mental and physical condition of drivers shall be assessed by the Supervisor
during the pre-departure convoy meetings, particularly after the job on the way
back to the facility. Physical and mental condition shall be assessed taking into
consideration hours worked, amounts of sleep the previous two days, time of
day, position in the natural alertness cycle, food intake, etc. Page 7 of 7 "OFS
Journey Management and Driving Standard".
1.4.3.9 Mobile telephones

Driving statistics show that the risk of an accident involving the use of a mobile
phone is equal to the risk of an accident involving the abuse of alcohol, i.e. 4
times higher than normal driving risk.
OFS employees shall not initiate calls from mobile phones while driving,
irrespective of the type of phone.
If a phone call is received on a mobile phone while driving, and it is not a

"hands-free" installation, the employee shall identify the caller, and terminate
the call immediately. If a return call is required, the employee shall pull
over at the first available safe rest stop and then return the call. Even with
"hands-free" installations, studies have shown that calls can be a distraction and,
consequently, it is strongly recommended that the conversation be continued
from a safe rest stop.
Private
1.5 Shop safety

This section describes procedures to observe while working in the shop.
These procedures include the following topics:
• Emergency exits.
• Sight/lighting.
• Protective Clothing.
• Housekeeping.
• Electrical.
• First aid.
• Welding.
• Ladders.
• Air nozzles.
• Pressure testing.
• Explosives.
• Radioactive Sources.
• Lifting.
• Fitness.
• No horseplay.
• Grinding equipment.
• Drilling equipment.
• Flammable liquids.
• Forklift operations.
1.5.1 Emergency exits

Determine the location of all emergency exits. Make sure you know:
• sound of shop fire alarms,

• location of fire alarms and how to sound the alarms,
• location of fire extinguishers and how to use fire fighting equipment,
• the nearest escape route for each part of the building,
Private
• location of the fire "meeting" point; that is, the location away from the building
where all personnel should meet after exiting the building.
1.5.2 Sight/lighting
Protect your eyes with proper eye protection. Always ear safety glasses when
cutting or hammering on metal surfaces. Make sure there is good lighting in your
working environment. Make sure the light level in the work area is adequate.
Sight is essential to enable you to identify and avoid hazards.
1.5.3 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)

Safety equipment and protective clothing are provided by the company and its
clients, and their complete and correct usage is compulsory.
All personnel must wear proper safety equipment including:
• Coveralls.
• Steel-toed boots.
• Gloves.
• Radiation badges.
• Goggles, ear protectors, hard hat and chemicals handling clothing as
required.
• Do not wear loose clothing such as scarves; they may get caught in a grinder
and choke you.
For additional information on this topic please refer to Intouch Support: SLB
QHSE Standard S003 (Personal Protective Equipment).
1.5.4 Housekeeping
It is a pleasure to work in a shop that is neat and clean. One man’s untidiness
could be another man’s injury. Therefore:
• Keep the work area clean and tidy.

• Clean up and dry slippery surfaces.
• Store tools in their proper place.
• Minimize obstacles on shop floor.
• Keep equipment properly maintained.
Private
• Use the right tool for each right job.

• Store yard equipment neatly and in an organized manner.
• Clean up after finishing every job.
1.5.5 Electrical hazards

Electricity can kill. Before you use any electrical equipment, make sure you
know the electrical hazards involved. Verify that all electrical appliances are
properly grounded.
First aid
1.5.6
You must know the location of the first aid kits and who is qualified in First Aid
and CPR. All first aid kits must be properly stocked and frequently checked.
1.5.7 Welding hazards

Only trained personnel should use welding equipment. Equipment must be
stored in its appropriate area. Arc welding must be done behind a screen.
Welders must wear masks as the ultraviolet light given off by an arc can blind. Do
not wear contact lenses near welding equipment. Leather gloves and apron must
be available. The welding area must be clean, without any flammable liquids in
the proximity. Gas bottles must be stored in a shaded area and adequately
ventilated. All equipment should be properly grounded. Items to be welded and
welding equipment must be stable and the area free of potential hazards.
1.5.8 Air nozzles

Compressed air can kill. Use only the appropriate air nozzles for compressed air.
Improper nozzles can inject air into the skin when the nozzle is aimed at the body.
1.5.9 Pressure testing

While equipment is under test in the pressure shop, the pressure doors must be
shut and nearby personnel informed and evacuated. This procedure ensures
that no one will be hurt in the event of an equipment failure. Pressure testing of
equipment can be done in a pressure test bay. Always follow the pressure policy
rules. Refer to section 1.9 Pressure control safety.
Private
1.5.10 Explosives
Do not smoke in the explosive shop. Explosives must be properly and
securely stored to avoid an explosion or theft. No electrically operated equipment
should be used in the gun loading shop. Always handle all explosives with great
care and respect. Refer to section 1.8 Explosive operations safety procedures.
1.5.11 Radioactive sources

Radioactive sources must be locked in proper storage pits and all movements
carefully recorded. While sources are being used, unnecessary personnel must
be evacuated. Barriers must be erected so that the radiation at the barrier is less
than the maximum permitted dose, and a visual warning must be used.
1.5.12 Lifting
Improper lifting injures more people in Schlumberger than anything else.
Therefore, it is in your interest to lift properly. Refer to the Section on Lifting
and Handling.
1.5.13 Fitness
Be fit. Do not use drugs or alcoholic beverages.
1.5.14 No horseplay
Horseplay is not tolerated. Do not take risks with your or colleagues’ safety.
Remember that you are required to maintain a safe attitude.
1.5.15 Grinding equipment

Grinding equipment and wire brushes must be in good condition. Check that the
grinder is secured to the base and the covers are properly fitted. Inspect the
equipment before you use it. Grinding must be done in front of the wheel and
not on the side of the wheel. An eye wash station must be visible and the area
free of potential hazards. Do not wear loose clothing.
Private
1.5.16 Flammable liquids

Paints and solvents should be properly sealed and locked up when not in use.
These substances are fire hazards and also release explosive vapors.
Flammable liquid safety issues include:
• Work in well ventilated areas.

• No Smoking signs must be clearly displayed.
• Make sure breathing masks and goggles are available and worn.
• Make sure the area is clear of trash and refuse.
1.5.17 Forklift operations

Only authorized personnel are allowed to operate a forklift or crane. Racks and
containers must be properly balanced. The forklift should:
• Never carry passengers.

• Never drive over loose objects.
• Drive slowly.
• Have an alarm for reverse driving.
• Have the maximum load displayed.
• If the forklift operator’s vision is obscured, get help.
1.6 Wellsite requirements
1.6.1 General land and offshore

A wellsite is a dangerous place. Drilling rigs are potentially dangerous pieces of
equipment. They must always be treated with respect as they are not tolerant of
any human error.
Strictly follow the safety regulations of the client. Do not jeopardize the safety of
the client, oil company, drilling contractor or Schlumberger personnel through
careless actions. Comply with following basic rules while at the wellsite.
Private
1.6.1.1 Smoking
Smoking on a rig floor or in the immediate vicinity of a rig is prohibited.
1.6.1.2 Personal protective equipment

Safety boots, hard hats, safety glasses and flame retardant coveralls are
compulsory on the wellsite.
Clothing should:
• Allow protection against abrasions, projections of corrosive fluids, flames, etc.

• Fit close to the body. Loose clothing could be dangerous.
• Gloves are compulsory whenever handling logging tools, rigging up
equipment and handling source shields.
1.6.1.3 Cleanliness
Ensure that working area is clean and clear. The catwalk and rig floor should be
washed clean of drilling mud and swept dry if possible. They must not be slippery.
1.6.1.4 Watch your step

Steps and V door should be clear. Inspect the condition of the steps, since they
are frequently damaged and bent. Look out for missing grating and railing and
always use the correct route when moving around the platform. People have
fallen great distances by not watching where they were going. Refer to section
1.3 Handling and stepping.
1.6.1.5 Lifting operations

When working around cat-lines, tuggers and cranes avoid using a cat-line
to move Schlumberger equipment. Always try to use an air tugger to hoist
equipment onto the rig floor. Heavy objects must never be carried up and down
the rig floor steps. The highest percentages of offshore accidents involve crane
and lifting operations. Always know where the cranes are located and stay a
safe distance from cables under tension. Stand clear of loading or unloading
operations.
Private
1.6.1.6 Rig machinery

Never operate rig machinery or equipment. It is the driller’s responsibility to raise
and lower traveling blocks and to operate the tuggers.
1.6.1.7 Lighting
You must have adequate lighting on the rig floor and the catwalk. The winchman
must clearly see what the Operators on the rig floor are doing.
1.6.1.8 Weather
Consider weather conditions such as wind, rain, etc. More extreme safety rules
apply when:
• explosives are being used,

• radioactive sources are used,
• there is pressure on the well,
• H2S is present,
• there is a fishing operation under progress.
1.6.1.9 Spot safety briefing

Have a spot safety meeting before rigging up. Discuss rig dangers and
coordinate communication with all the relevant personnel.
1.7 Installation Hot Work - “Permit to Work”

The “permit to work” system controls work offshore to ensure the safety of all
personnel and the integrity of the installation. The system is implemented in full
on every installation which carries hydrocarbons or from the start of drilling. All
areas are classified as either hazardous or safe.
It is important to know if Schlumberger equipment (unit, doghouse, generator,

etc..) is going to be used in the areas or zones defined as 0, 1 or 2.
Modifications (pressurization kit, explosion proof motors, etc.) to standard

equipment may be required depending on the zone it is to be located.
Private
Extra precautions have to be carried out when rigging up. Any lifting or hanging
equipment used in our setup should follow the safety requirement used offshore.
You must obtain a work permit before any radioactive operations or handling
explosives. A work permit is usually acquired through the operating company.
Handling and transporting must be performed by the Schlumberger personnel.
1.8 Explosive operations safety procedures
1.8.1 Training
The OFS QHSE STD S019 (Explosives Standard) states that OFS employees
shall receive explosive safety training appropriate for their jobs. Employees
will complete one of two training levels covering awareness (Level 1) and user
(Level 2). The training level required and the content and frequency for each
training level is shown in Table 1-1.
Table 1-1: Explosives Training Requirements
Employee, as
Training
Prerequisites part of their Topics Required Frequency
Level
duties, shall
None Not handle Introduction to: Initially
explosives but
will perform their • Explosions and explosives
duties at locations
Level 1 • Classifications of explosions
where operations
involving • OFS use of explosives
explosive are
conducted • Explosives safety
Level 1 Handle Detailed instruction on: Initially and

Instruction explosives, repeatd
but only those • explosives safety every three
Level 2 contained within years
transportation • OFS operating procedures
packages. • transportation of applicable
explosives
All levels 1 & 2 Handle Detailed instruction on: Initially and
requirements explosives repeated
above outside of • specific segment operating every three
transportation procedures years
Level 2
packages or
assist with
operations using
explosives
Private
Employee, as
Training
Prerequisites part of their Topics Required Frequency
Level
duties, shall
All levels 1 & 2 Perform arming Operational certification Initially and
requirements operations repeated
Level 2
above • as determined by OFS every three
segments years
Level 1 Manufacture or Detailed instruction on: Initially and
test emplosives repeated
at an OFS • explosives safety every three
manufacturing years
and testing center • OFS operating procedures
• Transportation of applicable
explosives
Level 2
• specific manufacturing and
testing center operating
procedures
Operational certification
• as defined by manufacturing
and testing center
To view the Schlumberger QHSE Standard on Explosives please link to InTouch

Support: SLB QHSE Standard S019 (Explosives).
For detailed information on Explosive Operation Safety please refer to InTouch

Support: Explosives Safety Manual - C200570 .
For detailed information on Wireline Perforation Safety Procedures please refer

to InTouch Support: Field Operations Manual, Wireline Perforating
1.8.2 Explosives safety placard

This placard lists the wireline field safety wellsite procedures for running
explosive services. Procedures for services, which use conventional electrical
detonators are presented on the placard as well as procedures for SAFE* firing
systems. A Placard shall be mounted in every wireline unit. A current placard for
mounting in your wireline unit can be ordered through your regular M&S ordering
system using part number H709745.
Private
SRPC Doc-TBT\SRPC Doc-TBT\275253781\2.4\Release Date:16-Nov-2006\EDMS UID: 275253781\Produced: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50 1-27 GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Health, safety, and environment 1-27
Figure 1-2: “Explosives: Schlumberger Field Safety Procedures” placard
Private
1.9 Pressure control safety
1.9.1 Statement of standard

Equipment that contains or controls pressure must be obtained from the Segment
Product Centers or from approved suppliers. Pressure containing equipment
must be manufactured, inspected, tested and maintained according to OFS and
segments standards and the applicable local regulations . The equipment must
be operated only within design limitations and by qualified personnel.
1.9.2 Training
OFS personnel operating pressure containing equipment are required to
complete Level 1 training on OFS-QHSE-S014 Pressure Equipment Standard
and pressure operations training required by the applicable Business Segments.
Level 1 training on OFS-QHSE-S014 may be accomplished either by reading this

standard or by attending a presentation covering the material of this Standard.
View the SLB QHSE Standard S014 (Pressure Equipment Standard) at InTouch
Support: SLB QHSE Standard S014 (Pressure) .
1.9.3 Basic safety

• Pressure control equipment is used to safely perform operations when
pressure is present or is likely to develop at the wellhead.
• A routine pressure job does not exist. Potential safety hazards always exist
during any operation performed under pressure.
• Well trained personnel and well maintained equipment are a fundamental
requirement for a safe pressure job.
• All personnel should wear adequate safety clothing, for example safety
glasses, gloves, boots, hard hat and coveralls.
• Special precautions are necessary if H2S may be present at the wellsite.
1.9.4 Responsibility
• Safety is everyone’s responsibility. You are responsible for own safety and
you have a duty of care to other personnel present on the rig or wellsite.
Private
1.9.5 General
• Never heat or weld any part of the pressure control equipment.
• Never tamper with equipment which is subjected to pressure.
• Never turn hose reels with pressure applied to hose.
• Never replace pressure fittings unless you are sure of the new parts service,
thread and pressure ratings.
• Never use any piece of equipment that does not have a Working Pressure
Rating.
1.9.6 Pre-departure
• Detailed, advance planning of a job is essential to ensure safe operations.
• As much information about the up coming job should be obtained. This
includes:
– Wellhead pressure and temperature.

– Production: gas, oil, hydrates, H2S, CO2, chlorides.
– Inhibitors, corrosive fluids, chemical injection.
– Rig: Height - BOP, adapters, flanges.
– Tubing, casing, restrictions, deviation.
– Wellhead crossover connection.
– Lifting equipment, catlines, travelling blocks, cranes.
• Select proper equipment depending on pressure and type of service.

Equipment is usually chosen to have a Working Pressure Rating of 1.2 times
the maximum expected Well Pressure. Check rating and compatibility of
all connections.
• Perform a complete system check.
• The pressure rating of a complete control system is equal to the rating of
the lowest rated individual item. This includes the pressure fitting, needle
valves, gauges, etc.
• Ensure that enough lubricator is available to cover the tool and allow 3 ft (1
meter) clearance. This applies to fixed structures - not semi-submersible
drilling rigs.
• Check spare parts box and ensure adequate quantity of spares are available.
Private
1.9.7 On location
• Review all operational steps with the engineer/technician in charge. Discuss
the possible safety hazards and procedures to open and shut-in the well.
• Be aware of rig emergency procedures, including shut-in, fire, H2S, abandon
ship, etc.
• Never fill riser or pressure test with diesel oil. Air in the riser can be
compressed and mixed with diesel vapor to cause a diesel explosion.
• Drill floors are dangerous places. Be more alert and take necessary
precautions when working on a rig floor.
1.9.8 Rigging-Up
• Clear area of unnecessary personnel.
• Ensure drill floor is free from mud and dirt.
• Rig up wellhead adapter, BOP and tool retainer first.
• Secure all flow and drain lines.
• Ensure drain lines are coupled to closed drain system or environmental
secure area.
• Pressure test the complete set up to 1.2 times the expected wellhead
pressure. Hold pressure for 10 minutes and record. Use water or glycol
to test and never diesel, gasses. Never pressure test using well fluids by
opening up the well.
• Client representative controls the xmas tree master valves.
• Count the number of turns and tag the valve.
• Never tighten or loosen connections under pressure.
• Use a rope, not the pressure hoses, to help align the grease head and
lubricator with the wellhead.
1.9.9 Rigging down

• Be aware that trapped pressure may exist in equipment even after it has
been rigged down and apparently bled down. A sure sign of trapped pressure
is an unusually tight connection or a stiff hose.
Private
1.9.10 After job

• Perform maintenance.
• Concentration is low after the job is complete and this leads to accidents.
Please remember that the equipment is heavy and should still be treated
with care and attention.
Potential Severity: Serious

Potential Loss: Personnel
Hazard Category: machinery equipment hand tools
PRESSURE EQUIPMENT DO’S AND DON’TS
• NEVER weld on any WHE component.

• Do not use stamps on WHE.
• Do not make modifications by drilling, boring, filing, cutting, etc.
• Secure risers when transporting them to the wellsite. Prevent them from
being bent or dented.
• Perform all required regular certification pressure tests and wellsite
pressure tests.
Private
SRPC Doc-TBT\SRPC Doc-TBT\275253781\2.4\Release Date: 16-Nov-2006\EDMS UID: 275253781\Produced: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50 1-32 GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Health, safety, and environment 1-32
Intentionally Blank
Private
2-i GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Operation management system 2-i
2 Operation management system

2.1 Introduction to cell concept ____________________________________ 2-1
2.2 Cell structure __________________________________________________ 2-4
2.3 Responsibility __________________________________________________ 2-5
2.4 Accountability __________________________________________________ 2-7
2.5 Cell control and reporting ______________________________________ 2-7
2.6 RITE maintenance system ______________________________________ 2-8
2.6.1 FIT __________________________________________________________ 2-8
2.6.2 TRIM ________________________________________________________ 2-9
2.6.3 Q-Check ____________________________________________________ 2-9
2.6.4 Asset History Cards _________________________________________ 2-10
2.6.5 The RITE Board ____________________________________________ 2-10
2.6.6 Tag system _________________________________________________ 2-11
Private
SRPC Doc-TBT\SRPC Doc-TBT\275253781\2.4\Release Date:16-Nov-2006\EDMS UID: 275253781\Produced: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50 2-ii GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Operation management system 2-ii
Intentionally Blank
Private
2-1 GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Operation management system 2-1
2 Operation management system Cell Concept, Accountability, advanced interpretation,
2.1 Introduction to cell concept

In nature, the cell is the smallest structural unit of an organism that is capable of
independent functioning. The “Wireline Cell” is an independent working unit at
the field level, comprising field employees and their equipment, always working
together, servicing a particular rig and client. The cell is the basic unit that
performs a job, satisfies a customer’s needs, and produces revenue. The FE cell
is the basic building block of a field location.
Key Points:
• The FE or FS (Field Specialist), the “crew”, the “logging unit” and a set
of “tools” form the basic organization unit or cell, that is responsible for
delivering wellsite services.
• The “cell concept” assigns to the cell leaders the responsibility of providing to
our customers a high level of “TOTAL SERVICE QUALITY”.
• A well-structured cell system, with clear responsibilities and accountability, is
the foundation of the organization of a wireline base. It is a major contributing
factor to superior service quality.
Private
SRPC Doc-TBT\SRPC Doc-TBT\275253781\2.4\Release Date:16-Nov-2006\EDMS UID: 275253781\Produced: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50 2-2 GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Operation management system 2-2
Figure 2-1: The wrong approach
Figure 2-2: The right approach
The FE Cell
Private
The success of the FE cell is clearly and easily demonstrated in one-man land
locations, where the responsibility and accountability are clear. In large districts,
particularly for offshore operations, it is not always easy to fully implement the
standard FE cell. However, it has been shown time and again that wherever we
come as close as possible to the standard FE cell organization, results have
been optimum.
The key to successfully implementing the FE cell is to always:
• clearly define and set up the organization so that each cell is an independent
operating entity.
• maintain the stability of the cell equipment and personnel at all times.
• ensure all cell leaders understand their responsibilities and acknowledge

their accountability for the service delivered by their cell.
Figure 2-3: The FE cell organization
Private
The cell approach is not merely the assignment of field employees, tools and
equipment to a permanent group. The individual employees working within a cell
must know they are fully responsible and accountable for their operations. To
achieve this, they must be involved in all aspects of the job from preparation to
product delivery.
The cell concept assigns to the cell leaders all the responsibilities they would
have when running a “one-man location” and makes them fully accountable for
the results of the cell.
The FE cell is fully and solely responsible for the quality of the services rendered
to their clients. This is achieved through the cell taking responsibility for the
training of their own personnel, the supervision of the maintenance of their
equipment, and the organization of their own logistics.
2.2 Cell structure

In order of importance, the “ideal” structure of an FE cell consists of all the
following:
• one FE/FS
• a set of tools
• one or more assigned clients
• an assigned crew chief
• a data acquisition unit and/or rig
• assigned operators.
The FE or FS in charge of the cell has under their responsibility a crew, a data
acquisition unit and a set of tools and performs wellsite operations always with
the assigned people. In this mode of operation the FE/FS becomes fully familiar
with the particular performance of each piece of equipment assigned as well as
the expertise and weakness of each member of the crew. In addition familiarity is
gained with the logistics associated with the particular operation, be it specific
transport procedures or unusual hole conditions. Last but not least, our clients
like to see continuity in the crews that service their wells. It takes more than just
a few trips to the wellsite to build the confidence level that is so necessary when
providing the type of services we provide.
The above list is ordered in importance; that is, the most important part of any
cell is the FE or FS, the “cell leader”, who is the manager of the cell and is fully
accountable for the job performance. In some locations, cells are less structured
Private
with a loose assignment of personnel. This results in poorly defined assignment

of responsibilities and contradicts the concept of the cell. The FE or FS, and the
responsibilities they are assigned, is what defines the cell.
2.3 Responsibility
The “cell leader” is responsible for:
• On-the-Job Service Quality

Poor service quality costs us many hundreds of millions of dollars each year,
either in lost revenue, lost contracts, rebates and other associated costs. The
cell leader is responsible for making sure the job runs smoothly, without
failures, and that the client needs and concerns are professionally addressed.
• Evaluation and Training of Assigned Personnel
The same crew always working as a unit, together with the assigned
Engineer or Specialist, allows all members of the group to get to better know
and complement each other. The cell manager can evaluate the strengths,
weaknesses, and performance of each member of the crew and thereby
tailor the training programs to correct any of their shortcomings. He or she
should know where employees fit into their corresponding training program
and monitor their performance against objectives through the review of the
performance appraisal of each employee in the cell. It is the cell leader’s
responsibility to continually develop the members of the cell.
• Equipment Planning and Maintenance
Assigned equipment should always remain under the control of a cell, even
during short intervals of time when it may not be needed. Changes in
equipment assignment, even for short periods of time, mean cell members
lose the associated experiences and history of their equipment, resulting in
a loss of confidence. Cell employees must always retain the responsibility
for the maintenance of their equipment even though they may not carry out
some of the detailed controls and checks themselves. They should follow
their equipment through the different maintenance steps as their guidance will
help the technical support staff pinpoint any problem areas. Cell personnel
working with assigned maintenance personnel will ensure the equipment is
always maintained to the highest standard. Cell employees, in return, will
become better familiarized with their equipment and thus minimize failures
due to equipment misuse.
Pool equipment not assigned to cells will look and perform badly as no one
feels responsible for this equipment.
Private
Periodic calibrations, backed up with full record keeping, of the same set
of tools allows for easier identification of potential equipment problems.
Consistent calibration values are a guarantee of good tool performance,
while shifting values, even within acceptable limits, should trigger preventive
maintenance actions before it is too late.
By tracking the transportation of the cell’s assigned equipment, rough
transportation (sometimes difficult to avoid) can be partially offset by
accelerating the preventive maintenance schedules of that equipment. As
the cell personnel are present and in control of the wellsite operation, they
will be aware of any abnormal tool behavior such as spikes or noise, or
should abnormal treatment of equipment occur. This means actions can be
taken before the hardware actually fails, or to guide the technical support
personnel in the case of actual failures.
The cell should also help in the planning for new equipment to ensure that
the client contract is satisfied and obsolete equipment is retired.
• Operations
The cell leader is responsible for ensuring the smooth running of the assigned
operations, from start to finish, and managing the logistics prior to and after
the job. Because the cell always operates for the same client or clients,
its personnel will become very well acquainted with client personnel - their
needs, their problems and their priorities - and hence the cell will be better
able to provide full satisfaction. From experience, the cell will know what
is expected at the wellsite in terms of answer products, services, updated
information about well conditions, data transmission requirements, reporting
requirements, and special rig-up or set-up procedures. There is no substitute
for experience.
• Failure follow up
The cell leader must report all failures in WRS/RITE and follow them through
to closure.
• Client Communications
The cell leader should attend all pre-spud or pre-job meetings, client Service
Quality meetings, post well meetings, etc. He or she should also make
periodic visits to the client’s office with both the FSM and sales engineers.
• Product Quality and Delivery
The cell leader is responsible for the quality and timely delivery of all logs
and products to the client.
Private
2.4 Accountability
For the cell concept to have significant impact on service quality, the cell leader
and the crew must understand that they are solely accountable for the overall
outcome of the operations they are performing. They must feel a personal
involvement for each success and failure of the cell, in the same way the location
manager is accountable for the success or failure of the location. This requires
that the cell personnel have complete control of all the components of the job.
For example, an engineer will not feel fully responsible for a tool failure of a tool
borrowed from another cell, because he or she believes the failure is beyond
their control - even though they are ultimately responsible for every aspect of
the corresponding job.
A rigid structure, with well defined responsibilities, will enable the cell leader to
have control of all the circumstances that determine the performance of the cell.
Only then will they feel fully accountable for the performance of the cell.
2.5 Cell control and reporting

A “cell book” (truck or rig book) should be maintained for each cell and should
include all the information needed to run the cell. The information collated in the
cell book should be retained at the wellsite to better manage the operation while
the job is in progress. It should be brought back to the location upon completion
of the job. The cell book should contain all the general information about the
location that the crew may require, such as contact numbers and information
specific to their cell. The structure of the “cell book” should be the same for all
cells in a single location. As a broad guideline, the following information would
typically be included in a “cell book”:
• location and client contact lists

• QHSE issues associated with rig/truck or unit, such as particular hazards
and evacuation procedures
• inventory and equipment lists
• Maintenance reports
• Failure reports
• rig specific procedures
• Shipping reports - All shipments from the wellsite must be recorded.
• a file of pertinent rig information
• Material Requisitions
Private
• Price Schedule
• Safety - A record of safety meetings, accident reports, etc.
• memos - A file of memos, letters, special instructions, etc.
2.6 RITE maintenance system

RITE stands for Review and Inspection of Tools and Equipment. The RITE is the
standard equipment management and maintenance program for Wireline field
locations. It is primarily a maintenance scheduling system for field equipment
and vehicles, including:
• scheduling of maintenance,
• engineering modifications,
• recording and analysis of equipment failure,
• recording and reporting of asset history.
RITE also contains features that aid in managing and tracking equipment at
the location level or between locations. RITE is the medium for service quality
reporting and monitoring. Its objective is to minimize the number of wellsite
failures. Three different levels of inspection and test make up the RITE program:
• FIT - Fast Inspection of Tools

• TRIM - Tool Review and Inspection Monthly
• Q-Checks - Quality Checks.
2.6.1 FIT
This check level has three functions:
• FIT1 - cleaning, greasing or otherwise lubricating, controlling and replacing

seals
• FIT2 - checking continuity and insulation of electrical assemblies.
Verifications of oil level in engines and hydraulic assemblies
• FIT3 - operational check of the equipment under simulated operating
conditions.
FIT checks are the responsibility of the cell engineer or field technician and
crew. They require minimal accessories and materials, and can be carried out
at the wellsite when needed.
Private
FIT frequency is after each job. All Schlumberger equipment must pass a
complete FIT check after each rig-down and before being rigged up again on a
well. A FIT must follow every repair. FIT and TRIM procedures are detailed in
ORMs, FOHs and in maintenance manuals.
2.6.2 TRIM
This check level is more in-depth than the FIT. TRIM includes:
• visual inspection of electronics circuitry and mechanical subassemblies

• enclosed subassemblies are removed from their housings
• tools master calibration

• 100/200-hr maintenance for winch units.
TRIM checks are the responsibility of the cell engineer/field technician assisted
by maintenance specialists and mechanics.
Recommended frequency of TRIM checks is between one and three months.

It depends on equipment utilization, transportation conditions and well
environment. Master calibration intervals depend on tool stability and quality
of the secondary calibrations. Master calibration frequency is specified in the
Operations Reference Manual (ORM), and/or in the equipment Maintenance
manuals. Particular environment conditions may require a TRIM check after each
job. A TRIM check must follow each major repair and modification. TRIM checks
and calibrations require specialized equipment and a dedicated calibration area.
They are carried out at the shop or in specially designed wellsite facilities.
2.6.3 Q-Check
These are in-depth checks of the equipment. Hydraulic and mechanical
assemblies are disassembled and all seals are changed. Performance of
electronic circuits is controlled and realigned. Sensor responses are checked
with respect to nominal values. The 1000-hr revision is performed on winch
units. Pressure certifications are performed.
The frequency of Q-checks depends on the rate of tool deterioration. This

is linked to tool reliability, local operating conditions and time of exposure to
adverse environment (primarily temperature).
The average recommended frequency for tools with normal utilization (two
jobs/tool-month) and exposure is every six months. This can be used as the
starting point, and must be adapted to the local prevailing failure rate for each
type of tool or equipment. This is an important responsibility of the District
Private
Engineer, with the advice of the Geomarket/Area Technical Manager as it

impacts the load of the maintenance organization and the wellsite performance
of the equipment.
A specialized maintenance support staff generally performs Q-checks. It is

the responsibility of the cell engineer/field technician to schedule them at the
specified intervals.
Q-checks require specialized equipment, well-organized labs, and a good supply

of spare parts. They are normally carried out in District maintenance labs, or
in specialized Area maintenance facilities. Latest generation equipment have
automatic Q-check routines sometimes using the acquisition system software.
Other tools are available in the RITE system. They are:
• Asset history cards,

• the RITE board,
• the RITE tags system.
Following are some explanations about these tools.
2.6.4 Asset History Cards

This is a basic performance follow-up system to be compiled for each asset.
The history card shows detailed identification information about the asset and
recapitulates the most important repairs, status of modifications, exposure to
hostile environment, and routine maintenance performed. Cards are kept in
the maintenance area of the shop. They must be sent along with the asset for
permanent transfers.
Assets history cards are also available in electronic form in the RITE.
2.6.5 The RITE Board

This is a visual display to be kept in each maintenance lab. It is a basic
maintenance management tool, showing each individual asset:
• asset identification and year of commission

• modification status - installed and due
• failures occurrence over at least an 18-month period, separating wellsite
and shop failures
• maintenance history and the next six-month planned schedule.
Private
Such a board, even when maintained on a computer, must be kept visible to all
personnel. It helps to continually analyze and tune the maintenance procedures
in the location and reduce the wellsite failure rate.
2.6.6 Tag system

This is a basic organization method, permitting all to know at a glance the status
of equipment. The three colored tags used are:
• GREEN - Equipment ready for a job, having passed a complete FIT check
must carry a green (RITE) tag or sticker. Only green tagged tools are to be
considered ready for a job. Green tags must carry, as well, the date, author
and type of the last maintenance event.

• YELLOW - Intermediate tags carrying information such as "Repaired -
Waiting on FIT/TRIM". They may be used after they are operationally
checked by an engineer or field technician.
• RED - Equipment reported to have failed, waiting on parts, etc., must carry a
red (WRONG) tag or sticker. Red tags must carry the date of the last job, and
the originator of the failure report with a brief failure description.
Tools with no tag are in unknown status. They must undergo a thorough FIT
check before being dispatched to a job.
Private
SRPC Doc-TBT\SRPC Doc-TBT\275253781\2.4\Release Date: 16-Nov-2006\EDMS UID: 275253781\Produced: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50 2-12 GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Operation management system 2-12
Intentionally Blank
Private
3-i GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Meters 3-i
3 Meters
3.1 Reference document ___________________________________________ 3-2
3.2 Overview of multimeters _______________________________________ 3-2
3.3 Standard meter symbols _______________________________________ 3-2
3.4 Multimeter operating instructions ______________________________ 3-3
3.4.1 Operating rules and precautions ______________________________ 3-3
3.4.2 Adjusting pointer for zero - mechanical adjustment _____________ 3-3
3.4.3 Adjusting ohms zero - electrical adjustment ____________________ 3-4
3.4.4 Measuring resistance ________________________________________ 3-5
3.4.4.1 Measuring high resistance - insulation _____________________ 3-6
3.4.4.2 Measuring low resistance - continuity ______________________ 3-7
3.4.4.3 Measuring AC voltage to 1000 volts _______________________ 3-8
3.4.5 Measuring DC voltage to 1000 volts ___________________________ 3-9

3.4.6 Measuring DC current to 500 mA ____________________________ 3-11
3.5 Safety meter __________________________________________________ 3-12
3.5.1 Measuring resistance of a blasting cap _______________________ 3-13
3.5.2 Checking operation of a selective switch or monoswitch _______ 3-13
3.5.3 Checking a dual diode plug or dual diode dwitch ______________ 3-14
3.5.4 Checking the wiring of a selective gun string during assembly __ 3-15
3.5.5 Checking input capacitor of ESIC (EFI cartridge) in a safe system
____________________________________________________________ 3-15
3.6 Megohmmeter _________________________________________________ 3-16
3.7 Common FIT terms ____________________________________________ 3-17
3.8 Rig to casing monitor _________________________________________ 3-18
Private
SRPC Doc-TBT\SRPC Doc-TBT\275253781\2.4\Release Date:16-Nov-2006\EDMS UID: 275253781\Produced: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50 3-ii GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Meters 3-ii
Intentionally Blank
Private
3-1 GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Meters 3-1
3 Meters TOPS, SRPC, Meters
This section introduces the multimeter, megohmmeter, safety meter and rig
to casing monitor.
These meters are critical to maintaining the electrical quality of cables, heads
and adapters and for safety during explosive operations. The following topics
covered are:
• overview, purpose, and limitations of the multimeter

• multimeter meter symbols
• multimeter operation such as how to zero the meter, measure resistance, AC
and DC voltages and current
• overview of megohmmeter
• megohmmeter controls
• operation of megohmmeter
• common FIT (Fast Inspection Test) terms.
Student objectives
After studying this section, the operator in training should be able to perform
the following:
• Describe the purpose of a multimeter, megohmmeter, safety meter and

casing to rig monitor.
• Describe the standard controls and labels on a multimeter.
• Zero a multimeter.
• Demonstrate how to measure AC voltage, DC voltage, current.
• Take insulation and continuity measurements.
• Explain why a megohmmeter provides a better insulation measurement than
a multimeter.
• Demonstrate how to measure insulation using a megohmmeter.
• Check and install a casing to rig monitor.
• Use the SFT-300 to check blasting caps and perforating accessories.
Private
3.1 Reference document

Simpson/Megger Handbook
3.2 Overview of multimeters

The multimeter is a key piece of maintenance equipment. The multimeter
performs various functions including: voltage, current and resistance
measurements. As an operator, one of your major job duties is to maintain the
electrical quality of logging cables, heads and adapters. You will also perform
continuity and insulation checks on logging tools as part of their FIT checks.
There are several available multimeter brands for field use. The two most
commonly used in the field are the Simpson 260 and Weston 660. There has now
been introduced the Schlumberger safety multimeter SFT-300 (H622622-AB).
The basic operation of all multimeters is similar. Therefore, instructions are
provided for the SFT-300. Refer to Figure 3-1 Schlumberger safety multimeter
H622622.
Schlumberger Logo
SAFETY MULTIMETER Pointer-Adjust
& H622622 Text For-zero Screw
Safety multimeter
Function Switch
Reset Button
Range Switch
"OFF" Position
Zero Ohms Knob

Common (-) Jack
Terminal
(+) Jack Terminal H622622-AB
Figure 3-1: Schlumberger safety multimeter H622622
3.3 Standard meter symbols

The following symbols are common to all multimeters.
Term Definition
AC alternating current
Private
DC direct current
K kilo; equivalent to 1000; example: 10k = 10,000
kV kilovolt; equals 1000 volts
mA milliampere; equals 0.001 amperes
x multiply by
Ω ohm; unit of electrical resistance
∞ infinity
3.4 Multimeter operating instructions

3.4.1 Operating rules and precautions

Always follow these equipment precautions:
• Turn tool power "off" before connecting or disconnecting multimeter test

leads to equipment. First, connect the test leads at the desired points, then
turn the power on.
• Ensure the function switch is set properly for the correct type of measurement.
For example, the control switch must be set to AC for AC voltage
measurements, DC for DC voltage measurements, and mA for current
measurements.
• Never attempt to take resistance measurements while the tool is powered.
Also, never attempt to measure voltage with the meter set for resistance or
current. This will blow a meter fuse or possibly damage the meter.
• Turn the multimeter off when not in use.
3.4.2 Adjusting pointer for zero - mechanical adjustment

Refer to Figure 3-2 Mechanical zero adjustment. In order for a meter to read
accurately, the meter movement must be zeroed. Verify the pointer reads zero
when the meter is off or no input is applied. On a level surface, the pointer must
be exactly on zero.
If pointer is off zero, use a screwdriver to adjust the screw located below the
meter scale. Slowly turn the screw clockwise or counterclockwise until the
pointer is exactly over zero at the left side of the scale.
Private
OHMS OHMS
Adjusting
Screw
WARNING
READ MANUAL BEFORE USE
OUTPUT
Figure 3-2: Mechanical zero adjustment
3.4.3 Adjusting ohms zero - electrical adjustment

Refer to Figure 3-3 Electrical zero adjustment. Always check the zero indication
on the VOM before you measure any resistance. Check and adjust the zero
indication each time you switch to a different resistance range. Set the ohms
zero adjustment as follows:
1. Set the range switch to the resistance range position desired and the function
switch at either -DC or +DC.
2. Connect the black test lead in the common (-) jack and the red test lead in
the (+) jack.
3. Touch the contact end of the test leads together to short out the multimeter’s
resistance circuit.
4. Observe the meter indication. Resistance should read 0 ohm on the right
hand end of the ohm scale located at the top of the dial.
5. If the pointer does not read 0 ohm, adjust the zero ohm knob. If you can not
adjust the pointer far enough to read zero, the multimeter’s batteries need
to be replaced.
6. When the pointer shows zero, release the shorted test lead. The multimeter
is now ready to accurately measure resistance.
Private
Adjust to
read zero
ZeroZero Ohms
Set to
-DC or +DC Adjust Knob
Set to
R x 1, R x 100,
or R x 10,000
Black
Test Load Read
Test Load
Figure 3-3: Electrical zero adjustment
3.4.4 Measuring resistance

Potential Loss: Assets
Always turn equipment power off before taking resistance measurements.

Refer to Figure 3-4 VOM setting for high resistance measurements. Measure
resistance as described in the following procedure:
1. Set the range switch in one of three resistance range positions.
• Use R x 1 for resistance readings from 0-200 Ohm.

• Use R x 100 for resistance readings from 200-20 kOhm.
• Use R x 10,000 for resistance readings above 20 kOhm.
2. Set the function switch to +DC.

3. Connect the black test lead to Common (-) and red test lead to (+).
4. Short the test leads together and verify that the meter indicates zero ohm. If
not, adjust the multimeter zero knob as described above.
5. Connect the leads across the resistance to be measured.
Private
Note
The resistance measurements for rectifiers vary depending on the range switch
of the multimeter’s range switch setting. For example, a crystal diode which
measures 80 Ohms on the R x 1 range may measure 300 Ohms on the R x 100
range. This is a normal response and results from the diode’s and multimeter’s
operating characteristics. These differences in values do not indicate any fault in
the diode. Also, the measured resistance depends on which order the leads are
connected to the diode. The diode will measure either a high or low resistance,
depending on which end the negative lead is connected. The point is that the
measurement must go from low-to-high or high-to-low as the VOM leads are
swapped across the rectifier.
6. Read the pointer indication on ohms scale at the top of the multimeter dial.
7. Multiply the reading by the range switch position multiplier factor. For
example, if the indication is 2 ohms and the range is set to R x 10,000 the
resistance is 20,000 ohms.
3.4.4.1 Measuring high resistance - insulation

Refer to Figure 3-4 VOM setting for high resistance measurements. Set the
range switch to R x 10,000 to obtain the most accurate insulation readings.
Private
WARNING
Function Switch
Set to +D.C.
Range Switch
Black Set to R x 10,000
Test Lead
Red
Test Lead
R = 200 x 10,000 = 2 Megohms
Figure 3-4: VOM setting for high resistance measurements
3.4.4.2 Measuring low resistance - continuity

Refer to Figure 3-5 VOM setting for low resistance measurements. Set the
Range switch to R x 100 to obtain the most accurate continuity readings. For
point-to-point wiring checks, set the Range to R x 1. The value should be <1 ohm.
Private
WARNING
Function Switch
Set to +D.C.
Range Switch
Set to R x 100
Black
Test Lead
Red
Test Lead
R = 20 x 100 = 2 k Ohms
Figure 3-5: VOM setting for low resistance measurements
3.4.4.3 Measuring AC voltage to 1000 volts

Refer to Figure 3-6 Measuring AC voltage. Use the following procedures to
take AC voltage measurements:
1. Set the function switch to AC volts.

2. Set the range switch to a voltage range higher than the expected voltage.
Potential Severity: Light

Hazard Category: electrical
When in doubt about the voltage level to be measured, always use the
highest voltage range as a protection to the meter. Observe the meter
reading. If voltage is within a lower range, set the Range switch to a lower
range to get a more accurate reading. The most accurate readings are
obtained when the pointer is mid-point in the arc.
3. Plug the black test lead into common (-) and red test lead into (+).
Private
Note
When measuring high voltage in the range of 500 VAC or 1000 VAC, plug
the red test lead into the 500 V or 1000 V plugs.
4. Turn power "off," and connect the test leads across voltage source.
5. Turn power "on."
6. Read the voltage measurement as follows:
• For 10 V, 50 V, and 250 V ranges, use the red arc marked AC. Black
numbers immediately above the arc indicate the voltage measurement.
• For the 500 V and 1000 V ranges, the range switch should be set at
250 V. Read the red arc marked AC. Use 0-5 numbers for the 500 V
range and 0-10 numbers for 1000 V range. In both ranges, multiply the
numbers by a factor of 10 to acquire the value.
7. Turn circuit power off circuit power.

8. Remove test leads.
WARNING
Set function
Switch to
OUTPUT
A.C. Volts
ONLY A.C. VOLTS
500 MA 100 MA
ONLY 10 MA ZERO OHMS
2.5 V
- D.C. 10 V 1 MA
+ D.C. 25 V Rx1
OFF 50 V R x 100
Black 250 V R x 10,000

Test Lead COMMON 500 V 1000 V
ALL TERMINALS 1KV MAX.
Red
Test Lead Set Range Switch to
2.5 V, 10 V, 25 V, 50 V, or 250 V
Figure 3-6: Measuring AC voltage
3.4.5 Measuring DC voltage to 1000 volts

Refer to Figure 3-7 Measuring DC voltage. Use the following procedures to take
DC voltage measurements.
Private
1. Set the function switch to +DC or -DC depending on the polarity of voltage
to be measured.
2. Set the range switch to a voltage range (2.5 V, 10 V, 25 V, 50 V or 250 V)
higher than the expected voltage.
Note
When in doubt about the voltage level present, always use the highest
voltage range as a protection to the meter. Observe the meter reading. If
voltage is within a lower range, set the range switch to a lower range to get
a more accurate reading. The most accurate readings are obtained when
the pointer is mid-point in the arc.
3. Plug the black test lead into common (-) and red test lead into (+). To
measure 500 VDC or 1000 VDC, plug red test lead into 500 V or 1000 V.
4. Connect the black test lead to the negative and the red test lead to the
positive side of circuit to be measured. When measuring supply voltages, the
black lead is always connected to mass.

Supply voltages are measured with respect to mass. Be sure to set the
function switch to the correct polarity, either -DC or +DC, for the voltage
polarity anticipated. An incorrect setting can damage some multimeters.
5. Turn the power on.
Note
If the pointer deflects to the left of zero, the function switch is set to the wrong
polarity. Turn power off, switch the function switch to the correct polarity, and
turn power back on.
6. Read the voltage on the black arc marked DC. This mark is second from the
top of the dial. Read the voltage measurement as follows:
• For 10 V, 50 V, and 250 V ranges, read the figures directly.

• For 500 V or 1000 V, the range switch should be set at 250 V position.
Use the 0-50 scale and multiply by 10 for the 500 V range. Use the 0-10
scale and multiply by 100 for the 1000 V range.
7. Turn the power "off" and disconnect the leads.
Private
WARNING
OUTPUT
500 MA 100 MA
A.C. VOLTS
Set Function ONLY 2.5 V 10 MA ZERO OHMS
Switch to - D.C.
10 V 1 MA
+ D.C.
+ D.C. 25 V Rx1
50 V
OFF R x 100
Black 250 V R x 10,000
Test Lead COMMON 500 V 1000 V
Red
Test Lead Set Range Selector to
2.5 V, 10 V, 25 V, 50 V, or 250 V
Figure 3-7: Measuring DC voltage
3.4.6 Measuring DC current to 500 mA

When measuring current, make sure the meter leads are not connected cross
a voltage point. This could blow the fuse or damage the meter movement.
Refer to Figure 3-8 Measuring DC current. Use the following procedures to
take current measurements.
1. Set the function switch to +DC.

2. Set the range switch one of the five current range positions, marked 50 mA, 1
mA, 10 mA, 100 mA or 500 mA. When in doubt as to the amount of current
present, always use the highest current range (500 mA). Observe the meter
reading. If current is within a lower range, set the Range switch to a lower
setting to get a more accurate reading.
3. Plug the black test lead into common (-) and red test lead into (+).
4. Make sure power is turned off and connect the leads to the current source.
Private
5. Connect the black test lead to negative side and the red test lead to the
positive side of circuit to be measured.
6. Turn the power "on". If the meter reads below zero, turn the power off and
change the function switch to DC. Turn power "on".
7. Read the current measurement as follows:
• 50 mA: Read the black arc marked "DC" using the 0-50 scale.
• 1 mA: Read the black arc marked "DC" using 0-10 and divide by 10.
• 10 mA: Read the black arc marked "DC" using 0-10.
• 100 mA: Read the black arc marked "DC" using 0-10 and multiply by 10.
• 500 mA: Read the black arc marked "DC" using 0-50 and multiply by 10.
8. Turn the power off and remove the test leads.
WARNING
OUTPUT
500 MA 100 MA
A.C. VOLTS
Set Function ONLY 2.5 V 10 MA ZERO OHMS
Switch to
+ D.C. - D.C. 10 V 1 MA
+ D.C. 25 V Rx1
OFF 50 V R x 100
Black 250 V R x 10,000

Test Lead COMMON
+ 500 V 1000 V
Red
Test Lead Set Range Switch to
50 mA, 1 mA, 10 mA,
100 mA, or 500 mA
Figure 3-8: Measuring DC current
3.5 Safety meter

Safety meters are ohm-meters designed to be used during explosive services.
These meters are designed to limit their current outputs to very small levels
(< 25 mA) to minimize the risk of accidentally detonating the explosive charges.
Private
Tip
Only safety meters may be used during explosive operations.
The new SFT-300 (H622622) replaces the previous Schlumberger Safety Meter
(H123080). It is approved for use with all Schlumberger electrical explosive
devices.
3.5.1 Measuring resistance of a blasting cap

1. Set Range switch to the R x 10 position and perform an electrical zero
adjustment.
2. Place blasting cap into safety tube and measure resistance between wire
leads.
3. Resistance of most blasting caps is between 50 and 60 ohms.
3.5.2 Checking operation of a selective switch or

monoswitch
It is preferred that the switch be already installed in Selective Adapter so that the
following checks will cover installation:
1. Set range switch to the R x 10 position and perform an electrical zero

adjustment.
2. Connect red lead probe to white wire and press black lead probe into
connector hole in switch piston (end for attaching shock disk or wire
connector). There must be continuity or less than 1 ohm.
3. Disconnect black lead probe from connector hole in switch piston, but leave
red lead probe attached to white wire.
4. Set range switch to R x 10,000 position and perform an electrical zero
adjustment.
5. Leave red lead probe attached to white wire, hold black lead probe against
selective switch/monoswitch metallic body. Resistance must be infinite.
6. Leave red lead probe attached to white wire, connect black lead probe
to colored wire (either Red, Green or Blue). Resistance must be infinite.
Change polarity to Negative (-) DC. The resistance must remain infinite.
Leave black lead probe connected to colored wire and function switch set to
negative (-) DC position. Disconnect Red lead probe from white wire and hold
Private
red probe against Selective Switch/Monoswitch metallic body. Resistance

must be infinite. Change polarity to Positive (+) DC position. The resistance
must remain infinite.
3.5.3 Checking a dual diode plug or dual diode dwitch

It is preferred that plug or switch be already installed in selective adapter so that
the following checks will cover installation:
Dual Diode Plug (Various H & P #’s)

BLUE
LOWER SCREW TERMINAL
UPPER WHITE (OR LOWER WHITE WIRE)

Dual Diode Switch (H304818)

BLUE
UPPER WHITE
LOWER WHITE
Figure 3-9: Checking a dual diode plug or dual diode switch
1. Set Range Switch to the R x 100 position and perform an electrical zero
adjustment.
2. Connect red lead probe to the upper white plug wire.
3. Place black lead probe on the lower terminal (or lower white wire). The
resistance should be between 600 and 700 ohms.
4. Set function switch to negative (-) DC position. The resistance must be
infinite. Set range switch to R x 10,000 position. Resistance must remain
infinite.
5. Set the range switch to R x 100. Leave function switch in the negative (-)
DC position and red lead probe connected to the upper white plug wire.
Connect the black lead probe to the blue wire. Resistance should measure
between 600 and 700 ohms.
6. Leave both lead probes connected as described above, set function switch to
positive (+) DC position. The Resistance must be infinite. Set Range Switch
to R x 10,000 position. Resistance must remain infinite.
7. Leave the function switch set to positive (+) DC position and the range switch
set to the R x 10,000 position, as well as the red lead probe connected to
the upper white plug wire. Disconnect the black lead probe from the blue
wire and hold the black lead probe against dual diode metallic body. The
resistance must measure infinite.
8. Leaving both lead probes connected as described above, set function switch
to negative (-) DC position. The resistance must remain infinite.
Private
3.5.4 Checking the wiring of a selective gun string during

assembly
1. Set range switch to the R x 10,000 position and perform an electrical zero
adjustment.
2. At bottom end of gun, connect red lead probe to white gun wire. Hold black
lead probe against gun carrier body. Resistance must be infinite.
3. Disconnect red lead probe from white gun wire and black lead probe from
gun carrier body.
4. Set range switch to the R x 10 position and perform an electrical zero
adjustment.
5. Place red lead probe against gun carrier body. Connect black lead probe to
colored ground wire at bottom of gun. There must be continuity (less than
4 ohms).
6. Leave black lead probe connected to colored Ground wire at bottom of gun.
Connect red lead probe to white gun wire at bottom of gun.
7. At upper end of gun, short conductor or white wire to ground or mass using a
screwdriver/knife/jumper/etc. There must be continuity (less than 4 ohms).
8. Repeat steps 1 through 7 for next gun.
3.5.5 Checking input capacitor of ESIC (EFI cartridge) in

a safe system
It is required that esic be installed into a safe basic unit or esic Pressure Housing
so that there is a return loop in the circuit, as well as the following checks will
then cover installation.
1. Set Function Switch to either the Positive (+) DC or Negative (-) DC position.
2. Plug RED lead probe into (+) jack terminal and BLACK lead probe into
Common (-) jack terminal.
3. Set Range Switch to R x 10,000 position and perform an electrical zero
adjustment.
4. Connect red lead probe to input side of esic, hot gun wire or upper head
conductor and black lead probe to ground side of esic, gun mass or basic
unit mass (not to colored Ground gun wire).
Private
5. Change polarity by rotating function switch between positive (+) DC and

negative (-) DC positions. Rotate function switch several times to determine
size of meter pointer movement. Meter pointer deflection should be
approximately 1/4" (meter reading of approx. 200) for a single ESIC; and
approximately 1/2" (meter reading of approx. 100) for two ESIC’s. If there is
no deflection, or if there is a resistance, recheck wire connections. If problem
persists, the input capacitor of the ESIC may be bad. Refer to Safe Electrical
Maintenance Manual or replace ESIC.
3.6 Megohmmeter
The only purpose the megohmmeter serves is to test the insulation of cable
conductors, adapters, heads, and logging tool through wiring. The Megohmmeter
is required because the multimeter takes resistance measurements by applying
a low voltage (typically 9.0 VDC) across its resistivity circuit.
However, insulation breaks down under high voltage. Insulation that measures
correctly with a VOM may actually leak to mass when high voltage is applied.
The Megohmmeter provides 500 or 1000 volts between the probe and the mass
connections.
Therefore, the megohmmeter provides a more accurate test by applying a high

voltage to the wiring or connector. If the wirings insulation is bad, the high voltage
will break it down, allowing current to flow to mass.

Never touch the probe when the press to read button is pressed. The press to
read button applies 1000 V to the probe.
• Always release the press to read button before disconnecting the probe
or the mass clip.
• Never used a megohmmeter on electronic circuits. The egohmmeter should
only be used on cables and equipment where the electronic section is
removed or disconnected. It may be used on the motor and transformer
windings of mechanical tools; however, refer to the tool’s maintenance
manual to be absolutely certain.
Private
5 2 1
10 -5
20 -2
50 -1
5 -0.5
100 2 10
MΩ 1 20 0
-5
Ω 0 100
BATT
ACV O K
TAUT BAND
MCOEL
AMB -1A
PRESS
TO READ
ACV
MΩ
DO NOT
PRESS
FOR ACV BATT
AMPROBE*
Figure 3-10: Megohmmeter
3.7 Common FIT terms

When performing FIT procedures you will encounter the following terms:
Term Definition
Continuity usually a low resistance (1 to 10 kOhm)
Insulation resistance 20 megOhms (20,000,000 Ω)
Meg or megOhm 1 million ohms or 1,000 KiloOhms (kΩ)
Examples:
• With pointer on 1 and range switch at R x 1, the value equals (1 Ohm x

1) or 1 Ohm.
• With pointer on 1 and range switch at R x 100, the value equals (1 Ohm
x 100) or 100 Ohm.
• With pointer on 1 and range switch at R x 10,000, the value equals (1 ohm x
10,000) = 10 kOhm.
• With pointer on 100 and range switch at R x 10,000, the value equals (100
Ohm x 10,000) or 1 megOhm.
• With pointer on 2k and range switch at R x 1, the value equals (2000 ohm
x 1) or 2 kOhm.
Private
• With pointer on 2k and range switch at R x 100, the value equals (2000 Ohm
x 100) or 200 kOhm.
• With pointer on 2k and range switch at R x 10,000, the value equals (2,000
Ohm x 10,000) or 20 megOhm.
3.8 Rig to casing monitor

Rig to casing monitors are used to monitor the voltage difference between
the superstructure of the rig and the well head. This is to ensure that during
explosive operations, no dangerous potentials exist which could set off the
explosives prematurely.
To use a rig to casing monitor properly, adhere to the following procedure:
1. Before using the casing-to-rig voltage monitor, it should be tested to ensure

that it is functioning properly.
a. Verify that the plug leads into the rear portion of the monitor.
b. With a multimeter on the R x 1 scale (Rx10 if using a Safety Multimeter),
check for continuity between the two clamps, making sure that the clamps
are not shorted together. Resistance between the clamps should be about
3000 ohm. The rig-to-casing voltage monitor should read approximately 1
V. This test ascertains that the meter and clamp connections are working.
c. An alternate test is to use a 1.5 V battery source attached between the
two clamps. In this case, the rig-to-casing voltage monitor should read
the battery voltage.
2. After making the test, unplug the leads from the monitor and, attach each
clamp securely, one on the derrick and the other to the casing.
Plug in the leads to monitor. Keep plugs separated and avoid handling
together.
3. Spot meter face conveniently on the rig floor, catwalk, or pipe rack so that the
engineer arming the gun may observe the meter reading.
4. If any voltage in excess of 0.25 V exists, ascertain its nature: Bring the
multimeter back inside the logging unit. Only the safety meter is allowed
outside the logging unit from now until the end of the operation.
Private
4-i GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / O-rings 4-i
4 O-rings
4.1 O-rings basics _________________________________________________ 4-1
4.2 Causes of O-rings seal failures _________________________________ 4-2
4.3 Standard operating procedure __________________________________ 4-3
4.3.1 Who ________________________________________________________ 4-3
4.3.2 When _______________________________________________________ 4-3
4.3.3 How _________________________________________________________ 4-4
4.3.4 Checks ______________________________________________________ 4-4
4.3.5 Wellsite and shop standards __________________________________ 4-5
Private
SRPC Doc-TBT\SRPC Doc-TBT\275253781\2.4\Release Date:16-Nov-2006\EDMS UID: 275253781\Produced: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50 4-ii GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / O-rings 4-ii
Intentionally Blank
Private
4-1 GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / O-rings 4-1
4 O-rings Troubleshooting
This section describes the purpose of O-rings used in Schlumberger tools; how
O-rings provide a seal, what causes them to fail, and how to maintain O-ring
seals.
Student objectives
the following:
1. Explain the purpose of O-rings in a tool.

2. List the main causes of O-ring failure.
3. Describe the correct procedures for O-ring maintenance.
4. Identify who is responsible for reinstalling O-rings.
Reference documents
Refer to the Heads Maintenance Manual, content ID# 3012542, in InTouch.
4.1 O-rings basics

O-rings are vital to the successful operation of all Schlumberger downhole tools.
The most common use of O-rings is to provide a seal between a tool’s make-up
joint and external hydrostatic pressure. O-rings are also used in hydraulically
operated tools such as the MDT, MSCT, and RFT. Refer to Figure 4-1 Effect of
pressure on O-ring activation. O-rings seal by plugging the small gap between
two surface areas. If not for the O-ring, fluid and pressure will pass through the
gap. Fluid pressure pushes the O-ring material into the gap, plugging it to create
a seal. As fluid pressure increases on the fluid side, the O-ring deforms and is
pushed further into the gap. If the pressure and temperature limits of the O-ring
are exceeded, extrusion failure occurs, resulting in a flooded tool.
Private
SRPC Doc-TBT\SRPC Doc-TBT\275253781\2.4\Release Date:16-Nov-2006\EDMS UID: 275253781\Produced: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50 4-2 GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / O-rings 4-2
Figure 4-1: Effect of pressure on O-ring activation
4.2 Causes of O-rings seal failures

Several conditions can cause an O-ring seal failure. A failure is anything that
opens a fluid path either through or around the O-ring seal. Two components of
the O-ring seal are the O-ring and the gap. The gap is formed by the edge of
the O-ring groove and the seal bore.
Causes of O-ring seal failure include:
• corrosion (rust) in the O-ring groove or seal bore,

• improperly machined parts (gap too big or out of round),
• scratched O-ring groove or seal bore,
• O-ring twisting during installation,
• incorrect O-ring size, hardness, or material,
• cut or shearing during installation,
• worn out, flat O-rings.
Private
Inspect O-ring seals for the above conditions during tool maintenance. If any
of the above conditions are found, correct the condition before proceeding.
Otherwise, a seal feature will occur.

Attention to detail during O-ring assembly is vitally important. Never substitute

O-rings. Always use the exact part number listed in the Engineering reference
drawing and parts list.
4.3 Standard operating procedure

The Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) for O-ring maintenance is presented
in the following four categories:
• Who is responsible?
• When are O-rings serviced?
• How are O-rings serviced?
• Checks - What should be inspected?
• Wellsite and Shop Standards - How O-rings are handled and stored.
4.3.1 Who
The person who removes an O-ring is responsible for reinstalling it.
4.3.2 When
• Replace O-rings before or after running in deep or hot (>300 degrees) holes.
• Replace O-rings between jobs with explosive services.
• Replace O-rings during the tool’s TRIM (Tool Review Inspection Monthly).
Private
4.3.3 How

Never make up a tool without O-rings installed, even temporarily.

Never install end caps without O-rings installed.
Never transport a tool out of the shop without O-rings installed.
Never use a sharp instrument, such as a pocket knife or screw driver, to remove
O-rings.
1. Gather new O-rings before removing old O-rings.

2. Check for the correct part number according to tool/application - Arctic/HEL.
3. Use a light coat of grease (Lubriplate or DC-111) to glide the O-ring over the
installation tool.
Note
If the O-ring is used in a hydraulic circuit, like those in MDT, lubricate it with
Vaseline.
4. If an installation tool is not available, use a string (flat lacing cord) looped
through the center of the O-ring to guide it over the groove.
5. Use a light coat of Lubriplate or DC 111 on O-ring parts when installing them
into mating parts.
6. Pay close attention when installing O-rings into mating parts. Make sure the
O-ring does not become shaved or cut.
7. Use a Green "RITE" tag on the tool and indicated "O-rings changed" and date.
4.3.4 Checks
• Inspect O-rings for damage before connecting tools.
• Inspect O-ring grooves and seal bores for cleanliness, corrosion or damage.
• For night operations know the "look and feel" signals of a missing O-ring
during tool assembly or make-up.
These signals include:
– too easy of connection make-up,
Private
– connections bottom out too hard.
• Verify the O-ring fills the groove and does not turn easily.
• If back-up rings are used, make sure they are installed on the correct side of
the O-ring according to the Engineering reference drawing.
4.3.5 Wellsite and shop standards

• Store O-rings in their original bags.
• Observe the date code on the bag and throw out expired O-rings.
• Stock O-rings by part number, not by size.
• Count O-rings removed versus installed.

• Use O-ring kits where available (no spares).
• Use a designated heads work station to provide correct parts, quantities
and drawings.
Private
SRPC Doc-TBT\SRPC Doc-TBT\275253781\2.4\Release Date: 16-Nov-2006\EDMS UID: 275253781\Produced: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50 4-6 GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / O-rings 4-6
Intentionally Blank
Private
5-i GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Cables 5-i
5 Cables
5.1 Safety and precautions _________________________________________ 5-2
5.1.1 Personnel safety _____________________________________________ 5-2
5.1.2 Equipment safety ____________________________________________ 5-3
5.1.2.1 Wireline cable tension limits _______________________________ 5-3
5.1.2.2 Torque ___________________________________________________ 5-4
5.1.2.3 Cable corrosion considerations ____________________________ 5-5
5.1.3 Reporting cable problems ____________________________________ 5-6
5.2 Cable description ______________________________________________ 5-6
5.2.1 Purpose of cables ____________________________________________ 5-6
5.3 Hepta cable construction _______________________________________ 5-7
5.4 Monocable construction ________________________________________ 5-7
5.5 Coaxial cable construction _____________________________________ 5-8

5.5.1 Cable nomenclature __________________________________________ 5-9
5.6 Material properties ____________________________________________ 5-10
5.6.1 Insulation and jacketing _____________________________________ 5-10
5.6.2 Temperature rating __________________________________________ 5-10
5.6.3 Capacitance and attenuation ________________________________ 5-10
5.6.4 Mechanical properties _______________________________________ 5-11
5.6.5 Electrical properties _________________________________________ 5-15
5.7 Voltage and current ratings ____________________________________ 5-19
5.8 Cable Maintenance ____________________________________________ 5-19
5.8.1 Avoiding mechanical problems _______________________________ 5-19
5.9 Electrical maintenance ________________________________________ 5-20
5.9.1 Electrical checks - insulation and continuity ___________________ 5-20
5.9.2 Insulation check ____________________________________________ 5-20
5.9.3 Electrical leak location _______________________________________ 5-20
5.9.4 Estimation of cable length - resistance method ________________ 5-21
5.10 Check for remaining life and ductility __________________________ 5-22
5.10.1 Basic information ___________________________________________ 5-22
5.11 Prolonging cable life __________________________________________ 5-22
5.11.1 Sheave size selection _______________________________________ 5-22
5.11.2 Speed in and out of the well _________________________________ 5-23
5.11.3 Loose armor and birdcaging _________________________________ 5-24
5.11.4 Periodic tightening of cables _________________________________ 5-25
5.11.5 Cleaning, post-forming, brushing and lubricating ______________ 5-26
5.11.6 Coverage and gaps _________________________________________ 5-27
5.11.7 Torque and its effect on cable behavior _______________________ 5-27
5.11.8 Gas cut muds and hydrocarbons _____________________________ 5-28
5.11.9 Storing a cable at high tension _______________________________ 5-29
Private
SRPC Doc-TBT\SRPC Doc-TBT\275253781\2.4\Release Date:16-Nov-2006\EDMS UID: 275253781\Produced: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50 5-ii GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Cables 5-ii
Intentionally Blank
Private
5-1 GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Cables 5-1
5 Cables SRPC,TOPS
This section introduces the cables used in wireline operations. Proper cable
selection, handling, and maintenance are critical to performing quality jobs.
The topics covered are:
• purpose of logging cables for wireline services

• basic construction of a hepta cable and monocable
• nomenclature used to define cable features and specifications

• cable theory - capacitance and attenuation, effects of torque on cable,
voltage and current ratings
• cable handling - avoiding damage
• electrical maintenance - insulation and continuity and leak location
• winch operations.
Keep your lifeline healthy by doing the following:
• Check armors for wear.

• Cut the cables regularly.
• Perform a cable serviceability test.
• Make a new rope socket.
• Check insulation and continuity.
• Inspect the collector.
• Update the cable data card.
• Use the line wiper.
Student objectives
the following:
• List three purposes served by logging cables.

• Describe the basic construction of both the hepta cable and monocable.
• Describe a cable’s features based on its nomenclature.
Private
• Describe the causes of excessive cable torque and how to prevent it.
• Explain how insulator thickness and material effects cable capacitance and
attenuation.
• Explain the affects of capacitance and attenuation on the logging signal.
• Describe cable damage that can result from improper handling and how to
avoid it.
• Estimate the length of cable on a drum.
• Demonstrate how to perform the electrical insulation and continuity checks
on a cable.
• Demonstrate how to determine the general location of an electrical leak in
a cable.
• Perform remaining cable life and ductility test.
• Describe winch operation techniques.
Reference documents
• IPC Wireline Cables (ALC) Maintenance Manual , content ID# 3614996, in

InTouch Support.
• IPC Wireline Cables (ALC) Operations Reference Manual , content ID#
3614996.
• Simpson/Megger Handbooks
5.1 Safety and precautions

This section focuses on the importance of safety to personnel and equipment.
The first section covers safety information pertaining to personnel safety. The
second major section covers information regarding equipment safety. It covers
safety information pertaining to wireline cable tension limits and cable corrosion
considerations. It discusses how to report cable problems to the Schlumberger
Integrated Productivity and Conveyance (IPC) center, and how to handle cable
returned for failure analysis.
5.1.1 Personnel safety

The main safety hazards for personnel handling logging cables include crushing
of fingers and hands, cuts and punctures, and chemical exposure.
Private
• Be careful where you place your hands and fingers while spooling cable on
the drum. The cable tension is more than adequate to crush your fingers
and hands.
• Be careful where you place your hands and fingers when working around
sheave wheels with cable under tension.
• When handling cable or splicing cable wear work gloves when possible to
avoid cuts and punctures. Cable armor can be nicked causing cuts, or
stranded causing punctures. This is especially true while the cable is moving.
• Wear the proper safety protection equipment such as rubber gloves, rubber
aprons, and eye protection when applying corrosion inhibiting chemicals to
logging cable. Refer to the chemical’s material safety data sheet (MSDS)
before starting the job to determine the level of protection required and first
aid in the event of exposure.

• The MSDS sheet for any chemical inhibitor used at a district must be on file
and accessible by shop employees.
• Wear safety glasses when cutting cable armor or conductors during a splicing
operation. Ends of armor and conductor wires can fly off when cut presenting
an eye puncture hazard.
5.1.2 Equipment safety

The safety issues surrounding wireline cables include the following
considerations.
5.1.2.1 Wireline cable tension limits

A great amount of energy is stored in a cable under tension. The sudden
release of this energy is very dangerous. Even if nobody is injured, the
unintentional parting of a wireline cable causes great expense both to the client
and Schlumberger. Schlumberger Integrated Productivity & Conveyance (IPC)
has calculated tension values for each cable in use to guard against accidental
parting or damage because of over-pull ( see Table 5-1). The subsections that
follow describe what these values mean.
Ends fixed break strength is defined as the maximum tension in a straight pull
that a cable can withstand when both ends are fixed and unable to rotate. An
example of this is a truck towing a car when the tow cable is tied to both vehicles
and cannot rotate. Another example is a new cable at the surface; it has not had
any rotation yet. Without rotation, both layers are stressed equally.
Private
Ends free break strength is defined as the maximum tension in a straight pull
that a cable can withstand when one end is free and able to rotate. The lower
portion of a cable with a logging tool attached to it in a vertical cased hole comes
close to this condition.
Armored cables have two layers of armor wound over the core at an angle called
the lay angle, measured between the direction of the wires and of the cable
center. The lay angle values are about the same and of opposite directions to
one another. If you had only one layer wound on the cable and hung a weight on
the end, it would simply unwind until the armor wires were straight and it would
get longer. Two layers wound opposing one another stop this from happening.
5.1.2.2 Torque
Torque developed by each layer is a function of the number of wires, their area,
their distance from the center of the cable (moment arm) and the lay angle.
Because of geometry, the inner layer has smaller wires (same number) or less
wires (same size) than the outer, thus having less area and, also, a smaller
moment arm. The result is that the outer layer develops a greater torque than the
inner. We say that the outer armor "controls" in this situation, it unwinds itself,
gets longer, does not carry as much weight or develop as much torque.
What happens to the inner? Since it is wound in an opposite direction, it is turned

in order to wind itself up, get shorter, carry more weight, and is forced to
develop more opposing torque. The cable rotates until the inner and outer
torque are equal, then the rotation stops. There is an unbalance between layers
with the inner being stressed more. If you increase the pull, the inner breaks
first, the load all goes to the outer layer, and it breaks next. Ends free break
strength values are always smaller than ends fixed values because of this
unequal load sharing. In the real world, wells are not perfectly vertical and the
friction against the borehole keeps the tool from being totally free to turn. The
result is that the cable, after use, is somewhere between ends fixed and free.
The longer it is used, the closer to ends free it becomes.
Special torque-balanced armors can be designed by using a few large wires

for the inner armor and many very small wires on the outer. These cables are
not suited to logging operations as the small outer wires wear quickly against
the borehole.
The rule is that you should not exceed one-half the ends fixed breaking strength,
nor 90% of ends free breaking strength, of a cable during operations. You need
this safety factor to take into account the additional risk of an older cable or
when you try to free a stuck tool.
Straight pull versus pulling over a sheave
Private
The ends fixed and ends free breaking strengths are derived assuming the
cable is in a straight pull. When a cable is pulled over a sheave, the stresses
in the armor wires could increase up to 20%. The amount of stress increase is
dependent on many things, but primarily on the ability of the armor wires to
re-adjust position to relieve stresses. If the cable is new, then there will be little
friction between armor wires and they can slide against one another in order to
relieve stress. If the wires are rusty and clogged with mud, they will have more of
a tendency to "lock up". This will prevent the armor wires from moving to relieve
the stresses of being bent over a sheave and this is when stresses can increase
up to 20% more than the stresses seen in a straight pull.
Table 5-1: Tension Limits for Common Wireline Cables
Breaking Strength (lbf) Safe Working Load (lbf)

Schlumberger
Fixed Free 0.50 Fixed
Cable
1-23/2-23 5,970 4,390 2,985
1-32/2-32 10,000 7,500 5,000
7-39LXS 15,440 10,890 7,720
7-42 13,900 9,700 6,950
7-42XS 16,200 11,300 8,100
7-46 16,700 11,600 8,350
7-46XS 19,500 13,540 9,750
7-52 23,400 18,800 11,700
7-53 21,600 15,800 10,800
Note
Pleae see Figure 5-5 for tension limits for other cables currently used in the field.
5.1.2.3 Cable corrosion considerations

• Be sure to use the proper alloy cable for the well conditions that you will
be operating.
• Avoid using logging cables with extra high strength armor in wells containing
H2S. The steel used in high strength armor has a more dense grain structure,
making it more susceptible to molecular Hydrogen than standard steel.
• For cables exposed to high corrosive wells, be sure to follow all maintenance
guidelines and perform wear and ductility tests. This is necessary to extend
the life of the cable and to prevent cable failure during a job.
Private
• Always rebuild the logging head when using MP35N and HC265 alloy cables
in H2S environments. Although the cable alloys are resistive to H2S corrosion
and embrittlement, the rope socket, nut and washer can be damaged by
corrosive gases and fluids. Never use a copper thrust washer when going
into this type of environment. Use only the stainless steel washer (H230460).
5.1.3 Reporting cable problems

Schlumberger Integrated Productivity and Conveyance (IPC) has experienced
cable design engineers and the laboratory facilities to analyze cable failures or
potential problems. When difficulties with cables and their use develop:
1. Isolate the problem source as quickly as possible.

2. Do not take cable samples apart prior to shipping them to IPC for analysis.
3. Initiate an InTouch ticket that includes a report explaining all the conditions
prior to the cable failure or the problems you are having with the cable.
These three steps will ensure that crucial cable failure "evidence" is not
destroyed. Also, by isolating the source of the problem, its cause and probability
of recurrence can be minimized or quickly eliminated.
5.2 Cable description
5.2.1 Purpose of cables

Cables are a basic tool required for Schlumberger wireline work. Cables are
Schlumberger’s largest single item of expense. Therefore, it is essential that
every operator have a thorough knowledge of the construction, use, and special
handling techniques pertaining to cables.
Cables provide three primary functions:
• mechanical support of downhole tools

• electrical connection between the surface unit and downhole instruments
• depth measurements.
Private
5.3 Hepta cable construction

Figure 5-1 illustrates the construction of a Hepta cable. The Hepta cable
contains six teflon-insulated conductors wrapped around a center conductor.
The conductors are separated by a semi-conductive neoprene jacket. A second
neoprene jacket surrounds the seven conductors, separating them from two
layers of armor wire. The armor layers are wrapped in opposing directions and
carry the weight of the tool string.
Outer Semi-conductive
Armor Neoprene Jacket
Teflon
Conductor
Conductors
Teflon
Inner
Armor
Figure 5-1: Hepta cable construction
5.4 Monocable construction

Figure 5-2 illustrates the construction of a monocable. The monocable has only
one Teflon-insulated conductor that runs through the center of the cable. A
semi-conductive neoprene jacket separates this conductor from two layers of
armor wire. Like in the hepta cable, the armor layers are wrapped in opposing
directions and carry the weight of the tool string.
Private
Figure 5-2: Monocable construction

5.5 Coaxial cable construction

Coax cables differ from monocables due to the addition of a served shield
composed of many small copper wires spiraled around the insulated center
conductor. Coax cables are progressively replacing monocables because of their
increased data rate capabilities, better shielding, and improved current return
capacity.
The 2-23 coaxes do not have electrical isolation between armor and serve. There
is a thin jacket under the armor which serves as a mechanical protective layer
only. However, 2-32 coaxes have electrical isolation due to their thicker jacket.
Coaxes are available with only Teflon insulation. Jackets are Tefzel. Refer to
Figure 5-3 for a cross-sectional view of a coaxial cable.
Served Shield
TeflonTM
TefzelTM
Figure 5-3: Coaxial cable construction
Private
5.5.1 Cable nomenclature

All Schlumberger cables are designated by an alphanumeric code "x-xxxx" as
follows:
Position no. 1 = "number of conductors"
Position no. 2 = "dash"
Position no. 3 and 4 = "diameter in hundredths of an inch"
Position no. 5 and 6 = "jacket and insulation material"

Bedding and insulation:
"T" = FEP Teflon insulation
"A" = PFA Teflon insulation
"F" = TFE Teflon insulation or bedding as braid
"P" = Ethylene Propylene Copolymer insulation (EPC)
"V" = Vectorene insulation (TPX) with Nomex tape
"VE" = Same as V but with Dacron tape
"N" = Neoprene jacket material
"K" = Polyetheretherketone bedding material (PEEK)
"Z" = Tefzel bedding and/or insulating material
Example:
7-46 NT = seven conductors/0.46 in./Neoprene/Teflon
In some cases there are added descriptors to denote special features:
• MP35N and HC265 are H2S resistant armors.

• XS indicates extra strength armor used in deep wells.
Private
5.6 Material properties
5.6.1 Insulation and jacketing

Figure 5-4 summarizes the important characteristics of insulation and jacket
materials including their temperature ratings. Of these, TFE and PEEK are not
commonly used because of processability, although they are available for special
purpose, nonstandard cable construction.
5.6.2 Temperature rating

Temperature ratings depend on armor type, insulation and jacket material. See
Figure 5-5 (p. 5-12) and Figure 5-6 (p. 5-14) for the mechanical properties of
wireline cables.
• Normal "P" series cables, such as 7-46P XS have a polypropylene insulated

conductor core and are for service under 300 degF.
• Intermediate temperature rated "ZV" series cables use Tefzel insulated
conductors and are good for service up to 350 degF.
• Higher temperature NT and V cables have been obsoleted due to their poor
reaction to some hydrocarbons. They have been replaced with the M18 "A"
series cables which use new armor, filler and conductor materials for service
over 300 degF and up to 450 degF.
5.6.3 Capacitance and attenuation

The dielectric constant and geometry of the conductor determine the cable
capacitance. A high dielectric constant and thin insulation produce a high
capacitance, resulting in high attenuation. In similar situations, (that is, same
tools, temperature, well depth, etc.) higher capacitance results in higher
attenuation. For example, a 7-46P cable has a lower capacitance than a 7-39Z
cable. The 7-39Z cable may have transmission problems when its length
exceeds 23,000 or 24,000 ft. The dielectric constants used as insulation vary
little with temperature.
Private
SRPC Doc-TBT\SRPC Doc-TBT\275253781\2.4\Release Date:16-Nov-2006\EDMS UID: 275253781\Produced: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50 5-11 GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Cables 5-11
Figure 5-4: Common insulation and jacket component ratings
5.6.4 Mechanical properties

The ranges below are nominal values only, and will differ from cable to cable. In
some instances, there may be overlap between the two different armor tensile
ranges depending on armor diameter, and application. Please look up armor
tensile ranges in the table below.
Table 5-2: Armor Tensile Ranges
Typical Manufacturer’s Tensile Min. Zinc

Wire Grade
Strength Tolerance Coating
GIPS 245 - 285 kpsi 0.45 oz/ft 2
XGIPS 285 - 315 kpsi 0.30 oz/ft 2
XXGIPS 315 - 345 kpsi 0.30 oz/ft 2
MP35N 265 - 300 kpsi
HC265 260 - 280 kpsi
VL (6X alloy) 225 - 246 kpsi1
1
Obsolete and no longer in manufacture
Material in the tables that follow is subject to change, and is updated as new
cables become available. Please refer to Wireline Cable Mechanical Properties,
content ID# 2048360, in InTouch for the latest data of mechanical properties
of cables.
Private
Figure 5-5: Mechanical properties of standard cables
Private
SRPC Doc-TBT\SRPC Doc-TBT\275253781\2.4\Release Date:16-Nov-2006\EDMS UID: 275253781\Produced: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50 5-13
Private
GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Cables

5-13
Figure 5-6: Mechanical properties of special order cables
Private
5.6.5 Electrical properties

Material in the tables that follow is subject to change, and is updated as new
cables become available. Please refer to Wireline Cable Electrical Properties,
content ID# 3042318, in InTouch for the latest data of electrical properties of
cables.
Private
Figure 5-7: Electrical properties of standard cables
Private
Private
GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Cables

5-17
Figure 5-8: Electrical properties of special order cables
Private
5.7 Voltage and current ratings

View cable voltage and current rating criteria in the Wireline Cable (ACL) Manual
on InTouch page Armor Logging Cable (ALC) Documentation, content ID#
2048360, in InTouch Support.
5.8 Cable Maintenance
5.8.1 Avoiding mechanical problems

Problems generally occur because of poor operating practices. Cable problems

you can avoid are discussed in Table 5-3.
Table 5-3: Problem Preventative Measure
Problem Preventative measure

When spooling cable on or off the drum, make sure that adequate tension is
Loose cable
on the cable end.
Improper spooling is caused by misalignment of the unit or if the unit is too
Improper spooling
close to the rig floor.
When cable cannot be spooled off the drum, it is usually due to improper
spooling. If the cable is kept to one side during spooling, it eventually collapses
Tangled cable on itself and cannot be unspooled. If improper spooling exists, always fill up
the complete layer on the drum even if it looks bad. At least then the cable can
be unspooled at a later time.
Broken strands are normally a result of running into or pulling out of the
Broken Strands borehole too fast. Keep cable speeds within a reasonable value and never
run in hole with the hand brake on.
Birdcages and knots in the cable are caused by running in too fast or by
Birdcages or knots spudding when the tool is stuck. Never yo-yo the cable excessively when
trying to free a stuck tool.
Rig up damage Cables are often damaged during rig up by lack of proper attention by the crew.
Cable on the spool can cut through the lower layer during spooling. This
Cable cutting
situation results from poor cable insulation.
Private
5.9 Electrical maintenance
5.9.1 Electrical checks - insulation and continuity

Perform electrical checks before and after every job to ensure the cable is ready
for use. The cable should also be checked when there is reasonable doubt about
its electrical quality. For example, a current load above a toolstring’s normal
load may indicate a cable or head problem. The two electrical checks include
insulation and continuity.
For proper Megohmmeter and VOM operation please see Chapter 3 Meters
(p. 3-1).
5.9.2 Insulation check

Please see Figure 5-7 and Figure 5-8 for specific nominal cable resistance
values.
Using the megohmmeter, measure the insulation quality of each cable conductor.
Each conductor should measure at least 100 megohms with respect to mass or
other conductors. Any other reading should be discussed with the engineer.
Continuity using the VOM, measure the resistance of each cable conductor
from end-to-end. The resistance measured should be the same for all conductors
and will be approximately 10.9 ohms per 1000 feet of cable. Any other reading
should be discussed with the engineer.
5.9.3 Electrical leak location

Cables are designed to aid you in locating a leak somewhere in the length of
the cable. Each conductor’s insulation is coated with a conductive substance
to aid in creating a good electrical short to mass (armor) when the conductor’s
insulation breaks down. This feature allows you to locate the leakage point using
the method illustrated in and the following formula:
Private
Figure 5-9: Point of leak determination
For detailed description on additional methods of finding cable fault location

please refer to Section 5.4 of the Wireline Cables (ALC) Maintenance Manual,
content ID# 3614996, in InTouch.
5.9.4 Estimation of cable length - resistance method

This method of estimating cable length on the drum is achieved by measuring
the resistance of a conductor. Once the resistance measurement is done, divide
the measured resistance by the known resistance per 1000 ft (Section 5.6.5
Electrical properties (p. 5-15)) of the conductor to get the cable length. When
measuring a heptacable with this method, line 7 will give the most accurate cable
length as it is the only non-wound conductor.
Note
For an alternative method of finding cable length please refer to WRM Cables:
Electrical Logging Cables, content ID# 3331590, in InTouchSupport.
Private
5.10 Check for remaining life and ductility
5.10.1 Basic information

Cables are lost or retired due to normal wear and tear of field use or to
catastrophic events. These could be birdcages and hockles due to mishandling,
pieces lost during fishing, cut and thread operations, etc. For GIPS cables,
embrittlement can happen due to lack of knowledge of well conditions.
Normal wear and tear is due to abrasion and/or corrosion. Both actions are
gradual and can be easily observed and measured.
Note
For the latest information on cable ductility evaluation methods please refer to
Section 5.2.2 of the Armor Logging Cable (ALC) Maintenance Manual, content
ID# 3614996.
5.11 Prolonging cable life
Note
For cable break-in or "seasoning" guidelines, please refer to the ALC Reference
Page, content ID# 3258435, in InTouchSupport.
5.11.1 Sheave size selection

Figure 5-10 illustrates sheave diameter for various tensions on a cable.
These numbers are derived from many sources: elevator manufacturers,

navy and oceanographic users, and many years of successful experience in
Schlumberger. Using too small a sheave will lead to broken armor wires, cable
stretch and damage to the core.
Sheave size is a multiple of cable diameter, the multiplier being greater for
heavier loads. A 7-46 used at a maximum of 50% of its break strength would
have a multiplier of 60, so the sheave should be 0.464-in x 60 = 27.8-in. This is
the minimum size sheave which should be used for long life.
Schlumberger sheaves are 24-in and 36-in in diameter. The 24-in diameter is
suitable for shallower wells where tensions seldom reach one-half break strength
and the 36-in sheave for deep hole service where tensions of 50% of break
Private
strength are common. Remember: THE LARGER THE SHEAVE THE LONGER
THE CABLE LIFE. Make also sure that the sheave groove matches the cable
diameter.
Sheave Diameter
versus
Cable Diameter
Sheave Diameter (Multiplier of Cable Diameter)
for
100 Various Tensions
80
60
40
20
5 10 25 50 65
Applied tension (% Rated Break Strength)
Figure 5-10: Sheave diameters
5.11.2 Speed in and out of the well

Table 5-4 lists guidelines for speeds in and out of a well. Local conditions vary
and you go beyond or below these guidelines. All possible factors influencing
speed cannot be listed; you need to use common sense to keep from having a
fiasco. Speed alone is not what will cause that fiasco, but TENSION WILL: TOO
LITTLE GOING IN, TOO MUCH COMING OUT.
For example: On the way down in open hole, stop after you have gone in the
well 1000 ft. or so, read your static tension and then start down at 2/3 of that
amount, not exceeding the associated speed limit.
Private
Table 5-4: Cable Speed Guidelines
Depth In Out
0–100’ 2000 FPH 2000 FPH
100–200’
4000 FPH 4000 FPH
Then: >.8 Static Tension, <1.2 Static Tension,
In Cased Portion or Case Not to exceed 25,000 Not to exceed
Hole FPH 25,000 FPH or 50%
break strength
In Open Hole >.67 Static Tension, <1.33 Static Tension,
Not to exceed 15,000 Not to exceed 15,000
FPH FPH or 50% break
strength
Restrictions: Tension should never decrease going down.

Deviated Holes: Monitor screen, tool must be moving.
Tool Types: Pad or eccentric tools 15,000 FPH maximum.
Weak Point: Do not exceed 75% rated strength. If possible, use AMS.
Well Conditions: Tight spots, Casing CR or Tubing shoes, Packers, Crossovers, Valves,
Fluid levels, etc. 3000 FPH.
Cables have been run at higher speeds BUT to exceed the rules:
- District Manager Endorses.
- Client Gives Approval.
- Alert Crew on the Job.
Lower Speed <6000 FPH should be used whenever.

- Using an expensive cable, i.e., MP-35, Vectorloy, or HC265.
- In gas wells.
- Pulling out after a long time in the hole (above 6 hours).
For more information on the cable speed guidelines, please refer to the QHSE
standard: WL-QHSE-S03-WC (InTouch ID#4137706), specially the section 5.1.1
- Normal operations and 5.1.2 - Non-standard operations.
5.11.3 Loose armor and birdcaging

A wireline cable will rotate due to its geometry which is not harmful when
the cable has been handled in a correct manner. When the cable has been
abused by coming out too fast, especially with a tight wiper or packoff, you have
generated more turns than is normal and the outer armor, when relaxed, will be
separated from the inner armor. There are cases when you can put a screwdriver
under several of the outer wires when the abuse has been severe.
A birdcage is a ballooning out of the outer armor. It happens below a tight spot
like a wiper, packoff, or flow tube as any looseness of outer wires accumulates
ahead of the tight spot. Once started, the birdcage usually will continue and get
larger since a cable with loose outer armor will have it usually for a long distance.
When the birdcage gets large enough, several wires may cross over, fold over,
Private
or get tangled and then break. It also happens with rigid cable in compression.
For example, for a hepta cable just above a PEH-A when your tool frequently
stops on a bridge or on bottom, you will notice a gradual important wear in this
zone, about one foot long.
To remedy this: When going in you need to put the birdcage on the other side of
the constriction, reverse the cable direction and "chase" it back to the bottom of
the cable. In almost all cases you cannot do this, the customer will not tolerate
the lost time. Another possible solution is to slowly reduce the tightness of the
wiper while the cable is moving to spread out this looseness over a longer
distance. You have now hidden the problem but you have not solved it. The
solution is a trip to a cable shop where the birdcage will be chased down to the
tool end and the cable will be rotated. If no cable shop is available, use a split
eye to chase the looseness to the end. A split eye is made by drilling a hole into
a block of steel that is split, the hole being 0.001" to 0.002" larger than the cable.
Clamp the block on the cable at the place where the birdcage started and pull the
cable slowly, keeping it oiled, through that block to the end. It is wise, anyway, to
use this method before building a new rope socket over the last 50 feet of cable.
5.11.4 Periodic tightening of cables

Open hole cables occasionally need to be tightened, but this is a rare occurrence
unless they have been mishandled. They fill with drilling mud fairly early in
life; this mud packs in the spaces between the armors and is not a particularly
good lubricant. It tends to lock the armors and keep them from turning easily
and loosening the outer armor. Tools with pads and the rough surface of the
formation also inhibit rotation somewhat.
Cables used in production services, however, go through flow tubes, are always
well greased and, as a result, are very free to turn. Also, steel surfaces of
tubing or casing have low coefficients of friction, making it easy for a tool to
rotate. Since they can loosen more easily, they may need periodic tightening.
This is even more true for H2S resistant cables as they don’t rust and armors
never lock themselves.
Checking a cable for loose armor is more art than science. If you can get a small
screwdriver between two outer armor wires and move them easily, the cable
needs tightening. Check near the tool end and further into the cable with the
cable relaxed. At Schlumberger Integrated Productivity & Conveyance Center
(IPC) a gauge with a special tip is used. The gauge is commercially available
and we can furnish you the model number and a drawing of the tip (Vector
#E80211), which can be made in any machine shop.
Private
Tightening the cable is done by putting it into a twister that holds the winch or
reel and turns it while the cable is being unspooled onto another reel. Some light
post-forming may or may not be done, depending on the amount of turning that
is needed and the condition of the cable. This operation should be done by a
Vector Cable Service Center or another competent cable shop as it requires
close supervision and a lot of judgment and experience as to the number of
turns needed.
5.11.5 Cleaning, post-forming, brushing and lubricating

The primary corrosion protection of a cable is the layer of zinc on the armor
wires. Additional protection is given by the application of an vegetable oil base
rust inhibitor that is applied during manufacture. This material does a better job
at high temperature than other coatings. However, it will not last forever and
must be replaced periodically.
Experience has shown that the recoating technique is more effective if started
when the cable is new. Once the cable has been in service a long time with
no cleaning, the inner armor is corroded and the space between the armors
is packed with well fluids and corrosive products. At this stage, it is harder
to remove these than it would have been earlier and you will not reverse the
damage already done by corrosion.
The ideal maintenance program is the use of the Cable Cleaning Inhibitor
Applicator (CCIA) every quarter in conjunction with regular remarking. The best
method is to clean dry the cable on its way off the truck, then clean with water
and re-coat with oil or grease while going back onto the truck.
Following this program diligently has shown that the life of the cable will be
increased 25% to 50%. The principle is to run the cable through a series of offset
rollers (post-former) that are vertical and horizontal and that cause some wire
movement. This causes material to fall out from between the armors, leaving
room for the corrosion inhibitor to be applied on the return trip. If available, a jet
of compressed air will help to remove this material.
Two tanks are needed for the set-up. One tank is used dry while taking the
cable off. The products that accumulate should be removed and the tank filled
with water for the return trip. On the return trip both tanks are used, one to
wash and the other to inject the corrosion inhibitor. If the cable was exposed
to chlorides, bromides or acids, it is suggested to add Trisodium Phosphate
or Sodium Metasilicate to the water.
It is better if you can fill the tank with hot water. Hot water dissolves salts more
quickly and completely than cold water. Whether you neutralize or not, change
the water frequently since it will become acid very quickly.
Private
The second tank is used to apply the corrosion inhibitor. It is filled with the
compound and the cable is run through a post-former in order to fill the cable.
There is a wiper to remove excess material and, as a further benefit, this wiper
will push any loose armor wire toward the tool end of the cable. For best results,
the corrosion inhibitor should be heated to about 100 degF.
Brushing a cable is an option done with four wire brushes mounted on electric
motors and oriented at right angles to each other. This is not a recommended
practice on new cables because it removes some of the zinc steel wire coating.
5.11.6 Coverage and gaps

Coverage is defined as the percentage of the cable’s surface that is covered by

an armor layer. Coverage of the inner armor must be high enough to minimize
core extrusion. Coverage at 100% is avoided since this can lead to a wire being
forced inward when the cable is bent or rotated due to operating tensions. Outer
coverage is not as critical since the inner armor is not going to extrude through
the outer armor layer.
For cables used in cased hole operations, outer coverage should be low enough
to allow a good flow of grease to enter the space between the armors, make a
good pressure seal and impede gas to blow through the interstices. Coverage
will always increase for the inner armor as the cable gets older and "seasons."
The diameter gets a little smaller as the outer armor tightens the inner. This
effect raises the coverage. The outer coverage, however, will increase with
diameter reduction but will decrease with its self-induced rotation. The change
can then be in either direction but will be small.
Gaps are caused when the coverage is too low. There is always a small gap
between each armor wire and its neighbor. The crowding of the wires in one
location on the inner armor is harmful as it leaves enough room for the core to
flow past the armor when under pressure, heat and tension. Large gaps in the
outer armor are not considered detrimental to the operation of the cable.
5.11.7 Torque and its effect on cable behavior

The section on ends fixed and free break strengths described why there is a
difference in the two because of rotation. The cause of rotation is torque, and the
results of excessive torque are not usually beneficial. The results are:
• Twisted and coiled cables at rig-up. Handling problems.

• Looseness of the outer armor. Crossovers in the armor.
• Birdcaging: Quite harmful with flow tubes, cause cable jam.
Private
• Stranding a wire when it folds over.

• Mud lumps under the armor cause uneven armor.
• Inner armor over-covered. Wires crowd and buckle inward.
• In extreme cases, inner armor and core come out of outer armor.
• In some cases, the cable throws a loop into itself when relaxed and when
retightened, the resulting kink destroys the cable at that point.
How does this excessive torque get into the cable? Generally because of
inappropriate handling, primarily excessive and/or irregular speed in and out of
the hole. Torque, speed in and out of the hole and tension in and out of the hole
are all tied together. See Section 5.1.2.1 Wireline cable tension limits.
5.11.8 Gas cut muds and hydrocarbons

Natural gas, under a combination of temperature and pressure, diffuses into
insulating and jacketing materials (especially rubbers). All compounds are
affected to some extent. Even though rubber is no longer used as insulation, it is
still used as a jacketing material for NT cables and for bridles. When brought
back quickly to the surface, the gas cannot diffuse back out quickly enough,
hence, the "bloated bridle."
Hydrocarbons soften both P and V cables but have a greater effect on V cables,
especially since they can also be used at higher temperatures. Elastomers
(rubbers) tend to swell. Since the armors are spiraled around the core in a helix,
any swelling by the core causes the cable to shorten. Teflon and Tefzel are not
affected by hydrocarbons; however, gas will permeate them as mentioned above.
The combination of gas-cut, oil-based mud has the worst effect. A strange event
that occurs in 7-46NT is the swelling of the Neoprene as described above. The
shortening of the cable causes the center conductor to protrude from the end
of the cable. This happens only at the very end since further up the cable the
conductor is under compression and cannot move. This causes the center
conductor to "Z-kink". After a few jobs the kinks, being now severely work
hardened, pull apart (open circuit) or jam through the insulation (short circuit).
One way to allow the gas to diffuse out of the cable is to come out of the hole
slowly. Don’t use the same cable in gas-cut mud all the time. Allowing the cable
or bridle to rest a few days at the surface will allow the gas to diffuse out.
Private
5.11.9 Storing a cable at high tension

As mentioned in Section 5.8.1 Avoiding mechanical problems, it is very important
not to store the cable at an exceedingly high tension. This situation can occur
after logging a deep or sticky well. When coming out of the well the cable tension
will be higher than normal. If the cable is stored on the drum in this condition for
a long time, the core will begin to "cold flow" through the gaps between the inner
armor wires. This will reduce the insulation thickness around the conductors and
will eventually result in a conductor shorting to the armor package.
Note
For cable drums specifications, please refer to the Integrated Productivity and Con
veyance (IPC) Center web page, http://www.hub.slb.com/index.cfm?id=id167040.
For cable drum maintenance guidelines, please refer to the Wireline Cables
(ALC) Maintenance Manual, content ID# 3614996, in InTouch.
Private
SRPC Doc-TBT\SRPC Doc-TBT\275253781\2.4\Release Date: 16-Nov-2006\EDMS UID: 275253781\Produced: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50 5-30 GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Cables 5-30
Intentionally Blank
Private
6-i GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Logging accessories 6-i
6 Logging accessories
6.1 Adapter heads (AH) ____________________________________________ 6-2
6.1.1 Introduction __________________________________________________ 6-2
6.1.2 General information _________________________________________ 6-2
6.1.3 Example adapter head _______________________________________ 6-4
6.1.4 RITE maintenance ___________________________________________ 6-5
6.1.5 Adapter heads group listing ___________________________________ 6-7
6.2 Casing collar locators _________________________________________ 6-12
6.2.1 RITE maintenance __________________________________________ 6-13
6.2.1.1 FIT 1 mechanical ________________________________________ 6-15
6.2.1.2 FIT 2 electrical __________________________________________ 6-15
6.2.1.3 FIT 3 operational ________________________________________ 6-15
6.2.2 Group listing table ___________________________________________ 6-16

6.3 Flexible joint adapters _________________________________________ 6-18
6.3.1.1 FIT 1 mechanical ________________________________________ 6-20
6.3.1.2 FIT 2 electrical __________________________________________ 6-21
6.3.1.3 FIT 3 operational ________________________________________ 6-22
6.3.1.4 TRIM-1 mechanical ______________________________________ 6-22
6.3.1.5 TRIM-2 electrical ________________________________________ 6-22
6.3.1.6 Q-Check ________________________________________________ 6-22
6.4 Swivel adapter heads _________________________________________ 6-23
6.4.1.1 FIT 1 mechanical ________________________________________ 6-29
6.4.1.2 FIT 2 electrical __________________________________________ 6-29
6.4.1.3 TRIM ___________________________________________________ 6-30
6.4.1.4 TRIM-1 mechanical ______________________________________ 6-31
6.4.1.5 TRIM-2 electrical ________________________________________ 6-31
6.4.1.6 Q-Check ________________________________________________ 6-31
6.4.2 SAH group listing ___________________________________________ 6-31
6.5 EQF weights __________________________________________________ 6-32
6.5.1.1 FIT-1 mechanical ________________________________________ 6-37
6.5.1.2 FIT-2 electrical __________________________________________ 6-38
6.5.1.3 EQF weight group listing _________________________________ 6-38
6.6 Centralizers and standoffs ____________________________________ 6-39
6.6.1 Example - CME-ZC (J966300) _______________________________ 6-43
Private
SRPC Doc-TBT\SRPC Doc-TBT\275253781\2.4\Release Date:16-Nov-2006\EDMS UID: 275253781\Produced: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50 6-ii GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Logging accessories 6-ii
Intentionally Blank
Private
6-1 GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Logging accessories 6-1
6 Logging accessories SRPC,TOPS,adapters ,collar,locators
This section introduces the logging accessories used in reservoir evaluation

and completion operations. For the purposes of this manual, the accessories
are separated into six groups:
• Adapter heads (AH)

• Casing collar locators
• Flexible joint adapters

• Swivel adapter heads
• EQF weights
• Centralizers and standoffs.
A detailed graphic, bill of material, wiring table and basic RITE maintenance
procedures are provided (where available) via a single accessory for each group
in this chapter. An accessory group listing is also provided for reference to
accessories commonly used in the field.
Note
Detailed information on any accessory in a group listing in this chapter can be
found by referring to its corresponding InTouch weblink.
Student objectives
the following:
1. Be able to find reference material on InTouch Support or in the maintenance

manuals for any of the accessories covered in this chapter.
2. Explain three purposes of adapter heads.
3. Explain how casing collar locators function and the importance of casing
collar locators in logging a well.
4. Explain how a flexible adapter head works and why it is used in the tool string.
5. Explain how a swivel works and why it is used in a tool string.
6. Explain when weights should be used.
7. Explain why centralizers are used and their proper placement on a tool string.
Private
Reference documents
• IPC Adapters Repair and Maintenance Manual , content ID# 3016829.

• Tool Adapters Reference Pages, content ID# 3258462, in InTouchSupport.
• SAH-F Maintenance Manual , content ID# 3029123.
• Wireline Perforating Field Operations Manual, content ID# 3831780.
• SRC Technology Center Homepage at http://www.rosharon.oilfield.slb.com.
6.1 Adapter heads (AH)

6.1.1 Introduction
Adapters are a collection of downhole assemblies, usually with wiring, between
an upper head and a lower head. Their main applications are listed below, with
most adapters serving only one purpose rather than a combination:
• interconnect or "adapt" tools with different diameters, threads, electrical

connections, telemetry wiring, etc. in the same toolstring
• permit swivel or rotary motion between upper and lower adapter headsto
decrease torque buildup in the wireline cable and to orient toolstrings
• permit flexure or bending motion between and upper and lower heads, a
motion required where the well trajectory is not straight
• ensure pressure isolation between upper and lower heads
• ensure electrical isolation between upper and lower heads.
Through the years, a large number of adapters have been designed to

accommodate the many combinations of tool diameters, electrical pinouts,
telemetry wiring, etc. that coexist in the field. New adapters continue to be
released to meet the higher temperature and pressure ratings and changing
operational requirements of new tool families.
6.1.2 General information

The most common category of adapters are assigned file codes of the
form "AH-xx" or "AH-xxx", where "xxx" indicates numbers that are assigned
sequentially. These include such types as flexible joints or knuckle joints, mass
isolation subs, and eccentric adapters. Some are specialty items used only for
specific applications while others are in much more general usage.
Private
Flexible joints, prior to the introduction of AH-201, were designed around a

flexible tube. AH-201 is the first flexible joint to use a ball joint design. This design
permits a reduction in length and easier maintenance, since the wiring harness
does not have to be re-terminated when the flexible joint is disassembled.
Adapters with file codes of the form "BH-x" are pressure isolation bulkheads that
permit through wiring while isolating upper and lower sections.
Adapters with file codes of the form "EAH-X", where "X" is a letter code, are
equipment adapter heads.
Adapters with file codes of the form "PEK-X" are perforating equipment kits.
Adapters with file codes of the form "SAH-X" are swivel adapter heads. Swivels
are presented as a separate section in this chapter. These permit through wiring
of electrical connections while allowing rotation between upper and lower heads.
This relieves torque buildup in the cable and prevents "birdcaging" of the armor.
It also allows tools with pads to be oriented correctly.
Selected swivel adapter heads have their own Maintenance Manuals. To see
these manuals please refer to InTouch Support: Tool Adapters Reference Pages,
content ID# 3258462 in InTouch.
Private
6.1.3 Example adapter head

Figure 6-1: Example adapter head AH-38 - assembly drawing
Private
Table 6-1: AH-38 Electrical Checks
Continuity Checks
From To Value Comments
UH1 LH1 <2Ω
Insulation Checks @ 500 VDC
UH1 mass >100MΩ
Table 6-2: AH-38 Bill of Material
Level Part # Rev Description Qty UM

1 B011968 AE O-RING,SZ 2-210 .734 ID X.139W VITON 1 EA
95D H239
1 B012068 AE O-RING, SZ 2-214, VITON,95D 2 EA

1 H017958 AE CONNECTOR ROD SLEEVE 1 EA
1 H025276 AD LOCK RING 1 EA
1 H030902 AB THREAD PROTECTOR 1 EA
1 H040731 AH THREAD PROTECTOR 1 EA
1 H106435 AC CONTACT PIN 1 EA
1 H106436 AL ADAPTER HOUSING 1 EA
1 H125979 AF INSULATOR, BEVELLED 2 EA
Note
Graphics, bills of material, and RITE maintenance procedures for the example
adapter head above can be found for any adapter head in the group listing Table
6-3. Please refer to the Adapters Repair and Maintenance Manual, content
ID# 3016829.
6.1.4 RITE maintenance

FIT-1 mechanical
1. Clean the adapter and remove the thread protectors.

2. Clean and inspect the O-rings for signs of damage. Inspect the O-ring seats.
Replace the O-rings as necessary.
3. Clean and inspect the threads or threaded rings for burrs, nicks, and signs of
cross-threading.
Replace as necessary.
Private
4. Inspect the electrical contacts to determine if any are bent or loose. Replace
as necessary.
FIT-2 electrical
Refer to the appropriate “wiring table” or to the wiring diagram for the adapter.
The table can be used as a test record for the FIT.
1. Check continuity on all lines as per the wiring information.

2. Check insulation resistance from line to mass as per the wiring information.
3. Check insulation resistance from line to line.
4. Refer to the wiring table for any special instructions that apply to a mass
isolation sub.
FIT-3 operational
1. Ensure the locking ring is deformed (if equipped).

2. Oil the housing and lightly lubricate the O-rings using Lubriplate (B013366) or
Krytox (B039179) for HTHP service.
3. Lubricate all threads with Lubriplate or Krytox.
4. Install thread protectors on both ends of the adapter.
TRIM-1 mechanical
Perform the FIT-1 procedures above.
TRIM-2 electrical
Q-check
See the engineering drawing, reference documents (if any), and bill of material for
reference to any special tools needed to disassemble or assemble the adapter.
A rebuild consists of the following:
1. disassembly
2. inspection of parts
3. replacement of damaged parts
4. replacement of all seals
5. assembly and lubrication
Private
6. FIT.
6.1.5 Adapter heads group listing

Table 6-3: Adapter Head Group Listing (Includes Flex Joints)
Name Rev. Description

AH-100 AA ADAPTER HEAD, 1-3/8-in, 1 TO 15 PIN. RATED 500 DEG. F. 25,000
AH-101 AA ADAPTER HEAD, 1-3/8-in, 22 TO 15 PIN. FOR USE WITH 1-11/16".
AH-102 AA ADAPTER HEAD, 1-3/8-in, 15 TO 22 PIN. FOR USE WITH 1-11/16".
AH-104 AA 1-11/16-in ADAPTER HEAD. UNIVERSAL JOINT FOR DEVIATED

HOLES, 1
AH-105 AA ADAPTER HEAD, 1-11/16 TO 1-3/8-in MONOCABLE, RATED 500
DEG F, 2
AH-106 AA NONE
AH-107 AA ADAPTER HEAD, FLEXIBLE, 3-3/8-in, 31 TO 31 PIN OR 53 TO 53 PI
AH-108 AA 53 PIN TO 53 PIN FLEX JOINT. 4 DEG FLEX IN ANY DIRECTION. RA
AH-109 AA ADAPTER HEAD, FLEXIBLE, 2-3/4-in, 29 TO 29 PIN, RATED 350
DEG
AH-111 AA ADAPTER HEAD, 1-11/16-in. STINGER 31 TO 31 PIN, RATED 350
DEG
AH-112 AA ADAPTER HEAD, 1-11/16-in. STINGER 31 TO 31 PIN, RATED 350
DEG
AH-113 AA ADAPTER HEAD,1 11/16-in, 22 PIN TO 15 PIN,AIR TO AIR FOR H2S
S
AH-114 AA ADAPTER HEAD, 1 11/16-in, 1 PIN TO22 PIN, AIR TO AIR FOR H2S
AH-116 AA ADAPTER HEAD,1-11/16-in, 22 PIN TO 1 PIN, AIR TO AIR FOR H2S
SER
AH-117 AA ADAPTER HEAD, 1-11/16-in. FEMALE 31 TO 31 PIN, RATED 350
degF
AH-118 AA ADAPTER HEAD, DOUBLE FLEX-JOINT,1-11/16-in, 22 PIN UPPER
& LO
AH-119 AA ADAPTER HEAD, 2-3/4-in DIA. 29 PIN TO 3-3/8 31 PIN. RATED 500
degF
AH-120 AA INSULATED FLEX JOINT 31 TO 31 PIN THE MAIN DIFFERENCE
WITH T
AH-121 AA FLEX ADAPTER HEAD FOR PGGT-A AND PGGT-B 1-11/16-in HEAD
& BOT
AH-122 AA ADAPTER - 1-11/16 DIA. SOCKET TO BOX THREAD. CONNECTS
PGGT-A/
AH-123 AA 15 PIN TO 22 PIN ADAPTER, AIR TO AIR
Private

AH-124 AA 1 TO 22 PIN ADAPTER FOR CTS TELEMETRY.
AH-125 AA ADAPTER HEAD, 1-11/16-in, 22 PIN TO 1 PIN, WITH SPECIAL WIRIN
AH-126 AA ADAPTER HEAD, 1-11/16-in, 22 PIN TO 1 PIN, AIR TO AIR, SIMILA
AH-128 AA ADAPTER HEAD 7-22 ADAPTER HEAD 1-3/8 to 1-11/16-in 7 PIN
TO 22 P
AH-130 AA NON MAGNETIC 53-53 PIN 4 DEG FLEX JOINT IN ANY DIRECTION
RAT
AH-131 AA ADAPTER HEAD 3-3/8-in 31 PIN TO 2-3/4-in, 29 PIN H2S RATED
350 DEG
AH-132 AA ADAPTER HEAD LDCA/TUBING
AH-133 AA ADAPTER HEAD MSRT/PCTV-D
AH-134 AA ADAPTER HEAD MSRT/PCTS

AH-135 AA ADAPTER HEAD MSRT/PCTV-E/F
AH-136 AA ADAPTER HEAD MSRT/PCTV-B
AH-137 AA ADAPTER HEAD MSRT/PCTV-C
AH-138 AA ALAT STAND-ALONE ADAPTER
AH-140 AA ADAPTER HEAD, 1-11/16-in, 22 PIN TO 22 PIN, 45 DEG KEY
AH-166 AB 3-3/8-in DIA. MONO TO 31 ADAPTER. RATED 350 degF, 20,000 PSI.
AH-168 AA ADAPTER HEAD. ECCENTRALIZER SUPPORT. 01/84.
AH-169 AA ADAPTER HEAD, CCS MASS ISOLATION SUB. 31 TO 31
CONNECTOR. (AH
AH-170 AA ADAPTER HEAD, FLEXIBLE. 31 PIN. DOUBLE KEY FOR GCT TOOL
STRI
AH-171 AB 1 11/16-in ADAPTER, SINGLE CONDUCTOR, DOUBLE BOX.
ADAPTER HEAD,
AH-172 AB 1 11/16 ADAPTER, 15 PIN TO 22 PIN, DOUBLE BOX. ADAPTER
HEAD,
AH-173 AA 1 11/16 ADAPTER, SSPE TO WET CONNECTOR. ADAPTER HEAD,
SSPE,
AH-174 AA ADAPTER HEAD, 3-3/8-in DIA, HPHT, 31PIN TO 1PIN
AH-175 AA ADAPTER HEAD, 3-1/2-in 31 PIN TO 2-3/4-in 29 PIN. OFFSET, FOR
AH-176 AA ADAPTER HEAD, 2-3/4-in 29 PIN TO 3-1/2-in 31 PIN. OFFSET, FOR
US
AH-177 AA 7TOL PEH-L ADAPTER 1-3/8-in 3 DIA, 350 degF 30,000 PSI
(BACK-OFF).
AH-178 AA ADAPTER 3 3/8-in DIA 31 PIN TO 3 5/8 DIA 53 PIN, AIR TO AIR, RA
AH-179 AB ADAPTER HEAD, 2 IN 22 PIN TO 1-11/16-in 22 PIN
AH-180 AA ADAPTER HEAD 3-3/8-in, 53 PIN TO 31 PIN CONDUCTOR. USED
FOR CSAC-
AH-181 AA ADAPTER HEAD,1-3/8-in TO 1-11/16-in SEVEN TO ONE COND.
MALE-MALE A
Private

AH-182 AA 3-3/8-in 31 TO 31 ADAPTER HEAD, SPECIAL WIRING FOR MFCS
(MULT
AH-183 AB ADAPTER HEAD ASSY FOR PWCH. CONNECTS LOGGING CABLE
TO PWCH.
AH-184 AA CCS AND DTS INSULATED FLEX JOINT 31 TO 31 CONNECTOR.350
degF,
AH-185 AA CCS AND DTS MASS INSULATION SUB 31 TO 31 CONNECTOR.
DIFFERENT
AH-187 AA ADAPTER HEAD. 1-11/16-in FOR RUN-NING CAL-UA/ATC-C/TDT-P
TOOL
AH-188 AA ADAPTER HEAD, 4-1/2-in DIA. (PIN) 31 PIN TO 3-3/8-in DIA. (BOX
AH-189 AA INSULATED ADAPTER HEAD, 2 3/4-in OD SAME PURPOSE AS
AH-69 F
AH-190 AA ADAPTER HEAD 3-5/8-in TO 3-3/8-in, 53 TO 31 PIN
AH-190H AA ADAPTER HEAD 3-5/8-in
AH-191 AA ADAPTER HEAD 3-3/8-in TO 3-5/8-in, 31 TO 53 PIN
AH-191H AA ADAPTER HEAD 3-3/8-in
AH-192 AA ADAPTER HEAD, DUMMY EMM
AH-197 AA ASSEMBLY ADAPTER HEAD, 2-1/2-in 31 PIN TO 3-3/8-on 31 PIN,
RATED 400 degF 20,000 PSI
AH-198 AA ADAPTER HEAD,3-3/8-in TO 2-1/2-in, 31 TO 31 PIN,
ECCENTRIC,RATED 400 degF 20,000 PSI
AH-199 AB ASSEMBLY ADAPTER HEAD,3-3/8-in 31 PIN TO 2-1/2-in 31 PIN,
AH-200 AA ADAPTER HEAD, 2-1/2-in TO 3-3/8-in,31 TO 31 PIN,
ECCENTRIC,RATED 400 degF 20,000 PSI
AH-201 AA ADAPTER HEAD, 2-1/2-in FLEX KNUCKLE JOINT, 31 TO 31
PIN,RATED 400 degF 20,000 PSI
AH-202 AA ADAPTER HEAD, 1-11/16-in DIA. 22 TO 22 SOCKET
AH-203 AA ADAPTER HEAD, 1-11/16-in DIA. 22 TO 22 PIN
AH-204 AA ADAPTER, APSK-B 31 TO 31 PIN REVERSING HEAD
AH-205 AA ADAPTER HEAD, 3-5/8-in DIA53 TO 53, FOR NPLC/UH TO APS/UH
AH-206 AA ADAPTER HEAD, FLEXIBLE, 3 3/8-in, 31 TO 31 PIN
AH-207 AA 1-11/16-in 22 PINS M TEL B TO 22 PINS F DTB
AH-208 AA 1-11/16-in 22 PINS M TEL B TO 15 PINS F
AH-209 AA 1-11/16-in 22 PINS M DTB TO 15 PINS F
AH-210 AB ADAPTER HEAD, FLEX JOINT, 1-11/16-in, 22 PIN, 90 DEG KEY, FOR
H2S, 15 KPSI. & 350 degF
AH-211 AB ADAPTER HEAD, 1-11/16-in, 15-22 PIN, RATED FOR H2S, 15 KPSI.
& 350 degF
Private

& 350 degF
& 350 degF
AH-214 AB ADAPTER HEAD, 1-11/16-in, 1-22 PIN, FOR CTS TELEM., RATED
FOR H2S, 15 KPSI & 350F.
AH-215 AB ADAPTER HEAD, 3-3/8-in DIA. 31 PIN TO 31 PIN
AH-216 AA ASSEMBLY ADAPTER HEAD,2-1/2-in 31 PIN TO 2-3/4-in 29 PIN,
AH-218 AA ADAPTER HEAD, POWER SUB 2-1/2-in 31 PIN TO CNT-D 2-3/4-in
29 PIN
AH-219 AA ADAPTER HEAD,2-3/4-in 29 PIN TO 2-1/2-in 31 PIN", RATED 150
degC 14,000 PSI

AH-220 AA ADAPTER HEAD DGAHT-A TO 3 1/2-in PH6 #15.8 PIN
AH-221 AA ADAPTER HEAD DGAHT-A TO PCTV-F/PCTH-F
AH-222 AA ADAPTER HEAD, 2-1/2-in M TO 1-11/16-in M TOOLS
AH-223 AA ADAPTER HEAD, 2-1/2-in M TO 1-11/16-in F TOOLS
AH-224 AA ADAPTER HEAD, 3-3/8" FLEX KNUCKLE JOINT, 31 TO 31 PIN,
AH-225 AA ADAPTER HEAD, FLEX-JOINT, 2-1/2-in (31)M TO (31)FM,
DEFLECTION = 2.243
AH-228 AA ADAPTER HEAD, 2 1/2-in 31 PIN TO 3 3/8-in 31 PIN, RATED 400
degF 20 KSI FOR PSTT-A
AH-230 AA PRESSURE BULKHEAD SUB
AH-231 AA 2 1/2-in TO 3-in ADAPTER HEAD, CENTERED
AH-232 AA 3-in TO 2-1/2-in ADAPTER HEAD, CENTERED
AH-233 AA 3-in" TO 3-3/8-in ADAPTER HEAD, ECCENTERED
AH-234 AA 3-3/8-in TO 3-in ADAPTER HEAD, ECCENTERED
AH-237 AB SLIMHOT DEADHEAD SUB
AH-238 AA 3.0 SLIM KNUCKLE JOINT
AH-245 AB 3-in TO 3-3/8-in ADAPTER HEAD ASSY., CENTERED
AH-246 AB 3-3/8-in TO 3-in ADAPTER HEAD ASSY., CENTERED
AH-250 AA ADAPTER, 3-3/8-in DIA, CMR SONDE LOWER HEAD, 25K PSI, 31
PIN TO 31 PIN
AH-269 AA MODIFIED AH-169 MASS INSULATING ASSEMBLY FOR HRLT
AH-276 AA ADAPTER HEAD, 1 11/16-in TO 2 1/2-in, 22 SOCKET TO 31 PIN
AH-277 AA ADAPTER HEAD, 2 1/2-in TO 1 11/16-in, 31 SOCKET TO 22 PIN
AH-283 AB ADAPTER HEAD 3-3/8-in, 31 PIN TO 1
AH-33 AA ADAPTER - 3-5/8-in - 10 COND. FOR SCT-A
AH-36 AA ADAPTER - 3-7/8-in - MASS ISOLATION 10 COND.
Private

AH-38 AA ADAPTER - 1-3/8-in MONO TO 1-11/16-in MONO (CONVERTS
MH-22 TO MH-2
AH-39 AA ADAPTER - 1-11/16-in MONO TO 2-5/8-in MONO
AH-40 AA ADAPTER, 1-11/16-in MONO TO 2-5/8-in MONO PRESSURE
BULKHEAD
AH-46 AA ADAPTER HEAD 3-3/8-in DIA. TO 2-5/8-in DIA. MONOCABLE
AH-51 AA 1-11/16-in ADAPTER HEAD (FLEXIBLE JOINT)
AH-52 AA ADAPTER (CONVERTS MH-22 TO LEH-E)
AH-54 AA ADAPTER HEAD, 15 TO 1 (15 PIN PATTERN TO 1-3/8-in
MONOCABLE)
AH-59 AA ADAPTER HEAD, 1-11/16-in TO 1-3/8-in MONOCABLE
AH-60 AA ADAPTER HEAD, 1-11/16-in, H2S RATED. (SWS TRANS REL

3/23/79).
AH-61 AA 2-5/8-in TO 3-3/8-in, 10-10 ADAPTER HEAD
AH-62 AA MASS INSULATING ASSEMBLY (MASS ISOLATION SUB, 31 TO
25 CONDU
AH-63 AA 31 TO 10 ADAPTER, 3-3/8-in
AH-64 AA 10 TO 31 ADAPTER, 3-3/8-in
AH-65 AA ADAPTER - 1 TO 10 (PEH-C TO CAL-N)
AH-66 AA 3-3/8-in DIA. MONO TO 31 ADAPTER. RATED 350 degF, 20,000 PSI.
AH-67 AA 1-11/16-in FLEXIBLE ADAPTER HEAD-INLINE KEY-15PIN.
AH-68 AA 1-11/16-in FLEXIBLE ADAPTER HEAD-90DEG KEY.-15PIN
AH-69 AA MASS ISOLATION SUB. 31 TO 31 CONDUCTOR.
AH-75 AA ADAPTER HEAD, FLEXIBLE. 2-3/4-in DIA. 29 PIN TO 10 PIN. RATED
AH-76 AA ADAPTER HEAD, 2-3/4-in DIA. 10 PIN TO 29 PIN. RATED 400 degF
AH-77 AA ADAPTER HEAD, FLEXIBLE, 2-3/4-in DIA. 29 PIN TO 29 PIN RATED
AH-79 AA ADAPTER HEAD 10 TO 1 (PEH-A TO CAL-Q FOR DEVIATED HOLE
TDT)
AH-80 AA ADAPTER HEAD, FLEXIBLE, 3-3/8-in DIA. 31 PIN. RATED 350 degF
AH-81 AA ADAPTER HEAD, 3-3/8-in DIA. 10 PIN TO 31 PIN. FOR PGT-J.
RATED
AH-82 AA ADAPTER HEAD, 2-3/4-in DIA. 29 PIN TO MONOCABLE. ADAPTS
LEH-R
AH-83 AB ADAPTER HEAD, 3-3/8-in DIA. 31 PIN TO MONOCABLE. ADAPTS
LEH-Q
AH-84 AA ADAPTER HEAD, 2-3/4-in DIA. 29 PIN TO 10 PIN. FOR USE WITH
LEH
AH-85 AA ADAPTER HEAD, 3-5/8-in DIA, 29 PIN 31 PIN, MASS ISOLATION.
RAT
AH-86 AA 3-3/8-in DIA ROLLERED PIVOT JOINT FOR DEVIATED HOLE
MONOCABLE
Private

AH-87 AA SINGLE CONDUCTOR. DEVIATED HOLE MONOCABLE TOOL FOR
OFFSET IN
AH-88 AA ADAPTER HEAD, FLEXIBLE W/ROLLERS SINGLE CONDUCTOR,
FOR USE WI
AH-89 AA 36-in SPACER FOR PLT-A TRACER USE. 15 TO 15 PIN. RATED 200
AH-90 AA ROLLERED FLEX-JOINT FOR 1-3/8-in PERFORATING HARDWARE.
DEVIAT
AH-91 AA ADAPTER HEAD, 3-3/8-in DIA. 31 PIN TO 10 PIN. FOR USE IN NGT-C
AH-92 AA ADAPTER HEAD, 1-11/16-in, 15 PIN TO 22 PIN, AIR TO AIR.
AH-93 AA ADAPTER HEAD, 3-3/8-in, 31 PIN TO 31 PIN. RATED 175 degC,
20000

AH-97 AA ADAPTER HEAD, 1-11/16-in, FLEXIBLE INLINE KEY, 22 PIN.
AH-99 AA 36-in SPACER FOR PLT-A TRACER USE, 22 TO 22 PIN, RATED 2000
AHC-H AA SEE C
AHD-D AA ADAPTER HEAD 37 PINS TO 22 PINS
AHK-CA AA ADJUSTABLE HANGER-STD
AHK-CB AA ADJUSTABLE HANDGER DNV
AHM-H AA AHM-H
AHS-H AA APM H
6.2 Casing collar locators

Casing Collar Locators (CCL) provide one component of depth control. Collar
signals back up the IDW (Integrated Depth Wheel) measurement and the gamma
ray depth correlation curves. These tools contain a coil and magnet to detect a
change in magnetic flux when the CCL (or CAL) passes a collar makeup joint. By
knowing the casing length, the Engineer can count the number of collar joints to
determine the approximate location of the tool; that is, within one length of casing.

Before operating the tool, read the safety precaution in the Operating Instruction
section.
Private

Refer to Figure 6-2 for the following RITE maintenance sections.
Private
6
7
8
9 CAL-B Parts List

10 Item Description Part No.
11 1 Thread Protector H047988
4 2 Thread Protector H049186
6 3 Magnetic Screen P039590
12
4 O-ring, Size 333, Viton 95D P012497
14 5 Housing H046131
13 6 Spring Contact H334866
15
16 7 Upper Head H047996
17 8 Upper Head, 3.1 Pin P373850
18
O-ring, Size 336, Viton 95D P011206
5
10 Upper connector Rod H047964
11 Spirol Pin P016210
3
12 Shock absorber H046124
13 Ground Ring H046126
19
14 Terminal Plate H046159
15 Screw 6-32 x 1/34 in. P011266
16 Screw P016173
17 Casing Anomaly Kit H121927
18 Diode H210229
20
19 Cartridge Assembly H046160
4
20 Lower Head H047987
21 Lower Connector Rod H239557
11 22 Threaded Ring H036354
21 Note: CAL-B boosters are available to extend the
range of pipe sizes it can operate. Booster
9 P286938 is available from EPS. Also,
9-5/8-in. and 13 3/8-in. boosters are
22 available from ISS-SEA.
23
Figure 6-2: CAL-B assembly
Private
6.2.1.1 FIT 1 mechanical

1. Take off the thread protectors (1, 2) and magnetic screen (3).
2. Clean the tool.
3. Check the O-rings (4) and replace if worn.
4. Check that the spring contact (6) and lower connector rod (21) are tightened
in place.
6.2.1.2 FIT 2 electrical

1. Check the continuity between the spring contact (6) and housing (5). The
multimeter should read between 10 kOhm and 14 kohm.
2. Check the continuity between the spring contact (6) and lower connector rod
(21). The multimeter (on range x10k) should deflect on each polarity.
6.2.1.3 FIT 3 operational

1. Connect the multimeter (on 100 mA scale) between the spring contact (6)
and housing (5).
2. Pass a steel rod or screwdriver slowly along the housing (5). Momentary
deflections of about 20 mA should be observed.
3. Oil the housing (5) and slightly grease the O-rings (4).
4. Install the thread protectors (1, 2) and the magnetic screen (3).
Quality Note
Do not store casing collar locators near electronic cartridges, especially
Dipmeters.
Note
Graphics, and maintenance tables presented for the collar locator above (Figure
6-2 can be found for some common collar locators in the group listing Table
6-4. Please refer to InTouch Support: Wireline Perforating Systems, content
ID# 3250896 or Wireline Perforation Field Operations Manual V1, content ID#
3013565.
Private
6.2.2 Group listing table

Table 6-4: Collar Locator Group Listing
Name Rev. Description State

2-3/4-in DIA. MANDREL COLLAR LOCATOR WITH
CAL-AA AA Released
ELECTRONICS COMPAT-IB
CAL-B AA CASING ANOMALY LOCATOR 3-3/8-in Released
CAL-C AA CASING ANOMALY LOCATOR 1-11/16-in Released
CAL-D AA 10 TO 10 CASING ANOMALY LOCATOR Released
2 3/4-in. MANDREL TYPE CASING COLLAR LOCATOR.
CAL-EA AA Released
29 PIN UPPER A
2 3/4-in OUTRIGGER TYPE CASING COLLAR
CAL-FA AA Released
LOCATOR. 29 PIN UPPER
3-1/8-in CASING ANOMALY LOCATOR FOR LPGS-B,
CAL-GA AA Released
10KSI & 350 deg F
CAL-H AA CALAB Released
CASING ANOMALY LOCATOR 3-3/8-in 500 degF.
CAL-HT AA Created
20,000 PSI
10 TO 10 CASING ANOMALY LOCATOR TO REPLACE
CAL-J AA Released
CCL-Q IN GNT EQUI
10 TO 11 CASING ANOMALY LOCATOR FOR GNT
CAL-JB AA Released
EQUIPMENT USING GNC-
3-3/8-in CASING ANOMALY LOCATOR (260 degC) 10
CAL-M AA Released
CONDUCTOR
2-5/8-in OD CASING ANOMALY LOCATOR FOR
CAL-N AA Released
HI-TEMP 500 degF
CAL-O AA CASING ANOMALY LOCATOR 5-1/2-in Prototype
CAL-O AB CASING ANOMALY LOCATOR 4-1/2-in Prototype
1-11/16-in CASING ANOMALY LOCATOR MONO TO 15
CAL-Q AA Released
PIN. 14,000 PSI 35
CAL-QB AA Released
PIN. 17,000 PSI 35
CAL-QC AA Released
PIN. 20,000 PSI 35
3-3/8-inLOGGING COLLAR LOCATOR. 31 PIN UPPER
CAL-R AA Released
AND LOWER HEAD
CAL-S AA Released
PIN. 20,000 PSI 35
1-11/16-in CASING ANOMALY LOCATOR.1-22 PIN, 25
CAL-T AA Released
K.S.I. 4/78
CAL-U AA Released
PIN 17000 PSI 350
Private
Name Rev. Description State

CAL-UB AB Released
PIN, 17,000 PSI 35
2-in CASING ANOMALY LOCATOR MONO-22 PIN, 25K
CAL-UC AB Released
PSI 400 degF
2-3/4-in LOGGING COLLAR LOCATOR 29 PIN UPPER
CAL-V AA Released
AND LOWER HEADS
2-3/4-in CASING COLLAR LOCATOR 29 TO 29 PIN
CAL-W AA Released
HEAD CENTRALIZE
CAL-X AA CASING ANOMALY LOCATOR 7-in Prototype
CAL-X AB CASING ANOMALY LOCATOR 7-in Prototype
3-3/8-in COLLAR LOCATOR. 31 PIN HEADS. FOR USE
CAL-YA AA Released
WITH MONO OR M
2-3/4-in DIA. OUTRIGGER COLLAR LOCATOR WITH

CAL-Z AA Released
ELECTRONICS COMPATIBLE
CCL-AF AA 3-3/8-in CASING COLLAR LOCATOR FLUSH JOINT Released
1-11/16-in CASING COLLAR LOCATOR. MONOCABLE
CCL-AG AA Released
RATED 500 degF.
1-11/16-in CASING COLLAR LOCATOR, FLUSH JOINT.
CCL-AJ AA Released
MONOCABLE UP
CCL-AK AA 1-3/8-in CASING COLLAR LOCATOR, 500 degF Released
1-3/8-in CASING COLLAR LOCATOR, (REMCO
CCL-AL AA Released
#0118-TRACER EJECTOR TOO
1-3/8-in CASING COLLAR LOCATOR FOR CIT-A
CCL-AM AA Released
(MODIFIED CCL-AA)
CCL-AN AA Released
(LOWER) (MODIFIED CCL-
CCL-AP AA Released
(UPPER) (MODIFIED CCL-
1-11/16-in CASING COLLAR LOCATOR. RATED 600
CCL-AR AA Released
degF
1-11/16-in CASING COLLAR LOCATOR. MONOCABLE
CCL-AT AA Created
RATED 500 degF.
CCL-H AA CIRCU Released
CCL-L AA 1-11/16-in DIA. CASING COLLAR LOCATOR Released
1-11/16-in DIA CASING COLLAR LOCATOR. FOR USE
CCL-LB AB Released
WITH POT-CA
CCL-LX AA 2-5/8-in DIA. CASING COLLAR LOCATOR Released
GENERAL ASSEMBLY OF 1-3/8-in DIA CASING
CCL-N AA Released
COLLAR LOCATOR
1-3/8-in CASING COLLAR LOCATOR WITH 1-11/16-in
CCL-NB AA Released
HOUSING FOR USE
CCL-X AA CASING COLLAR LOCATOR (FLOW METER) Created
Private
6.3 Flexible joint adapters

Flexible Joint Adapters are adapter heads, which permit flexure or bending
motion between upper and lower heads. These adapters reduce the rigid length
of a toolstring to allow passage through portions of a well where trajectory is
not straight or where dogleg severity is too great. Use of multiple flex joints
end to end can also help to uncouple centralized portions of a toolstring from
eccentralized portions.
Note
Flexible joint adapters are a specialized type of Adapter Head (AH). As such,
graphics, maintenance tables and wiring diagrams provided in the example

below can be found for any flexible joint adapter in the group listing Table 6-3.
Please refer to Adapters Maintenance Manual, content ID# 3016829, in InTouch.

Refer to Figure 6-3 for the following RITE maintenance sections.
Private
SRPC Doc-TBT\SRPC Doc-TBT\275253781\2.4\Release Date:16-Nov-2006\EDMS UID: 275253781\Produced: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50 6-19 GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Logging accessories 6-19
Figure 6-3: AH-107 assembly drawing
Private
Table 6-5: AH-107 Bill of Material
Level Part # Rev Description Qty UM

1 B012678 AD O-RING,SZ 2-114 .612 ID X.103 W VITON 95D 4 EA
1 B012828 AC O-RING,SZ 2-230 2.484 ID X.139 W VITON 5 EA
95D
1 B013504 AD O-RING,SZ 2-121 1.049 ID X.103 W VITON 4 EA
95D
1 B015067 AA PIN, SPIROL 1/8 X 7/8 SST 1 EA
1 B015293 AA PIN, SPIROL 1/8 X 5/16 SST 1 EA
1 B018205 AA PIN, SPIROL 1/8 X 2 SST 1 EA
1 P026240 AG SNAP RING 1 EA
1 P115571 AF HEAD SPRING 1 EA

1 P142094 AB 31 PIN HEAD ADAPTER 1 EA
1 P142291 AH 31 SOCKET HEAD 1 EA
1 P142293 AD ALIGNING PIN 1 EA
1 P142345 AJ THREADED RING 1 EA
1 P142346 AG SPLIT RING 1 EA
1 P142347 AB SPLIT RING SPACER 1 EA
1 P142366 AD THREAD PROTECTOR 1 EA
1 P142581 AH TONGUE HEAD ASSEMBLY 31 PIN 1 EA
1 P251929 AD THREAD PROTECTOR 1 EA
1 P279963 AC TUBE, FLEXURE 1 EA
1 P279964 AB WASHER 1 EA
1 P285483 AC SPLIT THREADED RING 1 EA
1 P285484 AA TUBE SUPPORT 2 EA
1 P285485 AE KNUCKLE 1 EA
1 P285486 AD HOUSING 1 EA
1 E074801 AB TAPE GLASS-SILIC-RUBBER .3MMTK 19MM 0.25 EA
WIDE 15M ROLL
2 P142292 AS 31 SOCKET HEAD 1 EA

cross-threading.
Private
4. Inspect the electrical contacts to determine if any are bent or loose.

Refer to the appropriate Wiring Table or to the wiring diagram for the adapter.
The table can be used as a test record for the FIT.

2. Check insulation resistance from line to mass in accordance with the wiring
information.
Table 6-6: AH-107 Electrical Checks
Continuity Checks
UH1 LH1 <2Ω Lines 1-31 through wired
UH2 LH2 <2Ω
UH3 LH3 <2Ω
UH4 LH4 <2Ω
UH5 LH5 <2Ω
UH6 LH6 <2Ω
UH7 LH7 <2Ω
UH8 LH8 <2Ω
UH9 LH9 <2Ω
UH10 LH10 <2Ω
UH11 LH11 <2Ω
UH12 LH12 <2Ω
UH13 LH13 <2Ω
UH14 LH14 <2Ω
UH15 LH15 <2Ω
UH16 LH16 <2Ω
UH17 LH17 <2Ω
UH18 LH18 <2Ω
UH19 LH19 <2Ω
UH20 LH20 <2Ω
UH21 LH21 <2Ω
Private
Continuity Checks
UH22 LH22 <2Ω
UH23 LH23 <2Ω
UH24 LH24 <2Ω
UH25 LH25 <2Ω
UH26 LH26 <2Ω
UH27 LH27 <2Ω
UH28 LH28 <2Ω
UH29 LH29 <2Ω
UH30 LH30 <2Ω
UH31 LH31 <2Ω

All lines mass >100MΩ
6.3.1.3 FIT 3 operational

1. Ensure the locking ring is deformed (if equipped).
2. Oil the housing and lightly lubricate the O-rings using Lubriplate (B013366) or
Krytox (B039179) for HTHP service.
3. Lubricate all threads with Lubriplate or Krytox.
4. Install the thread protectors on both ends of the adapter.
6.3.1.4 TRIM-1 mechanical

6.3.1.5 TRIM-2 electrical

6.3.1.6 Q-Check
Private
1. disassembly - Note: Do not intermix parts when disassembling flexible joints.

2. inspection of parts - Note: Inspect Belleville washers for compression set.
5. assembly and lubrication - Caution: Do NOT overfill flexible joints with grease.
6. FIT.
6.4 Swivel adapter heads

Adapters with file codes of the form "SAH-X" are swivel adapter heads. These
adapters permit through wiring of electrical connections (via an internal collector

assembly) while allowing rotation between upper and lower heads. This relieves
torque buildup in the cable and prevents "birdcaging" of the armor. It also allows
tools with pads to be oriented correctly.
SAH-E, F, G, JB, L and M have their own maintenance manuals. For detailed
maintenance procedures on these swivel adapters please refer to InTouch
Support: Tool Adapters Reference Pages.
Note
To avoid compatibility problems between materials, be careful to use only the
greases and fluids that are specified for each swivel adapter head.
Note
Graphics, bills of material and wiring diagrams presented for the example swivel
adapter head below can be found for any swivel adapter head in the group listing
Table 6-8. Please refer to the Adapters Repair and Maintenance Manual , content
ID# 3016829, or the Tool Adapters Reference Pages, content ID# 3258462.
Due to the complex internal mechanics and electronics of SAH adapters, the
bill of materials is exceedingly long. For the purposes of this manual, a bill of
material will not be presented in the example.
Private
SRPC Doc-TBT\SRPC Doc-TBT\275253781\2.4\Release Date: 16-Nov-2006\EDMS UID: 275253781\Produced: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50 6-24 GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Logging accessories 6-24
Intentionally Blank
Private
P026240 B012016 P694332 P785802

P694177
P142347 B028409 P230515
P583429 B077070 P694194 P694334 B012828
P142346 B016090 B075827 B076207 P190396 P251929
B077010 B694332 B077070 B019151 P124224
P694190 P694775
P694797 B016812 P694197 P694330 P694337 P694333 P694188
B077071 B077096 B013074 P694202
P230030
P694762 B017484 P694338 P694180 P583427 P694339 B012579
P222343 B012828 P694339 P186339
E-027357 P186339 B012416

P694190 P694183 P176509
P142366 P694774 P694183 B077071 P694340 P694196 B012827
B017484 P694336 P694341 Sub-Ass’y
P694207 B077096 P694192 P694789 B012827
B013718 P694198 B013435 P789222
P694210 B015067 P142345 B012827 B019133 P694335 P694186 P694789 B019034 P694195
P694208 B012827 P694191 P694194 P693361
P142293 B013718 P694192 B016351 P694199
B012828 P694340
P694209 P694205 P694193 P694206 B019151 B019034
B016812
P694191
B012764 P199908
P074096
SECTION A-A
SAH-F SWIVEL ADAPTER HEAD

CTS/DTS 20 CONTACTS
DP693362 AL
Figure 6-4: SAH-F assembly drawing, DP693362
Private
Private
Note
See the Adapter Maintenance Manual, content ID# 3258462, for a complete
bill of materials.
Private
Figure 6-5: SAH-F circuit diagram
Private

cross-threading. Replace as necessary.
4. Inspect the electrical contacts to determine if any are bent or loose. Replace
as necessary.
5. Inject grease in each grease opening to keep the piston from getting stuck
by dried mud.
6. Rotate the swivel.
Rotation should be smooth and easy. If rotation is rough, gritty, sounds
like metal-to-metal contact, or requires high torque to rotate, a rebuild is
necessary.
7. Check the oil level.
8. In the SAH-B and SAH-C the diaphragm should be firm under finger pressure.
9. In the SAH-E at least four spring coils should be visible in the window.
10. In the SAH-G the top of the piston should be flush with bottom of slot window.

Refer to the appropriate wiring table or to the wiring diagram for the adapter. The
table can be used as a test record for the FIT. Rotate the swivel adapter head by
hand while performing the electrical tests.

2. Check insulation resistance from line to mass in accordance with the wiring
information.
Private
Table 6-7: SAH-F Electrical Checks
Continuity Checks
UH1 LH1 <2Ω 19 through wired contacts
UH2 LH2 <2Ω
UH3 LH3 <2Ω
UH4 LH4 <2Ω For other maintenance information,
refer to the SAH-F Maintenance
Manual, M073317, content ID#
3029123
UH5 LH5 <2Ω
UH6 LH6 <2Ω
UH7 LH7 <2Ω All measurements while rotating the

head
UH8 LH8 <2Ω
UH9 LH9 <2Ω
UH10 LH10 <2Ω
LH12 LH12 <2Ω
UH16 LH16 <2Ω mass
UH23 LH23 <2Ω
UH25 LH25 <2Ω
UH27 LH27 <2Ω
UH28 LH28 <2Ω
UH29 LH29 <2Ω
UH30 LH30 <2Ω
UH31 LH31 <2Ω
All lines* mass >500MΩ *Except UH16 and LH16
6.4.1.3 TRIM
Perform a rebuild if any of the following conditions apply:
• bearing damage (does not rotate easily)

• leaking oil (piston bottomed out)
• loss of continuity
• water contamination of oil
Private
• low resistance from conductor to mass (First try removing and cleaning end
contacts and insulators!)
• swivel has seen extreme well conditions, near rated temperature and
pressure
• swivel has seen high H2S concentrations
• swivel has not been rebuilt in the last year.
6.4.1.4 TRIM-1 mechanical

6.4.1.5 TRIM-2 electrical

6.4.1.6 Q-Check
1. disassembly
2. inspection of parts
5. assembly and lubrication
6. oil-fill
7. FIT.
6.4.2 SAH group listing

Table 6-8: SAH Group Listing
Name Rev Description State

SAH-B AA SWIVEL ADAPTER HEAD 1-3/8-in MONO. Released
SAH-C AA SWIVEL ADAPTER HEAD 3-3/8-in MONO. Released
Private

SAH-D AA SWIVEL ADAPTER HEAD 3-3/8 10 COND. Released
W/PISTON COMPENSATOR (SAH
SAH-E AA SWIVEL ADAPTER HEAD, 3-3/8-in. 31 PIN Released
HEADS (CONFORMS TO STD-
SAH-F AA REINFORCED SWIVEL HEAD Released
SAH-G AA SWIVEL ADAPTER HEAD, 1-11/16-in MONO Released
CABLE
SAH-H AA SWIVEL ADAPTER HEAD, 2-1/2-in, 31 PIN TO 31 Prototype
PIN, 17 THRU CONDUCTOR,400 DEG F 20 KPSI
SAH-J AA HTHP SWIVEL ADAPTER HEAD, 3-3/8-in, 31 Prototype
THRU CONTACTS, 500 degF 25 KPSI
SAH-JB AA SWIVEL ADAPTER HEAD 3.375-i Prototype
SAH-K AA ADAPTER, SWIVEL 3 3/8-in MONO Prototype

SAH-L AB SWIVEL, ADAPTER HEAD, 3-3/8-in MONO CABLE Released
SAH-M AA SWIVEL ADAPTER HEAD, 3-in, 31 THRU Prototype
CONTACTS, 500 degF, 30 KPSI
SAH-N AA 1 11/16-in SWIVEL ADAPTER HEAD, 8 THRU Prototype
CONTACTS, 22 PINS
SAH-O AA DO NOT USE Created
SAH-P AA 3 3/8-in SWIVEL ADAPTER HEAD, 31 THRU Created
CONTACTS, HTHP, HIGH POWER
6.5 EQF weights

EQF weights provide additional weight to light weight perforating gun strings.
The additional weight helps the gun string overcome downhole hydrostatic
forces allowing them to go downhole. They also help the guns from being
"blown" uphole when the guns are fired. EQF weights also provide an electrical
connection from the top of the weight to the bottom so they can be connected
anywhere in the gun string.
Hint
High density weights consist of two concentric tubes with an annular space. The
annular space is filled with powdered tungsten. If a high density weight is flooded,
fluid passes through holes in the inner tube and is absorbed by the powdered
Private
tungsten. When the weight is exposed to high temperature, the water boils,
distributing water vapor into all the weights. Since water vapor is non-conductive,
a failure will probably not occur on the descent that flooded the tool.
However, on the trip out of the well the water vapor condenses causing the
weight to leak electrically to mass. Cleaning the conductor parts will fix the
electrical leak, but liquid will remain in the tungsten powder causing problems in
future descents.
Prevent future problems by removing the rods and heating all affected weights
to 250 degF [121 degC] overnight. Then wire brush the connector rod cavity
to remove all rust.
Private
Figure 6-6: High density EQF weights (ends only drawing)
Private
Figure 6-7: EQF weights - bill of material
Private
Figure 6-8: EQF steel weights (ends only drawing)
Private
Figure 6-9: EQF steel weights - bill of material
6.5.1.1 FIT-1 mechanical

See Figure 6-6 and Figure 6-8.
Private
1. Remove the male and female thread protectors (1 and 11).

2. Clean the tool.
3. Inspect the O-rings (2) and replace them if worn.
4. Inspect cleanliness of the O-ring seat on the upper head.
5. Verify the spring (3) or pin contact is not bent and is tight.
6. Verify the contact rod terminal (10) is tight and in place.
6.5.1.2 FIT-2 electrical

1. Measure the insulation between the spring (or pin contact) and body using a
multimeter. The insulation should measure 100 megohms or greater.

2. Set a VOM to R x 1 and measure the continuity between the spring contact
and contact rod terminal. The continuity should measure 1 ohm or less.
6.5.1.3 EQF weight group listing

Table 6-9: EQF Weight Group Listing

EQF-29 AA 10.10 INSULATED HEAVY ADAPTER Released
EQF-33 AA 3-3/8-in MONOCABLE WEIGHT Released
EQF-34 AA 2-in DIA. TUNGSTEN WEIGHT (35 KILOGRAMS) FOR Created
USE WITH 1-11/
EQF-38 AA 1-11/16-in DIA. SOLID WEIGHT Released
EQF-39 AA 1-11/16-in MONOCABLE 2IN DIA. SOLID WEIGHT Released
EQF-41 AA 1-3/8-in DIA WEIGHT WITH NYLOCK(REPLACES EQF-28) Released
EQF-42 AA 1-11/16-in WEIGHT FOR POT-A Released
EQF-43 AA 1 11/16-in MONOCABLE HIGH DENSITY SOLID WEIGHT Released
EQF-46 AA 2-1/8-in O.D. HIGH DENSITY WEIGHT-MONOCABLE; Released
(TUNGSTEN/LEAD)
EQF-47 AA 1-3/8-in MONOCABLE HIGH DENSITYWEIGHT. H2S Released
RESISTANT, 6 FT
EQF-48 AA 3-5/8-in O.D. WEIGHT; 31 CONDUCTOR 250 LBS. Released
EQF-49 AA 1-3/8-in TUNGSTEN WEIGHT. MONOCABLE, 4-1/2-ft., 50 Released
LBS. RATED
EQF-50 AA 1-1/8-in TUNGSTEN WEIGHT. USED BETWEEN TWO Released
AH-90 FLEX-JOINTS
EQF-51 AA 1-3/8-in WEIGHT WITH 1-11/16-in OD BODY FOR USE Released
WITH SIT-BO. (
EQF-52 AA 1-3/8-in O.D. HEL, H2S, HI-DENSITY WEIGHT. 12/80 Released
Private

EQF-53 AB 1-11/16-in O.D. HEL, H2S, HI-DENSITY WEIGHT Released
EQF-54 AB EQF-54, 2-1/8" O.D. HEL, H2S HI-DENSITY WEIGHT Released
EQF-56 AA EQF-56, 3-5/8-in BOWSPRING WEIGHT Released
6.6 Centralizers and standoffs

Some tools or their combinations require the use of centralizers and/or standoffs
in order to be run into the well. Check the proper installation procedures and
their correct positioning. Make sure the attaching mechanism to the tool is tight
enough to avoid losing them during logging.
Whatever the configuration, as a general rule, NEVER install them on top of tool
sensors or on top of epoxy sections of the sondes. Also take care not to cover
with a stand-off any oil relief valve. Ask if in doubt.
Centralizers are spring loaded. Be careful when opening or closing them. Try
not to store them in the collapsed position for long periods of time. The most
commonly centralizer used is the CME-Z or the CME-ZB (non-magnetic). You
can use rope to help restrain spring action during dismounting for servicing.
Standoffs provide separation between the tool and the borehole wall. They
generally have replaceable rubber or Teflon fins. Check the condition of the fins.
Also check the condition of the "Jubilee" clips (or hose clamps).
Teflon fins are used mainly for deviated holes. Rubber fins can be of two types
(Figure 6-10):
• 1.5-in flexible or truss fin (H-207844), mainly used on induction tools

• 5-in fin (H-135982), that can be cut according to the desired size.
Most of the standoffs have four fins only. When installing two consecutive
standoffs take care to install them on such way that the fins are not aligned
longitudinally on the same position between both standoffs, in order to create
an even separation along the tool. See Figure 6-10.
1. Check fin size is correct for tool type, hole size combination.
2. Check with the engineer.
Private
Figure 6-10: Common tool standoffs
Private
Figure 6-11: Tool standoff position
Gemcos are a slip on, solid metal centralizer used in cased hole applications
for sonic logs where centralization is the first priority or where CME or CMIR
are not available for the particular tool being run. The quick reference table
below provides a comprehensive list of available Gemcos (SKK) that have
a Schlumberger part number. This information is found at InTouch Support,
Content ID# 3367223.
Note
To prevent becoming stuck in the hole, the set screws must go on the up hole
side of the Gemco.
Private
Figure 6-12: Gemco reference table
Private
6.6.1 Example - CME-ZC (J966300)

Figure 6-13: CME-ZC assembly drawing J966300
Private
The CME-Z is a slip-on centralizer that fits over 3–5/8 in and 3-3/8 in tools. It can
be used in casing as well as open holes. To reduce the noise affecting some
sensors the titanium springs have vulcanised rubber pads. It is possible to use it
as a standoff device by setting the maximum diameter to the expected casing I.D.
The locking rings must always be positioned inside the six-spring cage to allow
the full collapsing of the centralizer.

Clean the centralizer and that spirol pins and moving parts are in good condition,
and that set screws are not stripped. Grease throroughly and replace set screws
in place.
ALWAYS CHECK THAT THE CME-Z WILL COLLAPSE FULLY!
Note
Centralizers and standoffs are not supported in the New IPC Adapters Repair
and Maintenance Manual, and do not currently have a specific InTouch reference
page. Information for the example in this section was found by referencing
InTouch Support.com. Refer to the tool that the centralizer or stand off will be
installed on for descriptions and specifications.
Table 6-10: Centralizers Group Listing

CME-AC AA CENTRALIZER, 1-11/16-in DIA., INLINE, 15 TO 15, Released
1-11/16-in MIN
CME-AD AA CENTRALIZER, 1-11/16-in DIA., SLIP ON. 2.92-in MIN. Released
DIA. TO 12
CME-AE AA WHEEL STANDOFF, 3-3/8-in DIA. INLINE. 31 TO 31, Released
OPEN HOLE, THRE
CME-AF AA CENTRALIZER, 3-3/8-in DIA. INLINE. 31 TO 31. FOR Released
CASED HOLE. 3.
CME-AH AA CENTRALIZER, 1-11/16-in DIA., INLINE, 15 TO 15, 6 Released
BOW SPRINGS,1
CME-AJ AA CENTRALIZER, 1-11/16-in DIA., SLIP ON, 6 BOW Released
SPRINGS, 13 IN. MA
CME-AK AA ROLLERED CENTRALIZER FOR BAKER 7-in TO Released
9-5/8-in. ABLE TO FIT C
CME-AL AA ROLLERED CENTRALIZER FOR 3-3/8-in WEIGHT. Released
ADJUSTABLE TO FIT C
CME-AM AA CENTRALIZER FOR 3-38-in AND 3-5/8-in TOOLS. HOLE Released
SIZES TO 30-in DI
Private

CME-AN AA CENTRALIZER, 1-11/16-in DIA., INLINE, 22 TO 22, Released
1-11/16-in MIN
CME-AP AA ADJUSTABLE ROLLERED STANDOFF. ADJUSTS Released
FROM 7-in OD TO 16-in OD.
CME-AQ AA CENTRALIZER 1-11/16 DIA.,SLIP ON2.92 IN. MIN. DIA. Released
TO 12 IN.
CME-AR AA CENTRALIZER, 2-3/4", ADJUSTABLE SLIP-OVER BOW Released
SPRING, 4.13"
CME-AS AA CENTRALIZER, 2-3/4", ADJUSTABLE.SLIP-OVER WITH Released
RIGID ARMS,
CME-ASB AA CENTRALIZER, 2-3/4", ADJUSTABLE,SLIP OVER Released
W/RIGID ARMS, HEA
CME-ASC AA CENTRALIZER, 2-3/4", ADJUSTABLE,SLIP OVER Released

W/RIGID ARMS, HEA
CME-AT AA CENTRALIZER, 2-3/4", ADJUSTABLE.IN-LINE WITH Released
RIGID ARMS, 3.
CME-ATC AA CENTRALIZER, 2-3/4", ADJUSTABLE,IN LINE WITH Released
RIGID ARMS, HE
CME-AW AA CENTRALIZER, IN-LINE, WHEELED. 7/81 Released
CME-AXC AA 2-3/4" IN-LINE CENTRALIZER (29 PIN) Released
CME-BA AB CENTRALIZER, 1-11/16 IN. DIA INLINE, MONO., 1-11/16 Released
IN MIN T
CME-H AA CENTRALIZER - 3 5/8 EQUIP. (SLIPS OVER HOUSING Released
- FOR SLT) EP
CME-HB AA CENTRALIZER - 3-3/8 EQUIPMENT (CME-H WITH Released
CMK-C INSTALLED)
CME-J AA 3-3/8 IN DIA. 10 COND. IN LINE CENTRALIZER Released
CME-M AA CENTRALIZER - NON MAGNETIC DOUBLE SPRING, Released
SLIPS OVER 3 5/8 I
CME-MB AA CENTRALIZER, NON-MAGNETIC SINGLESPRING, Released
3-ARM. SLIPS OVER AL
CME-MC AA CENTRALIZER, NON MAGNETIC SINGLESPRING, 3 Released
ARM, SLIPS OVER 4-
CME-P AA 1-11/16 CENTRALIZER - IN LINE 15 TO 15 (FOR SLT-J). Released
8" MAX
CME-R AA 1 11/16 IN DIAMETER LOWER CENTRALIZER (NO Released
CONDUCTORS, 15 PIN
CME-V AA 1-11/16 CENTRALIZER IN LINE 15 TO 15 - 12 IN. MAX. Released
DIA.
CME-W AA 1-11/16 CENTRALIZER LOWER. NO CONDUCTORS - Released
15 PIN HEAD-12 IN
CME-Y AA CENTRALIZER, 3-3/8 (WITH SPACER)3-5/8 SLIP ON Released
WITH ROLLERS F
Private

CME-Z AA CENTRALIZER ADJUSTABLE 4.9" MIN.TO 16.0" MAX. Released
3-3/8 DIA, (
CME-ZB AA CENTRALIZER,NON-MAGNETIC ADJUSTABLE 4.9" Released
MIN TO 16.0" MAX3
CME-ZC AA CENTRALIZER FOR HP-DSI 3-5/8 Prototype
CMIR-AA AA CENTRALIZER,MECHANICAL INLINE ROLLER, 1 11/16 Released
STANDARD
CMIR-AD AA CENTRALIZER,MECHANICAL MONO INLINE ROLLER Released
1-11/16 SPECIALITY
CMIR-AE AA CENTRALIZER, MECHANICAL, IN-LINE, ROLLER, Created
1-11/16, ANTI-ROTATION
CMIR-AF AA CENTRALIZER, IN LINE 1-11/16, 22 PIN, 3 ARM Prototype
ROLLER/WEDGE TYPE FOR SONIC TOOL,420F, 22

Kpsi
CMIR-AF AB CENTRALIZER, IN LINE 1-11/16, 22 PIN, 3 ARM Prototype
ROLLER/WEDGE TYPE ,420F, 22 Kpsi
CMIR-AF AC CENTRALIZER, IN LINE 1-11/16, 22 PIN, 3 ARM Review
ROLLER/WEDGE TYPE ,420F, 22 Kpsi
CMIR-AG AA CENTRALIZER, 1-11/16, 22 PIN, 3 ARM ROLLER Prototype
WEDGE, 15 Kpsi,200C
CMIR-AG AB CENTRALIZER, 1-11/16, 22 PIN, 3 ARM ROLLER Prototype
WEDGE, 15 Kpsi,200C
CMIR-AG AC CENTRALIZER, 1-11/16, 22 PIN, 3 ARM ROLLER Review
WEDGE, 15 Kpsi,200C
CMIR-AH AA CENTRALIZER, MECHANICAL, IN-LINE, ROLLER, Created
1-11/16, FREESPIN
CMIR-BA AA CENTRALIZER, MECHANICAL INLINE ROLLER 2-1/2 Prototype
STANDARD
CMIR-BB AA CMIR-BB,CENTRALIZER MECHANICAL INLINE Released
ROLLER 2 1/2" SPECIALITY
CMIR-BC AA CENTRALIZER,MECHANICAL ROLLER INLINE 2-1/2 Released
SPECIALITY
CMIR-CA AA CENTRALIZER, MECHANICAL INLINE ROLLER 2-3/4 Released
STANDARD
CMIR-CB AA CENTRALIZER,MECHANICAL ROLLER INLINE 2-3/4 Released
SPECIALITY
CMIR-CC AA CENTRALIZER,MECHANICAL ROLLER INLINE 2-3/4 Released
SPECIALITY
CMIR-DA AA CENTRALIZER, MECHANICAL INLINE ROLLER 3" Released
STANDARD
Private
7-i GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Collectors 7-i
7 Collectors
7.1 Description _____________________________________________________ 7-2
7.1.1 General information __________________________________________ 7-2
7.1.2 General description __________________________________________ 7-3
7.1.3 COL -Z/ZA/ZT _______________________________________________ 7-6
7.1.3.1 COL-ZA specifications ____________________________________ 7-6
7.1.3.2 COL-Z maintenance ______________________________________ 7-7
7.1.4 COL-ZC _____________________________________________________ 7-8
7.1.4.1 COL-ZC specifications ____________________________________ 7-9
7.1.4.2 COL-ZC maintenance ____________________________________ 7-9
7.1.5 Assembly ___________________________________________________ 7-11
7.1.5.1 Mounting the collector ___________________________________ 7-11
7.1.5.2 Ring collector assembly _________________________________ 7-13

7.1.5.3 Wireline cable gland selection ____________________________ 7-13
7.1.5.4 Prepare the wireline cable end ___________________________ 7-14
7.1.6 Prepare the cable collector end ______________________________ 7-19
7.1.6.1 Collector cable measurements ___________________________ 7-19
7.1.6.2 Pin diagram of J-8 and J-9 _______________________________ 7-19
7.1.6.3 MAXIS Collector Safety Switch (CSS) ____________________ 7-20
7.1.6.4 WPT MCM Safety Switch ________________________________ 7-21
7.1.6.5 MSLC MCM Safety Switch _______________________________ 7-22
7.1.6.6 Basic Collector/Safety Switch wiring diagram _____________ 7-23
Private
SRPC Doc-TBT\SRPC Doc-TBT\275253781\2.4\Release Date:16-Nov-2006\EDMS UID: 275253781\Produced: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50 7-ii GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Collectors 7-ii
Intentionally Blank
Private
7-1 GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Collectors 7-1
7 Collectors Collectors
This section introduces the collector assembly and describes how the collector
assembly and safety switch wiring connect the logging cable to the logging unit
computer. It also describes how the collector is attached to the side of the cable
drum and how the logging cable is connected in the collector.
The collectors discussed in this manual are the COL-Z series (COL -Z/ZA/ZT/ZC).
These collectors are the standard for all hepta, coax and monocable applications.
Basic collector assembly and maintenance are also discussed.
Specific topics include:
• 8-ring collector assembly

• collector cable assembly
• cable collector end measurements (preparation)
• pin diagram of fire wall AK plug
• safety switch wiring diagrams: MAXIS, SWPT and MSLC.
Student objectives
the following:
• Describe in basic terms what components make up a collector and how the
collector operates.
• Describe how and where the 8-ring collector is connected to the cable drum.
• Describe how the logging cable is connected to the collector.
• Describe the collector safety switch wiring.
• Demonstrate how to maintain a collector, including electrical checks.
Reference documents
The following documents are used in the development of the collector training:
• Collector COL-Z/ZA/ZT Maintenance Manual(Content ID: 3016618)

• Collector COL-ZC Maintenance Manual
Private
• Basic Equipment reference pages - COL-Z/ZA/ZT (Content ID: 3264507).
7.1 Description
This section introduces the collector assembly and describes how the collector
assembly and safety switch wiring connect the logging cable to the logging unit
computer. It also describes how the collector is attached to the side of the
cable drum and how the logging cable is connected to the rings and clips in
the collector.
Figure 7-1: COL-ZA 8-ring collector COL-ZA

The COL-Z is a dual bearing 8-ring electrical winch collector that replaces
collectors COL-SB, COL-TB, COL-SC and COL-TC, as well as the older COL-L.
This section contains a brief description of the collector and its design features.
Figure 7-1 is a drawing of the COL-ZA series collector.
The four collectors discussed in this manual are: 1) COL-Z, 2) COL-ZA, 3)

COL-ZT and COL-ZC. When reference is made to COL-ZA in this manual, the
reference also applies to COL-ZT.
COL-Z
Private
The COL-Z (T5013929) is the unwired collector, meaning that it has no collector
cable assembly.
COL-ZA
The COL-ZA (H709710) is described as a wired collector because it is a COL-Z
with a factory installed Det Norse Veritas (DnV) certified collector cable and a
Cannon connector in a molded boot. This is in wide use in the field.
COL-ZT
The COL-ZT (H308244) is a COL-Z with a factory installed DnV approved
collector cable and a Trolex connector.
COL-ZC
The COL-ZC (100051262) is a high voltage, high current dual bearing 8-ring
electrical winch collector that replaces the collector COL-Z in areas that require
European governing regulations: IEC 79–1, NEC 500 and CE compliance. The
collector is built to ATEX EU Directives, category 2, zones 1 and 2 and gas
subdivision.
7.1.2 General description

The flameproof enclosure consists of a main body and a removable cover with
an O-ring seal - both made of cast aluminum alloy. The main body is mounted
on a winch drum pillow block with four 5/16 in x 1-1/4 in mounting screws. Two
transmission screws or pins, on the rotor of the collector, engage mating holes
on the end of the winch drum shaft. Rotation of the shaft then causes rotation
of the collector rotor. The rotating assembly in the COL-ZA is supported by two
roller bearings designed so that the enclosure is classified as flameproof. See
Figure 7-2. The interior environment of the collector is air at ambient pressure.
For more detailed information on collector maintenance and installation please
refer to InTouch Support: COL-Z/ZA/ZT Collectors Maintenance Manual.
Private
SRPC Doc-TBT\SRPC Doc-TBT\275253781\2.4\Release Date:16-Nov-2006\EDMS UID: 275253781\Produced: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50 7-4 GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Collectors 7-4
Figure 7-2: COL-Z mechanical and electrical contact drawing COL-Z
The bottom end of the wireline cable is placed inside the winch drum shaft, which
is hollow. The cable enters the collector through a hole that is coaxial with the
winch drum shaft. Inside the collector, the cable passes through a cable gland
that seals the interior of the collector from the external environment. See Figure
7-1 and Figure 7-2. This gland, which seals on the cable armor, must be installed
correctly to insure proper operation in an explosive atmosphere.
The wireline cable conductors are then routed to a terminal board where they
connect to internal wiring connections for the rotating contact rings. The rings
are made of copper / brass and protected by rhodium. Each ring is in contact
with two sets of stationary clips, which are a gold / nickel alloy. See Figure 7-3.
From the clips, internal wiring connects to another terminal board where the
collector or connection cable assembly terminates. The collector cable is routed
through a cable gland that threads into the main body of the collector. When
properly installed, the gland is waterproof. All cable glands specified for the
collector have CENELEC classifications.
Private
Figure 7-3: COL-Z open collector with clip holder stacks removed COL-ZA
Each collector is identified with a manufacturer’s part number and serial number.
A Schlumberger nameplate with file code is attached separately. COL-ZA is
equipped with a collector cable consisting of 12 feet of DnV certified cable
terminated in a Cannon connector in a molded boot.
COL-ZT is identical to COL-ZA except that the Cannon connector is replaced

with a Trolex connector, that is rated for service in explosive atmospheres.
This eight ring collector is intended for use with all heptacables, coaxes, and
monocables. The eighth ring is connected internally to ground or mass. A
separate three ring collector is no longer available.
The collector mounting is compatible with all current cable / drum systems with
the exception of the winch drum used on the Shallow Well Perforating Truck
(SWPT). An adapter ring, if required for a specific drum, is listed in the winch
drum Bill of Materials.
Private
7.1.3 COL -Z/ZA/ZT

The COL-Z is a dual bearing 8-ring electrical winch collector that replaces
collectors COL-SB, COL-TB, COL-SC and COL-TC, as well as the older COL-L.
This section contains a brief description of the collector and its design features.
Figure 7-4 is a photo of the COL-ZA series collector.
Figure 7-4: COL-ZA collector with cable COL-ZA
7.1.3.1 COL-ZA specifications

Table 7-1: COL-Z Specifications
Description Rating
Maximum rated current per contact 10 A
Maximum rated voltage 1000 V DC or 1000 V AC (60 Hz)
Insulation resistance between rings 2,500 Megohms at 500 V DC
Insulation resistance between ring and ground 2,500 Megohms at 500 V DC
Dielectric strength (between one ring and all 2300 V AC for 1 second
others)
Ambient operating temperature -20 degC to +40 degC
Life expectancy of electrical contacts > 10,000 hours
Rotor bearing design Two sealed roller bearings
Rotational speed Permanent 120 rpm; Maximum 200 rpm
Diameter 230 mm (9.05 in)
Private
Description Rating
Length 210 mm (8.27-in)
Inside diameter of cable entry hole 15.5 mm (0.6 in)
Weight (with cable) 16 Kg
Rotational torque Less than 0.2 m Kg (1.96 Nm or 1.45 ft-lbf)
Code for explosive atmospheres Eex d IIB T6
Certificate of Conformity for collector LCIE 98.E6061
Certificate of Conformity for cable glands LCIE 88.B6041 X
Applicable European standards EN 50014 (1992)
EN 50018 (1994) for group IIB and T6
temperature class (85 degC)
7.1.3.2 COL-Z maintenance

Be aware there is a potential electrical shock hazard when measuring insulation

resistance of the collector while it is connected to a wireline cable. Each cable
conductor acts as a capacitor with respect to earth ground. Each conductor
will therefore store an electrical charge after voltage has been applied by a
megohmmeter. Be careful not to touch a bare conductor until the conductor has
been discharged by briefly touching it to ground. The components of the collector
alone do not store sufficient charge to constitute a hazard.
FIT-Checks - FIT should be made on COL-ZA before and after every trip to the
wellsite, with the collector mounted on the winch drum. The cover is in place
during FIT unless troubleshooting is necessary.
FIT-1 Mechanical
1. Verify the collector mounting is secure on the pillow block. Tighten fasteners
as required.
2. Inspect the collector cable for signs of abrasion or damage.
3. Verify the grounding jumper (typically green wire with yellow stripe) is
installed between the cover and the housing.
FIT-2 Electrical
1. Verify the Collector Safety Switch (CSS) is in the CIS position.
Private
2. Check continuity on each conductor from within the unit to the head.
3. Perform an insulation resistance (IR) measurement on each conductor of the
wireline cable, collector, and collector cable assembly. Measure IR from each
conductor to every other conductor and to ground (armor).
7.1.4 COL-ZC
The COL-ZC (100051262) is a high voltage, high current dual bearing 8-ring
electrical winch collector that replaces the collector COL-Z in areas that require
European governing regulations: IEC 79–1, NEC 500 and CE compliance. The
collector is built to ATEX EU Directives, category 2, zones 1 and 2 and gas
subdivision.
Figure 7-5: COL-ZC collector with cable COL-ZC
For additional information on COL-ZC maintenance

refer to Basic Logging Equipment Reference Page
(http://intouchsupport.com/intouch/MethodInvokerpage.cfm?caseid=3264507).
Private
7.1.4.1 COL-ZC specifications

Table 7-2: COL-ZC Specifications
Description Rating
Maximum rated current per contact 10 A
Maximum rated voltage 1000 V DC or 1000 V AC (60 Hz)
Insulation resistance between rings 2,500 Megohms at 500 V DC
Insulation resistance between ring and ground 2,500 Megohms at 500 V DC
Dielectric strength (between one ring and all 2300 V AC for 1 second
others)
Ambient operating temperature 70 degC

Life expectancy of electrical contacts > 10,000 hours
Rotor bearing design Two sealed roller bearings
Rotational speed Permanent 120 rpm; Maximum 200 rpm
Diameter 230 mm (9.05 in)
Length 260 mm (10.24 in)
Inside diameter of cable entry hole 15.5 mm (0.6 in)
Weight (with cable) 16 Kg
Rotational torque Less than 0.2 m Kg (1.96 Nm or 1.45 ft-lbf)
Code for explosive atmospheres Directive 94/9/EC
Certificate of Conformity for collector LCIE 03 ATEX 6241
Certificate of Conformity for cable glands LCIE 88.B6041
Applicable European standards EN 50014 (1997) + Amendments 1 and 2
(1999) EN 50018 (2000) LCIE test Report No
60004547 dated June 06, 2003
EN 50018 (1994) for group IIB and T6
temperature class (85 degC)
7.1.4.2 COL-ZC maintenance

FIT Checks - FIT should be made on COL-ZC (100051262) before and after
every trip to the wellsite, with the collector mounted on the winch drum. The
cover is in place during FIT unless troubleshooting is necessary.
FIT-1 mechanical
1. Verify the collector mounting is secure on the pillow block. Tighten fasteners
as required.
2. Inspect the collector cable for signs of abrasion or damage.
Private
3. Verify the grounding jumper (typically green wire with yellow stripe) is
installed between the cover and the housing.
TRIM - TRIM should be made on the COL-ZC monthly, with the collector
removed from the winch drum.
TRIM-1 mechanical
1. Remove the cover and clean the inside of the cover and housing with a clean
cloth and isopropyl alcohol. Do not use high pressure air or other types of
solvents (WD-40, chlorinated fluids or ether).
2. Inspect the collector internally, including each ring and contact for signs of
abrasion or other damage.
3. Inspect the insulation on the wireline cable conductors for any sign of
abrasion with the inside surface of the cover.
4. When the collector is to be used in a hazardous environment, replace the
seal within the wireline cable gland. This requires that the wireline cable
conductors be disconnected from the terminal block mounted on the rotor.
5. With the wireline cable conductors still disconnected from the terminal block,
perform TRIM-2.
6. Check the condition of the cover O-ring before re-installing the cover.
7. Replace the grounding jumper (green wire with yellow stripe) between the
housing and the cover.
Quality Note
The dual bearings are sealed, so lubrication is NOT required.
8. Check to see that the transmission screws are tight.
TRIM-2 electrical - The objective is to obtain electrical measurements with the

wireline cable disconnected from the collector.
1. Place the Collector Safety Switch (CSS) in the CIS position.

2. Check continuity on each conductor from within the unit to the terminal board
mounted on the collector rotor. All conductor resistances should be equal
within about 1%. Telemetry problems may result from unequal resistances.
3. Perform an insulation resistance (IR) measurement of the collector and
collector cable assembly at 500 VDC. Measure IR from each conductor to
every other conductor and to ground (armor). It should be a minimum of
500 Megohms for each conductor.
Private
7.1.5 Assembly
7.1.5.1 Mounting the collector

Part numbers identified in the figures below are for the COL-Z/ZA/ZT. Part
numbers the for COL-ZC are listed below the associated figure.
1. Determine if gasket (460) will be used. See Figure 7-6.
a. If the gasket will be used, cut a wireline cable entry hole and attach the
gasket to the collector using a weatherproof adhesive.
Figure 7-6: Installing gasket (460)
Part numbers for the COL-ZC are: gasket (055) and transmission screws
(065).
2. Thread the bottom end of the wireline cable through the cable gland body.
Private
Figure 7-7: Mounting the collector on the winch drum
Part numbers for the COL-ZC are: external cable gland (540) and terminal
block (550).
3. Before installing the collector onto the winch drum pillow block, rotate the
collector until the external cable gland is positioned on the top or to the side.
Figure 7-7 shows the external cable gland on top.
4. Mount the collector onto the adapter ring of the winch drum pillow block.
Note
The external cable gland my be turned to the bottom to improve water runoff
but with the cable in this position, there is an increased risk of collector cable
damage during winch drum installation.
5. Install the four mounting bolts 5/16 in x 1-1/4 in hex head machine screws
with lock washers.
6. Before engaging the transmission screws (165) in the corresponding holes,
check the position of the terminal block (190) attached to the rotating
assembly. If possible, rotate the assembly so that the terminal block is on
the upper or top side. This will simplify the termination process. See Figure
7-7 above.
Private
7.1.5.2 Ring collector assembly

Figure 7-8 shows the orientation of collector parts making up the electrical
assembly.
Figure 7-8: COL-Z electrical assembly COL-Z
7.1.5.3 Wireline cable gland selection

The wireline cable enters the interior of the collector through a cable gland that
contains a weatherproof seal. The selection of the gland is determined by the
diameter of the wireline cable. See Table 7-3.
Table 7-3: Wireline Cable Glands
Cable Gland Manufacturer’ s Cable Weatherproof

Part No. Part No. Diameter Seal Part No. Cable Types
A076965 Legrand 95513 11 – 14.3 mm A076975 7-46 / 7-52
A076869 Legrand 95512 6.5 – 12 mm A017811 1-22 / 7-39 / 7-42
The wireline cable gland (170) assembly is shown in Figure 7-9.
Private
Figure 7-9: Cable gland components cable gland
7.1.5.4 Prepare the wireline cable end

The cable collector end connects to the 8-ring collector and is just as important
as the rope socket. An equal amount of care and attention must be taken when
building them.
Collector problems tend to be intermittent and sometimes difficult to find. This is

all the more reason why the collector and cable collector end must be checked
more regularly.
1. Attach an armor ground cable to the wireline cable.
a. Remove any grease or debris from the cable armor near the end of the
cable.
b. Cut about 6-in of tinned copper braid wire (E008536 or equivalent) and
position one end on the outer armor about 5 to 6-in from the cable end.
See Figure 7-10.
Private
Figure 7-10: Preparing the wireline cable endcopper braid
c. Begin wrapping 28 AWG bare sold copper wire (E026045 or equivalent)

around the braid wire. Use sufficient tension so that the braid is securely
held in place with a smooth "level wind" without crossovers.
d. Continue wrapping until about 3/8-in length of braid wire is covered.
e. Snip the ends of the solid copper wire and twist them together.
f. Thoroughly heat the wrapped wire area with a soldering iron and apply
solder (rosin flux) over all the wrapped section, completely around the
cable.
g. Trim any high spots when finished. This completes the braid wire
connection that serves as the armor ground connection.
2. Remove the outer layer of armor cable.
a. Hold the armor ground cable away from the wireline cable to protect it
from the cutting process.
b. Cut the outer armor wires with a cutting tool (Dremel tool or equivalent)
approximately 1/4 in. up from the soldered braid wrapping around the
circumference of the cable. See Figure 7-11.
Private
Figure 7-11: Ground wire wrapping completed COL-Z
c. Remove all the outer armor wires.

3. Remove the inner layer of armor cable.
a. Unwrap three of the inner armor wires back to the braid wire connection
and fold them away from the core. See Figure 7-12.
Figure 7-12: Inner wires bent out
b. Using the rotary cutting tool, cut the three wires while bending them
slightly away from the core.
c. Remove any sharp edges on the ends of the armor wires.
Private
d. Repeat removing 3 armor strands at a time until all inner strands are
removed.
4. Unwrap the tape from the inner core or remove the outer neoprene jacket
on NT cables.
5. Unwrap the outer conductors as shown in Figure 7-13.
Figure 7-13: Conductors unwrapped
Quality Note
All heptacables (except for NT or NA construction) use semi-conductive
cable filler in the cores. This filler must be removed completely from the
exposed surface of the conductor insulation. Cleanliness is important. If it is
not removed, there is a danger over time of the material eventually falling
onto the conductive parts within the collector or terminal block and forming a
low resistance path to ground.
6. Remove semi conductive cable filler.
a. Use a scouring pad (B033693) or fine emery cloth (400 grit or finer) to
carefully remove the cable filler material from the conductors without
causing damage to the insulation. Be sure no particles fall within the
collector housing. Isopropyl alcohol may be used as a clean solvent
(optional). Don’t use other types of solvents.
Private
7. Vectorene (TPX) conductors have special requirements. (A taped core

construction cable with a green conductor is a P or polypropylene cable;
otherwise it is a TPX cable.) This material is subject to damage by UV light
so do not leave conductors exposed to sunlight for over three days in the
shade or a few hours in direct sunlight. Vectorene is also prone to stress
crack propagation. If the material is nicked or cut slightly on the surface, the
damage will propagate or grow when the conductor is bent for an extended
period.
8. After the individual conductors are separated and cleaned, loosen the outer
nut of the cable gland and slide the excess length of cable back inside the
gland. The soldered connection should be positioned just inside the clamp
bushing so that the core extends out about 1/4 in. from the outer nut. See
Figure 7-14 Cable end repositioned.
Figure 7-14: Cable end repositioned
9. Tighten the outer nut of the cable gland snugly. This compresses the
weatherproof seal and prevents moisture entry. When operating in an
explosive atmosphere, the seal is critical for the CENELEC rating. In this
case, change the cable gland seal for every cable installation.
Private
7.1.6 Prepare the cable collector end
7.1.6.1 Collector cable measurements

The collector cable connects to the 8-ring collector. The length of each cable
conductor must to cut to the length shown in Figure 7-15.
Figure 7-15: Cable conductor measurement lengths
For detailed information on terminating conductors, refer to Basic Equipment

Reference Pages - COL-Z/ZA/ZT Collectors Maintenance Manual.
7.1.6.2 Pin diagram of J-8 and J-9

All current "wired" collectors are manufactured with cable H709558, which
includes 12 ft of cable (E048550) and the Cannon connector assembly
(H709539). This Cannon (J8) plug is compatible with all the current and future
logging unit designs. The matching wall Cannon jack connector (J9) for plug
H709539, which replaces the previous wall AK receptacle, is E045068. Figure
7-16 illustrates the pin location and designations of the AK plug attached to
the firewall of the unit.
Private
Pin Diagram of J-8 & J-9
N=7
M
L=6 A=1
W=Shield P=GR
K B
V X=Shield
J=5 C=2
W T
H D
G=4 E=3
F
Pins I, Q, O, Y, Z Not Used

Figure 7-16: Pin diagram
7.1.6.3 MAXIS Collector Safety Switch (CSS)

The CSS (Collector Safety Switch) is a simple device that allows switching the
logging cable conductors to selected surface acquisition equipment. The CSS is
also equipped with a key, which will lock the switch in the OFF position. The key
must be removed for explosives operations as per Schlumberger Field Safety
Procedures placard H709745 (Rev AD).
When in OFF, PLAYBACK or INSTR ONLY positions, each of the logging

cable conductors (1 through 7) are electrically disconnected from the surface
acquisition equipment. This will prevent accidental power transmission to the
downhole tools.
When in OFF, PLAYBACK or INSTR ONLY positions, each of the logging

cable conductors (1 through 7) are also shorted to ground through two 10K
ohm resistors. These two resistors will bleed off any residual electric charge
remaining in any of the cable conductors. A typical 20K ft [6 Km] cable has the
capacity of a 2 F capacitor charged with hundreds of volts. This energy, if not
discharged, could be enough to activate a ballistic explosive detonator. It is a
good habit to ground the arming wires to mass prior to arming an explosive
device. The two 10K ohm resistors (one rated at 3 watts and the other at 5 watts)
Private
are run in parallel. If a large charge/surge is encountered, the lower wattage

resistor will burn first, allowing the second, larger wattage resistor to continue
to dissipate charges.
In the "OFF" position, the CSS will also disarm the power to the instrument rack.
Figure 7-17 illustrates how the collector safety switch acts as the interface from
the logging cable to the MAXIS.
Figure 7-17: Collector Safety Switch wiring diagram
Note
For detailed information on the Collector Safety Switch
refer to Collector Safety Switch (CSS) Operational Tests
(http://intouchsupport.com/intouch/MethodInvokerpage.cfm?caseid=3299665).
7.1.6.4 WPT MCM Safety Switch

Figure 7-18 illustrates how the MCM safety switch interfaces the collector to the
computer in a SWPT (Shallow Well Perforating Truck).
Private
Ground
10K 10K
3 Watts 5 Watts
Off
On
Power to
Computer
From Collector 1-10

Power In
1
10
Figure 7-18: SWPT MCM safety switch wiring
7.1.6.5 MSLC MCM Safety Switch

Figure 7-19 illustrates how the MCM safety switch interfaces the collector to the
computer in the MSLC.
Private
Switch
Sources & Outputs
Resistors
WFMD Switch In Rack Rack I/O

J14, J18
PMI Card
Tool
Module(s) J14,
J18
Cable:
J24,
WFAD Hepta
& / or
Mono
Collectors
Rack I/O
CIS
J23, AC
(Hepta & Mono) Shutdown
J25
Rack Resistors
Shutdown
(On Over Temp
Cntrl Assy J2) Ground
Figure 7-19: MSLC MCM safety switch wiring
7.1.6.6 Basic Collector/Safety Switch wiring diagram

Figure 7-20 illustrates the basic collector, safety switch and unit wiring used to
interface the computer to the logging tool.
Private
Outside Inside
Collector
CSU Off 10KΩ 10KΩ
Playback 2 Watt 3 Watt
ELCO
Plug
to CSU
CSU Panel
Main Shoot
6
5
AK
Plug
Panel
Head Survey
AK
CSU Aux Shoot Plug
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1
2
1
Fish
5
4
1 Goes to 8
2 Goes to 9
Figure 7-20: Wiring diagram showing the collector, safety switch, and unit
Private
8-i GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Rig-up equipment 8-i
8 Rig-up equipment
8.1 Health, safety and environmental _______________________________ 8-2
8.1.1 Personnel danger ____________________________________________ 8-2
8.1.2 Equipment danger ___________________________________________ 8-4
8.1.3 OFS standards ______________________________________________ 8-5
8.1.3.1 OFS-QHSE S003: PPE ___________________________________ 8-5
8.1.3.2 Standard 13: Mechanical lifting and its application to wireline rig-up
equipment _______________________________________________ 8-5
8.1.3.3 Standard 17: Injury prevention ____________________________ 8-8
8.1.4 Rig-up policy ________________________________________________ 8-8
8.1.5 Rig-up assessment __________________________________________ 8-9
8.1.6 Rig-up equipment manufacturing and supply ___________________ 8-9
8.1.7 Traceability policy ___________________________________________ 8-10

8.1.8 Refurbishment policy ________________________________________ 8-10
8.1.9 Record keeping _____________________________________________ 8-11
8.2 Equipment description ________________________________________ 8-12
8.2.1 Introduction _________________________________________________ 8-12
8.2.2 Sheaves ___________________________________________________ 8-13
8.2.2.1 Sheave specifications and rite maintenance schedules _____ 8-18
8.2.2.2 Aluminum sheave _______________________________________ 8-19
8.2.2.3 DNV certified stainless steel sheaves _____________________ 8-21
8.2.2.4 Nylon sheaves __________________________________________ 8-23
8.2.2.5 SWPT Crown block assembly ___________________________ 8-25
8.2.3 Bridle guards _______________________________________________ 8-27
8.2.4 Rig-up yoke ________________________________________________ 8-27
8.2.5 Floor stand _________________________________________________ 8-27
8.2.6 Hand guards ________________________________________________ 8-28
8.2.7 Sheave hangers and adapters _______________________________ 8-28
8.2.7.1 Sheave hanger specifications and rite maintenance
schedules _______________________________________________ 8-31
8.2.8 Make-up plates and top hats _________________________________ 8-33
8.2.8.1 Make-up plate and top-hat specifications and rite maintenance
schedules _______________________________________________ 8-36
8.2.9 Tie-down chains ____________________________________________ 8-38
8.2.9.1 Tie-down chain specifications and rite maintenance
schedules _______________________________________________ 8-40
8.2.10 Lifting caps and thread protectors ____________________________ 8-42
8.2.10.1 Lifting caps, subs and thread protectors: specifications and rite
maintenance schedules __________________________________ 8-44
8.2.11 Slings ______________________________________________________ 8-46
8.2.11.1 Slings specifications and rite maintenance ________________ 8-47
8.2.12 Shackles ___________________________________________________ 8-50
8.2.12.1 Shackles specifications and rite maintenance schedules ___ 8-51
8.2.13 Goosenecks ________________________________________________ 8-54
8.2.14 Dual hook devices __________________________________________ 8-54
Private
8-ii GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Rig-up equipment 8-ii
8.2.14.1 Dual hook device specifications and rite maintenance

schedules _______________________________________________ 8-55
8.2.15 Top drive compensating sheave adapter and shear pin
assembly ___________________________________________________ 8-57
8.2.15.1 Specifications for top drive compensating sheave adapter and shear
pin assembly ____________________________________________ 8-59
8.2.16 Line wipers _________________________________________________ 8-61
Private
8-1 GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Rig-up equipment 8-1
8 Rig-up equipment TOPS
Introduction
Rig-Up Equipment is Schlumberger equipment used at the well site, onshore or

offshore, for the set-up of the Schlumberger logging cable in order to perform
geophysical surveys or other logging operations in a wellbore. The purpose
of this chapter is to provide the operator with a complete and current rig-up
equipment reference necessary for the field, and for fulfilling global TOPS
requirements.
Detailed maintenance procedures, which are beyond the scope of this manual
can be easily found by referring to InTouch Support: Rig-up Equipment
Maintenance Manual 2nd Edition (Content ID: 3012539). This document is a
major reference for the creation of this chapter.
Note
The Intouch Rigup Equipment Reference Page (InTouch ID #3258434) can be
used to find the latest information concerning wireline rig-up equipment, technical
alerts, etc. The above link is a major reference for the creation of this chapter.
Overview
Health, safety and environmental of this chapter deals with QHSE issues
pertaining to rig-up equipment and rig-up operations.
Equipment description provides general descriptions, a full listing of part

numbers, ratings and working lifes, graphics and RITE maintenance procedures
for all rig-up equipment.
Student objectives
After studying this chapter, the operator in training should be able to perform
the following:
• Identify each item of rig-up equipment and know the ratings.

• Perform RITE maintenance on each item of rig-up equipment.
• Explain the requirements for re-certification rig up gear.
• Explain the importance of traceability and record keeping.
Private
8.1 Health, safety and environmental

This section will cover the various policies in place to ensure safe rig-up
operations. It is very important that the material in this section is read and
understood.
The items covered in this chapter are as follows:
• Personnel danger
• Equipment danger
• OFS standards
• Rig-up policy (NAM, 1988)

• Rig-up risk assessment
• Rig-up equipment manufacturing and supply
• Traceability policy
• Refurbishment policy
• Record keeping.
Before rigging up, the general rig-up safety items given here should be
considered for all jobs. They are necessary items to action when creating risk
assessments and carrying out pre job safety talks.
8.1.1 Personnel danger

This section lists the issues associated with the safety of all personnel.
• Right tools for the right job – Not only does using the incorrect tools for
a particular job often create a safety hazard, but it usually increases the
time it takes to rig-up. Before you rig-up or rig down, ensure that everything
required is available. Also consider,for example, whether the operation will
be dealing with high tensions.
• Spot safety meeting – This is an essential part of any rig up and should be
undertaken before the sheaves are lifted.
• Rig lighting – If rig lighting is inadequate (if, for example, the operation is at
night), it may be necessary to slow down the operation. In particular, make
sure that the floor is clear of all obstructions.
Private
• Wellbore and mouse hole covered when not in use – The wellbore and
mouse hole should be covered with a rig supplied cover, not a make-up plate,
line wiper or any other item of wireline equipment.
• All tools in the right place – The best thing is usually to have a
dedicated box for holding items necessary for rigging up tools, that is easily
transportable to the rig floor.
• Clean and tidy – Rags and gloves especially should not be dropped all over
the rig floor. More accidents occur on the rig floor due to slipping on dropped
rags than anything else.
• Report hazards – If a hazard is seen on the drill floor (or anywhere which
effects the wireline operations, such as cranes over the wire, etc.), then
report it. Verbally tell the tool pusher or driller, and follow it up by using the
rig’s safety improvement cards (e.g. stop cards).

• Report failures – Failures occurring during the process of rigging up or
rigging down (such as a cable jumping the sheave causing cable damage),
should be reported. The idea is that failures should not re-occur, and so
should be properly communicated.
• Correct profile
– safety awareness
– coveralls
– hard hat
– safety boots
– gloves
– eye protection
– radioactive badge.
Lead by example. Always have your glasses on!
Private
• Working in a hazardous environment
– Slippery floor – Most drill floors should have non-slip mats. If they do
not, suggest to the rig that it would be a good idea, and be very careful
moving around the floor.
– H2S – If it is an H2S environment, this should have been brought to the
crew’s attention in enough advance to ensure the necessary training with
the necessary equipment.
– Hazardous muds (OBM, Caustics, etc.) – If the mud is oil-based or
caustic, ensure that the gloves available are appropriate. Cloth polka-dot
gloves will become saturated in minutes resulting in irritated hands.
– Heavy equipment – Man-handling heavy equipment should be avoided.
Use the rig tuggers where possible.

– Explosives – In the case of explosives, all regulations must be followed.
– Radioactivity – Ensure that the rig-crew are aware of radioactive
sources, and the rig crew is not present on the drill floor during
loading/unloading. All regulations must be followed.
– High pressure – Pressure Operations Manual
– Long hours – Due to the nature of wireline work, long hours may
sometimes be unavoidable. Bear in mind that the most likely time for
an accident to happen with wireline operations is during rigging up or
rigging down. Try to manage the crew so that everyone is as well rested
as possible.
8.1.2 Equipment danger

The following precautions refer to the operation of all Schlumberger Rig-Up
Equipment, in accordance with general Schlumberger operating regulations
and safety rules:
• Rig-up equipment and logging cables are only used to perform wireline
operations. Their use for any other operation, such as cargo lifting, is
absolutely prohibited.
• Rig-up equipment is to be used according to the most current specification.
• Individual pieces of rig-up equipment are only to be used according to their
own specification.
• Use only Schlumberger approved rig-up equipment for any operation at the
well site.
• Know the rating of all rig-up equipment and when it should be junked and
replaced.
Private
• The engineer is fully responsible for the proper installation and use of the
rig-up equipment.
8.1.3 OFS standards

There are many OFS QHSE standards that are applicable to rigging up and
rigging down. However, in particular, there are three standards that are always
applicable, because they are directly related to general rig-up operations. It is
important that all members of the wireine crew, not just the engineer understand
the material in this section.
Note
All OFS QHSE Standards can be easily found by referring to InTouch
Support: QHSE Reference Page (Content ID: 3312250).
8.1.3.1 OFS-QHSE S003: PPE

This standard details Personnel Protective Equipment requirements. In
particular, it clearly states that body protection, eye protection, foot protection,
hand protection and head protection should be worn at all times. Additionally,
radiation workers (all field operations within wireline) should wear radioactive
badges during all working hours.
8.1.3.2 Standard 13: Mechanical lifting and its application to

wireline rig-up equipment
The purpose of the mechanical lifting standard is to help in minimizing to an
acceptable level the risk involved with mechanical lifting operations. However,
due to the high level nature of the OFS 13 standard, it is not specific enough to
define the preventative maintenance and inspection requirements for all the
highly specialized wireline rig-up equipment. Therefore, the following paragraphs
will be adopted as the key OFS 13 addendum and primary reference for all
Wireline rig-up equipment. The preventative maintenance policy for each asset
in the rig-up equipment category will be based on this minimum standard.
OFS-13 Generalities for wireline rig-up equipment addendum
Wireline Rig-up equipment refers to all equipment and accessories used to

sling, hook, hang, lift and convey tool and cable loads during wireline logging
operations when rigged up on a wellhead or drilling rig. These include but are not
limited to sheaves, sheave hangers, tie down chains, clevis, dual hook device,
Private
fishing and safety slings, lifting caps, makeup plates and all other equipment
as specified in this manual. This is the primary reference for this equipment
published in 2003. Additionally:
• Wireline Rig-up equipment is supplied solely by IPC and shall be designed

and manufactured according to the applicable industry standards and best
practice.
• All Wireline rig-up equipment will be entered into the RITE system as the
primary register for tracking age, jobs, maintenance and inspection.
• Wireline rig-up equipment must not be used for any other operation other
than the application for which the equipment was originally designed and
intended.
OFS-13 Preventative maintenance for wireline rig-up equipment

addendum
A preventative maintenance program based on the requirements in the Rig-up

equipment manual and utilizing the RITE system for tracking purposes shall be
applied to all assets in this category. The preventative maintenance program
will comprise:
• FIT Inspection prior to and after every job

• TRIM Inspection monthly
• Quarterly inspection entered on RITE
• Annual Q-check
• Annual MPI or other non-destructive inspection
• Annual recertification to SWL or 2xSWL, depending on the application
• Retirement after two or five years depending on the asset
• Five-year refurbishment by the vendor for Sheaves and some other
equipment.
Note
The rig up equipment may have to be repaired or junked at any stage in its life
cycle prior to retirement if the preventative maintenance program finds a fault
or defect. In general defective equipment should be junked, however, some
equipment including sheaves can be refurbished or repaired by the vendor.
Contact IPC Intouch if there is any question regarding whether components
can be safely repaired.
Private
OFS-13 Six monthly inspection and testing for wireline rig-up

equipment addendum
Wireline Rig-up equipment is not subject to six monthly inspection or color

coding, as the preventative maintenance program in place is more rigorous than
prescribed by OFS-13 in the official standard.
OFS-13 Annual inspection and recertification for wireline rig-up

equipment addendum
Annual inspection and recertification for wireline rig up equipment must be

carried out in accordance with the procedures in this manual. It is anticipated

that most locations will use a third party lifting equipment inspection company
for this task, following the Annual Q-check. Note that NDT (Non Destructive
Testing) must always by done after SWL or proof loading testing to maximize the
chances of isolating a defective asset.
It is anticipated that some new equipment, an SWL and proof load test bench
designed for sheaves, along with revised procedures will be released in 2003 to
simplify the task of sheave load testing which is currently not well addressed. IPC
Intouch will continually revise and improve this manual’s content and procedures
so please check for revisions regularly.
OFS-13 Training and qualification for wireline rig-up equipment

addendum
Wireline rig-up equipment shall be operated by employees who have been

formally trained and reached a satisfactory proficiency level set by the Wireline
business segment. This should also include basic crane skills and hand signal
communications, dogging and rigging skills as required to move, load and unload
wireline equipment before, during and after Wireline logging operations.
These minimum requirements are often set both by the Wireline business
segment and by the clients, rig operators, local country or government bodies.
OFS-13 also contains a list of useful reference books listed below. IPC have
recently provided part numbers for these books to simplify ordering, so they can
now be ordered directly through SWPS.
100024906 Handbook, International Rigging And Lifting
100024943 Handbook, Crane Operations And Cargo Handling
100024966 Manual, Basic Rigging Training
Private
100024995 Manual, Wire Rope Users
100025011 Manual, Wire Rope Sling User
8.1.3.3 Standard 17: Injury prevention

Standard 17 deals with ways to prevent injury, particularly with regards to
training. The most important injury prevention training, is SIPP (Schlumberger
Injury Prevention Program). Locations should have SIPP training on a regular
basis for new employees, as well as those in need of a refresher course.
SIPP has two levels, Level 1 and Level 2. Level 1 is permanent and must be
done within the first ninety days of employment. Level 2 lasts for three years,
covers the five SIPP modules, and must be done within the first ninety days of
employment. See the Standard 17 document for more details.
8.1.4 Rig-up policy

The following policy was put in effect October 1988 and, while there are some
additions, it is still in effect as of today:
If a clevis and bolt (H008254) or dual hook device (H441540), is to be used

during tool make up, only one is permitted. The clevis used must be located no
further than five feet from the logging cable or bridle.
The Rig-Up policy was adopted in October 1988, after the death of a
Schlumberger Operator. During rig up, the tool string was pulled into the top
sheave, breaking the weak point. Since the tools were connected with a number
of clevises, the tools covered a large area of the rig floor as they fell, leaving little
room for the operator to escape. This policy effectively limits the tool string to
one piece, connected to the head by a single dual hook or shackle. Rigging up
with only one bolt/clevis is potentially more time consuming, but is certainly safer.
Note
Dual Hook Devices (H441540 made obsolete, T5018340): The standard dual
hook device (H441540, 4300 lbf SWL) is unsuitable for use with most of the
approved Schlumberger lifting caps (the cap handles are too big for the hook),
but can still be used for cased hole operations with the 1 11/16-in. certified lifting
caps. A heavy duty dual hook device (T5018340, 12,000 lbf SWL) is available
for this purpose. Further details can be found in the equipment section of this
chapter.
Thread protectors and lifting caps:
Private
Thread protectors, according to company policy, should be replaced after two

(2) years of field use. However, if the caps are to be used for lifting within the
two-year period, they should be tested every quarter by pulling them to 4000
lbs (2000 lbs safe working load) using a Tension Device Calibrator and SFT-269.
This procedure is available in the Maintenance chapter.
Thread protectors or end caps, which come with logging tools, have never been
certified as lifting devices by SCD or other product centers. Therefore they are
not pull tested at the time of manufacture. The material and dimensions of these
caps should be sufficient to have a 2,000 lb SWL and 4:1 safety factor. However,
welds, corrosion and aging could lead to unpredictable failures. You may pull
test, inspect and certify your thread protector end caps locally. For rig up of
tool strings, certified lifting caps should be used. These caps come with a
certificate and should only be used when lifting tools for makeup.
Note
Do not attempt to modify any thread protectors to use as lifting caps.
8.1.5 Rig-up assessment

Refer to Appendix: QHSE/Rig-up assessment. This can also be found on the
Hub, at:
QHSE: Risk Management: REW Top Risk Assessment Sheets: Rig-up/Rig-down

(http://www.hub.slb.com/inserts.cfm?id=id827351)
This assessment must be applied for all rig-ups when constructing a risk
assessment. In some locations, risk assessments are mandatory as part of
the work permit.
8.1.6 Rig-up equipment manufacturing and supply

IPC conveyance engineering provide design and engineering support for all
wireline rig-up equipment used in our ongoing worldwide operations. This
specialist wireline rig-up equipment can be ordered through IPC customer
service and SWPS. The equipment will be supplied from IPC France or IPC
Sugar Land. This equipment has been specifically engineered for our Wireline
application and is subject to the strict maintenance, inspection, certification and
retirement policies detailed in this manual. IPC use only approved third party
manufactures and suppliers for this equipment and it is uniquely identified to our
specification. IPC are the only rig-up equipment supplier to the field.
Private
Note
The purchase of any wireline rig-up equipment from third party suppliers
(bypassing or without going through IPC for approval) is strictly prohibited.
This includes field locations dealing directly with IPC approved suppliers. The
reason behind this is to conform to the company’s third party supplier and
contractor standard plus to ensure that all rig-up equipment used in the field
meets appropriate engineering quality and safety standards. IPC must be the
single source supplier for this equipment to the field to ensure full engineering,
QHSE and sustaining control.
The use of any non-standard wireline rig-up equipment will require a QHSE
exemption and in addition must be approved by IPC conveyance rapid

response engineering.
8.1.7 Traceability policy

Traceability establishes procedures to ensure serial number traceability of
items of rig-up equipment. Traceability shall provide a permanent record of
an individual item’s manufacturer and date of manufacture and shall facilitate
tracking of equipment usage and performance.
Traceability requirements apply to all individually identifiable load bearing items

of rig-up equipment, including sheaves, chains, slings, etc. Traceability applies
not only to complete assemblies, but also to detachable subassemblies. For
example, in the case of the sheave wheel assembly, the traceable items would
be the frame subassembly, the axle, the wheel, and the entire assembly.
Each item of rig-up equipment must be uniquely identifiable by a serial number.

The manufacturer must be readily identifiable and the date of manufacture must
be easily ascertainable. The name of the manufacturer or a manufacturer’s code
shall be included either on the item itself or on the identification tag attached to
the item.
8.1.8 Refurbishment policy

The service life of rig-up equipment is specified in the Maintenance chapter.
It is possible that some items of rig-up equipment may have their useful
lives extended by refurbishment, which will include Q-check, inspection and
recertification. If the service life is to be extended, return the item to the vendor
where it can be examined for wear, corrosion, and mechanical deterioration.
The item must perform as new and be proof tested and certified as if new. It
is imperative that lot number control not be lost if an item is refurbished. The
Private
original serial number including original purchase order number/line item number
shall be maintained for each individual item of equipment. At present only
wireline sheaves may be refurbished by the respective vendors after 5 years.
Note
The maximum useful life of the sheaves is extended to 10 years following return
to vendor refurbishment. Sheaves can not be refurbished more than once as it
will not be economic to do so. For example at 10 years every single componenet
in the sheave assembly including the wheel, frame, clevis, etc., must be junked.
The refurbishment must include the replacement of any items such as cast
components on WTI Nylon sheave frames which have a specified life of 7 years.
A sheave that has undergone refurbishment must have a useful life expectancy
of 5 year remaining.
8.1.9 Record keeping

Field locations must maintain accurate and up to date records during the service
life of all wireline rig-up equipment. These records must be entered onto the
RITE system as the primary method of tracking all preventative maintenance
events. The RITE system records for the rig-up equipment must be updated
quarterly during the life of the asset to provide a clear picture of the condition
and age of each component.
Additionally, it is also advisable to keep a copy of this information in the rig

book corresponding to the cell where the equipment is located. These records
shall provide the ability to quickly determine the current status and condition
of all the Wireline rig-up equipment assigned to the cell, the previous and
upcoming maintenance events, retirement age, etc. The importance and priority
on accurate record keeping for all the safety critical wireline rig-up equipment
cannot be over emphasized.
The record keeping required for a good preventative maintenance program will
comprise the following records as a minimum. This information will be updated
regularly in RITE and the cell rig book. Physical certificates and other third
party inspection paperwork can be scanned into RITE and filed in the location
in a traceable manner.
• Quarterly inspection entered on RITE

• Annual Q-check entered on RITE
• Annual MPI or other non destructive inspection. (Third party records can be
scanned or filed in the location but entered in RITE)
• Annual recertification to SWL or 2xSWL depending on application. (Third
party records can be scanned or filed in the location but entered in RITE)
Private
• Retirement date or planned refurbishment date for the asset entered onto
RITE
• Date in service, Supplier and Vendor order detail entered onto RITE.
Note
Good record keeping is important for several reasons:
It is a mandatory requirement in the OFS-13 and also an important poart of the

OFS QHSE management system. Accurate records enable the field location and
wireline crews to safely use and manage load bearing wireline rip-up equipment
over its service life in a tough and demanding environment. A field location
equipped with accurate records and regular effective preventative maintenance

has a very low risk of equipment failure and resulting personnel injury.
The rig-up equipment retirement policy can only be effective if accurate records
are available to identify when service life is finished.
8.2 Equipment description
8.2.1 Introduction
This section provides general descriptions, a full specifications table including
part numbers, ratings and working lifes, graphics and RITE maintenance
procedures for the following rig-up equipment:
• Sheaves
• Bridle Guards
• Rig-up Yokes
• Floor Stands
• Hand Guards
• Sheave Hangers and Adapters
• Make-Up Plates and Top Hats
• Tie-Down Chains
• Lifting Caps and Thread Protectors
• Slings
• Shackles
• Goosenecks
Private
• Dual Hook Devices

• Top Drive Compensating Sheave Adapter and Shear Pin Assembly
• Line Wipers.
8.2.2 Sheaves
This section will briefly describe the different types of sheaves available in the
field. Broadly, they can be split in to three categories:
• aluminum sheaves
• stainless steel sheaves
• nylon composite sheaves.
Note
Disassembling and resassmbling a sheave destroys its certification. If a sheave
must be dissassembled, restoring or an exeption witll be required to use it. See
the Maintenance chapter for more details.
Standard use aluminum sheaves
Refer to Figure 8-1. Schlumberger designed the aluminum sheaves years ago,
and are still the primary choice of sheave for open hole operations. They are
available in several sizes for a range of cables. The main disadvantage of the
aluminum sheaves are their weight. The upper and lower aluminum sheaves are
different in appearance. The lower sheave has a finger guard and a pinch-point
guard to minimize the risk of fingers being caught in either the spoke or between
the wheel and the logging cable. The upper sheave only has a guard to prevent
the cable from jumping out of the sheave. Refer to the sheave information in
the sub-sections that follow.
Private
SRPC Doc-TBT\SRPC Doc-TBT\275253781\2.4\Release Date:16-Nov-2006\EDMS UID: 275253781\Produced: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50 8-14 GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Rig-up equipment 8-14
Figure 8-1: Aluminum sheave
DNV Certified Stainless Steel Sheaves
Refer to Figure 8-2. SWHD-CB Sheave Wheel Heavy Duty (Lower) and
SWHD-CA Sheave Wheel Heavy Duty (Upper) are 36-in. sheaves for 7-46 and
7-52 cables. The SWHD-CA sheave has been designed to comply with the
toughest known regulations. This design is DNV approved. Every sheave of this
type is tested to the proof test load (two times its Safe Working Load) and is
shipped with a DNV test certificate.
Private
Note
DNV Certification is provided by Det Norske Veritas, a Norwegian company. It is
an internationally known and recognized standard and, as such, is sometimes
requested by clients who may not feel comfortable with local certfications and
policies.
Figure 8-2: Heavy duty 36-inch DNV sheave
Refer to Figure 8-3. The SWHD-A is a 13-in sheave for 0.22/0.23-in cables
or smaller. As with all the stainless steel sheaves, the 13-in sheave has been
designed and manufactured according to the toughest known regulations and is
DNV approved. The cable guides are made of nylotron, which has good wear
resistance and improves the cable life. The housings are made of glass fiber.
Apart from weight reduction, the advantage of this material over the previous
aluminum casting is that the fiberglass should not crack. Accidents that happened
in the past, such as the breaking of the housing due to corrosion developing
in unnoticed micro cracks, should not occur. The housings are zinc-coated to
prevent the accumulation of static electricity on the housing, which is made of
insulating material. Every sheave of this design is tested to the proof test load.
Private
Figure 8-3: Heavy duty 13-inch DNV sheave

Standard use nylon composite sheaves
Refer to Figure 8-4. The purpose of the Wireline Technologies (WTI) Nylon
Sheave is to provide the field with a safe, lightweight, break-apart sheave. There
are several distinct features available only on the Nylon sheaves. It has a side
loading gate that opens toward the operator and they weigh considerably less
than aluminum sheaves. The logging cable is confined within the sheave groove
by a stainless steel shroud attached to the loading gate. This covers a large
portion of the pulley circumference. This design prevents the cable from leaving
the groove. Standard use Nylon sheaves are available in 14, 17 and 24-in sizes,
for a variety of cable sizes. They are also available as part of a crown block
assembly for DOP-B and SWPT. Refer to Figure 8-5.
Private
Figure 8-4: Nylon composite sheave
Figure 8-5: Sheave and crown block assembly on SWPT
Heavy duty nylon composite sheaves
Private
See Figure 8-6. The 36-in Heavy Duty Nylon Composite Sheaves were designed
by IPC as part of two kits: SFT-393 (7-46/7-48 cables) and SFT-401 (7-52
cables). These kits also contain other items of rig up gear specially designed for
heavy duty logging. The sheaves can be ordered separately, however. Currently,
even though they are designed to a higher SWL than the heavy duty stainless
steel sheaves, they are not DNV certified. This is still in progress. However,
they are operational and have proved successful thus far. The lower sheave is
modified with a pinch guard kit to help prevent hand injuries.
Figure 8-6: Heavy duty nylon sheaves
Note
DNV Certification is provided by Det Norske Veritas, a Norwegian company. It is
an internationally known and recognized standard and, as such, is sometimes
requested by clients who may not feel comfortable with local certfications and
policies.
8.2.2.1 Sheave specifications and rite maintenance schedules

This section provides the ratings and specification tables as well as the RITE
Maintenance and Retirement schedules for each category of sheave.
Note
Detailed RITE maintenance procedures for sheaves can easily be found by
referring to Section 7.1 Rig-up Equipment Maintenance Manual 2nd Edition
(InTouch Content ID: 3012539).
Private
8.2.2.2 Aluminum sheave

Table 8-1: Aluminium Sheaves
She- Cable Sheave Part No. SWL Safe Proof Wt. App. Com-
ave Size Type (lbf) Cable Load (lbs) Ref. ments
Size Tension (lbf)
in- (lbf)
ches
36 0.52 SHV-M H014752 24,000 12,000 48,000 120 A For 7-52

cable
36 0.52 SHV-ML H315458 24,000 12,000 48,000 135 A SHV-M +

SHVK-B
36 0.46 SHV-W H025900 24,000 12,000 48,000 120 A For 7-47
Cable
36 0.46 SHV-WL H315459 24,000 12,000 48,000 135 A SHV-W +
SHVK-B
24 0.42/ SHV-G H008652 20,000 10,000 48,000 95 A For 7-42
0.46 and 7-46
cable
24 0.42/ SHV-GL H315455 20,000 10,000 48,000 110 A SHV-G +
0.46 SHVK-A
24 0.39 SHV-AC H109144 20,000 10,000 48,000 85 A For 7-39
cable
24 0.39 SHV H315457 20,000 10,000 48,000 100 A SHV-AC
-ACL +
SHVK-A
24 0.32 SHV-V H024968 20,000 10,000 48,000 85 A For 2-32
cable
24 0.32 SHV-VL H315456 20,000 10,000 48,000 100 A SHV-V +
SHVK-A
Private
Sheave Sheave Safe Proof Retirement Maximum life FIT 1 TRIM Quarterly Annual Annual Annual Five year refurbishment by
Size Type working Load schedule with (before and (monthly) Inspection Qcheck NDT recertification manufacturer will include
(inch) load (lbf) (years) refurbishment after every (recorded on inspection load test (lbf) 2xSWL proof load test of
Private
SWL (years) job) RITE) individual components, NDT
inspection, replace TX
components, load test to
SWL.
36 SHV-M 24,000 48,000 5 10 yes yes yes yes yes 24,000 by vendor only
SHV-ML
36 SHV-W 24,000 48,000 5 10 yes yes yes yes yes 24,000 by vendor only
SHV-WL
24 SHV-G 20,000 48,000 5 10 yes yes yes yes yes 20,000 by vendor only
SHV-GL
24 SHV-AC 20,000 48,000 5 10 yes yes yes yes yes 20,000 by vendor only
SHV-ACL
24 SHV-V 20,000 48,000 5 10 yes yes yes yes yes 20,000 by vendor only
SHV-VL
GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Rig-up equipment

Figure 8-7: Rite maintenance and retirement schedule for aluminum sheaves
8-20
8.2.2.3 DNV certified stainless steel sheaves

DNV Certified sheaves are also designed against the following temperature
criteria: Operating temperature range: –55 deg C to +75 deg C.
Thermal Shock: from –55 deg C to 25 deg C in two minutes and from 75 deg C
to 25 deg C in two minutes.
Table 8-2: DNV certified stainless steel sheaves
She- Cable Sheave Part No. SWL Safe Proof Weight App. Com-
Size Tension (lbf)
in- (lbf)
ches
36 0.46 Upper P570960 24,000 12,000 48,000 172 A For 7-46
Sheave cable
SWHD-
CA
36 0.46 Lower P574580 24,000 12,000 48,000 201 A For 7-46
Sheave cable
SWHD-
CB
13 0.32 SWHD-A P570940 11,000 5,500 12,000 40 A For 2-32
cable
Private
(inch) load SWL (lbf) (years) refurbishment after every (recorded on inspection load test (lbf) 2xSWL proof load test of
Private
(years) job) RITE) individual components, NDT
components, load test to SWL.
36 Upper 24,000 48,000 5 10 yes yes yes yes yes 24,000 by vendor only
Sheave
SHWD-CA
36 Lower 24,000 48,000 5 10 yes yes yes yes yes 24,000 by vendor only
sheave
SHWD-CB
steel DNV certified sheaves

13 SHWD-A 11,000 12,000 5 10 yes yes yes yes yes 11,000 by vendor only

Figure 8-8: Rite maintenance and retirement schedule for stainless
8-22
8.2.2.4 Nylon sheaves

Table 8-3: Nylon Sheaves Specification
She- Cable Sheave Part No. SWL Safe Proof Wt. App. Com-
Size Tension (lbf)
in- (lbf)
ches
36 0.52/ SHVC-LA T5011050 40,000 20,000 60,000 170 A Part of
0.53 SFT-401
36 0.42/ SHVC-KA T5011051 40,000 20,000 60,000 170 A Part of
0.46/ SFT-393
0.48
24 0.42/ SHVC-HA H713156 20,000 10,000 40,000 74 A For 7-42/
0.46 7-46 cable
24 0.39 SHVC-GA H713115 20,000 10,000 40,000 74 A For 7-39
cable
17 0.32 SHVC-EA H713155 10,000 5,000 20,000 34 A For 2-32
cable
17 0.25 SHVC-DA H713154 10,000 5,000 20,000 34 A For 1-25
cable
17 0.23 SHVC-CA H713114 10,000 5,000 20,000 34 A For 2-23
cable
14 0.22 SHVC-AA H353613 7,500 3,750 15,000 31 A For 2-23
cable
Private
(inch) load SWL (lbf) (years) refurbishment after every (recorded on inspection load test (lbf) 2xSWL proof load test of
Private
24 SHVC-HA 20,000 40,000 5 10 yes yes yes yes yes 20,000 by vendor only
24 SHVC-GA 20,000 40,000 5 10 yes yes yes yes yes 20,000 by vendor only
17 SHVC-EA 10,000 20,000 5 10 yes yes yes yes yes 10,000 by vendor only
17 SHVC-DA 10,000 20,000 5 10 yes yes yes yes yes 10,000 by vendor only
17 SHVC-CA 10,000 20,000 5 10 yes yes yes yes yes 10,000 by vendor only
14 SHVC-AA 7,500 15,000 5 10 yes yes yes yes yes 7,500 by vendor only
duty nylon composite sheaves


Figure 8-9: Rite maintenance and retirement schedule for standard
8-24
8.2.2.5 SWPT Crown block assembly
Note
Despite the SWL of the sheaves, the maximum recommended line tension with
the SWPT is 6,000 lbs.
Table 8-4: SWPT Crown Block Assemblies
Sheave Size Cable Size Part No. SWL (lbf) Proof Load App.
(inches) (lbf) Ref.
17 0.22/0.23 T5016027 12,000 24,000 A

17 0.25 T5016015 12,000 24,000 A
17 0.32 T5016028 12,000 24,000 A
17 0.39 T5016029 12,000 24,000 A
17 0.42/0.46 T5016030 12,000 24,000 A
Private
Sheave Safe Proof Retirement Maximum life FIT 1 TRIM Quarterly Annual Annual Annual Five year refurbishment by
Type working Load schedule with (before and (monthly) Inspection Qcheck NDT recertification manufacturer will include
load SWL (lbf) (years) refurbishment after every (recorded on inspection load test (lbf) 2xSWL proof load test of
Private
T5016027 12,000 24,000 5 10 yes yes yes yes yes 12,000 by vendor only

Figure 8-10: Rite maintenance and retirement schedule for swpt and dop-b sheaves
8-26
8.2.3 Bridle guards

Refer to Figure 8-11. Bridle guards are used on aluminum sheaves. The upper
sheave has a bridle guard to prevent the cable from jumping out. Bridle guards
are available for both 24-in and 36-in standard aluminum sheaves, and the 36-in
DNV certified stainless steel sheaves.
Figure 8-11: Bridle guards
8.2.4 Rig-up yoke

Refer to Figure 8-12. The Rig-Up Yoke provides a place to attach a tugger line or
chain instead of using a floor stand. Use of a rig-up yoke will prevent damage
to the sheave covers. The yoke can also be used to stabilize top sheaves
under high wind conditions. Two rig up yokes are available: one for standard
nylon sheaves and one for the heavy duty nylon sheaves that is part of SFT-393
and SFT-401 heavy duty kits.
Figure 8-12: Rig-Up yoke
8.2.5 Floor stand

Refer to Figure 8-13. Floor stands provide convenient support for the lower
nylon sheaves if the sheave cannot be supported with a yoke and tugger. They
can be used in conjunction with hand guards. There are two sizes available to
Private
accommodate 14-in, 17-in, and 24-in nylon sheaves. Heavy-duty 36-in nylon
sheaves must be rigged up with a yoke. The floor stands are painted safety
orange for high visibility.
Figure 8-13: Floor stand

8.2.6 Hand guards

Refer to Figure 8-14. The hand guard should be used when a running line can
possibly be touched by or come in contact with personnel working in the vicinity
of the rigging sheave. The wireline enters through one set of bushings and out
through the other set. This prevents the worker’s hands from being drawn into
the running sheave, if, for example, a running line is inadvertently grabbed
because a worker has slipped. Hand guards are available for 14-in, 17-in, 24-in
and 36-in sheaves, and bushings can be ordered separately.
Figure 8-14: Hand guards
8.2.7 Sheave hangers and adapters

There are several sheave hangers (commonly referred to as spades) and
adapters available, to suit the specific rig-up.
Private
Note
Sheave hangers should always be secured to the elevators with a suitably rated
safety sling, such as the high strength synthetic safety sling and corresponding
sling saver clevis.
See Figure 8-15. The sheave hanger is used with its shoulder resting on
the elevators and the upper sheave hanging from its lower eye. The sheave
hanger adapter (see below) is required when the sheave hanger is used with
the Aluminum sheaves. For the Nylon sheaves, the sheave hanger adapter is
not needed.
Figure 8-15: Sheave hanger
Sheave hangers are available in standard, heavy duty and large versions. The
heavy duty sheave hanger is part of the heavy duty kits SFT-393 and SFT-401,
but can be ordered separately. A heavy duty sheave hanger pin assembly must
be used with the heavy duty sheave hanger, which is also part of SFT-393 and
SFT-401.
The large sheave hanger can be used when the elevators on the rig are too big
for the standard sheave hanger and the rig is not equipped with a smaller set.
Sheave hanger adapter
Refer to Figure 8-16. The upper axle of the sheave hanger adapter joins with
the lower eye of the sheave hanger. The lower axle of the adapter joins with
the upper sheave. Sheave hanger adapters are only required with aluminium
sheaves. Originally, sheave hanger adapters were used in place of TD-Ks
(thereby being called dummy tension devices), when a TD-K was not being used
above the upper sheave. TD-Ks are now very rarely used in the field, and so
most locations opt to use the alternative sheave hanger (see below).
Private
Figure 8-16: Sheave hanger adapter

Alternative sheave hanger
Refer to Figure 8-17. Like the standard sheave hanger, the alternative sheave
hanger is used with its shoulder resting on the elevator and the upper sheave
hanging from its lower eye. The alternative sheave hanger is to be used with the
Schlumberger aluminum sheave wheels, and with a separate axle (see Figure
8-18 Adapter axle to connect alternative sheave hanger on nylon sheaves), can
also be used with the standard Nylon sheaves. This sheave hanger eliminates
the need for a sheave hanger adapter,and it costs substantially less when
compared to the current sheave hanger plus a sheave hanger adapter.
Figure 8-17: Alternative sheave hanger
Figure 8-18: Adapter axle to connect alternative sheave hanger on nylon sheaves
Private
8.2.7.1 Sheave hanger specifications and rite maintenance

schedules
Note
Detailed RITE maintenance procedures for Sheave Hangers can easily be found
by referring to Section 7.2 Rig-up Equipment Maintenance Manual 2nd Edition
(InTouch Content ID: 3012539)
Table 8-5: Sheave Hangers and Adapters

Item Part No. SWL Proof App. Comments

(lbf) Load Ref.
(lbf)
Standard H114228 24,000 48,000 B Must be used with sheave hanger
Sheave Hanger adapter for aluminium sheaves
Sheave Hanger H315626 24,000 48,000 B For aluminium sheaves
Adapter
Alternative H354451 24,000 48,000 B Must be used with axle H356822
Sheave Hanger for Nylon sheaves
Large Sheave H360034 24,000 48,000 B For large elevators – Must be used
Hanger with sheave hanger adapter for
aluminium sheaves
Heavy Duty H360021 40,000 80,000 B Part of SFT-393 and SFT-401
Sheave Hanger
Heavy Duty H360036 40,000 80,000 B For non-standard rig ups without
Sheave Adapter sheave hanger (e.g. TLC, fishing)
Private
Item Part Safe Proof Retirement FIT 1 (before TRIM Quarterly Annual Annual Annual
number working Load schedule and after (monthly) Inspection Qcheck NDT recertification
Private
load SWL (lbf) (years) every job) (recorded on inspection load test (lbf)
RITE)
Standard sheave hanger H114228 24,000 48,000 5 yes yes yes yes yes 48,000
Sheave hanger adapter H315626 24,000 48,000 5 yes yes yes yes yes 48,000
Alternative sheave hanger H354451 24,000 48,000 5 yes yes yes yes yes 48,000
Large sheave hanger H360034 24,000 48,000 5 yes yes yes yes yes 48,000
Heavy duty sheave hanger H360021 40,000 80,000 5 yes yes yes yes yes 80,000
Heavy duty sheave hanger H360036 40,000 80,000 5 yes yes yes yes yes 80,000
adapter

Figure 8-19: Rite maintenance and retirement policy for sheave hangers and adapters
8-32
8.2.8 Make-up plates and top hats

There are currently five vertical Make-Up Plates (commonly known as C-Plates)
available to the field and two varieties of “Top-Hat” (including the cone and mini
Make-Up Plates set).
Vertical Make-Up Plates (“C-Plates”)
Note
Although vertical Make-up plates are designed to operate safely under a given
safe working load, they are not tested or certified by the manufacturer. Should
certification be required, this should be done locally.
There are three vertical make-up plates available for 3-5/8-in or smaller tools:
SFT-129 (Standard Rating), SFT-159 (Heavy Duty Rating), and the mini make up
plate that is part of SFT-261 (see below). Heavy duty make-up plates must be
used for long heavy tool strings (e.g. TLC Supercombos). All vertical make-up
plates should be fitted with a rotating insert, which fits different sizes of logging
tools. See Figure 8-20.
Figure 8-20: Heavy duty make-up plate
Refer to Figure 8-21. A heavy duty make-up plate also exists for the MDT. When
rigging up an MDT it is necessary to have a regular make-up plate as well to
connect any 3-3/8-in or 3-5/8-in tools that may also be in the tool string.
Private
Figure 8-21: Mdt make-up plate
Top-Hats (Including Cone and Mini Make-Up Plate)
Refer to Figure 8-22. The SFT-261 cone and mini make-up plate package was
the first design concerned with moving the make-up point above the rig floor,
making it easier to screw the tool sections together. The kit is still used in some
locations, especially where the rig floors are slanted or have limited space. The
items can be ordered separately if required.
Private
Figure 8-22: Cone and mini make-up plate
Note
Although the cone and mini make-up plate are designed to operate safely under
a given safe working load, they are not tested or certified by the manufacturer.
Should certification be required, this should be done locally.
Refer to Figure 8-23. A top hat was also designed with the MDT in mind, but can
be used equally as well with other tool strings. The top hat is a better design than
the cone part of SFT-261. The slot in the side allows the top hat to be removed
from a tool string suspended by a cable or tugger with ease, and its added
height means that connecting tool joints is easier. The top hat also underwent
extensive static and dynamic testing to ensure it could withstand high impacts
on a regular basis.
Private
Figure 8-23: Top hat being load tested
8.2.8.1 Make-up plate and top-hat specifications and rite

maintenance schedules
Note
Detailed RITE maintenance procedures for Vertical Make-up plates and Top-Hats
can easily be found by referring to Section 7.3 Rig-up Equipment Maintenance
Manual 2nd Edition, (InTouch Content ID: 3012539).
Private
Table 8-6: Make-up plate and top-hat specifications
Type Part No. SWL Proof Load (lbf) App. Comments

(lbf) Ref.
Standard H142593 2,770 Not Done C For tools: 1 11/16, 2
Make-Up 1/2, 2 3/4, 3 3/8, 3 5/8
Plate: SFT-129
Heavy Duty H542225 3,500 Not Done C For tools: 1 11/16, 2
Make-Up 1/2, 2 3/4, 3 3/8, 3 5/8
Plate: SFT-159
Standard MDT H433970 3,000 Not Done C MDT Only
Make-Up Plate
Heavy Duty H434610 5,000 Not Done (SEE C MDT Only

MDT Make-Up MAINTENANCE –
Plate Top Hat
Load Testing)
Cone and H654063 3,500 Not Done C For tools: 1 11/16, 2
Mini-Plate: Mini-Plate 3/4, 3 3/8
SFT-261 separate:
H654062
Cone
separate:
H654043
Top Hat T1028010 5,000 Not Done (SEE C To be used in
MAINTENANCE– conjunction with
Top Hat vertical make-up
Load Testing) plate (not H654043)
Private
8.2.9
Item Part Safe Retirement FIT 1 TRIM Quarterly Annual Annual Annual
number working schedule (before and (monthly) Inspection Qcheck NDT recertification
load (years) after every (recorded inspection load test (lbf)
Private
SWL job) on RITE)
Standard Make-Up Plate: SFT-129 H142593 2,770 2 yes yes yes yes yes not required
Heavy Duty Make-Up Plate: SFT-159 H542225 3,500 2 yes yes yes yes yes not required
Standard MDT Make-Up Plate H433970 24,000 2 yes yes yes yes yes not required
Heavy Duty MDT Make-Up Plate H434610 5,000 2 yes yes yes yes yes not required
Tie-down chains
Cone and Mini-Plate: SFT-261 H654063 3,500 2 yes yes yes yes yes not required
Top Hat T1028010 5,000 2 yes yes yes yes yes not required

There are two types of tie-down chains available: standard and heavy duty.
Figure 8-24: Rite maintenance and retirement schedule for make-up plates and top-hats
8-38
Note
Always try to use the most suitable length of tie-down chain, and avoid tying
knots. Tying knots comprises the integrity of the chain and reduces its rating.
Refer to Figure 8-25. Standard duty tie-down chains are available in three
lengths: 10 ft., 20 ft. and 30 ft. They are used to anchor the lower sheave to the
rig’s superstructure and should be used with the appropriate clevis as given
later in this chapter.
Figure 8-25: Tie-down chain
Heavy Duty Tie-Down Chains
Refer to Figure 8-26. Heavy duty tie-down chains are part of the heavy duty
kits SFT-393 and SFT-401, but can be bought separately if required. They are
available in two sizes: 20 ft. and 30 ft. A second 20 ft tie down chain designed by
SRPC is also available. This chain is rated higher than the standard duty chains,
but below that of the chains just mentioned. The other difference between this
chain and the other chains is that links are not used to connect the chain to
the hook or master link.
Private
Figure 8-26: Heavy duty tie-down chain
8.2.9.1 Tie-down chain specifications and rite maintenance

schedules
Note
Detailed RITE maintenance procedures for tie-down chains can easily be found
by referring to Section 7.4 Rig-up Equipment Maintenance Manual 2nd Edition
(InTouch Content ID: 3012539)
Table 8-7: Tie-down chain specifications
Type Part No. SWL Proof Link Wt . App. Comments

(lbf) Load Dia. (lbs) Ref.
(lbf)
10-ft. H114394 13,000 26,000 0.5 28 D Standard use tie
standard tie down chain
Down Chain
down chain
down chain
20-ft. heavy P287292 22,000 44,000 0.625 80 D Heavy Duty Tie
duty tie down down Chain (
chain IPC - Paris)
20-ft. heavy H360022 47,700 95,400 1.0 245 D Part of Heavy
duty tie down Duty Kits
chain SFT-393 and
SFT-401
30-ft. heavy H360026 47,700 95,400 1.0 340 D Optional heavy
duty tie down duty tie-down
chain chain (NOT part
of SFT-393 or
SFT-401)
Private
Item Part Safe Retirement FIT 1 TRIM Quarterly Annual Annual NDT Annual
number working schedule (before and (monthly) Inspection Qcheck inspection recertification
Private
load (years) after every (recorded load test (lbf)
SWL job) on RITE)
10 ft standard Tie-Down Chain H114394 13,000 2 yes yes yes yes yes 26,000
20 ft heavy duty Tie-Down Chain P287292 22,000 2 yes yes yes yes yes 44,000
20 ft heavy duty Tie-Down Chain H360022 47,700 5 yes yes yes yes yes 95,400
30 ft heavy duty Tie-Down Chain H360026 47,700 5 yes yes yes yes yes 95,400

Figure 8-27: Rite maintenance and retirement schedule or tie-down chains
8-41
8.2.10 Lifting caps and thread protectors

Thread protectors are the caps that are supplied with all tools. Lifting caps must
be ordered separately from IPC and should be used for all rig ups. Both male
and female lifting caps now exist for all tool types.
Thread protectors
See Figure 8-28. Thread protectors (or end caps) are for protecting the threads
of the tools and sealing against the O-Rings to protect the electronics against
moisture and water.
Figure 8-28: Thread protector for 3-3/8-in tool
Note
End caps are designed for 2000 lbf SWL. If they are to be used as lifting
equipment, they should be tested quarterly and junked after two years. See
the NAM policy in QHSE for more information. SFT-269 was designed to be
used with the tension device calibrator for testing thread protectors. See the
Maintenance chapter for more information on pull testing the thread protectors.
Now that lifting caps are available, field personnel should avoid using
thread protectors for lifting tools.
Lifting caps
Refer to Figure 8-29 and Figure 8-30. Lifting caps are over-engineered to
account for fatigue induced failures as well as load induced failures. All lifting
caps can be found in SFT-402. Both male and female lifting caps are available
for all tools and should be used for all rig ups. At least one female lifting cap for
every size of tool is required at the well site. Male caps are provided for rig-ups
where tools are lifted on to the drill floor shackled together, and for load testing
(whereby a male and female cap are screwed together and pulled to the testing
Private
load). They should be lifted with the appropriate shackle (anchor shackle), or
dual hook device (heavy duty) given later in this chapter. A lifting clamp for
1-11/16 tool is also available as part of SFT-402.
Figure 8-29: Female lifting cap

Figure 8-30: Male lifting cap
Lifting subs
Refer to Figure 8-31. Lifting subs are available for 3-3/8-in. and 3-5/8-in. tools.
They are very similar to the lifting caps, but have an extended shell so that the
tool can be lifted by the travelling block. This can be useful for long tools where
the tugger is not positioned directly above the rotary table, or off line rig ups.
Figure 8-31: Liftings sub
Private
8.2.10.1 Lifting caps, subs and thread protectors: specifications

and rite maintenance schedules
Note
Detailed RITE maintenance procedures for Lifting Caps, Subs and Thread
Protectors can easily be found by referring to Section 7.5 Rig-up Equipment
Maintenance Manual 2nd Edition, (InTouch Content ID: 3012539).
Table 8-8: Specifications for Lifting Caps, Subs, and Thread Protectors
Type Part No. SWL Proof App. Comments

(lbf) Load Ref.
(lbf)
Female 1 11/16-in mono pin T5018904 12,000 24,000 E Lifting Cap
Male 1 11/16-in mono pin T5018906 12,000 24,000 E Lifting Cap
Female 1 11/16-in 22 pin T5018900 12,000 24,000 E Lifting Cap
Male 1 11/16-in 22 pin T5018902 12,000 24,000 E Lifting Cap
Female 2 1/2-in RST T5018908 12,000 24,000 E Lifting Cap
Male 2 1/2-in RST T5018910 12,000 24,000 E Lifting Cap
Female 2 1/2-in T5017910 12,000 24,000 E Lifting Cap
Male 2 1/2-in T5017911 12,000 24,000 E Lifting Cap
Female 3-in T5017908 12,000 24,000 E Lifting Cap
Male 3-in T5017909 12,000 24,000 E Lifting Cap
Female 3 3/8-in H357041 12,000 24,000 E Lifting Cap
Male 3 3/8-in H357042 12,000 24,000 E Lifting Cap
Female MDT T5014177 12,000 24,000 E Lifting Cap
Bale for Female MDT T5014176 12,000 24,000 E Bale
Male MDT T5018303 12,000 24,000 E Lifting Cap
Bale for Male MDT T5014178 12,000 24,000 E Bale
Female VSII T5018918 12,000 24,000 E Lifting Cap
Male VSII T5018920 12,000 24,000 E Lifting Cap
Female 3 3/8-in Lifting Sub H357043 12,000 24,000 E Lifting Sub
Female 3 5/8-in Lifting Sub T5015635 12,000 24,000 E Lifting Sub
Private
Type Part Safe Proof Retirement FIT 1 TRIM Quarterly Annual Annual Annual
number working Load schedule (before and (monthly) Inspection Qcheck NDT recertification
Private
load (lbf) (years) after every (recorded inspection load test (lbf)
SWL job) on RITE)
Female 1 11/16" mono pin T5018904 3,500 7,000 5 yes yes yes yes yes 7,000
Male 1 11/16" mono pin T5018906 3,500 7,000 5 yes yes yes yes yes 7,000
Female 1 11/16" 22 pin T5018900 3,500 7,000 5 yes yes yes yes yes 7,000
Male 1 11/16" 22 pin T5018902 3,500 7,000 5 yes yes yes yes yes 7,000
Female 2 1/2" RST T5018908 12,000 24,000 5 yes yes yes yes yes 24,000
subs and thread protectors

Male 2 1/2" RST T5018910 12,000 24,000 5 yes yes yes yes yes 24,000
Female 2 1/2" T5017910 12,000 24,000 5 yes yes yes yes yes 24,000
Male 2 1/2" T5017911 12,000 24,000 5 yes yes yes yes yes 24,000
Female 3" T5017908 12,000 24,000 5 yes yes yes yes yes 24,000
Male 3" T5017909 12,000 24,000 5 yes yes yes yes yes 24,000
Female 3 3/8" H357041 12,000 24,000 5 yes yes yes yes yes 24,000
Male 3 3/8" H357042 12,000 24,000 5 yes yes yes yes yes 24,000
Female MDT T5014177 12,000 24,000 5 yes yes yes yes yes 24,000
Bale for Female MDT T5014176 12,000 24,000 5 yes yes yes yes yes 24,000

Male MDT T5018303 12,000 24,000 5 yes yes yes yes yes 24,000
Bale for Male MDT T5014178 12,000 24,000 5 yes yes yes yes yes 24,000
Figure 8-32: Rite maintenance and retirement schedule for lifting caps,
Female VSII T5018918 12,000 24,000 5 yes yes yes yes yes 24,000
Male VSII T5018920 12,000 24,000 5 yes yes yes yes yes 24,000
Female 3 3/8" Lifting Sub H357043 12,000 24,000 5 yes yes yes yes yes 24,000
Female 3 5/8" Lifting Sub T5015635 12,000 24,000 5 yes yes yes yes yes 24,000
8-45
8.2.11 Slings
There are two types of slings currently available: standard wire rope slings and
synthetic slings.
Note
Please read the chapters for slings concerning Operations Procedures and
QHSE in the Rig-up Equipment Maintenance Manual 2nd Edition (InTouch
Content ID: 3012539) before usage. They detail different sling configurations,
specific safety considerations and best practices.
Wire rope fishing sling
Refer to Figure 8-33. The Fishing Sling is a 1-in diameter, 14-ft. long wire rope.
It is usually used to hang the upper sheave from an A-Frame or beam in the
derrick during TLC operations or fishing, where the elevators are being used. It
is also be used to secure the sheave hanger in the elevators in case the elevator
opens. When ordered, the fishing sling comes with a DNV certified fishing clevis
supplied through IPC. Both items can be ordered separately if required. The wire
rope fishing sling is not being included in fishing kits ordered from IPC. It has
been replaced with a synthetic fishing sling.
Note
When using the wire rope fishing sling as the primary strength member to
hang the sheave during special operation, bear in mind the SWL of the sling.
It is best to use the sling in a “basket-type” configuration to optimize strength
characteristics. More details of sling configurations and set-ups can be found
in the Operations chapter of the Rig-up Equipment Maintenance Manual 2nd
Edition (InTouch Content ID: 3012539).
Figure 8-33: Wire rope fishing sling
Private
Synthetic slings
Refer to Figure 8-34. Currently, five types of synthetic sling are available. Four
of these are classed as fishing slings, and the other one is a safety sling for
securing the sheave hanger adapter to the elevators. This sling is made from
the combination of Kevlar and Spectra (the strongest material known to man)
that forms two continuous independent load bearing paths. It is also constructed
with two covers of different materials and colors. This provides an early warning
system, where exposing the bottom cover (red), if the top cover is cut, indicating
removal from service. The fishing slings are to be used with a Kevlar wear cover.
The wear covers can be ordered separately if required, but are provided with
the fishing slings.
Note
Currently, if SFT-157 (fishing kit) is ordered, it is supplied with a sling saver
clevis, but not a synthetic sling. Ensure that when a fishing kit is ordered that
a synthetic sling is ordered separately. The wire rope sling and shackle is still
supplied with the fishing kit.
Figure 8-34: Synthetic fishing sling
Note
When using synthetic fishing slings, always ensure that the correct sling saver
clevis is used and the kevlar wear pad is properly fitted. The safety sling (which
does not have a kevlar wear pad) should always be used with the sling saver
clevis. In both cases, the sling saver clevis must be ordered separately from IPC.
8.2.11.1 Slings specifications and rite maintenance
Note
Detailed RITE maintenance procedures for slings can easily be found by
Private
Table 8-9: Specifications for slings
Type Part No. Length SWL (lbf) Proof App. Comments

(ft) Vertical/ Load Ref.
Choker/ (lbf)
Basket
Wire Rope H045080 14 17,000/ 40,000 F Comes
Fishing Sling 12,600/ fitted with
34,000 anchor
shackle
B024264
Synthetic T5011078 20 50,000/ 100,000 F Must be
Fishing Sling T5018191 40,000/ used with
Replacement 100,000 Sling Saver
Shackle
Kevlar Wear
Pad
Kevlar Wear Shackle
Pad
Kevlar Wear Shackle
Pad
Kevlar Wear Shackle
Pad
Safety Sling 32,000/ used with
60,000 Sling Saver
Shackle
Private
Type Part SWL Proof Retirement FIT 1 TRIM Quarterly Annual Annual Annual
number Vertical Load schedule (before and (monthly) Inspection Qcheck NDT recertification
Private
Choker (lbf) (years) after every (recorded inspection load test (lbf)
Basket job) on RITE)
20 ft. Synthetic Fishing Sling T5011078 50,000 100,000 2 yes yes yes yes no 100,000
40,000
100,000
40,000
100,000
40,000
100,000
40,000
100,000
4 ft. Synthetic Safety Sling T5011075 40,000 80,000 2 yes yes yes yes no 80,000
32,000
60,000
Figure 8-35: Rite maintenance and retirement schedule for slings

8-49
8.2.12 Shackles
There are three types of shackles (or clevises) available through IPC. One was
designed specifically for the aluminum sheaves, and the other two are standard
Crosby shackles. This section does not cover those sheave shackles that are
generally not moved, such as those connected to Nylon sheaves.
Note
Shackles should use bolts instead of pins. A safety pin should also be used
to keep the nut in place. Torque from movement is then much less likely to
unscrew the bolt. Please read the chapters for shackles concerning Operational
Procedures and QHSE in the Rig-up Equipment Maintenance Manual 2nd

Edition (InTouch Content ID: 3012539) before usage.
Clevis and machine bolt for aluminium sheaves
Refer to Figure 8-36. The Clevis is used to attach the lower sheave to the
tie-down chain, and (depending on the set-up) to connect the upper sheave to
the fishing shackle. The clevis must be fitted with both a lock nut and safety pin.
Only this clevis and machine bolt set should be used with the aluminum sheaves.
They are supplied with the sheaves, but can be ordered separately if required.
Figure 8-36: Clevis and machine bolt for aluminium sheaves
Anchor shackle
Refer to Figure 8-37. The anchor shackle is supplied with the wire rope fishing
sling, but can also be ordered separately. It should not be used with synthetic
fishing slings. As well as a standard piece of fishing equipment, the anchor
shackle is also the standard shackle to be connected to lifting caps.
Private
Figure 8-37: Anchor shackle for wire rope fishing sling and lifting caps
Sling saver shackle
Refer to Figure 8-38. The sling saver shackle should be used for both the 8,
12, 16 and 20 ft. synthetic fishing slings and the 4 ft. safety sling at all times.
Currently, it must be ordered separately to the synthetic slings.
Figure 8-38: Sling saver shackle
8.2.12.1 Shackles specifications and rite maintenance schedules
Note
Detailed RITE maintenance procedures for Shackles can easily be found by
Private
Table 8-10: Specifications for Shackles
Type Part No. SWL Proof App. Comments

(lbf) Load Ref.
(lbf)
Clevis and Machine H008254 24,000 48,000 G For Use with Aluminium
Bolt: B025696 Sheaves
Lock Nut for Clevis H040997 Comes as standard with
Safety Pin for Clevis H008254
H008636 Comes as standard with
Bolt for Clevis H008254
Comes as standard with
H008254
Anchor Shackle B024264 26,400 52,800 G For wire rope fishing sling
(12T) and certified lifting caps
Sling Saver Shackle T5011079 45,100 112,750 G To be used with all synthetic
(20.5T) slings
Private
Type Part SWL (lbf) Proof Retirement FIT 1 (before TRIM Quarterly Annual Annual Annual
number Load schedule and after (monthly) Inspection Qcheck NDT recertification
Private
(lbf) (years) every job) (recorded inspection load test (lbf)
on RITE)
Clevis and Machine Bolt H008254 24,000 48,000 5 yes yes yes yes yes 48,000
Anchor Shackle B024264 26,400 52,800 5 yes yes yes yes yes 52,800
Sling Saver Shackle T5011079 45,100 112,750 5 yes yes yes yes yes 112,750

Figure 8-39: Rite maintenance and retirement schedules for shackles
8-53
8.2.13 Goosenecks
Refer to Figure 8-40: Gooseneck. The gooseneck should be slipped over the
cable head if laying down a tool string with the head attached, or picking up a
complete horizontal tool string. The gooseneck creates a smooth bending radius
for the cable. This prevents cable damage at the head when lifting or lowering
tools.
Figure 8-40: Gooseneck
8.2.14 Dual hook devices

Refer to Figure 8-41. The dual hook device is for hooking tools together prior
to rigging them up to increase the speed of rig up. The tools can be lifted up
vertically together above the rotary table and then screwed together. Two dual
hook devices are available: a standard duty (SFT-223) and heavy duty (heavy
duty dual hook device is part of lifting cap set SFT-402).
Note
The standard duty dual hook device cannot be used with the 3-3/8-in certified
lifting caps as it is physically too small and under rated. This device must only
be used with standard thread protectors or the 1 1/16-in certified lifting caps.
Please use only the 12000 lb dual hook device for the large (>1 11/16-in)
SFT-402 certified lifting caps. Only one dual hook device can be used at any
time. Please read the recommendations for rigging up tools shackled together in
the Operations chapter for lifting caps, shackles and dual hook device prior to
attempting to rig up in this way.
Private
Figure 8-41: Standard duty dual hook device
8.2.14.1 Dual hook device specifications and rite maintenance

schedules
Note
Detailed RITE maintenance procedures for dual hook devices can easily be
found by referring to Section 7.9 Rig-up Equipment Maintenance Manual 2nd
Edition (InTouch Content ID: 3012539).
Table 8-11: Specification for Dual Hook Devices
Type Part No. SWL Proof Length App. Comments

(lbf) Load (inches) Ref.
(lbf)
Standard H441540 4,300 8,600 23 I For use with Maxpro
Duty obselete. New tools 1 11/16-in
part number certified lifting caps
tba. and thread protectors
only
Heavy T5018340 12,000 24,000 24 I For use with equivalent
Duty rated (12000lb)
certified lifting caps
in SFT-402 only
Private
Type Part SWL Proof Retirement FIT 1 TRIM Quarterly Annual Annual Annual
number (lbf) Load schedule (before and (monthly) Inspection Qcheck NDT recertification
(lbf) (years) after every (recorded on inspection load test (lbf)
Private
job) RITE)
Standard Duty Dual Hook device H441540 4,300 8,600 2 yes yes yes yes yes 8,600
Heavy Duty Dual Hook device T5018340 12,000 24,000 5 yes yes yes yes yes 24,000

Figure 8-42: Rite maintenance and retirement schedules for dual hook devices
8-56
8.2.15 Top drive compensating sheave adapter and shear

pin assembly
Note
The TDCSA and shear pin assemblies described in this manual are manufactured
by an independent contractor in Aberdeen, UK. These assemblies have been
used successfully in the North Sea for many years where Clients and Rigs
require the Wireline company to provide the parts (in many locations, the rig or
Client supply the TDCSA and shear pin assembly if it is used). They are not
ordered through IPC. See the Specifications Chapter for details on ordering
TDCSAs and shear pin assemblies.
TDCSA
Note
Please read the Operating Instructions in the Rig-up Equipment Maintenance
Manual 2nd Edition (InTouch Content ID: 3012539) for the TDCSA and shear
pin assembly before using these devices. They should not be used for high
tension logging.
Refer to Figure 8-43. The TDCSA is used on semi-submersible rigs to

compensate the wireline in conjunction with the rigs compensation system. It
is connected to the elevators in the same fashion as a sheave hanger, secured
with a safety sling. The upper sheave is then hung from the lower eye using the
recommended clevis. A large, heavy duty compensating line is then connected
from the rig’s superstructure, up and through the sheave of the raised TDCSA
and down to a stronghold on the riser below the slip joints. The compensation
line is provided by the rig.
Private
Figure 8-43: Top drive compensating sheave adapter
Shear pin assembly
Refer to Figure 8-44. The shear pin assembly is used to connect the
compensating line to the rig superstructure. The shear pin is a safety device to
avoid excessive loads caused by high rig heave being placed upon the TDCSA.
It is recommended to use the shear pin at all times, especially in rough conditions
where there is a great amount of rig heave. There are two pins available,
designed to shear at different loads.
Figure 8-44: Shear pin assembly
Private
8.2.15.1 Specifications for top drive compensating sheave adapter

and shear pin assembly
Note
Detailed RITE maintenance procedures for TDCSAs can easily be found by
Table 8-12: Specifications for TDCSA

Item Part SWL on SWL on SWL on SWL on App. Comments

Number T-Bar T-Bar Sheave Lower Ref.
(lbf) Padeye (lbf) Padeye
(lbf)
TDCSA TDCSA 46,200 9,900 46,200 24,200 J Not
(21T) (4.5T) (21T) (11T) ordered
through
IPC
Table 8-13: Specifications for Shear Pin Assembly
Item Part No. Shearing App. Comments

Load Ref.
(lbf)
Red Shear Pin with RSL 80KN 17,600 J Not ordered through
assembly IPC
Yellow Shear Pin RSL 70KN 15,500 J Not ordered through
with assembly IPC
Spare Red Pins RSL 80 KNRP 17,600 J 10 per pack
Spare Yellow Pins RSL 70KNRP 15,500 J 10 per pack
Private
TDCSA sub Part SWL Proof Retirement FIT 1 TRIM Quarterly Annual Annual Annual
components number (lbf) Load schedule (before and (monthly) Inspection Qcheck NDT recertification
Private
(lbf) (years) after every (recorded on inspection load test (lbf)
job) RITE)
T-Bar TDCSA 46,200 92,400 5 yes yes yes yes yes 92,400
T-Bar Padeye TDCSA 9,900 19,800 5 yes yes yes yes yes 19,800
Sheave TDCSA 46,200 92,400 5 yes yes yes yes yes 92,400
Lower Padeye TDCSA 24,200 48,400 5 yes yes yes yes yes 48,400
Figure 8-45: Rite maintenance and retirement schedule for tdcsa

8-60
8.2.16 Line wipers

There are two kinds of line wiper commonly used in the field for general
purposes. These are an air line wiper Figure 8-46 and a pig tail line wiper.
Bushings for the air line wiper can be ordered separately. The pig tail line wiper
is not ordered through IPC. See sections 4.11, 6.11 and 7.11 in the Rig-up
Equipment Maintenance Manual 2nd Edition (InTouch Content ID: 3012539) for
specifications, operations and maintenance details.
Figure 8-46: Air line wiper
Private
SRPC Doc-TBT\SRPC Doc-TBT\275253781\2.4\Release Date: 16-Nov-2006\EDMS UID: 275253781\Produced: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50 8-62 GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Rig-up equipment 8-62
Intentionally Blank
Private
9-i GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Logging Units 9-i
9 Logging Units
9.1 Common logging units ________________________________________ 9-1
9.1.1 Land units ___________________________________________________ 9-2
9.1.1.1 Optimum Service Land Carrier (OSLC-A/B) ________________ 9-2
9.1.1.2 General description _______________________________________ 9-2
9.1.1.3 Specifications ____________________________________________ 9-3
9.1.1.4 OSLC-E Optimum service land carrier, 6x4 (enhanced)
OSLC-E _________________________________________________ 9-4
9.1.1.5 Optimum Service Land Carrier 6x6 (OSLC-F), front wheel assisted
high mobility _____________________________________________ 9-8
9.1.1.6 Medium Service Land Carrier (MSLC-BA), MAXIS Express _ 9-12
9.1.1.7 Shallow Well Perforating Truck, (SWPT-GB ) IHC-7300 4x4
chassis _________________________________________________ 9-15

9.1.2 Offshore logging units _______________________________________ 9-18
9.1.2.1 Offshore Unit electric drive (OSU-ME ) ____________________ 9-19
9.1.2.2 Offshore Norsok-Compliant cabin (ONCC-A ) _____________ 9-20
9.1.2.3 Winch Drum Drive Skid (WDDS-B), Zone 1, steel frame ____ 9-22
9.1.2.4 Electro-Hydraulic Power Skid (EHPS-D/E), Zone 1, Steel
frame ___________________________________________________ 9-28
9.2 Maintenance policy ____________________________________________ 9-32
9.2.1 Content overview ___________________________________________ 9-33
9.2.2 RITE program ______________________________________________ 9-33
9.2.2.1 FIT _____________________________________________________ 9-33
9.2.2.2 TRIM ___________________________________________________ 9-34
9.2.2.3 Q-Check ________________________________________________ 9-34
9.2.3 Tips for successful maintenance _____________________________ 9-34
9.2.4 General truck and unit FIT ___________________________________ 9-34
9.3 Operator qualification _________________________________________ 9-35
9.3.1 Overview ___________________________________________________ 9-35
9.3.2 Safe winch operating procedures ____________________________ 9-37
Private
SRPC Doc-TBT\SRPC Doc-TBT\275253781\2.4\Release Date:16-Nov-2006\EDMS UID: 275253781\Produced: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50 9-ii GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Logging Units 9-ii
Intentionally Blank
Private
9-1 GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Logging Units 9-1
9 Logging Units TOPS, SRPC, Logging, Units, Logging Units
This chapter provides an overview of the logging units commonly in use in the
field and the maintenance program in place to ensure their proper function.
This section also provides a brief overview of Unit Operator Qualification and
safe winch driving guidelines.
Student objectives
the following:
• List the purposes of the various logging units in this chapter.

• Explain the need for Offshore Modular logging units and list the various
modules available.
• Explain the difference between Zone 1 and Zone 2. Give examples of logging
units for use in each zone.
• Explain the maintenance policy in place for wireline logging units.
• Explain the process for operator driver qualification in Schlumberger.
• Explain the safe winch operating procedures outlined in the Safe Winch
Operations Placard.
References
• InTouch Support: Logging Units Reference Pages, content ID# 3264711.

• InTouch Support: Driving (Land Transport) Reference Page, content ID#
3511706.
• OSU-F/OSU-ME Operations and Maintenance Manuals, content ID#
3258452.
• Integrated Productivity and Conveyance (IPC) website,
http://www.hub.slb.com/index.cfm?id=id167040
9.1 Common logging units

This section provides an overview of common land based and offshore
logging units used in the field today. Information provided for the following
units is taken directly from IPC Product data sheets. For more details
Private
regarding the logging units covered (and not covered) in this section please
visit the Integrated Productivity & Conveyance Center (IPC) website at
http://www.hub.slb.com/index.cfm?id=id1118687.
Note
Selected cable drums are listed in the specifications table for each logging unit.
To view the product data sheets for all current cable drums, please refer to the
IPC Data Sheet web page at http://www.hub.slb.com/index.cfm?id=id1119410.
9.1.1 Land units

9.1.1.1 Optimum Service Land Carrier (OSLC-A/B)
Figure 9-1: Optimum Service Land Carrier (OSLC-A/B)
9.1.1.2 General description

The Optimum Service Land Carrier (OSLC) is an integrated full service logging
carrier, with similar visual characteristics to the MSLC. Emphasis has been
placed on minimizing the overall size of the truck, and at the same time the
OSLC provides full cable capacity. This characteristic is achieved by allowing
the use of existing large capacity drums (WDR-42 and WDR-57) as well as
excellent off-road capabilities through its 6x4 drive configuration, which allows
differential locking traction.
Private
The OSLC is designed to perform full service operations from an intermediate

size vehicle while presenting a small and efficient image. The cabin layout is
based on the MSLC overall design, with both the winch operator and engineer
facing the rig.
9.1.1.3 Specifications
Table 9-1: Operating Specifications for OSLC-A/B
Overall Length 340-in

Front Axle 14,900 lbm
Weight balance1
Rear Axles 32,000 lbm
-30,000 ft of 7-46 (WDR-42)
Cable capacity
-20,000 ft of 7-46 and 18,000 ft 2-23 (WDR-57)
Cable speed 70 to 37,000 ft/hr @ full-drum, continuously variable
Pull on Line 12,000 lbf @ full drum
Collector COL-ZA for both hepta and monocable applications
WDR mounting Standard pillow blocks
Tension Limiter (TLC mode) 1000-5000 lbf continuously variable torque on drum
Power Configuration Two PTOs driven from main engine (winch and generator)
Cummins M11 CELECT Plus, 310 hp (OSLC-AA) or 305 hp
Engine .
(OSLC-BA)
Hydraulic system Closed-loop servo pumps and auxiliary supply pump
Winch Controls All electrical, 12 VDC from a 24 V to 12 V converter
16.5 kW 240/120 VAC-60 Hz single-phase (can be configured
Generator
for straight 120 VAC-60Hz shop power).
Fuel 150 gal fuel tank
Cabin Three-seat 8-ft x 8-ft cabin for Modular Configuration MAXIS
MCM-Exploration with single CRT monitor, one TGRP, one
Instrumentation CLIP, WAFE-AC/DC. (Engineer’s area will offer 2 large flat
panel displays when they become commercially available)
Two independent wall- mounted, electrically driven Air
Conditioners.
Air conditioning
One optional A/C with engine-driven compressor for extreme
conditions.
Standard equipment Storage, PDP, CSS, module rack, two chairs, client bench.
1
With WDR-57 ‘split drum’, 20 kft 7-46 + 18 kft of 2-23 cable, 2500# downhole tools, 3150 lb storage, 150
gallons fuel, and 2 people. Winch drive compatible with WDR-30, WDR-42 or WDR-57 (heavy-duty split drum
with large cable capacity), hydrostatic transmission, conventional chain and sprocket drive.
Private
Table 9-2: Chassis and Associated Equipment
Chassis European Kenworth 6x4 (manufactured by Paccar/Foden)

-6 slots @ 5-1/2 in. dia. x 17 ft – 10 in. long
-2 slots @ 3-5/8 in. dia. x 17 ft – 10 in. long
Tool storage
-2 slots @ 3-5/8 in. dia x 19 ft – 4 in. long
-2 slots @ 3-5/8 in. dia x 19 ft – 11-1/4 in. long
Stairs Side entrance stair and rear step
Exterior storage Rear boxes for nuclear sources and side storage boxes
Spare Tire Provided on non-NAM carriers
Note
To view the complete OSLC-A/B data sheet please, refer to the IPC website at
http://www.hub.slb.com/index.cfm?id=id1118687.
To view the OSLC-A/B Maintenance Manual please, refer to the OSLC-A/B
Reference Page, content ID# 3258436, in InTouch.
9.1.1.4 OSLC-E Optimum service land carrier, 6x4 (enhanced)

OSLC-E
Figure 9-2: OSLC-EC, Foden 6x4 alpha model, euro certified, right hand drive version
Private
General description
The OSLC-E, or OSLC Enhanced, is an evolution of the full service logging

operations OSLC-A/B product range, carrying forward its compact image. The
OSLC-E provides more cable drums and equipment storage options.
The truck is based upon the Foden Alpha chassis model with sleeper cab.
Left-hand drive (LHD) and right-hand drive (RHD) models are available.
The winch deck can be reconfigured to address different markets and/or

applications. An Open Hole and a Cased Hole module are currently available,
but more options could be developed in the future. The winch modules can be
easily exchanged locally at any time during the lifetime of the unit.
Specifications
Table 9-3: General Operating Specifications
Overall Length 8740 mm (344 inches)

Overall Width 2440 mm (96 inches)
Overall Height (exhaust stack) 3950 mm (155.5 inches)
Lowest Ground Clearance
Below hydraulic pump skid: 375 mm (14.75 inches)
Point
Vehicle Weight Capacity GVW: 26,500 kg (57,300 lb)
Typical Overall Weight (Cased
Hole Winch Module example);
CHWM, 6,000 m (20,000 ft)
Front Axle: 6,900 kg (15,200 lbs)
of 7-46 (WDR-62) + 7,300
Rear Axle(s): 16,000 kg (35,300 lbs)
m (24,000 ft.) of 2-32 cable
Empty WDR-61 weight: 330 kg (728 lbs)
(WDR-61), 500kg (1,100 lbs.)
Empty WDR-62 weight: 1,650 kg (3,640 lbs)
of downhole tools, 400kg (880
lbs.) of storage, 570ltr (150
gal.) fuel, and 2 people.
Typical Overall Weight (Open
OHWM, 9,000 m (29,500 ft) of Front Axle: 7,350 kg (16,200 lbs)
7-46 (WDR-42C), 500kg (1,100 Rear Axle(s): 15,000 kg (33,100 lbs)
lbs.) of downhole tools, 400kg Empty WDR-42C weight: 1,970 kg (4,340 lbs)
(880 lbs.) of storage, 570ltr
(150 gal.) fuel, and 2 people.
Single PTO driven from main engine (winch and generator)
Power Configuration
via transmission (gearbox)
Hydraulics Closed-loop servo pumps and auxiliary supply pump
Point
Private
4-22kN (900-4,950 lbf) continuously adjustable line tension

Tension Limiter TLS mode:
by operator’s control of drum torque.
Winch Controls All electrical, 24 VDC with Smart Winch Control Terminal
28 kW (22kVA) 120/208 VAC-60 Hz three-phase (PDP will
Generator
accept straight 120 VAC-60Hz shop power).
Four-seat, 2.45 x 2.45 m (8’x8’) cabin for Modular
Configuration MAXIS Instrument cabin capabilities
Instrument Cabin
MCM-Exploration with three flat panel displays, one TGRP,
one CLIP, WAFE-AC/DC.
2 slots @ 140 mm dia. x 6300mm long (5 1/2-in. dia. x 20.7
ft.)
Downhole Tool Storage 10 slots @ 92 mm dia. x 6300mm long (3 5/8-in. dia. x 20.7
ft.)
5 slots @ 64 mm dia. x 6300mm long (2 1/2-in. dia. x 20.7 ft.)
Entrance stairs Side entrance stair and rear step integrated in bumper
Exterior storage Rear boxes for radioactive sources and side storage boxes
Three independent roof recess-mounted, electrically driven
Air Conditioners. Coleman Sea Mach Marine model 8533
Air conditioning type and (110 VAC).
capacity 4 kwh (13,500 BTU) cooling; 1.4 kwh (5,500 Btu) heating
Maximum operating ambient temperature: 53 degC (128
degF) at 88% humidity
Table 9-4: Abridged Chassis Specifications
Foden 6x4 Alpha II model A36R (manufactured by

Chassis model
Paccar/Foden)
195.5 inches (5000 mm); 90 inches (2260 mm) bogie
Wheel base
centerline to end of frame.
US EPA vehicles:
Engine type, power and torque Cummins ISM-340E, 50-State diesel engine, turbocharged
(OSLC-EA) Power Rating: 340 BHP @ 1800 rpm
Max Torque: 1695 Nm @ 1100-1400 rpm
Euro2 vehicles:
Engine type, power and torque Cummins ISM-345-E, Euro3 diesel engine, turbocharged
(OSLC-EB/EC) Power Rating: 340 BHP @ 1800 rpm
Max Torque: 1710 Nm @ 1200 rp
Operating temperature range From –45 degC (-49 degF) to 55 degC (131 degF)
Electrical system 24 VDC, negative grounded; Two 12VDC batteries in series
Engine brake Yes; Jacobs engine exhaust brake
Alternator 24 VDC, 80 A
Fuel Tank 620 liter (163 gal) capacity fuel tank; Electrical Fan fuel cooler
Transmission (Gearbox) ZF 16s181 Overdrive Synchro-mesh
Clutch Fuller-Spicer 17-in single plate
Power-Take-Off (PTO) ZF N221/10
Private
PACCAR 156N; 7,500kg, Taper-leaf springs with shock

Front Axle & Suspension absorbers
Power Steering TRW

Front: Knorr-Bremse SB7000 430 mm dia x 45 mm Disc
brakes
Rear: Meritor, 420 mm x 200 mm S-cam, non-asbestos
Brakes linings; automatic slack adjusters with stroke indicators
(FMVSS-USA)
ABS WABCO in all wheels
Auxiliary/parking brake in all wheels
Front: 315/80R22.5 Michelin XYZ tubeless radial tires (Qty 2)
22.5 x 9 ALCOA Aluminum (Aluminium) Disc wheels
Tires (Tyres) and Wheels
Rear: 11R22.5, Michelin XDY tubeless tires (Qty 8) 22.5 x
8.25 ALCOA Aluminum (Aluminium) Disc wheels
Maximum regulated speed 67 mph (108 kph); limited by legal limits in operating country
Maximum engine speed 1,800 rpm
Minimum engine speed in PTO
1,100 rpm
mode
Table 9-5: Open Hole Module Operating Specifications
Compatible with WDR-30, WDR-51, WDR-42, WDR-42C,

Winch Drive WDR-57 and WDR-64, traditional chain & sprocket drive with
DDDS
WDR mounting Two standard pillow blocks for chain drive
Winch brakes Spring applied, hydraulically released (SAHR) band brakes
Maximum cable tension (line
64 kN (12,000 lbf) at full drum; 20,000 lbf @ half drum
pull)
Nominal cable speed 60 to 38,000 ft/hr @ half-drum, continuously variable (DDDS)
9,144 m (30,000 ft) of 7-46 (on WDR-42C) 5,730 m (18,800
Nominal Cable Capacity
ft) of 7-46 and 6,800 m (25,600 ft) of 2-23 (WDR-64).
Table 9-6: Cased Hole Module Operating Specifications
Compatible with WDR-62 and WDR-61 drums only.

Winch Drive
hydrostatic transmission, direct drive with DDDS
WDR mounting One standard pillow block, Powerwheel at the direct drive side
Winch brakes Spring applied, hydraulically released (SAHR) disc brakes
Maximum cable tension (line Large line drum: 38 kn (8,500 lbf) @ full drum; 12,000 lb @
pull) half drum
Small line drum: 40 kn (9,000 lbf) @ half drum; 11,000 lb @ half drum
Large line drum 60 to 72,000 ft/hr @ full-drum, continuously
Nominal cable speed
variable
Private
Small line drum 60 to 64,000 ft/hr @ full drum, continuously variable

7,000 m (24,000) ft 7-46 (WDR-62) 7,000 m (24,000) ft 2-23
(WDR-61)
Note
To view the complete OSLC-E data sheet, please refer to the IPC website
at http://www.hub.slb.com/index.cfm?id=id1118687. To view the OSLC-E/F
Operations and Maintenance manuals, please refer to the OSLC-E/F Reference
Page, content ID#3947647, in InTouch.
9.1.1.5 Optimum Service Land Carrier 6x6 (OSLC-F), front wheel

assisted high mobility
Figure 9-3: OSLC-F, Renault 6x6 Kerax model, Euro3 Certified, Left Hand Drive version
The OSLC-F is the High Mobility version of the OSLC-E. The OSLC-F provides
more cable drums and equipment storage options than the HMLC. The payload
of the OSLC-E and F are identical, only the truck chassis are different.
The truck is based upon the Renault Kerax Euro3 6x6 chassis model with sleeper
cab. Left Hand Drive (LHD) and Right Hand Drive (RHD) models are available.
To improve the mobility of the unit in any type of rough driving conditions,
an automatic gearbox has been selected and 2 types of tires are available,
depending on the type of ground conditions.
Private
The winch deck can be reconfigured to address different markets and/or

applications. An Open Hole and a Cased Hole module are currently available,
but more options could be developed in the future. The winch modules can be
easily exchanged locally at any time during the lifetime of the unit.
• The Cased Hole Winch Module (CHWM) is designed to accommodate two

new direct drive drums (WDR-61 and WDR-62), developed to satisfy overall
weight and size constraints as well as the 7,000 m (24,000-ft) nominal cable
capacity requirement for each drum. The CHWM-A is a separate asset.
• The Open Hole Winch Module (OHWM) accommodates WDR-42C and
WDR-64, large chain drive drums (1321mm / 52-in flange diameter) with
improved chain and brake adjustments. The OHWM-A is a separate asset.
General description
Table 9-7: General Operating Specifications
Overall Length 8950 mm (353 inches)

Overall Width 2440 mm (96 inches)
Overall Height (exhaust stack) 4150 mm (163 inches)
Point
Vehicle Weight Capacity GVW: 26,500 kg (57,300 lb)
Typical Overall Weight (Cased
CHWM, 6,000 m (20,000 ft)
–Front Axle: 7,450 kg (16,424 lbs) (Estimated)
of 7-46 (WDR-62) + 7,300
–Rear Axle(s): 17,300 kg (38,139 lbs) (Estimated)
m (24,000 ft.) of 2-32 cable
–Empty WDR-61 weight: 330 kg (728 lbs)
(WDR-61), 500kg (1,100 lbs.)
–Empty WDR-62 weight: 1,650 kg (3,640 lbs)
of downhole tools, 400kg (880
lbs.) of storage, 570ltr (150
gal.) fuel, and 2 people.
Typical Overall Weight (Open
OHWM, 9,000 m (29,500 ft) of –Front Axle: 8,000 kg (16,200 lbs)
7-46 (WDR-42C), 500kg (1,100 –Rear Axle(s): 16,300 kg (35,934 lbs)
lbs.) of downhole tools, 400kg –Empty WDR-42C weight: 1,970 kg (4,340 lbs)
(880 lbs.) of storage, 570ltr
(150 gal.) fuel, and 2 people.
One PTO driven from main engine (winch and generator) and
transmission (gearbox) via transfer box.
Power Configuration
One PTO driven from automatic transmission (DDDS, Fan
cooler motor and Reeling Arm).
Hydraulics Closed-loop servo pumps and auxiliary supply pumps.
4-22kN (900-4,950 lbf) continuously adjustable line tension
Tension Limiter TLS mode:
by operator’s control of drum torque.
Private
Winch Controls All electrical, 24 VDC with Smart Winch Control Terminal
28 kW (22kVA) 120/208 VAC-60 Hz three-phase (PDP will
Generator
accept straight 120 VAC-60Hz shop power).
Four-seat, 2.45 x 2.45 m (8’x8’) cabin for Modular
Instrument Cabin
Configuration MAXIS
MCM-Exploration with three flat panel displays, one TGRP,
Instrument cabin capabilities
one CLIP, WAFE-AC/DC.
2 slots @ 140 mm dia. x 6355mm long (5 1/2-in. dia. x 22.7
ft.)
Downhole Tool Storage 10 slots @ 92 mm dia. x 6300mm long (3 5/8-in. dia. x 20.7
ft.)
5 slots @ 64 mm dia. x 6300mm long (2 1/2-in. dia. x 20.7 ft.)
Stairs and Steps Side entrance stair and rear step integrated in bumper
Exterior storage Rear boxes for radioactive sources and side storage boxes
Three independent roof recess-mounted, electrically driven
Air conditioning type and Air Conditioners. Coleman Sea Mach Marine model 8533
capacity (110 VAC). 4 kwh (13,500 BTU) cooling; 1.4 kwh (5,500 Btu)
heating
Maximum operating ambient
53 degC (128 degF) at 88% humidity
temperature:
Renault 6x6 Kerax 420.34 DCI 6x6 HD(manufactured by

Chassis model
Renault)
197 inches (5000 mm); 62.55 inches (1589 mm) bogie
Wheel base
centerline to end of frame.
CEE EURO 3 pollution controlled:
Engine type, power and torque Renault dCi 11, common rail HP injection, turbocharged
(OSLC-F) Power Rating: 412 HP @ 1900 rpm
Max Torque: 1870 Nm from 1050 up to 1350 rpm
Standard equipment tested at –20 degC with winter fuel.
Operating temperature range
Starting OK
Electrical system 24 VDC, negative grounded; Two 12VDC batteries in series
Engine brake Yes; Jacobs engine exhaust brake
Alternator and Batteries 24 VDC, 80 A alternator, 2 batteries 12 VDC 170 Ah
Fuel Tank 550 liter (145 gal) capacity fuel tank;
Transmission (Gearbox) Allison , Automatic 6 speed HD 4060.
Transfer box Steyr, VG2000.
ZF N221/10 on Transfer Box, Hydrocar 17 A1 type on Allison
Power-Take-Off (PTO)
GB.
Front Axle & Suspension 9,000kg, Taper-leaf springs with shock absorbers
Power Steering Integral assisted power steering.
Private
Full Air braking system, 2 independent circuits for safety.

Anti-wheel-locking system (ABS)
Brakes
Air operated springs parking brake.
Automatic adjustment.
Michelin 445/65 R22.5 XZL recommended if hardtop is
majority.
Michelin 525/65 R20.5 XS recommended if soft sand is
Tires (Tyres) and Wheels
majority.
All 6 wheels same type of tires. Original selection can be
changed afterwards if needed.
Maximum regulated speed 67 mph (108 kph); limited by legal limits in operating country
Maximum engine speed 1,800 rpm
Minimum engine speed in PTO
1,100 rpm
mode
Table 9-9: Open Hole Module Operating Specifications
Compatible with WDR-30, WDR-51, WDR-42, WDR-42C,

Winch Drive
WDR-64, traditional chain & sprocket drive with DDDS
WDR mounting Two standard pillow blocks for chain drive
Winch brakes Spring applied, hydraulically released (SAHR) band brakes
66 kN (15,000 lbf) at half drum
pull)
120 to 36,000 ft/hr @ half-drum, continuously variable
Nominal cable speed
(DDDS)
9,144 m (30,000 ft) of 7-46 (on WDR-42C) 5,730 m (18,800
ft) of 7-46 and 6,800 m (25,600 ft) of 2-23 (WDR-64).
Table 9-10: Cased Hole Module Operating Specifications. (estimates only, not checked)
Compatible with WDR-62 and WDR-61 drums only.

Winch Drive
hydrostatic transmission, direct drive with DDDS
One standard pillow block, Power wheel at the direct drive
WDR mounting
side
Winch brakes Spring applied, hydraulically released (SAHR) disc brakes
Large line drum: 38 kn (8,500 lbf) @ full drum; 12,000 lb @
Maximum cable tension (line half drum
pull) Small line drum: 40 kn (9,000 lbf) @ half drum; 11,000 lb
@ half drum.
Large line drum 60 to 72,000 ft/hr @ full-drum, continuously
variable
Nominal cable speed
Small line drum 60 to 64,000 ft/hr @ full drum, continuously
variable
7,000 m (24,000) ft 7-46 (WDR-62) 7,000 m (24,000) ft 2-23
(WDR-61)
Private
Note
To view the complete OSLC-F data sheet, please refer to the
Integrated Productivity and Conveyance Center (IPC) web page:at
http://www.hub.slb.com/index.cfm?id=id1118687. To view the OSLC-E/F
Operations and Maintenance manuals, please refer to the OSLC-E/F Reference
Page, content ID#3947647, in InTouch.
9.1.1.6 Medium Service Land Carrier (MSLC-BA), MAXIS Express

Figure 9-4: MSLC-BA (MAXIS Express)
General description
The Medium Service Land Carrier (MSLC-B) is an integrated Mobile Logging

Laboratory truck built on a 4x2 chassis, with similar visual characteristics to the
MSLC-A. The driving cab and logging cabin layouts are similar to the OSLC, with
both the winch operator and the engineer facing the rig.
Private
The truck is suited for both open and cased hole services. The British Foden
S104R4 4x2 chassis is built in accordance to US EPA specifications. Local
support is provided by the PACCAR organization through their Kenworth,
Peterbilt, DAF, Leyland and Foden service facilities and network. Production
started in Q3 1998 with MSLC-BA 3171.
The MSLC-BA uses a WDR-56 direct-drive drum with a disk brake, which can
accommodate 13,000 feet of 7-46 cable, 18,400 feet of the new 7-39LXS, or
16,100 feet of 7-42P cable. (To maintain an equivalent weight of 7-46, the length
of conventional 7-39P must be limited to 17,000 ft.).
• Cabin features and layout are designed specifically for operation with a
two-person crew.
• The MSLC winch deck is designed to carry two standard aluminum 24-in
sheaves. If Nylon sheaves are used, special transport racks are required.
See the Notes section.
• MCM acquisition system integrated in the truck without the use of a CSR
rack, incorporating the new 19-in. drawer standard.
• Equipped with remote winch control to allow rig-up or rig down operations
without the need for a winch operator in the instrument cab. This feature
should not be used for logging operations because the Maxis shutdown is
bypassed when this device is active.
• An optional taut-line Tool Laydown System (TLDS) permits movement of
tools from the truck to the catwalk by a single person.
• The Foden chassis features a 9 speed fully synchronized transmission,
eliminating the need for a 2-speed rear axle (implemented on the MSLC-A
chassis in 1997).
Specifications
Table 9-11: Operating Specifications
18,400 ft (5,575 m) of 7-39 LXS lightweight cable; or 13,000 ft

Cable capacity (3940 m) of 7-46; or 16,100 ft (4,880 m) of 7-42P cable. The
conventional 7-39P cable was discontinued in 1998.
33,850 lbm (20,000 lbm rear axle and 13,850 lbm front axle)
Max. vehicle weight
15,354 kg (9,072 kg rear axle and 6,282 kg rear axle)
Tool storage capacity 1,800 lbm (820 kg)
Misc. equipment storage 1,500 lbm (680 kg)
Private
Hydraulically driven, 2-speed hydraulic winch motor driving

through a 2-stage planetary reduction gear, direct-mounted
to the drum. Optional, additional slow-speed gear reduction
Winch
available to provide slow logging speeds down to 100 ft/hr
(0.5 m/min). Optional main drum reduction ratio available to
allow winch speed up to 100,000 ft/hr (510 m/min).
Max. cable speed1 40,000 ft/hr (204 m/min)
Min. cable speed 220 ft/hr (1.12 m/min)
8,500 lbf (3,855.5 kp) , full drum; 16,000 lbf (7,257.5 kp), at
Max. line pull1
drum core.
131.5 in. (3.34 m) ground level to top of instrument cab; 140
Overall vehicle height
in. (3.56 m) ground level to the top of the exhaust stack.
Overall vehicle length 309 in. (7.85 m), bumper to bumper
96 in. (2.44 m), logging cabin; including side mirrors: 124

Overall vehicle width
in. (3.15 m).
Foden S104R4 4x2 with Cummins B series (5.9 litre), ISB
electronic controlled diesel engine; power: 230 hp @ 2,500
Chassis/Engine
rpm; torque: 660 lbf (300 kp) @ 1,600 rpm. ABS brakes with
slack adjusters.
1
Maximum speed and pull are not simultaneously available.
Note
To view the complete MSLC-A/B data sheets, please refer to the
Integrated Productivity and Conveyance Center IPC web page at
http://www.hub.slb.com/index.cfm?id=id1118687. To view chassis specifications
and maintenance manuals, refer to the MSLC Reference Pages, content ID#
3258437, in InTouchSupport.
Private
9.1.1.7 Shallow Well Perforating Truck, (SWPT-GB ) IHC-7300 4x4

chassis
Figure 9-5: SWPT-GBB, Internaltional 7300 4x4 chassis, integrated mast option
General description
The SWPT was specifically designed for completion and perforating operations
on wells shallower than 18,000 ft (5486.4 m) deep. See specifications section
for nominal cable length capacities. SWPT-G is supplied by IPC Sugar Land.
SWPT-GB is based on an International 7300 series 4x4 chassis. Crew cab
configuration contains the MCM Completion Acquisition system and Winch
Control Panel (WCP), in such way the same person can operate the acquisition
and winch during logging operations. There are two versions of the 4x4
SWPT-GB:
• SWPT-GBA, without mast

• SWPT-GBB, with integrated mast.
The optional tripod configuration mast can be deployed to a maximum of 45 feet

(13.7 m) for rigless operations. It allows quick and simple rig-up, with two-person
operation.
Private
Specifications
Chassis model International 7300 series SFA, 6 person steel crew cab, 4x4
Wheel base 207 inches (5258 mm)
SWPT-GBA, 322 inches / 26.8 feet / 8.17 meters
Overall vehicle length
SWPT-GBB, 358inches / 29.8 feet / 9.08 meters
SWPT-GAA, 134 inches / 11.1 feet / 3.4 meters (exhaust
pipe)
Overall vehicle height
SWPT-GAB, 128 inches / 10.66 feet / 3.25 meters (headache
rack)
Overall vehicle width SWPT-GBA and GBB, 97 inches / 8.0 feet / 2.5 meters
Width with Mirrors, 102 inches / 8.5 feet /2.6 meters
Maximum GVW 32,000 lb (14,514 kg)
International DT466E HEUI, Electro Hydraulic fuel system,
Engine type
50 State
Engine power 230 hp / 171.5 kw, 2300-2600 rpm, 237 peak HP
Rated engine peak torque @
620 lb-ft / 85.72 @ 1400 rpm
1400 rpm
Governed engine speed 2,600 rpm
Engine parameters Road speed limit, 62 mph (100 km/h)
Maximum PTO engine speed: 2500 rpm
Set engine speed (PTO): 1000 rpm
Resume engine speed: 1200 rpm
Horton Drivemaster two-speed type with residual torque
Engine fan clutch
device for disengaged fan speed
Antifreeze Texaco long life to –40 degF (-40 degC)
Engine oil DELO SAE 15W40
Engine air compressor Bendix Tu-Flo 550, 13.2 cfm (374 lpm), gear driven
Electrical system 12 VDC, negative grounded
Alternator Leece-Neville 2819 LC, 12 VDC, 160 A
Starter Leece-Neville, 12 Volt M100R
(3 x 12 VDC in parallel) 3 International maintenance free
Batteries
12-volt 1950 CCA total
Type, Meritor MX-12-120, single reduction
Ratio 4.88:1
Capacity 14,000 lb (5.5 TM)
Front Axle
Hubs: 10-stud, 285.75 mm BC, hub piloted, flanged nut,
metric
Suspension: parabolic taper leaf springs, maintenance free
Private
Brake drums, Air Cam S-Cam 16.5-in x 5-in with dust shields
Brake chambers, MGM air, 20 sq.in., long stroke
Front Axle Brakes
Brake lining, Meritor MA212 FF-.73-in Meritor 5.5-in
automatic slack adjusters
Steering gear Shepard M100, ratio 18.9:1
Steering pump TRW high pressure
Meritor RS-21-145 single reduction (single axle)
Capacity 21,000 lb (9.5 TM)
Differential ratio, 4.63
Differential type, locking
Rear Axle
Axle lubricant: Synthetic, Emgard 75W-90
Hubs, 200 wheel ends, 10-stud, 285.75 mm BC, hub piloted,
flanged nut, metric
Suspension springs, Vari-Rate, 20,000 lb capacity
Brake drums, 16.5-in x 7-in Meritor with dust shields

Brake chambers, MGM TR-3030, air, 30 sq.in.
Brake lining, ABB-931-62 or Meritor MA212 FF-.85-in
Rear Axle Brakes Automatic Meritor slack adjusters
Parking brakes, 3030 Anchor Lock
Anti-skid brake system (ABS) Bendix 4-Channel system, Full
Vehicle Wheel Control
Transmission Fuller FS 6406 N 6 speed manual, oil - Engard 50 W synthetic
PTOs Right 6-bolt; Left 8-bolt
Clutch (with Neutral Safety Eaton-Fuller SAS1401, 14-in diameter, single ceramic plate,
Switch) stamped angle spring, 620 lb-ft torque capacity
Transfer case Meritor MTC-4208, 2-speed, 8300 lb-ft capacity
Lubricant Synthetic Emgard 50W
Front (2): Goodyear G159 11R22.5 LRL G-16 PR
Tires
Rear (4): Goodyear G328 11R22.5 LRL G-14 PR
Spare: Optional, not supplied as standard equipment
Front: 22.5 x 8.25-in, 10-stud, 285.75 mm BC, Hub piloted,
Metric, Steel, White
Wheels
Rear: 22.5 x 8.25-in, 10 stud, 285.75 mm BC, Hub piloted,
Metric, Steel, White
Fuel tank Steel, 70 US gallons (265 liters)
Table 9-13: SWPT-GB Operating Specifications

6,000 lb (2,722 kg)
pull)
Maximum cable speed 70,000 fph (21,300 m/hr)
Minimum cable speed 2,000 fph (600 m/hr)
Maximum mast height 45 ft (13.7 m)
Fully retracted - (A) - 33 ft (10.05 m)
–Intermediate - (B) - 38 ft (11.60 m)
Mast: vertical height
–Intermediate - (C) - 43 ft (13.10 m)
–Fully extended- (D) – 48 ft (14.63 m)
Private
Fully retracted - (1) – 72 in. (1.83 m)

Mast: horizontal distance from –Intermediate - (2) – 80-in. (2.03 m)
bumper to well head –Intermediate - (3) – 88-in. (2.24 m)
–Fully extended- (4) – 96-in. (2.44 m)
Flange diameter = 29 inches (736 mm)
WDR-61 drum dimensions Core diameter = 13 inches (330.2 mm)
Core width = 27 inches (685.8 mm)
Drum alone = 738 lb, (334.75 kg)
Drum with hub, sprocket, brake disc, and bearing = 958 lb,
WDR-61 drum weight
(434.5 kg)
See WDR-61 Data Sheet for more information
Cable diameter 0.23 inches, 24.5 kft (7.48 km)
Nominal logging cable
capacities (WDR-61) –
Maximum Cable Length
SWL 900 lb (400 kg), limited by the overall mast SWL rating
Auxiliary winch (catline),
130 feet of 5/16-in 7-19 GAC cable
SWPT-GBB only
Not Certified for man-riding
Note
To view the complete SWPT-GB data sheet, please refer to the
Integrated Productivity and Conveyance Center (IPC) web page at
http://www.hub.slb.com/index.cfm?id=id1118687. For the latest documentation
on SWPT units, please refer to the: SWPT Reference Page, content ID#
3261939, in InTouch.
9.1.2 Offshore logging units

This section provides examples of an Offshore Unit (OSU) and an Offshore
Modular Logging Unit used in the field today. For detailed information on the
logging units covered (and not covered) in this section please refer to:
• Integrated Productivity & Conveyance Center (IPC) web page at

• OSU Reference Page, content ID# 3258452.
• Offshore Modular Logging Units Reference Page, content ID# 3258454.
Private
9.1.2.1 Offshore Unit electric drive (OSU-ME )

Figure 9-6: Views of the offshore unit electric drive (OSU-ME )
General description
The Offshore Unit Electric Drive Unit is an alternate clean-air version of standard
diesel-hydraulic OSU-F. It consists of an OSU-F skid and cabin equipment fitted
with OSUK-E electric drive kit. The cabin equipment contains standard MCM
acquisition system, printers and cabinets. The standard winch-man control
panel is replaced with a modern electrical control panel, which includes TLC
control. A commercial AC drive cabinet is fitted underneath this new panel. The
electric drive consists of electric motor and resistor bank fitted in the place of
diesel engine and hydraulics equipment. The winch skid can accommodate any
sprocket-driven drum.
Application
The evolution of the OSUK-E concept originally was designed to meet better
winch speed resolution/control as well as address environmental issues such
as Noise and Pollution. Since this unit doesn’t use hydraulics, there will be less
maintenance in replacing hoses/seals as well as the hazards of the oil and the
unit is significantly quieter as compared to the standard OSUF with diesel engine.
Private
Specifications
Table 9-14: Operating Specifications
MCM Full exploration system with 2 18-in. flat panels TGRP,

Acquisition system
CLIP printers
Cooling 4 roof-mounted Coleman units (total 55,000 BTU)
Spooling Motor driven skid oscillation and manual steering arm control
Drum Identical to OSU-F : WDR 42C, WDR 57, WDR 51
Speed range 30 to 40,000 ft/hr @ WDR-42 (52-in.) flange
Dimensions Identical to OSU-F (18 ft “ L” x 7.8 ft “ W” x 7.7 ft “ H”)
Weight Total (19,690 lbm), without drum and cable/TGRP’ s

460V 60Hz or 380V 50Hz, 3phase, 200A for winch drive
Power
120/240V 50-60Hz 50A for Cabin equipment
Controller 90KW 120KVA ACS-601 Drive Controller
Motor 105KW 4 Pole, 460V Motor, 168A
9.1.2.2 Offshore Norsok-Compliant cabin (ONCC-A )
Figure 9-7: Interior views of the ONCC-A
Private
General description
The Offshore Norsok Compliant Cabin (ONCC-A) is the acquisition system

carrier of the Modular Offshore North Sea Unit System (MONU). MONU is a
modular exploration logging system designed specifically for the Norwegian
sector of the North Sea. The other two modules that make up the MONU along
with the ONCC are the Electro Hydraulic Power Skid (EHPS-D/E), and the Winch
Drive Drum Skid (WDDS-B). The ONCC may also be used independently as a
satellite cab for use with existing winches fitted with electrical controls.
Figure 9-8: Typical MONU configuration. showing the ONCC-A (left), the
WDDS-B (front) and the EHPS-D (back)
Specifications
Table 9-15: Cabin Specifications
Cabin structure: Steel construction, A60 fire insulation

Length: 3658mm
Width: 2438mm
Height: 2835mm (H)
Max. Gross Weight: 7500kg
Private
–One A60 door (2050x850-mm clear opening)

–One A60 window (1500 x1000 mm)
–Connection room with double doors at the back
General structure
–Bottom ISO corners and forklifts tunnels
– Lifting Padeyes with shackles
DNV 2.7-1 certified structure
The cabin is rated A60, pressurized and equipped with
an automatic shutdown system that makes it suitable for
Regulatory requirements operation in Zone 2 environment. The system monitors fire
and gas and controls fire dampers, pressurization and utility
power.
The following power supplies are required to operate the
ONCC.
Power Requirements
–380/400/440/480/660/690VAC 3 phase 50/60Hz main power
–230VAC single-phase 50/60Hz emergency power
One AC unit provides 3kW (12,000 BTU) cooling and 3.5 kW

heating to the cabin. Its condenser uses seawater as a cooling
media. The inlet and outlet of the air conditioner are equipped
Air Conditioning & Heating with sound dampers. The operating noise of the AC unit alone
is close to 50dB(A). In addition, a small Ex heater connected
on the rig emergency power allows to dehumidify the cabin
when the pressurization is off for extended period of time.
Note
To view the full data sheet for ONCC-A, please visit the IPC web page
at http://www.hub.slb.com/index.cfm?id=id1118687. To view the ONCC-A
Maintenance Manual, please refer to the Support: OMLU Reference Pages,
9.1.2.3 Winch Drum Drive Skid (WDDS-B), Zone 1, steel frame
Figure 9-9: WDDS-B front, right and left views
Private
General description
The WDDS-B is a modular wireline winch skid designed to operate in Zone 1

areas suitable to accommodate full size “heptacable” drums up to 57 inches (1.45
m) flange diameter. This WDDS model is assembled by 2MB in Rennes, France.
The WDDS-B has a DNV certified steel frame with overall dimensions of 2.13 x
2.13 x 2.59 meters (7.0L x 7.0W x 8.5ftH).
It has been especially developed for the Modular Offshore North Sea Unit
system, or MONU, therefore it should be used with the modified (Intrinsically
Safe barriers) WCT-D Winch Control Terminal that has been integrated in the
ONCC-A cabin and with a compatible Zone 1 electro-hydraulic power pack, such
as the EHPS-D or E.
This model of winch skid uses the traditional chain and sprocket drive train
system with very slow logging speed capability.
Cable spooling system can be operated in any of the three following methods:
auto-spooling using oscillating drum, manual spooling using oscillating drum or
manual steering using the reeling arm.
Figure 9-10: WDDS-B rear view showing the winch drive (left) and typical MONU setup (right)
Private
Specifications
Table 9-16: WDDS-B General Specifications
Empty (without drum): 2,740 kg (6,040 lb)

WDDS-B weight SWL rating: 9,100 kg (20,062 lb)
Maximum weight: See drum and cable Table below
Design Safety Factor (frame structure and padeyes): 2.5 x SWL
Design Standard: DNV 2.7-1 “Offshore Containers”
Frame and pad eyes are DNV certified.
Annual Load Test and Inspection required.
Four-point lifting should always be used with the WDDS-A.
Shackles are rated to 8,500 kg each but dimensions are not in strict
WDDS-B Lifting Guidelines compliance with DNV 2.7-1, nevertheless required safety factors are
exceeded. DNV Safety factor requirement is 6.0 while provided shackles

have a safety factor of 7.25.
Lifting slings angle must be equal or less than 45 degrees with respect to
the vertical WDDS-B Lifting Guidelines
See Weights Table below to determine the recommended maximum
length of logging cable for WDDS lifting purposes.
Length: 2158 mm (7.08 feet)
Width: 2130 mm (7.05 feet)
Height: 2590 mm (8.50 feet)
WDDS-B dimensions
Note
Slip ring collectors longer than the COL-ZA, such as the COLL or the
Trolex collector, will extend past the lift frame sides and therefore need to
be removed before transportation.
Grade E30-4 steel, 6.3 mm thickness; profile tubes (200 x 100 mm) for
Structure fabrication
the base and square tubes (100 x 100 mm) for the remainder
Noise level design limit Less than 83 dBA at 1 meter (3.4 feet)
The winch was tested according to the procedure recommended in
standard ISO 2372 for Group II machinery. This standard presents the
vibration amplitudes as a function of velocity as one of its operating
Vibration Test results
criteria, within the frequency range of 10 Hz to 1,000 Hz for each direction.
At the frame, GOOD classification as per ISO 2372 standard. Maximum
vibration level at high speed was 0.45 mm/s rms.
Ambient temperature range -20 degC (-4 degF) to 55 degC (131 degF)
- Oscillation system allows for a cradle rotation of +/- 14 degrees from
centerline between the middle of the cradle and the lower sheave.
- Minimum distance to the lower sheave should be 4.5 meters (15 ft).
Wellsite positioning - Maximum vertical spooling angle is 60 degrees.
- Oscillation cradle can be attached directly to the rig floor without using
the transport/lifting cradle. Special support base is required for this option.
See WDDS Maintenance Manual for details.
Private
–Winch hydraulic motor: Sauer-Sundstrand two-speed Series 51, 80cc

displacement.
–Gearbox reduction: Fairfield W9T3UD435, two-speed, 35:1 and 143;1
Drive train ratios.
Sprockets:
–Drive sprocket with 30 teeth
–Standard drum sprocket with 72 teeth, optional 80 teeth.
– Pneumatically actuated fail-safe braking system employing standard
Schlumberger brake bands and components.
– The brakes are designed to hold 12,000 lb (53.4 kN) of cable tension at
Brake system
the outer flange of a 52” drum in wet or dry conditions.
–Minimum pneumatic supply pressure: 95 psi (6.5 bar)
–Maximum pneumatic supply pressure: 125 psi (8.6 bar).
–Zone 1 rated according to EN European Standard classification, which is
equivalent to Class 1 Division 1 classification in the US and Canada.
Intrinsically Safe winch instrumentation and control circuits. I.S. barriers

Hazardous area classification
required on the acquisition cabin for associated equipment, such as
CMTD and IDW.
Logging cable collector should be explosion proof (COL-Z or Trolex)
Det Norske Veritas Classification A/S Rules for Classification of Mobile
Offshore Units and Fixed Offshore installations
–UK Statutory Instruments and HSE Guidance Notes, No. 289 and No.
611
–Regulations for production and auxiliary systems on production
installations etc. of 3rd April, 1978 with later amendments, Norwegian
Petroleum Directorate (NPD)
–Regulations of 4 September 1987 concerning construction of Mobile
Offshore Units, Norwegian Maritime Directorate (NMD)
–Regulations of 31 January 1984 concerning precautionary measures
Regulations and Standards
against fire on Mobile Offshore Units (amended 4 September 1987), MMD
–IMO MODU-Code, 1980
–Det Norske Veritas Certification Note 2.7-2 for offshore Freight
Containers
–NORSOK System requirements for wireline equipment, D-SR-008
–NORSOK Temporary equipment, Z-015
–NORSOK Working environment, S-002
–NORSOK. Machinery-WE assessment and documentation, S-005
–STATOIL Enquiry No. VMS79403
–CE machinery Directive
Private
Table 9-17: WDDS-B Performance Figures
–PLPS-AA, PLPS-BA/BB (55 cc pump): 22,400 ft/hr (6,830 m/hr)

–PLPS-AB (75 cc pump): 30,600 ft/hr (9,310 m/hr)
Maximum cable speed,
DAPS-A/B (100 cc pump):
two-speed hydraulic motor in
–Continuous operation 32,800 ft/hr (10,000 m/hr) –Intermittent operation
HIGH setting, at flange edge
(20 min. maximum) 39,100 ft/hr (11,920 m/hr)
of a 52-in drum with a 72-
–EHPS-D/E (130 cc pump):
teeth sprocket
–Continuous operation 32,800 ft/hr (10,000 m/hr)
–Intermittent operation (20 min. maximum) 39,100 ft/hr (11,920 m/hr)
Minimum cable speed,
two-speed W9T gearbox in
LOW setting, at flange edge of Continuous operation 70 ft/hr (21 m/hr)
a 52-in drum with a 72-teeth
sprocket
The expected performance of pull on line and cable speed combination

SCD Powerpack may require a winch pump with a minimum capacity of 75 cc.
Recommendations SCD recommends using the DAPS-B, the EHPS-D or the EHPS-E to drive
the WDDS-B winch module.
High speed setting, at flange of 52-in drum: 31 kN (7,000 lb)
– High speed setting, at drum core (24”): 68 kN (15,200 lb)
Maximum pull on line
–Normal speed setting, at flange of 52-in drum: 51 kN (11,400 lb)
–Normal speed setting, at flange of 52-in drum: 110 kN (24,800 lb)
Table 9-18: WDDS-B Weights and SWL
There are several permutations of cable drums, cable size, cable type and
cable length; therefore just the most representative figures have been included
in this Reference Table.
Initial considerations
–Weight of drums normally includes pillow blocks and sprocket.
–For lifting purposes the WDDS-B frame SWL of 9,100 kg (20,062 lb) should
NOT be exceeded.
WDDS-B only, no drum: 2,740 kg (6,040 lb)
Nominal gross weight of the –With WDR-42C: 4,710 kg (10,380 lb)
WDDS-B with empty drums (no – With WDR-51: 4,078 kg (8,990 lb)
cable) – With WDR-57: 4,806 kg (10,595 lb)
– With WDR-59: 5,610 kg (12,360 lb) With WDR-64: 5,290 kg (11,660 lb)
Private
WDR-42C (52-in diameter flange drum) with:

–29,700 ft (9,050 m) of 7-46 cable: 9,170 kg (20,211 lb)
–28,000 ft (8,530 m) of 7-48 cable: 9,789 kg (21,580 lb)
–23,300 ft (7,100 m) of 7-52 cable: 9,644 kg (21,260 lb)
–23,100 ft (7,040 m) of 7-53 cable: 9,580 kg (21,122 lb)
WDR-51 or WDR-30 (48-in diameter flange drums) with:
–24,000 ft (7,320 m) of 7-46 cable: 7,680 kg (16,930 lb)
–22,500 ft (6,860 m) of 7-48 cable: 8,160 kg (17,990 lb)
–19,200 ft (5,850 m) of 7-52 cable: 8,145 kg (17,956 lb)
–19,000 ft (5,790 m) of 7-53 cable: 8,085 kg (17,825 lb)
WDR-57 (52”/45.8-in diameter flanges, divided drum) with 20,000 ft (6,100
m) of 2-23 cable and:
–28,000 ft (8,530 m) of 7-39 cable: 9,044 kg (19,940 lb)
Nominal gross weight of the
–24,000 ft (7,320 m) of 7-42 cable: 8,816 kg (19,435 lb)
WDDS-B with fully loaded drums
–20,300 ft (6,190 m) of 7-46 cable: 8,815 kg (19,434 lb)
–20,200 ft (6,160 m) of 7-48 cable: 9,432 kg (20,795 lb)

WDR-59 (57-in diameter flange, large capacity drum)with:
- 37,100 ft (11,310 m) of 7-46 cable: 11,177 kg (24,640 lb)
- 35,300 ft (10,760 m) of 7-48 cable: 12,011 kg (26,480 lb)
- 30,000 ft (9,140 m) of 7-52 cable: 11,961 kg (26,370 lb)
- 29,700 ft (9,050 m) of 7-53 cable: 11,871 kg (26,171 lb)
WDR-64 (52-in/50-in diameter flanges, divided drum) with 25,600 ft (6,800
m) of 2-23 cable and
- 26,100 ft (7,960 m) of 7-39 cable: 9,575 kg (21,108 lb)
- 22,300 ft (6,800 m) of 7-42 cable: 9,352 kg (20.618 lb)
- 18,800 ft (5,730 m) of 7-46 cable: 9,343 kg (20,597 lb)
- 17,700 ft (5,390 m) of 7-48 cable: 9,731 kg (21,454 lb)
WDR-42C (“green” drum) with a maximum of
- 29,250 ft (8,920 m) of 7-46 cable
- 24,210 ft (7,380 m) of 7-48 cable
- 20,730 ft (6,320 m) of 7-53/7-53 cable
WDR-51 or WDR30 (“gray” drum): No limitations
WDR-57 (divided drum) assuming is fully loaded with 2-23 cable:
- No limitations for 7-46 and smaller diameter cables
Suggested maximum cable - No limitations for 7-52 and 7-53 cables
length to avoid exceeding the - 18,370 ft (5,600 m) of 7-48 cable
WDDS-B lifting frame’s SWL of
WDR-59 (large capacity drum) with a maximum of
9,100 kg (20,062 lb)
- 23,270 ft (7,070 m) of 7-46 cable
- 19,260 ft (5,850 m) of 7-48 cable
- 16,500 ft (5,030 m) of 7-53/7-53 cable
WDR-64 (divided drum) assuming is fully loaded with 2-23 cable:
- 22,050 ft (6,720 m) of 7-39 cable
- 20,310 ft (6,200 m) of 7-42 cable
- 17,180 ft (5,240 m) of 7-46 cable
- 14,220 ft (4,330 m) of 7-48 cable
Private
Note
To view the complete WDDS-B data sheet, please refer to the
http://www.hub.slb.com/index.cfm?id=id1118687. To view the WDDS-A/B
Maintenance Manual, please refer to Support: OMLU Reference Pages, content
ID# 3258454, in InTouch.
9.1.2.4 Electro-Hydraulic Power Skid (EHPS-D/E), Zone 1, Steel

frame
Figure 9-11: EHPS-D/E external views
General description
The EHPS-D and EHPS-E are electrically driven modular power packs designed
to operate in hazardous areas generally classified as Zone 1 and to provide
hydraulic power to the WDDS-B winch module. The EHPS modules are
assembled in France. The difference between the D and E versions is the input
voltage range required for the EHPS operation:
• EHPS-D requires a power source of 380 or 415 @ 50Hz, 440 or 480 VAC
@ 60 Hz, three-phase
• EHPS-E requires a power source of 600 or 690 VAC, three-phase, 50 or
60 Hz.
Private
The EHPS is capable of delivering up to 75 kVA @ 50 Hz, or 85 kVA @ 60 Hz

input frequency. Power is provided by a three-phase, asynchronous, explosion
proof electric motor with star-delta starter. This electric motor drives a variable
displacement hydraulic pump.
The EHPS functions are controlled by a Winch Control Terminal (WCT-D), which
has been fully integrated on the Offshore Norsok Compliant Cabin (ONCC-A).
The Modular Offshore North Sea Unit system (MONU) is made of the following
modules: EHPS-D or E, ONCC-A and WDDS-B.
Figure 9-12: EHPS-D interior view (left) and MCB with cover removed (right)
Specifications
Table 9-19: EHPS-D and EHPS-E General Specifications
With fluids (wet): 3,700 kg (8,150 lb)

EHPS-D/E weight Includes additional 700 kg (1,540 lb) of ballast to comply with DNV tilt
test requirements.
–Length: 2437 mm (8 feet)
EHPS-D/E dimensions –Width: 914 mm (3 feet)
–Height: 2591 mm (8.5 feet)
–Grade E30-4 6.3-mm steel tube frame.
–Hot-galvanized 200x100 mm profile tube for the base
Structure fabrication –Hot-dip zinc coated 100x100 mm profile tube for the remainder frame
parts.
–Panels and doors made of 2 mm thick steel panels
Private
–The frame and "padeyes" are designed to meet DNV specification 2.7-1,
“Offshore Containers”.
–Minimum Sling Safety Factor must be 10.
–Shackle Safety Factor must be at least 8, with a minimum of 30 mm
pin diameter.
Lifting system –The frame is designed with a safety factor of 2.5 based on the maximum
EHPS weight. Integrity Test is performed with a gross weight of 4,000
kg (8,820 lb).
–Four-point lifting should be used with the EHPS.
– Lifting slings angle must be equal or less than 45 degrees with respect to
the vertical.
–From -20 degC (-4 degF) to 45 degC (113 degF)
Ambient Temperature range
–Relative Humidity up to 95% at 35 degC (95 degF)
Noise level specifications Maximum external noise level is 83 dBA at 1 meter (3.3 feet)
–The EHPS-D was tested according to the procedure recommended
in standard ISO 2372 for Group II machinery. This standard presents

the vibration amplitudes as a function of velocity as one of its operating
criteria, within the frequency range of 10 Hz to 1,000 Hz for each direction.
Vibration Test results At the electric motor support points, “Good” classification as per ISO 2372
standard for an operating hydraulic pressure of 1,000 psi. Maximum
vibration level at high speed was 1.08 mm/s rms. For the operation at
maximum load (equivalent to 3000 or 3500 psi) the amplitude reaches the
level of 2.7 mm/s, falling in the " Acceptable machine" class range.
–From -20 degC (-4 degF) to 45 degC (113 degF)
Ambient Temperature range
–Humidity steady state up to 95% at 35 degC (95 degF)
Winch pump:
–Sauer-Sundstrand Series 90, 130cc variable displacement pump.
–Tension Limiting Control System (TLCS)
–Auxiliary pump (spooling) and Oil cooler pump:
–HPI dual 12 cc gear pump, 18 lpm, 1,200 psi (80 bar)
Hydraulic system Oil cooling system:

–Poclain 30,000 kCal/hr oil cooler with anti-static fan and 8cc hydraulic
motor drive.
Hydraulic Tank:
–Stainless steel, 115 ltr (30 gl), 10-micron return filter, fluid level and
temperature indicators.
–Built-in air driven filling system with and 6-micron filter.
1. Rig Air supply line
2. UPHOLE winch motor supply; 379 bar (5,500 psi) max
3. DOWNHOLE winch motor supply; 138 bar (2000 psi) max
WDDS-B output connections 4. WDDS auxiliary and auto-spooling supply
5. WDDS motor drain line
6. WDDS supply return line
7. WDDS 230 VAC for explosion proof flood lamp
Private
Zone 1 environment according to EN European Standard classification,

Hazardous area classification which is equivalent to Class 1 Division 1 classification in the US and
Canada.
–DNV Certification Notes No. 2.7-1 "Offshore Service Containers",
December 1995.
–DNV Certification Notes No. 2.7-2 "Offshore Service Containers",
Regulations and Standards December 1995.
–DNV: Det Norske Veritas –NPD’s "Regulation relating to electrical installations in the petroleum
–NPD: Norwegian Petroleum activities”, January 1992.
Directorate –NPD’s "Regulation relating to drilling an well activities and geological
–NMD: Norwegian Maritime data collection in the petroleum activities”, 7 February 1992, last amended
Directorate 25 March 1999.
–NMD’s "Regulations of 31 January 1984 No. 227 concerning
precautionary measures against fire and explosion on mobile offshore
units”, amended 2 March 1999.
Private
Table 9-20: EHPS-D and EHPS-E Electrical Specifications
–Manufactured by CEN (France), model R280 SA-4, explosion proof.

–Asynchronous, three-phase, four poles.
–See power requirements for input voltage and fuse capacities.
–Protection EExd IIB T5 for Zone 1 operations.
Electric motor specifications –Maximum power: 75 kw @ 50 Hz (1,500 rpm) or 85 kw @ 60 Hz (1,800
rpm)
–Star-Delta Starting system to reduce initial surge current.
–Built-in heater, 100 watts.
–Temperature range: -20 degC to +55 degC
Three-phase, 380 VAC or 415 VAC at 50 Hz, 75 kW maximum
–Motor starting current, Is = 290 Amp
–Nominal current, In = 143 Amp
–Supply Line Maximum Fuse rating: 160 Amp
–Flexible supply cable cross section: 35 to 50 mm2
–The power supply cable must have four cores; three phases plus one
ground (no neutral).
EHPS-D Power requirements
EHPS-E Power requirements ground (no neutral).
–Motor starting current, Is = 180 Amp Nominal current, In = 86 Amp
Note
To view the complete EHPS-D/E data sheet, please refer to the
http://www.hub.slb.com/index.cfm?id=id1118687. To view the EHPS-D/E
Maintenance Manual, please refer to Support: OMLU Reference Pages, content
ID# 3258454, in InTouch.
9.2 Maintenance policy

Keep Fuel Clean!
Private
Potential Severity: Major

Potential Loss: Environmental
Dirty fuel is one of the major causes of engine failure. Even a tiny particle
of dirt in the injection system may stop your engine. Keep the fuel tank
full at all times.
Keep Hydraulics Clean!


Contaminated oil is one of the major causes of plant failure. Always keep
the hydraulic oil reservoir at the correct level.
9.2.1 Content overview

This section provides an overview of the "Schlumberger Maintenance Policy"
concerning trucks and units. It defines the RITE Maintenance program’s FIT,
TRIM and Q-check maintenance levels, including when they are performed and
who is responsible to perform them. Also discussed are basic maintenance
hints and a list of FIT items.
9.2.2 RITE program

RITE (Review and Inspection of Tools and Equipment) consists of three
maintenance levels: FIT (Fast Inspection Test), TRIM (Tool Review Inspection
Monthly) and Q-check (Quality Check).
Note
The TRIM acronym applies more to electronic logging tools than mechanical
tools, trucks and units. These items are serviced based on hours of use instead
of chronological time.
9.2.2.1 FIT
FIT checks are performed before and after every job.
Private
The crew performs FIT checks under supervision of the engineer. The checks
should be reported on a FIT sheet.
9.2.2.2 TRIM
TRIM checks on the unit are performed at intervals mandated by local operating
conditions. The crew performs TRIM checks and the results are verified by
the engineer.
An outside vendor with a crewmember present can also perform TRIM. TRIM
should be reported on the TRIM report sheet. Copies of this report should be
sent to the base and to the District Mechanic for information and action.
9.2.2.3 Q-Check
Q-check maintenance on the unit are performed at intervals mandated by local
operating conditions. Only the District Mechanic or properly trained personnel
can perform the Q-Check.
9.2.3 Tips for successful maintenance

• Follow the proper starting procedure every time the engine is started.
• Follow the RITE Maintenance Program.
• Correct all problems as soon as they are detected.
• Keep all records up to date.
• Inform the base mechanic of any operating irregularities.
• Fight corrosion daily. Wash the truck on every return to the shop.
• Use only the proper lubricants and fuel as designated by the engine
manufacturer.
• Keep dust and dirt out of oil and fuel systems.
• Do not use dirty containers, funnels, oil or fuel.
• Keep water out of oil, fuel or air systems.
• Understand the truck or units limitations and do not exceed them.
9.2.4 General truck and unit FIT

The following items are included in all truck and unit FIT checks no matter the
model.
Private
1. Fill the fuel tank.

2. Check the engine oil level.
3. Check the radiator fluid level.
4. Check the hydraulic system oil level.
5. Check the cooling and hydraulic system for leaks.
6. Check all safety equipment.
For unit-specific FIT, TRIM, and Q-check instructions please refer to Intouch
Support: Wireline Oilfield Units Reference Page, content ID# 3264711.
9.3 Operator qualification
9.3.1 Overview
This section provides an overview of Schlumberger Driving Policy, operator
qualification requirements, and safe winch driving procedures.

Potential Loss: Automotive, Personnel
Hazard Category: land transport
Do not operate any Schlumberger unit if you are not certified to do so. You
are only qualified to operate a Schlumberger unit after you have completed
the appropriate training courses, skills assessment and commentary drive by a
certified instructor. See Figure 9-13.
To be qualified to operate an OFS Vehicle, an OFS Driver must satisfactorily

complete a Skill Assessment in a vehicle that matches the vehicle type required
by job duties. The assessment vehicle must have the characteristics of that
vehicle. As well, the driver is required to be qualified in the operating condition(s)
as appropriate to the assigned operating environment.
• Skill assessments are to be performed only by currently certified OFS Driver

Trainers.
• Skill assessments are to be completed in vehicles that are “field ready” and
loaded according with local activities and operations.
• Load securement is required, at a minimum, for all vehicles other than light.
Private
For detailed information on any of the subjects in this chapter please refer
to InTouch Support: Driving (Land Transport) Reference Page, content ID#
3511706.
Figure 9-13: Driver qualification process
Private
9.3.2 Safe winch operating procedures

Operators must not run a winch before proper training has been received. The
winch operator must have completed pull-off prevention training and become
proficient with the controls, indicators, standard and emergency procedures
for the winch unit being used.
All wireline winch operations must be conducted per standard operating

procedures and in compliance to the Safe Winch Operations Placard. See Figure
9-14 Safe winch operations placard.

Potential Loss: Automotive
Winch operators must keep a Z-chart. It is mandatory! Failure to use secondary

depth control is a leading cause of Unintentional Pull offs. Operator/Engineer
depth cross reference catches errors and helps eliminate UPOs. Read the Safe
Winch Operations Placard and be aware of its contents before running in the
hole.
Private
SRPC Doc-TBT\SRPC Doc-TBT\275253781\2.4\Release Date:16-Nov-2006\EDMS UID: 275253781\Produced: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50 9-38 GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Logging Units 9-38
Figure 9-14: Safe winch operations placard
For additional information and training material on Safe Winch Procedures

and Pull-off Prevention, please refer to the 2003 Unintentional Pull-off training
package and Prevention Plan, content ID# 3828510, in InTouchSupport. For
training material on depth control, please refer to \REW Online Training Services
& Tools - Depth Control, content ID# 3630854.
Private
10-i GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Rope sockets 10-i
10 Rope sockets
10.1 Rope socket parts on a logging cable _________________________ 10-1
10.2 Assembly _____________________________________________________ 10-2
10.2.1 Pre-assembly considerations ________________________________ 10-2
10.2.2 Material requirements _______________________________________ 10-3
10.2.3 Cone-type rope socket assembly _____________________________ 10-5
10.2.3.1 Preparing the multi-conductor armored cable ______________ 10-5
10.2.3.2 Installing the outer cone _________________________________ 10-6
10.2.3.3 Uncoiling the outer armor wires ___________________________ 10-7
10.2.3.4 Installing the intermediate cone ___________________________ 10-7
10.2.3.5 Preparing the inner armor wires _________________________ 10-10
10.2.3.6 Installing the inner cone _________________________________ 10-12
10.2.3.7 Removing the insulation from the conductor core _________ 10-13
10.2.3.8 Attaching connectors to the conductor wires ______________ 10-15
10.2.3.9 Final rope socket assembly _____________________________ 10-17
10.2.4 Cable rope socket __________________________________________ 10-18
10.2.4.1 Fishing head and rope socket assembly _________________ 10-18
Private
SRPC Doc-TBT\SRPC Doc-TBT\275253781\2.4\Release Date:16-Nov-2006\EDMS UID: 275253781\Produced: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50 10-ii GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Rope sockets 10-ii
Intentionally Blank
Private
10-1 GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Rope sockets 10-1
10 Rope sockets SRPC,TOPS,cables,rope soc kets
This section describes how to assemble two types of rope sockets. They are:
• cone-type rope socket used for multi-conductor logging cables

• cable rope socket (spider weakpoint) for mono conductor logging cables.
Student objectives
This chapter helps prepare the operator in training for the cables and rope
sockets requirements of the Global TOPS program. Trainees must demonstrate
an understanding of this material before they can progress to the next level of
training.
the following:
• Describe the purpose of the rope socket and how it connects the cable to
support the weight of the tool string.
• Assemble a cone-type rope socket.
• Explain why all conductors must be cut to exactly the same length.
• Explain why a rope socket is made with two grounding connections.
• Explain the purpose of the keyway in the outer cone.
• Assemble an MH-22 head and rope socket.
Reference documents
• Heads Maintenance and Repair Manual, content ID# 3258451.

• Logging Heads Reference Pages, content ID# 3258451.
• Integrated Productivity and Conveyance (IPC) center Website
• TLCS/LWF Maintenance Manual, 2nd Edition, content ID# 3016934.
10.1 Rope socket parts on a logging cable

Refer to Figure 10-1 Rope socket parts on a logging cable. Rope sockets
connect the logging cable to the logging head and bears the weight of the tool
string. The cone-type rope socket, used for multi-conductor cable, consists of a
Private
series of cones inserted between the cable inner and outer armors. These cones
provide the mechanical connection to the torpedo. The rope socket, its seat,
and the split torpedo are keyed to prevent any rotation. The MH-22 monocable
head uses a clamp nut, rope socket and steel thrust washer to make the rope
socket to head connection.
Conductor
Core
Inner Cone
Inner
Armor
Wire
Intermediate
Cone
Outer
Armor
Wire
Wire Spreader
Outer Screws for attaching

Cone Wire Spreader to
Jig
Split Jig Attachment Point

for Wire Spreader
Figure 10-1: Rope socket parts on a logging cable
10.2 Assembly
10.2.1 Pre-assembly considerations

Before starting to assemble the rope socket, consider the following issues:
• Ensure all the tools and parts required are available.

• Verify that the Winchester pliers are properly adjusted.
• Determine the easiest method of threading the inner core.
Private
• Do not use a knife to cut the conductor protector.

• Ensure all the conductors are cut to the required length.
• Properly dispose of all the pieces of cable armor wire. They are dangerous!
The length of the conductors is critical to the proper makeup of the head / rope
socket assembly. (Proper length prevents the connection from parting if too short
and wires from being squeezed in torpedo shells if too long.
10.2.2 Material requirements

Refer to Figure 10-2 Rope socket parts and accessories for the correct rope
socket parts. Always check that a part is correct before using it.
Private
SRPC Doc-TBT\SRPC Doc-TBT\275253781\2.4\Release Date:16-Nov-2006\EDMS UID: 275253781\Produced: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50 10-4 GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Rope sockets 10-4
Figure 10-2: Rope socket parts and accessories
Private
10.2.3 Cone-type rope socket assembly

The following procedure describes how to build a cone type rope socket. This
procedure is the same for several different cable types. The table in Figure 10-2
lists the required component part numbers according to cable type and diameter.
The sequence of major steps used to build a rope socket are as follows:
1. Prepare the multi-conductor armored cable.

2. Install the outer cone.
3. Uncoiling the outer armor wires.
4. Installing the intermediate cone.

5. Preparing the inner armor wires.
6. Installing the inner cone.
7. Removing the conductor core’s insulation.
8. Attaching connectors to the conductor wires.
9. Attaching connectors to the armor wire.
10. Final rope socket assembly.
Note
Standard operating procedure:
• A new rope socket must be built at least once a month, and more often if
cable is damaged or exposed to adverse well conditions.
• A cable ductility test must be performed every time a rope socket is built.
10.2.3.1 Preparing the multi-conductor armored cable

1. Wrap electrical tape (plastic) around the end of the cable.
2. Cut the end of the cable off square through the attached tape using a cable
cutter.
Note
If required, slide the appropriate spring boot on the cable. See Figure 10-2
for the correct part number for the cable size used.
3. Measure 5.4-in from the cable end as shown in Figure 10-3.
Private
Figure 10-3: Cable preparation
4. The electrical tape must be positioned so as not to be in the upper (larger

I.D.) portion of the split jig.
5. Place the cable in the correct split jig, measure and adjust the 4-in upper
length, and secure the cable in a vise, as shown in Figure 10-4. The electrical
tape must be positioned so as not to be in the upper (larger I.D.) portion of

the split jig.
Figure 10-4: Installing the cable into the split jig section
10.2.3.2 Installing the outer cone

1. Remove the electrical tape from the end of the cable.
2. Slide the outer cone over the cable and seat the cone in the upper portion of
the split jig.
3. Tap the cone into the jig with a ball peen hammer if necessary.
Private
Note
Using 5 turns of lacing cord around the cable at the top of the outer cone
prevents the armor wires from crossing over each other during the uncoiling
process. If this step is done slowly and carefully, lacing cord will not be
needed.
10.2.3.3 Uncoiling the outer armor wires

1. Uncoil the outer armor wires to the lacing cord.

Hazard Category: electrical, human
Be mindful of your hands and fingers around armor wire, as the ends are
very sharp.
2. Verify the outer armor wires are equally spaced and flat against the inside of
the outer cone, as shown in Figure 10-6.
10.2.3.4 Installing the intermediate cone

1. Place the intermediate cone over the inner armor wires, as shown in Figure
10-5.
Private
Figure 10-5: Installing the intermediate cone
2. Slide the intermediate cone to the top of the outer cone with the intermediate
cone punch, making sure that no armors are crossed.
Note
Verify the outer armor wires are equally spaced inside the outer cone. Wire
alignment plate (P075249) may be used to align and space the armors.
3. Clean dried mud, etc., from between the armor wires with an air gun before
seating the cones.

Hazard Category: electrical, human
Watch where you place your fingers during the next step. Also, be sure to
wear safety goggles since hammering is involved.
4. Seat the intermediate cone by driving it into the outer cone using the
intermediate cone punch and a large ball peen hammer.
Private
Figure 10-6: Properly seated intermediate cone with evenly spaced outer armors
Note
A 7-52 rope socket is built differently. The 7-52 intermediate cone will NOT
seat flush with the outer cone. It is supposed to stick about 1/16-in to 1/8-in
outside the outer cone as shown in Figure 10-7. It is sufficient to pound
the intermediate cone using a 1 lbm hammer, otherwise the flared area on
top of the cone will be crushed inward by the outer cone. When this flared
area is crushed, there is not enough room left for the inner cone and it will
be nearly impossible to seat properly no matter how hard it is pounded. The
intermediate cone is made of steel which is softer than the one used for the
outer cone. The inner cone may be damaged by the pounding.
Private
Figure 10-7: 7-52 rope socket cone positions
5. With the punch in place, notch the armor wires with a three-cornered file and
break the wires off. File the remaining wires smooth and flush with the top
cone surfaces. Do not file the cones.
10.2.3.5 Preparing the inner armor wires

1. Wrap five turns of lacing cord around the inner armor wires near the installed
cones and tie the lacing cord. The lacing cord prevents crossover of the
armor wires.
Private
Figure 10-8: Exposed inner armors
2. Uncoil the inner armor wires to the lacing cord.

3. Verify the inner armor wires are equally spaced and flat against the inside of
the intermediate cone, as shown in Figure 10-9.

Hazard Category: human
Be sure you are wearing eye protection before cutting wires. Hold the
individual armor wires while cutting them and put the wires in a trash can to
prevent the possibility of hurting someone.

When unwrapping armors in the correct direction, the second armor will stop
alongside the first, the third alongside the second, etc. When unwrapping
in the wrong direction, the second will cross behind the first, the third will
cross behind the second, etc.
Private
4. Bend out and cut all but three inner armor wires to approximately 0.5-in
lengths, See Figure 10-9.
Note
It is preferred to have three long inner armor wires (one ground and two
spare wires). However, only one long wire is required.
10.2.3.6 Installing the inner cone

1. Refer to Figure 10-9. Cut the conductor core at a 45 degree angle, and apply
DC111 lubricant on the end of the conductor core.
Figure 10-9: Installing the inner cone
2. Slide the inner cone over the lubricated cone end.

3. Continue sliding the inner cone down to the lacing cord using the correct
inner cone punch Figure 10-10.
4. Remove the lacing cord from the inner armor wires.
5. Using an inner cone punch and a large ball peen hammer. Seat the inner
cone by driving it into the intermediate cone.
6. Refer to Figure 10-10. Lift the inner cone punch and place the three long
inner armor wires inside the punch with the conductor core. This protects the
wires during the next step.
Private

When performing the next step be careful not to scratch an inner armor wire
or to file the cones. A scratched inner armor wire is not usable. If the zinc
is scratched off the armor, it will soon corrode. Bending stresses will be
concentrated at the scratch and the armor may easily break at this point,
causing a lost ground connection.
Figure 10-10: Properly set inner cone with cut and filed inner armors
Note
Do not file the cones or scratch a long inner armor wire in the following step.
7. With the inner cone punch in place, notch the short (0.5-in) inner armor wires
with a file, break the wires off, and file the remaining wires smooth and flush
with the top cone surface as seen in Figure 10-10.
10.2.3.7 Removing the insulation from the conductor core

Private
There can be no damage to any of the conductor’s insulation jackets during any
of the following steps. If at anytime any jacket insulation is nicked, pinched, cut
or otherwise damaged, start over and build a new rope socket.
1. Refer to Figure 10-11. If desired, wrap 5 turns of lacing cord around the outer
insulation and 0.25-in from the top cone surfaces.
Figure 10-11: Removed outer insulation
2. Remove the outer insulation to the lacing cord.
a. If the cable is rubber insulated, uncoil the rubber while stripping it with a
small pair of needle nose pliers.
b. If the cable is tape insulated, remove the tape and thoroughly clean each
conductor wire insulation with a suitable solvent.
c. Do not sand the conductor smooth.
3. Uncoil the rubber fillers (wire separators). Cut the fillers off.
4. Uncoil and straighten the conductor core wires, as in Figure 10-12.
Note
Klien D209-5C diagonal pliers are recommended for the next step.
Private

The following step only pertains to a center wire that is double-insulated. All
conductor wires must be insulated.
5. If the center wire is double insulated, carefully remove the outer rubber
insulation.
Figure 10-12: Cleaned and straightened conductor wires (filler and tape removed)
10.2.3.8 Attaching connectors to the conductor wires

1. Measure and cut the #7 conductor wire to 2.3-in, or use a trimming jig and
cut all conductors and grounds at once, as shown in Figure 10-13.
Private
Figure 10-13: Preparing the conductor wires
2. If no trimming jig is available use conductor #7 as a reference for measuring

and cutting the six remaining conductor wires and the three inner armor wires.
Note
Detailed instruction on connector installation is provided in the BCC boots
section 12.7 of this manual.
Private
Figure 10-14: Completed rope socket
10.2.3.9 Final rope socket assembly

1. Remove the cable from the split jig, and remove the electrical tape with a
razor knife.
2. The cone type rope socket is a crucial link between the tool string and must
be assembled correctly. Inspect carefully for assembly faults.
3. Inspect the (filled) armor wire spacing within the cones. Unequal wire spacing
indicates that a wrong cone is being used.
4. Refer to Figure 10-15. The cable should fit snugly, but not flared, inside
the outer cone. A flared cable points out that the outer cone is too large
and incorrect.
Flare
Birdcage
Figure 10-15: Flare and birdcage examples
Private
5. The cable should wrap evenly from the cones. A protruding cable wire ("bird
cage") indicates the cable end was not cut off square or measured correctly.
6. The insulation on each conductor should be inspected for any damage. No
jacket can be pinched, nicked, cut or otherwise damaged. If any damage is
found, scrap the rope socket and start over with a new one.
7. Go to the next step when satisfied that the unit has been carefully inspected.
8. If the head is not going to be installed on the cable right away, the rope
socket must be protected from damage. A simple way to do this is to attach
the torpedo that will be used when attaching the head, and tape up the split
halves (if using a PEH-A), or install the rope socket in the EQCS-41 torpedo
(if using an LEH head).
Note
For general information and detailed instructions on TLC Rope Socket
assembly, please refer to InTouch Support: TLCS Maintenance Manual,
10.2.4 Cable rope socket
10.2.4.1 Fishing head and rope socket assembly

The MH-22 can be built on any size cable from 1-18 to 1-42. Only two parts need
to be changed when going from one size of cable to another: the fishing head
and the rope socket (spider weak point). The MH-22 cable head is furnished
without the fishing head and rope socket parts. Make sure you have the correct
fishing head and rope socket for your cable size, as listed in Table 10-1.
Table 10-1: Cable Fishing Sub-assemblies
1-3/16-in cables fishing sub-assemblies used with MH-22

Fishing head and rope socket sub-assembly
Cable Dia
(inches) Sub-assembly Fishing Head Rope Socket
Part No. Part No. Part No.
0.42 H136157 H035324 H036476
0.31/0.32 H136159 H035593 H036477
0.25 H701925 H035593 H136166
0.23 H701923 H40728 H701998
0.20/0.22 H136160 H035073 H036464
0.18 H136161 H125567 H036475
Private
If the correct size hardware is not available, the next smaller size may be used.
Drill out the rope socket holes that accept the cable strands and the ID of the
fishing head to the correct dimensions.
Table 10-2 lists information about the feedthrough connectors and insulators that
can be used with a MH-22 lower head (H122373).
Table 10-2: Feedthrough Assemblies and Insulators for MH-22 Lower Head
Temp Rating Pressure Rating

Connector Remarks
(deg F) (kpsi)
H256581
500 25 Use B023671 backup ring
(OPT)
H701182 (STD) 500 50 Most reliable, electrically
1. Refer to Figure 10-16. Slide the fishing head onto the cable.
2. Slide the clamp nut (H035970), thrust ring (H230460), and the proper size
rope socket onto the cable.
Note
Thrust ring (H230460) is required for all rope sockets.
Figure 10-16: Sequence of parts installation on the cable
3. Wrap the cable with tape about 10.5-in from the end in order to establish the
point in which to place the rope socket.
Private
Note
For the MH-32 assembly, wrap the cable with tape about 6.5-in from the end.
The tape must be on the downhole end of the rope socket. The tape marks
the location of the rope socket with respect to the cable end.
4. Screw the clamp nut part way onto the rope socket to cover and protect the
threads Figure 10-17.
5. Hold the clamp nut in a vise (do not squeeze excessively) and pull the tape
marker on the cable tightly against the downhole end of the rope socket.
6. Select the required weak point strength. Consult your engineer, if you are
unsure of the strength rating required.

7. Table 10-3 lists the correct quantity of outer armor wires to use for the rope
socket strength required. It also provides the correct torque value to be used
to tighten the clamp nut.
8. Refer to Figure 10-17. Unwrap an outer armor wire. Loop it over the slotted
face of the rope socket and thread it back through the closest hole in the
rope socket.
9. Using vise grip pliers, pull the wire tight so that it lays flat in a slot adjacent
to the hole.
10. If necessary, carefully tap the wire down into the groove to make it lie flat,
ensuring that the rope socket will fit inside the bell housing.
Figure 10-17: Preparing outer armors
Private
11. Repeat the above wire placement procedure using the proper number of
strands of outer armor wires evenly spaced around the rope socket. The
strain on all strands used should be balanced.
12. Bend and cut off remaining outer armors as shown in Figure 10-17.
Private
SRPC Doc-TBT\SRPC Doc-TBT\275253781\2.4\Release Date: 16-Nov-2006\EDMS UID: 275253781\Produced: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50 10-22 GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Rope sockets 10-22
Intentionally Blank
Private
Table 10-3: Spider Weak Point Strengths
Cable Type 1-18 P/ZT* 1-20 P/ZT* 1-22 P/ZT 1-22 ZT

Armor Type GIPS 12 x 15 GIPS 10 x 16 GIPS 11 x 15 Multiphase 11 x 15
Nut Nut Nut Nut
Outer Inner Strength Torque Strength Torque Strength Torque Strength Torque
wires Qty wires Qty Lbs*** Inch x Lbs*** Inch x Lbs** Inch x Lbs** Inch x
Lbs Lbs Lbs Lbs
3 3 600 150 640 160 1060 195 1125 195
4 3 750 180 800 190 1260 230 1335 230
5 3 900 205 960 220 1460 260 1550 260
6 3 1050 235 1120 250 1660 295 1760 295
7 3 1200 260 1280 280 1865 325 1975 325

8 3 1350 290 1440 310 2065 360 2190 360
9 3 - - - - 2265 390 2400 390
Cable Type 1-22 ZT 1-23/2-23 P/ZT 1-23/2-23 ZT 1-25 P/ZT
GIPS & Multiphase
Armor Type Vectorloy 11 x 15 HC265 12 x 18 GIPS 12 x 18
12 x 18
Nut Nut Nut Nut
wires Qty wires Qty Lbs** Inch x Lbs** Inch x Lbs** Inch x Lbs** Inch x
Lbs Lbs Lbs Lbs
3 3 970 195 995 170 975 170 1205 180
4 3 1155 230 1160 200 1135 200 1405 225
5 3 1340 260 1325 230 1300 230 1605 270
6 3 1525 295 1490 255 1460 255 1805 315
7 3 1710 325 1655 285 1625 285 2005 360
8 3 1890 360 1820 315 1785 315 2205 405
9 3 2075 390 1990 340 1950 340 2410 450
10 3 - - 2155 370 2110 370 - -
11 3 - - 2320 400 2275 400 - -
Cable Type 2-23 P/ZT 2-23 ZT* 1-32/2-32 P/ZT 1-42 ZB/ZH*
GIPS & Multiphase
Armor Type 12 x 15 Vectorloy GIPS 12 x 18 Shooting Bridle
13 x 19
Nut Nut Nut Nut
wires Qty wires Qty Lbs** Inch x Lbs** Inch x Lbs** Inch x Lbs*** Inch x
Lbs Lbs Lbs Lbs
3 3 915 160 780 160 1720 200 2280 380
4 3 1070 190 910 190 2005 250 3000 400
5 3 1220 220 1040 220 2295 300 3550 420
6 3 1375 250 1170 250 2580 350 4060 440
Private
7 3 1525 280 1300 280 2870 400 4600 460

8 3 1680 310 1430 310 3155 450 5100 480
9 3 1835 340 1560 340 3440 500 - -
Private
Private
Private
*No experimental data available on these cable types*

**No experimental data available on these cable types ± 15%.
***Break strengths not adjusted per 12/93 model. Future testing planned ±
13. Tie cotton string around the inner armor layer as shown as shown in Figure
10-18.
14. Unwrap and install three inner armors in the rope socket for torque control.
15. Pull the inner armors tight. Do not leave them loose.
16. Leave two inner armors long for a ground connection (Figure 10-19).
17. Cut the remaining armors two inches from the rope socket (Figure 10-19).
18. Bend out the ends of the inner armors away from the core as shown in
Figure 10-19.
Figure 10-18: Preparing remaining inner armors for two inch cut
Figure 10-19: Ground wire and conductor preparation
19. Screw the clamp nut (H035970) farther onto the rope socket so that it clamps
the wires.
Private
20. Refer to Figure 10-20. Install the centering ring (H701896) that will align
the thrust washer with the rope socket and ensure the wires are sufficiently
flat in their grooves.
Figure 10-20: Applying torque to clamp nut
21. Make sure the centering ring covers both the thrust washer and the rope
socket.

Do not over torque the clamp nut. It will negatively affect the impact strength
(shock resistance) of the weak point.
22. Using a torque wrench, tighten the clamp nut with the proper torque
specified in Table 10-3.
23. Remove the tape from behind the rope socket.
Private
Note
For detailed instructions on Conductor Assembly and Lower Head Final
Assembly, please refer to the MH-22 portion of Section 12.4.3 MH-22
monocable head.
Private
SRPC Doc-TBT\SRPC Doc-TBT\275253781\2.4\Release Date: 16-Nov-2006\EDMS UID: 275253781\Produced: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50 10-30 GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Rope sockets 10-30
Intentionally Blank
Private
11-i GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / CMTD 11-i
11 CMTD
11.1 Cable Mounted Tension Device ________________________________ 11-1
11.1.1 Description _________________________________________________ 11-1
11.1.2 Basic theory of measurement ________________________________ 11-2
11.1.3 CMTD and logging cable setup ______________________________ 11-4
11.1.4 CMTD installation example __________________________________ 11-6
11.1.5 Calibration __________________________________________________ 11-7
11.1.5.1 Tension device calibrator (H71340) _______________________ 11-7
11.1.5.2 CMTD calibration _______________________________________ 11-10
11.1.5.3 CMTD calibration tolerances ____________________________ 11-11
11.1.6 CMTD FIT checks __________________________________________ 11-12
11.1.7 CMTD troubleshooting _____________________________________ 11-13
Private
SRPC Doc-TBT\SRPC Doc-TBT\275253781\2.4\Release Date:16-Nov-2006\EDMS UID: 275253781\Produced: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50 11-ii GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / CMTD 11-ii
Intentionally Blank
Private
11-1 GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / CMTD 11-1
11 CMTD CMTD
This section describes the purpose of the Cable Mounted Tension Device
(CMTD). CMTD safety issues, logging cable setup and unit installation are
presented. The basic calibration procedures for the CMTD are provided along
with CMTD FIT checks and troubleshooting.
Student objectives
After studying this section, the operator in training should be able to:
1. Describe the purpose of the CMTD and how it makes the tension
measurement.
2. Describe what parts of the CMTD need to be changed when using different
diameters of cable.
3. List the different types of CMTDs
4. Install a CMTD on a land or offshore unit.
5. Assist the engineer in calibration of a CMTD.
6. Assemble and disassemble a CMTD and perform FIT check.
Reference documents
• CMTD Maintenance Manual InTouch ID: 3012541

• InTouch Support: Basic Logging Equipment Reference Page
• IPC Integrated Productivity and Conveyance Center Homepage
11.1 Cable Mounted Tension Device
11.1.1 Description
The Cable Mounted Tension Device (series CMTD and CMTD-B) is a running
line tension meter. It provides accurate repeatable measurements of cable
tension for well logging services. The CMTD is mounted semi-permanently on
the reeling arm of the logging unit, and is compatible with all Schlumberger
logging units. Located between the winch drum and Integrated Depth Wheel
(IDW), the CMTD replaces the Tension Device (TD-K), which is mounted to the
remote sheave wheel.
Private
Figure 11-1: CMTD-B device
11.1.2 Basic theory of measurement

The CMTD provides a signal proportional to cable tension by detecting strain in

a roller axle. Cable load is applied to the strain axle by bending the cable over
a series of rollers, as shown in Figure 11-2. The two outer guide rollers are
placed such that the cable is forced to contact the smaller diameter inner guide
rollers. These inner guide rollers ensure that the cable bend angle over the
center roller, which contains the strain axle, remains constant when variations in
cable diameter occur.
Private
SRPC Doc-TBT\SRPC Doc-TBT\275253781\2.4\Release Date:16-Nov-2006\EDMS UID: 275253781\Produced: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50 11-3 GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / CMTD 11-3
Figure 11-2: Physics of measurement

• Never place your fingers near the CMTD while the cable is moving or while
the winch is enabled for operation. Fingers caught between the CMTD rollers
will be crushed.
• When handling the cable, watch out for armor burrs or broken strands that
can cut or puncture your hands.
• Do not exceed more than 15.0 VAC to the CMTD strain axle bridge.
• Excess voltage will permanently damage the strain axle.
For more detailed information on how the CMTD makes its measurement, please
refer to Section 3 of the CMTD Maintenance Manual, content ID# 3012541, in
InTouch.
Private
11.1.3 CMTD and logging cable setup

The CMTD functions with any size of logging cable. However, the proper size
"outer" rollers must be used for a given logging cable. Cable damage and
incorrect tension readings result if an improper roller is used. Use Table 11-1 to
determine the correct roller for the cable.
The CMTD-BD which is designed for 7-52 cable has unique rollers in all five
locations. These rollers have a straight knurl on the roller edge for ease of
identification. The rollers shown in Figure 11-3 can be used with the CMTD-BD
when it is necessary to use this version with different cable sizes.

When using a 7-52 cable, DO NOT use a CMTD that does not have all five 7-52
rollers with the straight knurl marking.
Table 11-1: Cable and Roller Reference Chart
Roller Cable Size Part No.

7-42, 7-46 H701074
1-32, 2-32, 7-39 H701077
1-18, 1-23, 2-23, 1-25 H701078
7-52 H701103, H701104, H701105
Cable tension must be zero before the CMTD can be mounted on the logging
cable. The logging cable is slid over the outer rollers, and under the inner and
center rollers. See Figure 11-2. The signal lead is then connected between
the CMTD and the TDP.
Private
Figure 11-3: CMTD cable/roller selection
Accurate CMTD operation requires proper calibration Section 10.3.5 of the

CMTD Maintenance Manual, content ID# 3012541, in InTouch. All calibration
correction techniques are to be followed. The CMTD should be calibrated with
a calibration cable that is the same size as the cable used with the CMTD for
operation. Ideally, this cable should be seasoned and without high armor wires.
Note
For part numbers and description of shop equipment and unit specific mounting
kits please refer to Section 2.2.3 of the CMTD Maintenance Manual. Link to
the new CMTD maintenance manual.
Table 11-2: CMTD Assembly Options
H441349 CMTD-BA for 7-42 and 7-46 cable sizes

H441350 CMTD-BB for 1-32 2-32 and 7-39 cable sizes
H441351 CMTD-BC for 1-18, 1-23, 2-23 and 1-25 cable
sizes
H441352 CMTD-BD for 7-52 cable
T5017801 CMTD-BE for 7-48 cable
H712060 CMTD-CA for 1-18, 1-23, 2-23, 1-25, 1-32 and
2-32 cable sizes
Private
11.1.4 CMTD installation example

Before CMTD installation, refer to the steps listed below and Figure 11-4.
Note
For part numbers and description of shop equipment and unit specific mounting
kits please refer to Section 2.2.3 of the CMTD Maintenance Manual, content
ID# 3012541 in InTouch.
1. Remove the IDW from the reeling arm (if not already removed).
2. Attach the pillow block (H441226) to the tapered mount (H441498) using
four 5/16-18 x 2-1/4 hex head screws (B028477), four spring lock washers
(B015747), and four 5/16-18 hex nuts (B013774).
3. Install the tapered mount (H441498) into the end of the reeling arm.
4. Install the IDW onto the end of the mounting bracket.
5. Install the CMTD and two extension springs (B029275).
6. Retain the CMTD with two quick release pins (B029235).
7. Secure the signal cable (H441353) to the mounting bracket and reeling arm,
so movement of the CMTD and reeling arm do not stress the signal cable.
8. Route the signal cable (H441353) along the reeling arm and through the
cab bulkhead connect to the TDP.
Note
The installation procedure example above is for OSU-FE, 2600, and 9900
series trucks. For unit specific installation graphics and procedures please
refer to Section 4 of the CMTD maintenance manual.
Private
Figure 11-4: Installation on OSU-FE, 2600 and 9900 series trucks, FSLC and MSLC
11.1.5 Calibration
11.1.5.1 Tension device calibrator (H71340)

Refer to Figure 11-5. The Tension Device Calibrator (TDC-C) is used to calibrate
the CMTD. The TDC-C is an update for the tension device calibrator. A precision
load cell with a digital readout replaces the old dial indicator measure rod. The
new TDC tension measuring system has greater accuracy, a resolution of 10
lbf, and is much easier to use.
Private
Figure 11-5: CMTD / TDC-C calibration setup
Private
Figure 11-6: Tension device calibrator drawing with load cell
Private
The TDC-C does not require calibration charts. The output is read directly in
Klbf. The digital readout also has peak reading "capture" capability. In addition,
a metering valve is added to the hydraulic system to serve as a "fine tuner" for
the applied tensile load. With this new system, it is possible to "dial in" precise
tensile loads to within 20 lbf in 10,000 lbf. The total load capacity is 30,000 lbf.
The TDC-C can be used to calibrate all tension devices currently used in the
field. It can also be used as a tensile test machine in the district, where it can
be used for checking the break strength of spider weak points, checking cable
condition, load testing end caps, etc. The peak reading capability of the digital
meter will capture breaking strength. The load cell is robust enough for ensile
testing items to failure, another improvement over the old dial indicator model.
11.1.5.2 CMTD calibration

Perform the calibration as follows:
1. Turn l2 V power on.

2. Select the type of tension device being calibrated on the WFDD.
3. Mount the tension device in the tension calibration jig.
4. With no tension applied, click the calibration button on the WFDD.
5. Enter ”0" into both high and low setpoints. This will result in a gain of 1 which
results in a raw tension value from the sensor.
6. Pump up the tension jig until the digital readout show about 90% of full scale.
Enter this value into the high setpoint Figure 11-7, and click the store high
value button.
7. Pump down the tension jig until the reading is about 10% of full scale. Enter
this value into the low setpoint and click the store low value button.
8. Click OK to close the window.
9. Pump the tension jig to various settings and verify the readout matches the
WFDD tension reading within acceptable limits Table 11-3. Recalibrate
if necessary.
Private
Figure 11-7: WFDD display
11.1.5.3 CMTD calibration tolerances

Table 11-3: CMTD Calibration Tolerances
Actual tension (lbf) Negative tolerance Positive tolerance

1,000 -0 +150
2,000 -100 +150
3,000 -150 +200
4,000 -200 +200
5,000 -250 +250
6,000 -300 +300
7,000 -350 +350
8,000 -400 +400
9,000 -450 +450
10,000 -500 +500
After calibration, the dial Indicator should return to zero. If a temperature change
causes more than one division error = (160 Ibf), then recalibrate. If the tension
response is out of tolerance, determine and correct the cause.
Private
11.1.6 CMTD FIT checks

Figure 11-8 illustrates the location of specific CMTD components and
maintenance points used in FIT Maintenance.

If high pressure steam is used to clean the CMTD, be careful not to spray directly
on the strain axle connector.
Figure 11-8: Component locations
1. Clean the CMTD thoroughly after each job.

2. Inject standard grease into all CMTD grease fittings, until grease extrudes
from the roller bearings. See Figure 11-8.
3. Verify all of the guide rollers roll freely, and all pivots on the mounting bracket
have close fits and move freely.
4. Verify there is no mud build up in the grooves of the guide rollers preventing
proper contact between the cable and rollers.
Private
Note
For detailed assembly and disassembly procedures, please refer to Section
5 of the CMTD Maintenance Manual.
11.1.7 CMTD troubleshooting

1. Verify the center roller rotates freely. If a foreign object is lodged between the
center roller and the grease housing, the load may not be transferred from
the center roller to the strain axle.
2. Using a VOM, check the insulation and continuity of the signal cable
(H441354) according to Table 11-4. Use the R x 1 ohm scale for continuity
and R x l0K scale for insulation.
Table 11-4: CMTD Continuity and Insulation Checks
Between Resistance
Pin A - Contact A > 1 ohm
Pin B - Contact A >1 ohm
Pin C - Contact C >1 ohm
Pin D - Contact C >1 ohm
Between all pins Infinity
All pins to mass Infinity
3. Check that the WFDD is set to the proper type of tension device.
Private
Figure 11-9: CMTD exploded view
Private
12-i GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Wireline logging heads 12-i
12 Wireline logging heads

12.1 Logging equipment head ______________________________________ 12-2
12.1.1 General description _________________________________________ 12-2
12.2 LEH-QT, 3-3/8-in, 31-pin logging tension head (H701460) ______ 12-3
12.2.1 Safety and precautions ______________________________________ 12-3
12.2.1.1 Danger to personnel _____________________________________ 12-4
12.2.1.2 Danger to equipment ____________________________________ 12-4
12.2.2 General description _________________________________________ 12-4
12.2.3 LEH-QT specifications ______________________________________ 12-5
12.2.4 Troubleshooting guide ______________________________________ 12-6
12.2.5 Assembly ___________________________________________________ 12-7
12.2.6 RITE maintenance _________________________________________ 12-14
12.2.6.1 FIT-1 mechanical _______________________________________ 12-14

12.2.6.2 FIT-2 electrical _________________________________________ 12-14
12.2.6.3 TRIM __________________________________________________ 12-14
12.3 Perforating Equipment Head (PEH) ___________________________ 12-15
12.3.1 Introduction ________________________________________________ 12-15
12.3.1.1 Kits/combinations ______________________________________ 12-16
12.4 Monocable Heads (MH) ______________________________________ 12-16
12.4.1 Description ________________________________________________ 12-16
12.4.2 Kits _______________________________________________________ 12-17
12.4.3 MH-22 monocable head ____________________________________ 12-17
12.4.3.1 Safety _________________________________________________ 12-17
12.4.3.2 Specifications __________________________________________ 12-18
12.4.3.3 MH-22 disassembly ____________________________________ 12-18
12.4.3.4 RITE maintenance ______________________________________ 12-28
12.4.4 MH-32 monocable head ____________________________________ 12-29
12.4.4.1 Description _____________________________________________ 12-29
12.4.4.2 Specifications __________________________________________ 12-29
12.4.4.3 MH-32 disassembly and assembly _______________________ 12-29
12.4.4.4 MH-32 special tools ____________________________________ 12-30
12.4.4.5 RITE maintenance ______________________________________ 12-30
12.5 Weakpoints __________________________________________________ 12-32
12.5.1 General Description ________________________________________ 12-32
12.5.2 Weakpoint listing ___________________________________________ 12-33
12.6 ECRD (Electronically Controlled Release Device) _____________ 12-36
12.6.1 Personnel safety __________________________________________ 12-36
12.6.2 Equipment safety __________________________________________ 12-37
12.6.3 General information ________________________________________ 12-37
12.6.4 Parts of the ECRD _________________________________________ 12-38
12.7 BCC boots ___________________________________________________ 12-39
12.7.1 Overview __________________________________________________ 12-39
12.7.2 General description ________________________________________ 12-39
12.7.3 Precautions _______________________________________________ 12-40
12.7.4 Boot selection _____________________________________________ 12-41
Private
12-ii GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Wireline logging heads 12-ii
12.7.4.1 Conductor sizes ________________________________________ 12-41

12.7.4.2 Female boot selection __________________________________ 12-42
12.7.4.3 Male boot selection - Kalrez and Viton (insulator series) ___ 12-43
12.7.4.4 Male boot selection – Kalrez and Viton (non-insulator
series) _________________________________________________ 12-44
12.7.4.5 Large wire boot selection _______________________________ 12-45
12.7.4.6 Female boot and liner dimensions _______________________ 12-45
12.7.4.7 Boot installation and removal tools _______________________ 12-46
12.7.4.8 Operating hints _________________________________________ 12-46
12.7.4.9 Assembly ______________________________________________ 12-47
12.7.4.10 Special assembly procedures for large diameter cable
insulations _____________________________________________ 12-50
12.7.4.11 Connecting and disconnecting ___________________________ 12-51
12.7.4.12 Troubleshooting ________________________________________ 12-53
Private
12-1 GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Wireline logging heads 12-1
12 Wireline logging heads SRPC,TOPS,wirline,logging
This section describes the various types of wireline logging heads currently used
in the field. For the purposes of this manual, wireline heads will be divided into
three separate categories: 1) Logging Equipment Heads (LEH), 2) Perforating
Equipment Heads (PEH) and 3) Monocable Heads (MH). In each category
focus is placed on: Equipment safety considerations, specifications and RITE
Maintenance. One common example from each category will be provided to
show the trainee what is available in the more detailed maintenance manuals
and reference material online. Web links to this material will be provided where
necessary. Brief reference sections for weakpoints and BBC connectors are
also provided at the end of this chapter.
Student objectives
After studying the material in this chapter, the operator in training should be
able to perform the following:
• Explain the difference between the different categories of wireline logging

heads.
• Perform basic RITE maintenance on one head from each category.
• Perform assembly and disassembly on a head.
• Determine what kind of head to use based on the type of job to be run.
• Determine what type and rating of weakpoint is to be used in a specific type
of head.
• Explain what a Loadcell is and how it works. What lines does it use?
• Explain the importance of proper BCC boot selection.
• Explain how an ECRD works, and how to identify an ECRD equipped head.
References
• IPC Heads Operations Reference Manual, content ID# 3258451.

• InTouch Support: Logging Heads Reference Pages,
http://intouchsupport.com/intouch/methodinvokerpage.cfm?caseid=3258451
• IPC Integrated Productivity and Conveyance website,
Private
12.1 Logging equipment head

The LEH cable heads are a part of a new modular torpedo, bridle, and cable head
system. Each location may configure their LEH heads to meet their own specific
needs. LEH-QC is now the standard LEH head. The LEH heads commonly have
a 31-pin female lower connection, so no AH-64 adapter is required.
The LEH heads can attach directly to the common 31-pin, 3-3/8-in logging tools.
The LEH family of heads can be connected directly to the armored logging cable,
or run with the BRT-AQ or BRT-BA bridle. The BRT-BA is a redesign of the
BRT-AQ for simplification and cost-reduction.
The mass isolation feature of the LEH/BRT combination is built into the bridle
cable rather than the weakpoint as in EQCS-34 and PEH-AB cable heads.
Any LEH head listed below can be teamed with the BRT-BA to replace the old
EQCS-34 bridle head. This will reduce the number of different heads that have to
be maintained and carried on the truck. Adapters are available for connecting the
LEH heads to a wide variety of different tool diameters and pin configurations.
Members of the LEH family of heads:
• LEH-QC 3-3/8 in, 31-pin w/ long torpedo (H701916)

• LEH-QO 3-3/8 in, 31-pin oil-filled head (H360020)
• LEH-QT 3-3/8 in, 31-pin head w/ tension measurement (H701460)
• LEH-HT 3-3/8 in, 31-pin HTHP head w/ tension measurement (H356846)
• LEH-ST 3-3/8 in, 31-pin SLIM head w/ tension measurement (H351344)
• LEH-RC 2-3/4 in, 29-pin head w/ long torpedo (H713338).
Note
Tables of common adapters and kits and combinations for LEH heads can be
found in the Heads Operation Reference Manual at InTouch Support: Logging
Heads Reference pages. Content ID:3258451.
Private
Note
Information provided in the example below (LEH-QT) can be found for any head
in the LEH family by referring to Heads Operation Reference Manual InTouch
Support: Logging heads reference pages. Content ID: 3258451.
12.2 LEH-QT, 3-3/8-in, 31-pin logging tension head

(H701460)
Figure 12-1: LEH-QT exploded view, (H701460)
12.2.1 Safety and precautions

Be aware that high voltages may exist in cable heads. Make sure that tool power
is off before working on a head attached to a logging cable.
Private
12.2.1.1 Danger to personnel

While calibrating the LEH-QT in a TDC-C, be aware of the relatively high
tensions that will be encountered. Be sure to remove the weakpoint from the
head before calibration.
Use care while assembling and disassembling the LEH-QT. Be careful not to
pinch or nick the exposed head wires during calibration or assembly. Use the
provided documentation to familiarize yourself with the hardware.
12.2.1.2 Danger to equipment

Do not apply more than 15 V excitation to the strain gauge circuit. High voltages
or transients will permanently damage the loadcell. The 31-pin adapter for the
LEH-QT is equipped with a gas-tube surge protector device. When the 31-pin
adapter is installed, this device will effectively protect the tension sensor from
accidental contact with a megger. If you are powering or checking the loadcell by
itself, there is no surge protection in the circuit and excess voltage will damage
the sensor.
Use 31-pin head extender (H245349) to meg the head; this will also prevent
contact with the tension sensor pins (#14,15,19,20).
Do not attempt field repairs of the tension sensor. If the loadcell appears to be
the source of a failure, remove it from the head and return it to IPC Engineering
for analysis and repair. See the troubleshooting section for help in locating the
source of the failure. Locations may want to keep a spare loadcell assembly
for this case.
The loadcell must be completely oil-filled. Check for air by pushing down on the
piston. Piston should not move. If oil is leaking, find the source of the leak.

The LEH-QT (Logging Equipment Head with Tension) is a modified LEH-QC
type cable head, which provides the field crew with a downhole measurement
of tension on the weakpoint. The downhole tension measurement provides a
clearer picture of stuck-in-hole situations that may occur in sticky or deviated
holes. The tension sensor is located where it is most effective, directly below the
weakpoint in the head, which helps to prevent accidental pull-offs. In addition, the
downhole tension data make more accurate cable stretch corrections possible,
which will improve the interpretation and quality control of the other logs.
Private
The tension sensor is enclosed in an oil-filled loadcell that is mounted in the

bulkhead of the LEH-QT, in the center of the feedthrough arrangement Figure
12-11.The sensor itself is a sputter-deposited thin-film strain gauge, arranged in
a Wheatstone bridge circuit. A sputter-deposited strain gauge was chosen for
increased accuracy and reliability under downhole environmental conditions.
The loadcell must be calibrated once a month with a TDC-C digital calibrator. An
LEH-QT, when properly calibrated, will provide an accurate downhole tension
measurement, even under severe downhole conditions.
The power and signal to and from the tension sensor are passed through the
31-pin adapter and then through a 5-pin, high-pressure feedthrough Figure 12-10
LEH-QT assembly drawing (p. 12-12) and then on to the sensor itself. Signal
processing and excitation voltage are supplied from a DTC or a modified TCC-B
(TCC-BF), which contains an additional small board to supply excitation voltage
to the loadcell and process the signal from it. The tension measurement is routed
into the CTEM circuit that currently exists in the TCC. After the modification to
the TCC-B is made, the CTEM measurement is no longer available.
In addition to the loadcell, two major machined pieces are needed to allow its
mounting in the head. Also, a modification to the 31-pin adapter is required
to allow for the passage of signal and power to/from the DTC or modified
TCC-B. The LEH-QT also uses slightly longer small-body feedthroughs for head
conductor connections than does the LEH-QC. All other parts of the LEH-QT
are common to the LEH-QC.
The LEH is also equipped with ports in the fishing bell (Figure 12-10) to hold
up to three maximum reading thermometers. This gives the client an accurate
formation temperature at the maximum depth reached by the toolstring, which
can be used for many purposes including cementing operations calculations.
The LEH-Q / QB or QC modified with the kit LHTK-AA (H701450) becomes

the LEH-QT.
12.2.3 LEH-QT specifications

• Length: 37.5-in
• Weight: 33 lbs
• Diameter: 3-3/8-in
• Operating temperatures: -65 degF to 350 degF
• Compensated temp. range: 32 degF to 350 degF
• Operating pressure: 20,000 psi.
Private
• Fishing neck: 2.31-in

• Load range: -1,000 to 8,000 lbf
• Accuracy: +/- 3% FS or 240 lbf
• Power supply: AC Main, 250 V, 10 mA.
12.2.4 Troubleshooting guide

The troubleshooting guide is intended to give the engineer, technician or operator
help in locating the probable cause of failures in the LEH-QT. If the failure is
isolated down to the loadcell, send the loadcell back to IPC for analysis and
repair. Field repairs on the loadcell are not recommended. The sputter-deposited
strain element is very fragile and can be easily damaged if removed from it’s
protective housing and mishandled.
H701311 H701315
H701429 H352106
Figure 12-2: Loadcell (H352106) mounting in head (H701315)
If the failure is not located in the loadcell, then the problem is either in the 31-pin
adapter or the processing electronics. Problems with the 31-pin adapter may be
found with a Simpson meter and a circuit diagram. If the problem is isolated to
the TCC-B, troubleshoot using the MR#6 circuit diagram for the TCC-B.
Table 12-1: LEH-QT Failure Symptoms and Probable Causes
Symptom Probable cause(s) Action

Bridge IR to Mass low(less Moisture in oil Remove 5-pin bulkhead;
than 40 megohms) Short on strain element clean, flush oil and refill.
If strain element is electrically
shorted, send to SCD for
repair.
3 kilohms between any pin Bridge open Isolate the open. If in 31-pin
combination (14,15,19,20) adapter, repair. If in loadcell,
send it to SCD.
Noisy output Unshielded wires used, either Shielded wire must be used
in 31-pin adapter or TCC, or in for sensor signal throughout.
31-pin jumper if used.
Leaking oil Damaged bladder or O-ring DO NOT GO IN HOLE.
seal. Replace seals and piston, if
necessary, and oil-fill.
Private
Symptom Probable cause(s) Action

Gain drifts Check calibration procedure
and set up. This failure is
unlikely.
Offset drifts ± 200 lbf is acceptable. If Check drift by comparing
more than 200 lbf, find source no-load reading at surface to
of drift (TCC or sensor). 31 no-loadreading at bottom hole.
pin jumpers may also be the
cause.
12.2.5 Assembly
Note
Please refer to Figure 12-10 for part numbers and locations within LEH-QT.
Please refer to Figure 12-11 for part numbers and locations within the tension
sensor loadcell.
1. Install 10 plastic feedthrough connectors (H701352) into head (H701315). An

O-ring (B012416) must be installed on each feedthrough before installation
in the head. Use O-ring installation tool (H701899) and torque wrench
(B033177) Figure 12-3 Plastic feedthrough connectors and loadcell installed.
Refer to InTouch Support: Plastic Feedthrus in Wireline Logging Heads
Content ID: 3441955 for proper installation procedure.
Figure 12-3: Plastic feedthrough connectors and loadcell installed
Private
2. Apply lubriplate grease to O-rings (B011286) and backup rings (H701625) on

loadcell (H352106). Install loadcell into head (H701315). Fit should be tight.
Ensure that loadcell shoulder has bottomed out on the base of the head. You
should feel both O-rings pass into the seal bore. See Figure 12-2.

Do not hammer on the loadcell to install!
3. Apply Loctite #242 (B017678) to the threads of large retaining ring (H701311)
Figure 12-2. . DO NOT OMIT THE USE OF LOCTITE. Use modified
socket (H701429) Figure 12-2, and an extension rod along with 1/2-in drive
ratchet wrench to screw the retaining ring onto the mounted loadcell. Torque
retaining ring to 50 ft-lbf, minimum. Be sure you have fully threaded on the
retaining ring.
Figure 12-4: Loctite application to loadcell ring (H701311)
4. Make up 10 head leads, using Viton female boots (H400313 or H318168),

liner (H245765), socket (H115576) and FEP insulated wire (H122757).
Overall length of leads should be 24-in measured from end of boot to end
of boot. See Figure 12-5 and refer to BCC Connections section 12.7 of this
chapter.
5. Install one end of each head lead over each feedthrough connector Figure
12-5. Use boot retainers (H245716), one each over the booted feedthrough.
Use a boot retainer tool (H268423) as seen in the figure below.
Private
SRPC Doc-TBT\SRPC Doc-TBT\275253781\2.4\Release Date:16-Nov-2006\EDMS UID: 275253781\Produced: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50 12-9 GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Wireline logging heads 12-9
Figure 12-5: Installation of head leads on to feedthroughs
6. Pack DC-111 around the booted feedthroughs at the bulkhead to exclude

mud from the area. Be careful not to get DC-111 on threads.
7. Screw the housing extension (H701310) onto the head (H701315). Secure
with two groove pins (B033000). Be careful not to pinch the wires. See
Figure 12-6 and Figure 12-10.
Figure 12-6: Housing extension (H701310)
Private

Do not omit these groove pins.

Do not substitute a spirol pin for a groove pin.
Note
To remove groove pins, reverse pins out of the hole, do not drive them
through the hole.
8. Install grease fitting (A017129) into the threaded hole provided. Make sure
the grease fitting does not extend past the 3-3/8- in diameter.
9. Screw weakpoint adapter (H441737) Figure 12-7 and Figure 12-10 onto
weakpoint of choice and then screw weakpoint into the top of the loadcell. Be
sure to bottom out these threads, but do not torque excessively.
Figure 12-7: LEH-QT with loadcell, weakpoint and weakpoint adapter installed
Note
Make sure that the pin and groove end of the weakpoint are pointed
downhole and fixed into the top of the loadcell.
10. Slide fishing bell (H231884) over weakpoint and loadcell assembly. Screw
the fishing bell onto housing extension (H701310). Install thermometer
housings (H245662).
Private
11. Attach Housing Weldment (H701897) to weakpoint head assembly. Slide

Outer Housing (H701907) over housing weldment and screw onto weakpoint
head assembly.
12. Slide fishing bell extension (H701908) over outer housing and screw into
fishing bell (H231884).
13. Using SFT-121 (H129804) cartridge installation and removal tool, install
bulkhead to head adapter (H701416) into bottom end of lower head
(H701315) Figure 12-8.
Figure 12-8: Bulkhead to head adapter in SFT-121
Figure 12-9: Asembled LEH-QT (H701460)
Private
Figure 12-10: LEH-QT assembly drawing
Private
Figure 12-11: Loadcell assembly
Private

Mechanical, electrical, and operational FIT checks are described in the following
sub-sections.
12.2.6.1 FIT-1 mechanical

1. Check load cell for oil leaks, or other damage. Top off head with DC-111,
using grease fitting.
2. Keep a good coat of DC-111 silicone grease between the outer housing
(H701907) and the fishing bell extension (H701908) to provide for a smooth
transmission of load to the weakpoint and the loadcell. A grease port is
located on the OD of the fishing bell extension for this. Do not allow the
interface between these two parts to become frozen with mud.
12.2.6.2 FIT-2 electrical

1. Using a Simpson (or similar) ohmmeter, check resistance between signal leg
(pins 14 & 19) and power leg (pins 15 and 20) of bridge. It should read 1,000
(±10%) on the signal leg and about 140 higher on the power leg. These
should be stable from month to month. Check also bridge resistance to mass
(Do not use Megger) from pin 14 to mass. It should be 40 M or higher.
2. Using a Simpson (or similar) ohmmeter, check continuity of each conductor
through the head. If checking through the head only, resistances should
be <1.0.
3. Check insulation. If you use a megger, use 31-pin extender (H245349) which
will prevent access to loadcell pins. Check each conductor line insulation
resistance to ground. All lines should be 500 megohms (min.) at 500 VDC at
room temp.
12.2.6.3 TRIM
1. Perform all FIT procedures.
2. Calibrate the LEH-QT as instructed in Shop Calibration Procedure. Record
GAIN for input into the logging software before logging.
Private
3. If LEH-QT has been exposed to downhole conditions hotter than 300 degF
or pressures exceeding 15,000 psi, remove the loadcell from the head and
change O-rings (B011286) and back up rings. The back-up rings are there to
lessen the chance for an O-ring extrusion failure at high temp and pressure.
They also will prolong the service life of the O-ring.
4. Pull the 5-pin bulkhead from the loadcell, (using a 4-40 screw) and replace its
O-rings. The retainer ring (H701312) must first be removed using a modified
socket (H701459) Figure 12-2. To avoid putting an air bubble in the oil, top off
the loadcell with silicone oil, then re-install the re-dressed bulkhead. Bleed
off this excess oil at one of the upper oil-fill plugs.
5. Change out modular weakpoint, monthly or sooner if exposed to a maximum
pull (75% of lower rated strength).
Note
For detailed instructions on LEH-QT loadcell calibration, please refer to the
Heads Maintenance Manual at InTouch Support: Logging Heads Reference
Page, content ID: 3258451.
12.3 Perforating Equipment Head (PEH)
12.3.1 Introduction
Although parts can still be ordered in the field for some PEH heads, they are
being phased out by their more modern and specialized alternatives. Only two
PEH heads are still supported. They are: PEH-E 3-3/8-in and PEH-EF 3-3/8-in.
See 12.3.1.1 Kits/combinations below Current alternatives to PEH-A (and even
for PEH-AB) are the MH-22 (H030796) with shooting bridles and the PEH-EF
(H713120) with flexible modular weakpoints. LEH-QT (H701460) is also a valid
alternative for perforating provided the loadcell is taken out and replaced with a
dummy loadcell (H351165).
The following PEH heads are obsolete:
• PEH-A, 3-3/8-in Perforating Equipment Head, 10-conductor with thermometer

(H105313)
• PEH-B, 3-3/8-in Perforating Equipment Head
• PEH-C, 2-5/8-in Perforating Equipment Head
• PEH-KB, 1-11/16-in head with solid weakpoint for Coax/Heptacable
Private
• PEH-M, 1-3/8-in head with solid weakpoint for Coax/Heptacable (15-pin

head) rated 350 degF, 25000 PSI
• PEH-KA, Modification Kit for PEH-A (extends bell housing length).
12.3.1.1 Kits/combinations
• PEH-E (H108785) + AH-38, (H106437) = 3-3/8-in Perforating Equipment
Head
• PEH-EF (H713120) + AH-38, (H106437) = 3-3/8-in Perforating Equipment
Head
• PEH-E (H108785) + PEHK-EF (H713119) = PEH-EF (H713120)
• PEK-BB, H432221 + MH-22, (H030796) = 3-3/8-in diameter head.
12.4 Monocable Heads (MH)
12.4.1 Description
The two members of the monocable head family are the MH-22 (H030796) 1-3/8
in. head, and its replacement, the MH-32 (H353637) 1-11/16 in. head. The
MH-32 serves to replace the MH-22/AH-38 1-3/8 in. to 1-11/16 in. combination.
The advantages of the MH-32 over the MH-22 are:
• reduced length (12.4-in make-up length)

• corrosion resistant (including H2S), hence longer life
• fewer parts (simpler to build)
• eliminates the need of an AH-38
• uses the same spider weak point to shorten the learning curve
• uses the same plastic feedthrough as the MH-22.
The MH-32 changes from the MH-22 include the following:
• a shorter conductor length for the rope socket is used. (2.3-in, same as
cone rope socket)
• dual grounding points are available
• direct BCC termination is available for all cables (no more splicing)
• cable torque is transmitted via a hex collar and groove-pins to the bell
housing.
Private
The MH-32 is more expensive than the MH-22/AH-38 combination. The extra
expense is mostly due to the use of corrosion-resistant materials that are NACE
rated for H2S service.
12.4.2 Kits
To provide monocable service for the larger diameter tools, the following
combinations are available:
• MH-22 (H030796) = 1-3/8-in diameter head

• MH-32 (H353637) = 1-11/16-in diameter head for 0.22, 0.23, and 0.25 cables
• MH-22 + AH-38 (H106437) = 1-11/16-in diameter head

• MH-22 + PEK-BB (H432221) = 3-3/8-in diameter head
• MH-32 + PEK-BC (H395941) = 3-3/8-in diameter head
• MH-22 + PEK-E (H123293) = 2-5/8-in diameter head.

Although any size tool can be adapted to any size monocable, the 2-5/8-in,
2-3/4-in or 3-3/8-in tools are not to be connected to 0.23-in or smaller monocable.
12.4.3 MH-22 monocable head
12.4.3.1 Safety
1. Display the weakpoint rating of the head you are using in the unit.
2. Record the weakpoint history in the rig book.
3. Do not use a weakpoint that has been used outside its safe working load.
4. Turn off all power supplies before connecting or disconnecting heads.
Note
A shooting bridle (MH-22 mounted on 25 ft of 1-42ZB cable) should be used
when shooting any type of explosives: back-off, cutters, guns, etc.
Private
Table 12-2: MH-22 Specifications and Combinations
Temperature 400 degF (204 degC)

Pressure 20,000 psi
Diameter 1-3/8-inono
Make-up length 18.9-in
MH-22 combinations
MH-22 (H030796) 1-3/8-in dia head
MH-22 + AH-38 (H106437) 1-11/16-in dia head
MH-22 + PEK-BB (H432221) 3-3/8-in dia head

MH-22 + PEK-E (H123293) 2-5/8-in head
12.4.3.3 MH-22 disassembly
Note
For all steps of disassembly and assembly refer to the MH-22, 1-3/8-in
Monocable Head Assembly Drawing Figure 12-13.
Dismounting the monocable head
1. Drive out the four spirol pins (B013813 - 2), (B013392 - 2 ), (B015067) in the
bell housing (H030798) using a long drive pin punch.
2. Unscrew the fishing head at the uphole end of the bell housing.
3. Lift out the key (H030772).
4. Unscrew the bell housing from the lower head assembly (H122373) and slide
it up over the rope socket.
5. Refer to Section C-C on H030796. Loosen the set screw (B013811) holding
the ground terminal.
Note
Replace the set screw (B013811) every time it is removed, to maintain a
good ground.
6. Slide the bell housing off the rope socket.
Private
7. Refer to Detail D of H030796. Slide the boot retainer (H245716; if used)

off the female boot, disconnect the BCC connector from the feedthrough
connector.
Disassemble the feedthrough assembly from the lower head
1. Unscrew the connector rod sleeve (H036384) from the feedthrough connector
(H701182) and remove the insulator (H125979).
2. Press on the threaded (down hole) end of the connector rod to force it out of
the head (H030464).
3. Carefully remove the O-rings off the feedthrough connector assembly. Do not
nick or scratch the O-ring grooves.
4. Replace the O-rings.
Disassemble the rope socket

Refer to Figure 12-12.
1. Cut the cable off above the rope socket.

2. Unscrew the clamp nut (H035970) off the rope socket.
3. Remove the thrust ring (H230460).
4. Cut the cable strands off at the bend just above the slots in the rope socket.
Note
Do not use the clamp nut to cut armor wires.
5. Bend out the cut pieces and slide the rope socket off the cable.
6. Pull the wire ends out of the holes in the rope socket.
7. The rope socket can now be mounted on a new section of cable.
Figure 12-12: Sequence of parts installation on cable
Private
MH-22 assembly
Tips When Building an MH-22
• Do not use the "splicing technique." Terminate the cable conductor directly
with a BCC. Large BCC boots are available for 1-25 and 1-32 cables Figure
12-14.
• Do not squeeze the rope socket in a vise during makeup. Screw the cable
nut (H035970) on the rope socket and hold the cable nut in the vice.
• When installing BCC connections on single layer insulation, remove the
ridges on the insulation that were caused by the cable inner armor. Use heat
to soften the insulation material, then use a rag to smooth the ridges.
• On coax cable, it is difficult to peel back the shield without damaging the
insulation material below it. Therefore, peel the shield back just enough to
install the BCC, then short the shield to the mass wire. Protect the conductor
wire from that splice using pressure tape (E026912).
Fishing Head and Rope Socket Assembly
Note
Monocable Rope Socket and Fishing Head assembly procedures are provided
in the Rope Sockets chapter of this manual and as such will not be provided
again here.
Conductor assembly
Preferred assembly procedure for all monocables: This method involves

terminating the conductor directly with a socket contact, liner, and female boot,
eliminating the splice. Care must be taken when smoothing the insulation jacket
to ensure sealing of the boot on the wire. See the BCC Boots section of this
chapter for proper liner and boot size selection. See Figure 12-14 (installation)
and Figure 12-15 (finished product) for proper conductor assembly procedures.
Note
The boot will form a watertight seal on the conductor only if the conductor
insulation is smooth, clean, and undistorted.
Private
Figure 12-13: MH-22 assembly drawing - H030796
Private
Figure 12-14: Monocable head conductor assembly drawing - H42060
Private
1. Using a solvent such as alcohol, clean all foreign material from the conductor
insulation. A scouring pad, 3M #7413 or equivalent, is useful for removing
grime or cable sealant.
Note
Removing the grooves in the conductor insulation is necessary to attain an
adequate seal. The grooves where caused by the armor wires.
2. Remove the grooves in the insulation as follows:
a. Place a heat shield behind the nozzle of the heat gun (E050651).
b. Place the boot sealing area of the wire equally spaced between the heat
gun nozzle and heat shield.
Note
Placing the wire between the gun nozzle and heat shield assists in even
heating on both sides of the wire.
c. Apply heat evenly to the boot sealing area of the wire until the insulation
becomes transparent (clear) and smooth at its melting temperature.
d. Stop heating the insulation.
3. After the insulation has cooled, measure the wire diameter, to the nearest
thousandth of an inch.
Note
The above step ensures you select the proper size boot. Digital calipers are
easily used for this task. Normally the heating process shrinks the conductor
only a few thousandths from its nominal diameter.
4. Select the proper size female boot and insulator from the chart located in
the BCC section.
5. Install the boot and liner on the wire as follows:
a. Strip the insulation jacket back ¼-in from the end.

b. Using properly adjusted Winchester crimpers, crimp on the socket
contact (H115576).
Private
Note
When performing the following step do not use excessive force.
Otherwise, the liner may pull out the back end of the boot. If this happens,
replace the boot with a new one.
c. Pull the boot and insulation liner into place over the socket. See Figure
12-15.
Figure 12-15: Conductor and ground wire make-up
Lower head and final assembly (H030796)
Note
Refer to Figure 12-13 and Figure 12-16.
1. Lubricate the feedthrough connector (H701182) with DC-111.

2. Install two O-Rings (B013113) onto the feedthrough connector.
Note
This is the new plastic fluid-to-air connector which replaces the old inconel
large body fluid-to-air (H245801). The new connector is less expensive than
the old inconel fluid-to-air connector.
Private
Figure 12-16: Lower head assembly
3. Push the feedthrough connector into the head (H030464) from the pressure
(up hole) side using the nut driver section of connector wrench (H122201) or
a deep socket that will push on the large beveled edge of the feedthrough.
4. Install the beveled insulator (H125979) and the connector rod sleeve
(H036384) onto the threaded end of the connector rod assembly. Figure
12-16. Torque the connector rod sleeve to 10 inch pounds.
5. Slide the bell housing over the rope socket and electrical connections Figure
12-17 (p. 12-25).
6. Refer to Figure 12-5. Using boot retainer pliers (H268423), plug the BCC
connector onto the fluid-to-air connector.

Be sure the boot is fully engaged over the fluid-to-air connector, the pin
has entered the connector socket cleanly, and is not misaligned during
engagement.
Figure 12-17: Preparing the lower head for installation
7. Slide the boot retainer (H245716) onto the boot.

8. Orient the boot retainer gas vent slot at the downhole end of the boot.
9. Refer to Section C-C of Figure 12-13. Insert the ground terminal into the hole
in the lower head and clamp it with set screw (B013811).
Private
10. Refer toFigure 12-18. Screw the bell housing onto the lower head. The rope
socket should be visible in the bell housing window.
Figure 12-18: Bell housing make-up to lower head
Note
Make sure the rope socket does not rotate while screwing the bell housing on
to the lower head assembly.
11. Install spirol pin (B015067) through the bell housing near the junction of the
housing and head (H030464). Head (H030464) is part of the lower head
assembly (H122373).
Note
Use a punch as a guide when installing the roll pins to keep them from
nicking a conductor wire.
12. Install one spirol pin (B013392) fully through the bell housing (H030798)
just below the rope socket.
13. Install another spirol pin (B013392) halfway through the bell housing
(H030798) just below the rope socket.
14. Mount the hexagonal collar (H034903) on the hex collar tool (H036971).
15. Slip these parts over the cable and insert them into the top of the bell
housing.
16. Refer to Figure 12-19. Slide the hex collar onto the hex end of the rope
socket with the slot aligned as nearly as possible with the window in the
bell housing.
Private
Figure 12-19: Installation of hex collar, key and fishing head

17. Rotate the hex collar tool for exact alignment of the hex collar slot with the
window. (No more than one and a half turns is necessary).
18. Insert the key (H030772) downhole end first. The key is stamped for
alignment through the window and into the slot in the hex collar.
19. Refer to Figure 12-19. While holding the key, screw the fishing head down
tight, locking the key in place.
20. Back off the fishing head 1/6 turn or less as needed to align the hex with
the spiral pin holes in the bell housing. Use the 3/16-in diameter punch to
assist alignment if necessary.
21. Insert spirol pin (B013813) through the uphole end of the bell housing and
fishing head.
22. Check the conductor insulation (>500 Meg) and continuity.
23. Pump the head full of DC-111 through the hole of the spirol pin (B013392)
that was inserted half-way in step 13.
24. When the head is full of grease, finish installing the spirol pin.
25. Re-check the conductor insulation (>500 Meg) and continuity.
26. File all spirol pins off flush with the bell housing.
27. Install two O-rings (B011968) on the downhole end of the lower head
assembly (H122373) Figure 12-16.
28. Screw the proper thread protector (H122375) onto the lower head assembly.
The head is now complete and ready for service.
Private
12.4.3.4 RITE maintenance
Note
Rebuild the MH-22 head after every six jobs or monthly whichever comes first.
FIT (Fast Inspection Test) Checks
FIT checks are performed after every job.
1. Wash the head clean and coat the threads with Lubriplate grease (B013366)
immediately after each job.

2. Apply a light coat of oil on all parts to retard rusting. The surfaces are treated
to absorb this oil.
3. Refill the head with DC-111 after each trip in well. If this is not possible,
refill the head after every job.
4. Check the spiral pins and replace them whenever they become badly bent
or worn.
5. Inspect all spirol pinholes. If they are wallowed out, and the pins do not fit in
snugly, the part is worn beyond its useful life. Junk it and order a new part.
6. Using a 500 V Megger, verify the insulation between the head and fluid-to-air
connector is 500 Mohms or better. Refer to the chapter 3 Meters of this
manual.
a. If insulation resistance is less than 500 megohms, remove the fluid-to-air

assembly and check insulation on the fluid-to-air connector separately.
b. If moisture is found under the boot, re-terminate the fluid-to-air connector
using a new boot, liner and socket.
7. Inspect armor strands at the rope socket for corrosion or pitting. If found,
rebuild the head.
8. Check the ground connection for continuity and tightness.
9. Inspect the O-rings on the lower head assembly for wear, nicks or cuts or
flatness. Replace the O-rings whenever a defect is found.
10. Inspect the fishing bell for burrs or nicks that can cause damage to the
cable armor.
11. Rebuild the head after every job where any concentration of H2S was
present.
Private
TRIM (Tool Review Inspection Monthly)
1. Perform all FIT Checks.

2. Replace all O-rings on the lower head assembly.
3. Rebuild the head after every six jobs or monthly, whichever comes first.
12.4.4 MH-32 monocable head
12.4.4.1 Description
The MH-32 1-11/16-in monoconductor head was designed based on the

requirements of the PSP (Production Services Platform) in coordination with
SRPC. It contains NACE-rated materials and is subject to the Platform Express
shock specification for reliability.
MH-32 serves as a replacement for the MH-22/AH-38 combination.
Table 12-3 lists the specifications for the MH-32 head.
Table 12-3: MH-32 Specificatons
Temperature 400 degF (204 degC)

Pressure 20,000 psi
Diameter 1-11/16-in mono
Make-up length 12.4-in
Rated for H2S service
12.4.4.3 MH-32 disassembly and assembly

The MH-32 assembly procedure is similar to the assembly procedure for the
MH-22. Refer to sections 12.4.3.3 and 12.4.3.3 for disassembly and assembly
procedures.
Private
Note
Refer to MH-32 assembly drawing Figure 12-20. During assembly, leave two
6-in lengths of armor wire for the ground connection. Trim the conductor length
to 2.30-in (as opposed to 7.0-in for the MH-22), before making up the BCC
connections.
12.4.4.4 MH-32 special tools

Table 12-4 lists the special tools required for servicing the MH-32.
Table 12-4: MH-32 Special Tools

Punch, drive pin 3/16 x 8 B015262

Punch, drive pin 1/8 x 4 B016963
Torque wrench, 100-750 in/lb, 3/8 ratchet, 13/16 crowfoot B034859
Gun, heat 750-800 degF, 120 VAC, 6 ft cord, and attachments E050651
Ring, centering H701896
12.4.4.5 RITE maintenance

Refer to MH-22 RITE Maintenance section 12.4.3.4 .
Private
Figure 12-20: MH-32 assembly drawing - H353637
Private
12.5 Weakpoints
12.5.1 General Description

The weakpoint is an intentional weak link between the cable and the head. Its
purpose is to provide a means of pulling the cable off the logging tool should the
need arise. There are several different types of weakpoints for different heads,
but the purpose of all of them is the same: to be the first point of separation
under an increasing pull at the surface.
The heart of the weakpoint is a tightly toleranced, small diameter section of a

special heat-treated stainless steel alloy. The material is heat-treated to obtain

certain properties that make it fail under a tensile pull in a predictable manner.
This closely machined piece is then packaged in the rest of the weakpoint
assembly, which may include rubber coating (for corrosion protection), a cover
sleeve (to prevent damage by torque or bending), or mass-isolation in the case
of the bridle head.
There are two different weakpoint types in use in wireline logging heads:
• solid
• flexible, also known as cable weakpoints.
The solid weakpoints are used for normal logging, and the cable weakpoints
are used for shooting heavy gun strings or other services that involve high
shock loading of the weakpoint. The cable weakpoint is less susceptible to
unintentional separation under high shock-loading conditions.
The “modular” solid weakpoint Figure 12-7 was developed to standardize and
reduce the cost of the weakpoint. It can be used in both the LEH and PEH heads,
but not the EQCS-34 bridle head since it is not mass-isolated. This is covered
in the bridles section of this manual.
In addition, weakpoints come in two different ratings:
• standard - for use up to 350 degF

• Hi-temp - for use in temperatures up to 500 degF.
The tensile material of standard and HT weakpoints is IDENTICAL. The only

difference between standard and HT weakpoints is:
• HT weakpoints are bare metal
Private
• standard weakpoints have a rubber coating on the metal.
The rubber covering on the standard weakpoints degrades with increasing

temperature and produces corrosive gases above 450 degF which can
deteriorate the tensile member, and can cause pitting on the metal. Therefore,
it is not used on hi-temp weakpoints. But below 350 degF, the rubber coating
protects the standard weakpoint from well fluids, and allows the weakpoint to be
used for a longer period of time. The rubber material is made of Aflas. Older
weakpoints had neoprene coating on them, and they are now obsolete.
Note
Please refer to the Weakpoints Section of the Heads Maintenance and Repair
Manual for special considerations when selecting the proper weakpoint.
12.5.2 Weakpoint listing

Below is a listing of solid weakpoints, both molded and modular, currently in use
in the field today. For a table of cable (spider) weakpoints see the Table 10-3.
Table 12-5: Specialty Weakpoints
Temp. Strength
Part # Description Color Rating Heads Rating Notes
H407220 Rigid gray 350 EQCS-34, 3000-3400 Mass
Molded PEH-A/AB Isolated
Aflas
H407221 Rigid red 350 EQCS-34, 3500-4200 Mass
Aflas
H407222 Rigid yellow 350 EQCS-34, 4800-5400 Mass
Aflas
H407223 Rigid green 350 EQCS-34, 5450-6900 Mass
Aflas
H407224 Rigid blue 350 EQCS-34, 6700-7300 Mass
Aflas
H441295 Flexible red 350 EQCS-34, 3500-4200 Mass
Aflas PEH-A/AB Isolated
H441294 Flexible gray 350 EQCS-34, 4400-5000 Mass
H123951 Flexible green 350 EQCS-34, 5450-6900 Mass
Private
Temp. Strength
H218756 Molded & 500 EQCS-34, 3000-3400 Mass
Rigid PEH-A/AB Isolated
& Gas
Resistant
& Gas
Resistant
& Gas
Resistant
H701006 Rigid, bare 500 LEH-V 6700-7300 CRS use

metal only
H134833 Flexible 350 LEH-D/H 5450-6900
Table 12-6: PEH Weakpoints
Temp. Strength
H-701033 Rigid (bare 500 PEH-E 2000-2400 5 wire
metal) holes
metal) holes
metal) holes
metal) holes
metal) holes
H-701045 Rigid (bare 500 PEH-E 7500-8500 CTL use
metal) only
H-701046 Rigid (bare 500 PEH-E 10000-11300 CTL use
metal) only
H-339555 Rigid (bare 500 PEH-KA 3000-3400 2 wire slots
metal)
H-339556 Rigid (bare 500 PEH-KA 4800-5400 2 wire slots
metal)
Private
Table 12-7: Modular Weakpoints
Temp. Strength
RIGID
H441403 Rigid gray 350 PEH-A/AB, 3000-3400
Molded LEH-Q/RC
Aflas
H441404 Rigid red 350 PEH-A/AB, 3500-4200
Molded LEH-Q/RC
Aflas
H441405 Rigid black 350 PEH-A/AB, 3900-4500
Molded LEH-Q/RC
Aflas
H441406 Rigid yellow 350 PEH-A/AB, 4800-5400

Molded LEH-Q/RC
Aflas
H352141 Rigid orange 350 PEH-A/AB, 5400-6000
Molded LEH-Q/RC
Aflas
H352149 Rigid tan 350 PEH-A/AB, 6000-6700
Molded LEH-Q/RC
Aflas
H441408 Rigid blue 350 PEH-A/AB, 6700-7300
Molded LEH-Q/RC
Aflas
RIGID HIGH TEMP.
H712951 Rigid (bare gray 500 PEH-A/AB, 3000-3400
metal) LEH-Q/RC
H712952 Rigid (bare red 500 PEH-A/AB, 3500-4200
metal) LEH-Q/RC
H712953 Rigid (bare black 500 PEH-A/AB, 3900-4500
metal) LEH-Q/RC
H712954 Rigid (bare yellow 500 PEH-A/AB, 4800-5400
metal) LEH-Q/RC
H352147 Rigid (bare orange 500 PEH-A/AB, 5400-6000
metal) LEH-Q/RC
H352148 Rigid (bare tan 500 PEH-A/AB, 6000-6700
metal) LEH-Q/RC
H712956 Rigid (bare blue 500 PEH-A/AB, 6700-7300
metal) LEH-Q/RC
FLEXIBLE
H713110 Flexible red 350 PEH-A/AB, 3500-4200
Aflas PEH-EF
H713111 Flexible gray 350 PEH-A/AB, 4400-5000
Aflas PEH-EF
Private
Temp. Strength
H713112 Flexible green 350 PEH-A/AB, 5450-6900
Aflas PEH-EF
H354471 Flexible & 500 PEH-A/AB, 1700-2000 Gas
bare PEH-EF resistant
ECRD (Electronically Controlled Release

12.6
Device)
The Electrically Controlled Release Device (ECRD) is a releasable weakpoint for
use with the tension measuring LEH heads. (LEH-QT, LEH-ST, LEH-PT, LEH-MT
and the LEH-TR). The advantages over standard mechanical weakpoints are the
ability to withstand high-pulls and high-shock, yet release with a slight pull after
activation. This allows the engineer to run heavier tool strings to deeper depths.
The ECRD-E is a direct replacement for the modular weakpoint and weakpoint
adapter.
12.6.1 Personnel safety

Before deciding to activate the ECRD-E, the logging cable will be subjected to
high loads to attempt to pull free. Running an ECRD-E allows the engineer to
pull higher loads than with a standard weakpoint. Always keep personnel away
from the wireline during these operations.
Safety precautions are in place to prevent the ECRD-E from firing due to large
voltage transients, or small stray voltages. But, any continuous application of
voltage greater than 200V down line 7 has the potential to fire the ECRD-E.
Due to the potential catastrophe that may occur as a result of falling toolstrings
while at surface, the mechanical section of the ECRD-E has been biased to
‘self lock’ while at surface. If the toolstring is under tension (~ 50 lbf or greater)
while at surface and the ECRD-E is fired (whether accidentally or intentionally),
the actuator rod will not move to let the latch out. Tension must be lowered to
release the ECRD-E. Once in the hole, pressure overrides this safety feature
and is no longer applicable.
Private
High temperatures are reached when energizing the heater. It takes a temp of at
least 575 degF to melt the solder. Temperatures higher than that are possible if
the heater is energized without heat sinking. Use caution when handling. Use
care when checking insulation resistance with a megohmeter. High voltages are
present on the test leads during measurements and on any conductive surface
that they touch.
Be aware that high voltages may exist on conductors if power is being applied.
Always make sure power is turned off before working on any tool or adapter
attached to the logging cable.
The ECRD-E is designed to be used for toolstrings using FTB or DTB telemetry.
Any other tools run below the ECRD-E that use line 7 for power run the risk of
accidentally releasing the weakpoint. DO NOT RUN THE ECRD-E WITH ANY
OTHER AC-POWERED TOOLSTRINGS.
12.6.2 Equipment safety

The safe rated pull of the ECRD-E is 8,000 lbf. Do not under any circumstances
exceed 8,000 lbf head tension, when working a stuck tool. If your ECRD-E is
combined with a mechanical weak point, do not exceed 75% of that weak point
rating.
The ECRD-E requires sending power down line 7 to fire. The bulkhead to head
adapter contains a relay to isolate line 7 prior to firing the ECRD-E. The ECRD-E
is not H2S rated.
Figure 12-21: ECRD installed in LEH-QT

The ECRD-E replaces the CRS-AA (Controlled Release Weakpoint), which was
originally found in LEH-V logging heads. CRS-AA usage has been very limited,
mainly due to its high cost and questionable reliability. The design goal of the
ECRD-E was to develop a low cost, highly reliable, field re-buildable device. The
Private
failure prone components of the CRS-AA (resistor, spring wire release, exo-wire,
and metal-body feed-thrus) have all been eliminated in the design of the ECRD-E.
Positive indication of firing at the surface is also designed into the ECRD-E.
The 8,000 lbf rating of the ECRD-E offers increased chances of pulling free when
logging tools become stuck. This translates into a major cost saving for the client
who can reduce the number of fishing or TLC jobs.
When stuck, the decision to free the cable from the toolstring can be made faster.
There is no longer the necessity to pull and relax to the lower weak point rating
estimate. The operator pulls to the maximum tension, holds, and if it does not
come free, releases the ECRD-E and fishes for the tools using drillpipe.
Long reach wells can now be logged safely, as overpull is no longer required to
release the cable from the logging tools. This means the tension limits can be
increased since they are determined by the cable strength and not the upper
rating of the weakpoint.
12.6.4 Parts of the ECRD

When looking at the assembled ECRD-E, three main components are
identifiable. See Figure 12-22. They are:
• the latch
• the ECRD housing
• the lower head.
Figure 12-22: Major sections of the ECRD
The housing contains the following parts:
Private
• latch
• actuator rod
• spring.
Note
For detailed information on maintenance or other issues concerning the ECRD
please refer to InTouch Support: ECRD & ERS Reference Pages.
12.7 BCC boots

12.7.1 Overview
This section defines the assembly and maintenance procedures for Bridle Cable
Connectors (BCC) and contains a list of BCC accessories.
Note
The material provided in this section is subject to change with changing
cable and BCC material technology. Please refer to the Basic Equipment
section of the Integrated Productivity & Conveyance Center (IPC) website at
http://www.hub.slb.com/index.cfm?id=id1118687. Please see the chapter 10
Rope sockets (p. 10-1) for color pictures and assembly of BCC connectors.

There are two families of boots covered in this section: male boots and female
boots. There are two materials used in both the families. One material is Kalrez
and the other is Viton. The design using the two materials is essentially identical.
Kalrez tends to split and therefore requires more boots to cover the same
wire size range as compared to the Viton boots. Kalrez is rated to 500 degF
continuous use and 600 degF on an expendable basis. It should also be used if
voltage exceeds 600 VAC. Viton is much less expensive but should be limited
to 450 degF and lower than 600 VAC. Viton boots and some Kalrez boots have
their part numbers molded on the boot.
The male boots are available in two types: insulator and non-insulator types. In
the insulator series, the female boot attaches to the male Teflon insulator. On
the non-insulator series, the male boot forms a sealing surface with the female
boot. The non-insulator series provides better sealing, because it provides a
rubber-on-rubber seal. However, the rubber-on-rubber seal is not as strong
a connection as the insulator on rubber seal, and can be separated easily if
Private
the surfaces become coated with grease. There is an optional small insulator
available in the non-insulator series. This insulator allows the use of the smaller
pin (which is common in the insulator series), and fits inside the male boot, hence
allowing for the rubber-on-rubber seal.
Fluorel boots have been phased out and are no longer in use. Fluorel boots were
more difficult to manufacture and had a higher scrap rate. The Fluorel boot part
numbers are still valid and can still be ordered. The only difference is that these
boots are now made out of Viton and have the same design and dimensions as
the old Fluorel boots. This was done to allow the field locations to order boots
using the same part numbers as in the past. In addition, new boots have been
added to cover the entire range of wireline cables.
12.7.3 Precautions
When the hole in the boot is too large for the wire, mud enters and causes a
leak. After long periods of use, the boot hole gradually enlarges and eventually
leaks. When the hole in the boot is too small for the wire, the boot may split
and also cause a leak.
Boots will form a watertight seal only on conductor insulation that is smooth,
clean, and undistorted. Clean the insulation of cable sealant or foreign material
with a solvent such as alcohol. Scouring pad (B033693) 3M #7413 or equivalent,
is useful for removing grime or cable sealant. Armor grooves must be removed
to attain an adequate sealing surface. This can be done with a hot air gun. Heat
the insulation in the boot location to the melting point as evidenced by the plastic
becoming clear. When melted, the plastic tends to resume its extruded shape.
Alternatively, emery cloth of 400 or finer grit may be used to remove armor
grooves. The wire must be measured for diameter afterwards to ensure the
use of the proper size boot.
If there is any doubt about the boot seal, slide the boot onto the wire where it
will be when assembled. Wet the boot-wire junction with soapy water and blow
into the front of the boot. Any bubbles indicate inadequate wire preparation or
wrong boot.
Private

The conductors must be clean and dry before attaching. However, DC-200 (and
not DC-111 or silicone oil) can be used in very small quantities to aid in installing
the boots on the wires.
Conductor insulation should be examined after BCC installation to ensure it is
free of defects. This should be done by touch as well as visually. Damage to
Teflon insulation, for instance, can often be felt more readily than seen.
Boots should be replaced as and when necessary. The time span is location
and well-condition dependent.
12.7.4 Boot selection
12.7.4.1 Conductor sizes

The outer diameter (OD) for conductors used in the wireline cables are provided
in the table below. This OD refers to the conductor OD, not the bare wire OD.
Once the OD has been determined for a particular cable, then the proper boot
can be selected from the boot selection charts.
Table 12-8: Cable Types and Conductor Insulation Outer Diameters
Insulation Insulation Insulation

Cable Type Cable Type Cable Type
OD (inch) OD (inch) OD (inch)
1-18 P 0.078 1-42 ZH 0.107 7-46 NA 0.069
1-20 ZT
0.066 2-23 P 0.079 7-46 NT 0.069
(Teflon)
1-20 ZT (Tefzel) 0.079 2-23 ZT 0.079 7-46 NT XS 0.069
1-22 P 0.099 2-32 P 0.095 7-46 P 0.098
1-22 ZT
0.082 2-32 ZT 0.095 7-46 P XS 0.097
(Teflon)
1-22 ZT (Tefzel) 0.099 2-32 ZT HPC 0.13 7-46 V 0.096
7-39 P (obsolete
1-23 KA 0.104 0.074 7-46 V XS 0.095
cable)
1-23 P 0.104 7-39 P LXS 0.082 7-46 VE 0.098
1-23 ZT
0.081 7-39 VE LXS 0.08 7-46 VE XS 0.097
(Teflon)
7-39 Z (obsolete
1-23 ZT (Tefzel) 0.104 0.074 7-52 NT 0.069
cable)
Private
Insulation Insulation Insulation

Cable Type Cable Type Cable Type
OD (inch) OD (inch) OD (inch)
1-25 ZT (Tefzel) 0.115 7-39 Z LXS 0.082 7-52 NT XS 0.069
1-25 ZT
0.91 7-42 P 0.088 7-52 P 0.097
(Teflon)
1-25 ZT (Tefzel) 0.115 7-42 P XS 0.086 7-52 V 0.097
1-32 P 0.143 7-42 V 0.087 7-53 NT 0.086
1-32 ZT
0.119 7-42 V XS 0.086 7-53 P 0.108
(Teflon)
1-32 ZT (Tefzel) 0.143 7-42 VE XS 0.087 7-53 V 0.108
1-42 ZB 0.107 7-42 Z 0.087 Bridles 0.069
E057566 HTHP
0.07
hook-up wire
H122757
0.093
hook-up wire
H142548
0.068
hook-up wire
Note
Sealing the boots on Teflon insulation is preferred over Tefzel (especially for high
temperature use). Tefzel is harder to remove and can potentially damage the
Teflon insulation underneath.
12.7.4.2 Female boot selection
Figure 12-23: Female boot
Table 12-9: Female Boot Selection
Insulation
Kalrez1 Viton1 Viton Viton Liner
Diameter
(Old Fluorel)
(in.) IPC SRPC
IPC
0.062 -
H231596 H400312 H318170 P274520 H222637
0.069
Private
Insulation
Kalrez1 Viton1 Viton Viton Liner
Diameter
0.070 -
H245757 H400312 H318167 P274521 H245768
0.077
0.078 -
H245760 H357044 H318167 P274521 H245764
0.092
0.093 -
H245758 H400313 H318168 P274522 H245765
0.105
1
Recommended series for BCC boot selections.
Note
For Insulation diameters greater than 0.105 in. refer to Table 12-12, below.
12.7.4.3 Male boot selection - Kalrez and Viton (insulator series)
Figure 12-24: Male Kalrez and Viton boot (insulator series)
Table 12-10: Male Kalrez and Viton Boots (Insulator Series)
Insulation
Diameter Kalrez Viton Viton Insulator Pin
(in)
IPC SRPC
0.062 -
H245476 H318171 P274523 H245414 H115642
0.085
0.093 -
H245477 H318172 P274524 H245506 H245505
0.110
H350729 for 7-53

cable
Private
12.7.4.4 Male boot selection – Kalrez and Viton (non-insulator

series)
Figure 12-25: Male Kalrez and Viton boot (non-insulator series)
Table 12-11: Male Kalrez and new Viton Selection (non-insulator)
Insulation Insulation
Viton1 Kalrez1
Diameter (in.)1 Diameter (in.)1
(Old Fluorel)
0.062 - 0.077 H400310 0.057 - 0.072 H701990

0.078 - 0.092 H395969 0.073 - 0.087 H357016
0.093 - 0.110 H400311 0.088 - 0.104 H701991
1
Recommended series for BCC boot selections
Private
12.7.4.5 Large wire boot selection

Figure 12-26: Large wire boot
Table 12-12: Large Wire Boot Selection – Viton and Kalrez
Insulation
Insulation Viton1 Kalrez1
Diameter (in.)
Diameter (in.)
0.105 - 0.108 H400313 0.105 - 0.115 H245761

0.109 - 0.125 H360042 0.116 - 0.125 H245762
0.126 - 0.143 H360043 0.126 - 0.142 H357024
0.144 - 0.160 H701946 0.143 - 0.160 H357026
1
Recommended series for BCC boot selections.
12.7.4.6 Female boot and liner dimensions

This table gives the nominal dimension of the wire tunnels in the various boots
and liners.
Table 12-13: Female Boot and Liner Dimensions
Kalrez Boots Viton Boots Liners

Tunnel Tunnel Tunnel
Part No. Part No. Part No.
Width (in.) Width (in.) Width (in.)
H231596 0.047 in. H400310 0.047 in. H222637 0.067 in.
H701990 0.047 in. H400312 0.047 in H245768 0.075 in.
H245757 0.055 in. H357044 0.063 in. H245764 0.093 in.
Private
Kalrez Boots Viton Boots Liners

H357016 0.063 in. H395969 0.063 in. H245765 0.100 in.
H245760 0.068 in. H400311 0.078 in. H712972 0.115 in.
H701991 0.078 in. H400313 0.078 in. H701934 0.155 in.
H245758 0.080 in. H360042 0.094 in.
H245761 0.094 in. H360043 0.111 in.
H245762 0.106 in. H701946 0.130 in.
H357024 0.116 in.
H357026 0.133 in
12.7.4.7 Boot installation and removal tools

Description Part No.
Crimp Tool, Winchester B017964
Crimping Tool, Modified D H356826
Crimping Stop for 0.062 dia. Pins and Sockets H122200
Setting Gage for B017964 Crimping Tool Barrel Size 20 H123578
Setting Gage for B017964 Crimping Tool Barrel Size 18 H123576
Connector Tool H208298
Boot Removal Tool H245545
Assembly Tool, Boot H245588
Connector Disengage Tool H245789
Boot Retainer/Extractor, Kalrez H268423
Tool Pin/Socket Crimp w/ Locator and Gauge H400300
Insulator/Pin Insertion Tool H400303
12.7.4.8 Operating hints

A male and a female boot can be made up from different materials and expected
to give a good seal.
Old Fluorel boots can be made up on metal feed-throughs (remember, fluorel

boots are no longer available from Vector).
Silicon oil cannot be used for installation of Fluorel or Viton boots.
The 10-pin BCC connectors used in BCC-D are obsolete, as are BCC-CC.
Private
Large size liners should not be pulled hard to "snap" into place. It can cause the
socket or the liner to be pulled through the boot hole. These liners do not have
a groove to lock around the socket contact, because the inside diameter was
increased to accommodate the larger size wire.
For gas wells, install boot retainers on torpedo booted connections.
For gas wells, if the boots are splitting, they can be soaked in oil. Put the boots
in an ovenproof beaker and cover with DC200-100. Put this beaker in a high
vacuum chamber and vacuum for at least 24 hours after noticeable bubbles are
observed on surface on boots. After removal from vacuum chamber, put in an
oven and bake at 250 degF for 24 hours.
None of the following practices are recommended:
• puncturing holes in the boot

• tying the boot onto the feedthrough/male pin.
Use boot retainers to prevent pop-off. The retainer sleeve locks the two boots
together and the slot in the sleeve allows the female boot to expand slightly and
relieve pressure during the trip out of the hole. It is imperative that the retainer
be installed such that the slot lines up properly with the female boot. If there is
no gas present, recommended practice is to reverse the sleeve to enhance
the locking action on the boots. Wrapping a couple of layers of Teflon tape will
prevent boots from popping off. The tape should be used only on the Viton boots,
and not on the softer now-obsolete Fluorel boots.
12.7.4.9 Assembly
1. Select the components for the wire to be terminated. See Table 12-8 for a list
of nominal wire sizes then use the BCC component chart to select the proper
part numbers for the pin or socket, insulator, and boot. Liners are compliant
and can be used on conductors as much as 0.015 in. larger than the nominal
liner diameter. Boots must have an interference fit of at least 0.010 in. and
can be as much as 0.025 in. (for Kalrez) or 0.030 in. (for Viton). Terminations
for 1-25 and 1-32 cables are not typical and will be described separately.
For ZT cables, the sealing surface can be either the Tefzel jacket or the
Teflon insulation. It is easier to install the boot on the Tefzel jacket. However,
to achieve the maximum temperature rating of the cable and to better protect
against gas intrusion, the boots should be installed on the Teflon insulation. In
addition, Teflon provides a better sealing surface. Care should be taken when
stripping off the Tefzel jacket to prevent nicks or cuts on the Teflon insulation.
2. Prepare the conductor as described in Precautions, making sure it has a
smooth, clean sealing surface.
Private
3. Cut the conductor at a 45 degree angle.

4. Grip the conductor with 400 grit emery cloth, and push the conductor through
the back of the boot, while turning the boot.
5. Install the liner (insulator) in the same manner as the previous step.
6. Install the liner (female only) in the same manner.
7. Strip back 1/4-in of insulation, using wire strippers set at the appropriate
setting for the conductor size. Make sure the edge of the conductor insulation
is flat, not beveled (Figure 12-27). after stripping.


Do not cut conductor strands when stripping!
Figure 12-27: Stripping conductors after boot and liner installation
8. Crimp on the socket or pin, using a properly adjusted crimping tool. The
insulation must shoulder on the contact. Do not let the wire slip out of the
contact during crimping!
Figure 12-28: Properly crimped connector
Note
Bend the conductor by the pin contact: there is no gap between the conductor
insulation the connector body.
Private
Figure 12-29: Inspect the crimp
To crimp socket (H115576), set the crimp tool (B017964) as shown in Figure
12-30, using a 0.047-in (1.2 mm) pin or a 3/64 drill bit.
To crimp the pins (H245505), set the crimp tool using a 0.066-in. pin (1.7
mm) or an equivalent drill bit size #51. The indentations should start about
1/16-in from the end of the pin or socket.
Figure 12-30: Winchester crimping tool and Daniels crimping tool
9. Slide the liner over the socket until it is fully seated.

10. Pull the boot over the liner or pin. A feedthrough, the connector tool and the
pin insertion tool (H208298 and H400303) can be used to hold contacts while
getting the boot in the proper position.
Figure 12-31: Completed male and female conductor terminations
Private

Do not pull so hard the liner comes out the back end of the boot. If this
occurs, start over with new components.
Squeeze the assembly to expel any trapped air. Clean the mating surfaces
with solvent such as alcohol or soap and water. Rinse and dry before
connecting.
12.7.4.10 Special assembly procedures for large diameter cable

insulations
The 14AWG conductor of the 1-32 cable and other large diameter conductors
require a socket with a larger wire barrel. The insulation diameter of 1-25 cables
does not allow the liner to fit over the wire. Sanding to smooth the insulation is
the preferred method for the 1-25 cables because of the tight fit on the boot.
These designs require installation of the liner from the front of the socket and
do not allow a thread. Reference to the connector tool does not apply to these
connections.
1. Cut the conductor at an angle of about 45 degrees and insert the conductor
through the back of the boot. For ZT cables, the sealing surface can be
either the Tefzel jacket or the Teflon insulation. It is easier to install the boot
on the Tefzel jacket. However, to achieve the maximum temperature rating
of the cable and to better protect against gas intrusion, the boots should be
installed on the Teflon insulation. In addition, Teflon provides a better sealing
surface. Care should be taken when stripping off the Tefzel jacket to prevent
nicks or cuts on the Teflon insulation.
2. Strip 1/4-in of insulation from the conductor and crimp a socket onto the wire.
The crimp barrel must abut the conductor insulation.
3. Slide the conductor end of a liner onto the front of the socket. Holding the
wire firmly, push the liner straight onto the socket until it snaps into place.
4. With the insulator in place, insert a feedthrough into the liner/socket.
Private

On the insulating Teflon sleeve H701934, the taper is not very obvious
because of the thin wall on the conductor end. There is a step on the
connector end and a feedthrough will fit closely in that end, the feedthrough
will be loose in the conductor end.
5. Hold the feedthrough and push the boot onto the feedthrough. Do not hold
the conductor and pull the boot over the insulator since the boot/liner could
be pulled off the socket.
12.7.4.11 Connecting and disconnecting

Connecting
The connectors must be clean and dry before attaching. Connect by simply
pushing the mating pieces together, while twisting. The attachment bump should
be fully seated in the groove provided in the female BCC. The same technique
can be used in attaching a female BCC to a fluid-to-air connector.
If it is difficult to get the two pieces mated together, perform the following steps:
1. Separate the pieces and inspect the insulators, especially on the female boot.
2. If the liner has been folded over, the white will be visible. If that is the case,
then perform the following steps:
a. Use connector tool (H208298) to hold the socket while the boot is pulled
back.
b. Straighten the liner and push it onto the BCC male pin or fluid-to-air.
c. Slide the boot back into place.
3. If the liner is torn, replace it.
Remember, the single most common cause of failure is incomplete BCC

makeup. Pay attention to detail during connecting, and make sure the BCC’s
are fully seated.
Disconnecting
When the BCC are attached dry, they tend to bond slightly. Therefore, use the
disconnect tool (H245789) Figure 12-32 to separate mated connectors.
Private
Figure 12-32: BCC disconnect tool (H245789)

1. Press the assembly into the tool so that each tool jaw engages one of the
boots.
2. Squeeze the handles gently while holding the BCC assembly in place.
3. The boots will either separate or the female boot will wrinkle slightly. If
wrinkling occurs, move the tool to the opposite side of the pair and repeat the
separation procedure. Continue in this manner until the boots separate.
To disconnect from a fluid to air connector, perform the following steps:
1. Twist the boot back and forth until it will turn on the connector.
2. Pull straight back and hold tension until the boot pops free.
3. If the boots are to be reused, note that they fit snugly on the connector. That
is, they should resist turning on the connector when twisted.
If the connectors are to be re-mated after disconnecting, they must be cleaned

first. Wipe away grease and mud with rags. The residue can be cleaned with
solvents such as alcohol, naptha, turpentine or water. The choice depends on the
well fluid. If the residue is silicone grease, the HCFC spray cleaner (B033239) is
effective. HCFC solvent (B033736) cleaner/degreaser (gallon container) is also
useful for removing grease. If there is dirt or grease in the connector, clean
by spraying cleaner (B033239) into the socket side. Let the liquid accumulate
and stir with a brush. Dump the fluid and rinse the connector by spraying more
solvent up into the socket. Spray the mating boot/pin and wipe quickly if needed.
This solvent evaporates rapidly chilling the part. Condensation of moisture may
occur in humid areas.
Private
12.7.4.12 Troubleshooting
The most common cause of BCC failure is incomplete makeup. Make sure
the BCC are fully seated, and the attachment bump is fully contained in the
groove that is inside the female BCC boot. Incomplete makeup may occur due
to carelessness, lack of attention, folded over liners, or some other deformity
making makeup difficult. Learn the look and feel of a good solid makeup, and
don’t be satisfied with anything less.
Another common failing of the BCC connection is the intrusion of well fluids
into the boots and then into the conductor stranding of the cable and head
leads. This can occur without a dead short occurring, if the well fluid is not very
conductive. Well fluid in the cable stranding is not noticeable, but is very obvious
in the silver-plated stranding of the head leads. Once this has been seen, the
assembly should be changed out with new components. Electrical leakage
is seen when conductor insulation has been damaged in assembly or when
conductive fluid penetrates the mated assembly.
Boots leak for the following reasons:
• incomplete makeup, resulting in poor sealing

• boot is worn out (loose)
• BCC sealing surface is damaged (either the wire, insulator, or fluid-to-air).
The use of silicon grease can promote fluid intrusion into the BCC assembly. For
this reason, assemble BCC connections only when the components are clean
and dry. Use degreaser (B033239) to clean the BCC of silicon if the boot is to be
re-used. Clean thoroughly and dry before makeup.
Private
SRPC Doc-TBT\SRPC Doc-TBT\275253781\2.4\Release Date: 16-Nov-2006\EDMS UID: 275253781\Produced: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50 12-54 GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Wireline logging heads 12-54
Intentionally Blank
Private
13-i GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Bridles 13-i
13 Bridles
13.1 Description ____________________________________________________ 13-2
13.1.1 Bridle composition __________________________________________ 13-2
13.1.2 Head end assembly _________________________________________ 13-2
13.1.3 Torpedo end assembly ______________________________________ 13-3
13.1.4 Bridle electrodes ____________________________________________ 13-3
13.1.5 Bridle cable _________________________________________________ 13-3
13.2 Standard bridles ______________________________________________ 13-4
13.3 Bridles for LEH-Q heads ______________________________________ 13-5
13.3.1 BRT-AQ-400 or 450 degF (H245162) _________________________ 13-5
13.3.2 BRT-BA-400 or 450 degF (H701773) _________________________ 13-5
13.3.3 BRT-BC-400 or 450 degF (H701612) _________________________ 13-5
13.4 Maintenance end re-swaging __________________________________ 13-5

13.4.1 FIT checks _________________________________________________ 13-6
13.4.2 FIT-2 electrical ______________________________________________ 13-6
13.4.3 TRIM checks _______________________________________________ 13-7
13.5 Head end re-swaging __________________________________________ 13-7
13.6 Cable end re-swaging _________________________________________ 13-8
13.7 Electrode TRIM ________________________________________________ 13-9
13.8 BCC boot kits _________________________________________________ 13-9
13.9 Bridle construction ___________________________________________ 13-10
13.9.1 Head end construction _____________________________________ 13-10
13.9.1.1 Construction for the LEH-Q _____________________________ 13-10
13.9.2 Electrode construction ______________________________________ 13-14
13.9.3 Torpedo end construction ___________________________________ 13-17
13.9.3.1 Construction for EQCS-41 ______________________________ 13-17
13.9.3.2 Construction for EQCS-26 ______________________________ 13-18
13.10 Swaging terminal upper end (H026246) _______________________ 13-20
13.11 Bridle BCC’s _________________________________________________ 13-21
Private
SRPC Doc-TBT\SRPC Doc-TBT\275253781\2.4\Release Date:16-Nov-2006\EDMS UID: 275253781\Produced: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50 13-ii GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Bridles 13-ii
Intentionally Blank
Private
13-1 GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Bridles 13-1
13 Bridles
This section introduces the operator to bridles. This will be the sequence of
discussion:
• Description
• Standard bridles
• Bridles for LEH–Q heads
• Maintenance and reswaging
• Head end reswaging

• Cable end reswaging
• Electrode TRIM
• BCC boot kits
• Bridle construction
• Head end construction
• Electrode construction
• Torpedo end construction
• Swaging terminal upper end
• Bridle BCC’s.
Note
EQCS 34 Bridle heads are no longer manufactured or supported and therefore
are not discussed in this manual. Please refer to InTouch Support: Heads
Repair and Maintenance Manual, Content ID: 3258451 if information on the
EQCS-34 is required.
Reference Documents
• Bridles Maintenance Manual, InTouch Support: Content ID-3012540.

• Logging Heads Reference Pages, InTouch Support: Content ID-3258451
• Heads Maintenance Manual (MH712999)
• Simpson/Megger Handbooks
Private
• IPC Bridles and Accessories Web Page,

“http://www.sugar-land.vpc.slb.com/basi/beqpt/bridles_3-23-98.html”
• Heads Repair and Maintenance Manual, InTouch Support: Content
ID-3012542
13.1 Description
Bridles are short pieces of insulated cable connected between the logging cable
and the equipment head. The bridle provides electrical isolation between the
logging head and the cable for those services requiring it. In addition, electrodes
may be placed on the bridle to provide electrically isolated potential reference
points.
13.1.1 Bridle composition

Bridles consist of four basic component types:
1. head end assembly - connects into the logging head

2. torpedo end assembly - connects via a torpedo assembly to the logging cable
3. electrode assemblies - locate electrical potential monitor points on the
insulated cable
4. insulated cable itself.
13.1.2 Head end assembly

The bridle head end assembly connects the bridle cable to the logging head.
Two functions are accomplished.
1. The stress member of the bridle cable is terminated in a swaged connector.

This transmits line pull from the bridle cable to the head.
2. The bridle cable strength member is connected to a termination electrically
isolated from the head. This provides the electrical path from cable armor to
mass-isolated head wire #10.
Note
Current bridles are terminated to connect either to the EQCS-34 head or the
LEH-Q/R head.
Private
13.1.3 Torpedo end assembly

The cable end of the bridle is terminated with a swaged connector and BCC
connectors to connect the bridle cable wires to the logging cable wires. The
mechanical connection between the bridle cable swage and the cable rope
socket is accomplished through one of three torpedo assemblies depending
on the type of bridle:
• EQCS-26
• EQCS-39 (EQCS-26 with spring steel boots)
• EQCS-41.
13.1.4 Bridle electrodes

Two bridle electrode assemblies are prepared on each standard bridle
configuration.
Spontaneous Potential - One of these electrodes serves as the Spontaneous

Potential (SP) measure electrode.
Groeningen effect - The other electrode serves as a reference electrode for

identification of the Groeningen effect-anomalous laterolog readings as a result
of lithology.
Current practice calls for the SP electrode to be placed 20 ft from the head end
and the Groeningen electrode to be placed 20 ft from the cable end. Each
electrode is made so that 6-in of lead electrode is exposed. This is considerably
shorter than former practice but sufficient for the purpose.
13.1.5 Bridle cable

There are currently three different bridle cable materials designed for different
purposes.
1. H133978 - Black Hycar Nitrile, not gas resistant, rated to 450 degF.
10 Teflon™ or Tefzel™ insulated and neoprene jacketed 21 AWG conductors.
2. H701725 - Transparent Tefzel™ gas resistant, rated to 450 degF.
10 Tefzel™ insulated 21 AWG conductors.
Private
All share similar construction with conductors cabled around a rubber covered
center stress member and then protected with a jacket as noted above.
The following are properties common to all cables:
• voltage rating 580 V(rms)

• breaking strength 11000 lbf minimum
• DC resistance 46 Q/kft maximum.
13.2 Standard bridles

Standard bridle configurations vary depending on the type of cable used, head
end construction, and cable end construction. All standard bridles are now 80
ft long and have two electrodes spaced 20 ft from either end. Field surveys
indicate that bridles with different electrode placements are unnecessary so
those bridles have been eliminated. SRPC Engineering discourages the use of
short bridles, so they have been eliminated also.
A basic bridle repair kit, consisting of those parts which need to be replaced when
a bridle is rebuilt, is available for each of the standard bridles. By purchasing
a basic bridle, the location can acquire a rebuilt bridle that is as good as new
without the expense of the reusable parts. Neither the standard bridles nor
the basic bridle repair kits include BCC boots. These may be ordered as kits
containing all necessary pins, sockets, and boots. The current standard bridle
configurations follow and are summarized in the table.
Table 13-1: Bridle Configurations
Part Temp Gas Basic Cable Torpedo Head

Bridle Number Rating1 Proof? Bridle #2 Used Type3 Type
BRT-AQ H245162 400 / No H701555 Hycar EQCS-41 LEH-Q
450°F
BRT-BA H701773 400 / No H701816 Hycar EQCS-26 LEH-Q
450oF
BRT-BC H701612 400 / Yes H701629 Tefzel™ EQCS-26 LEH-Q
450°F
1
Temperature rating depends on BCC boots-45 degF for Kalrez, 40 degF for Viton or Fluorel.
2
Basic bridles do not include BCC’s and reusable bridle part.
3
EQCS-39 gas-proof torpedo with steel spring boots may be substituted for the EQCS-26 in gas-proof bridles.
Private
Note
Bridles BRT-AC/AB and BB, used with the EQCS-34 bridle head, are obsolete.
Therefore, they are not discussed in this manual.
13.3 Bridles for LEH-Q heads
13.3.1 BRT-AQ-400 or 450 degF (H245162)

The BRT-AQ is the traditional bridle for use with LEH-Q heads. Cable end
construction requires the use of the EQCS-41 torpedo assembly. Because the
EQCS-41 torpedo is longer and greater in effective diameter than the EQCS-26,
care must be exercised when traversing sheaves. This bridle should not be used
with 24-in sheaves. Also, the EQCS-41 will not enter some side-door fishing
subs. Therefore, do not use this bridle if side-door capability is important to
you–use the BRT-BA instead. Fluorel or Viton BCC boot kits will make a 400
degF bridle - use Kalrez boots to raise the temperature rating to 450 degF.
13.3.2 BRT-BA-400 or 450 degF (H701773)

The BRT-BA is equivalent to the BRT-AQ except that the cable end uses the
traditional swage fitting and construction. This allows use of the EQCS-26
and eliminates the problems noted under BRT-AQ above. Cost is also greatly
reduced. Fluorel or Viton BCC boot kits will make a 400 degF bridle–use Kalrez
boots to raise the temperature rating to 450 degF.
13.3.3 BRT-BC-400 or 450 degF (H701612)

The BRT-BC is the gas resistant bridle for use with the LEH-Q head. It uses
the new Tefzel™ bridle cable. Like the BRT-BA, it is for use with the EQCS-26
torpedo. The EQCS-39 gas-proof torpedo is optional. Fluorel or Viton BCC
boot kits will make a 400 degF bridle-use Kalrez boots to raise the temperature
rating to 450 degF.
13.4 Maintenance end re-swaging

Good practice requires that the torpedo end of the bridle be re-swaged frequently
to minimize the possibility of mechanical failure and possible catastrophe. Failure
occurs as a result of repeated flexing of the wire rope strength member, and
failure is much more likely if the strength member is corroded at the swage. Field
Private
locations must establish a firm policy on re-swaging. It is strongly recommended

that the number of trips over an upper sheave be limited to 100. In any event, a
bridle should be re-swaged within six months of its first use. See section 13.6
Cable end re-swaging.
13.4.1 FIT checks

1. Thoroughly clean the bridle as soon as possible after coming out of the hole.
2. Insure that the boots at the electrodes and at the torpedo are free of mud and
other foreign matter.
3. Inspect the boots and bridle material for damage and mechanical function.
4. Perform the FIT-1 checks for the head being used.
13.4.2 FIT-2 electrical

1. Check insulation between the seven through conductors and the stress
member. Use a 500 VDC Megger. Any indication of current flow is
unacceptable. Note that a bridle may be saved by use of the spare conductor
wire.
2. Insulation between #10 and head body must be greater than 500 kilohms.
Check this with a VOM.
3. Insulation of the electrodes to head mass must be greater than 500
megohms. Check this with a VOM.
4. Check continuity from end to end for the seven through conductors, from the
lower electrode to head end conductor #8 and the upper electrode to head
end conductor # 9. Conductor resistance must be less than 4.5 ohms. The
resistance to the electrodes must be less than 5.0 ohms.
5. Clean all mud, grease, and extraneous matter from the torpedo end
BCC’s and wires before storage. Inspect the wires for nicks and cuts and
repair/replace as necessary. Use the plug protector (H031744) or thread
protector (H222822) to protect the wires and boots from damage during
transport and storage.
Private
13.4.3 TRIM checks

Bridle TRIM consists of re-swaging both ends of the bridle. Also, the integrity
of the electrodes is verified and the associated head is TRIM checked. Head
end TRIM should be performed six months from first use. Torpedo end TRIM
is performed after 100 trips over a sheave wheel or six months after first use,
whichever occurs first.
Bridles initially built to 80 ft lengths may be re-swaged four (or perhaps more)
times from each end before they become too short to provide reliable service.
SRPC Engineering states that a bridle needs to be 45 to 50 ft long in order to
provide adequate electrical isolation between the cable and head. In addition,
the electrodes should be no closer than 10 ft to either the torpedo or head end
of the bridle.
If the above guidelines are followed, bridles should have a life expectancy of
400 trips over upper sheaves.
13.5 Head end re-swaging

Begin the head end rebuild by cutting off at least one foot of bridle cable, more
if the cable is damaged or if the cable is corroded badly. Head end swaging
is detailed in the bridle construction section of this manual. Parts needed to
re-swage the head end vary depending on which head is used. The following
lists show the parts for LEH-Q heads. Remember that re-swaging changes
the electrode measure points.
Table 13-2: Parts Needing Replacement - LEH-Q Heads
Parts needing replacement-LEH-Q heads

B011404 O-ring (2 required)
B013124 O-ring (2 required)
B018124 Set Screw (2 required)
H239338 Mass Isolation Boot
H245813 Fluid to Air Compressor
H320028 Washer (2 required)
H320321 Lock Washer
H320138 Swage Assembly
H320346 Tubing
E016830 Teflon™ Lacing Cord
Private
Parts needing replacement-LEH-Q heads

E018735 0.5-in Teflon™ Tape
Reusable Parts
H320029 Nut
H320031 Plug Seal
13.6 Cable end re-swaging

Begin the torpedo end rebuild by cutting off at least one of foot bridle cable, or if
the cable is damaged or if the cable is corroded badly. Swaging is detailed in the
bridle construction section of this manual. Parts needed to re-swage the cable
end vary depending on which torpedo is used. The following lists show the parts
for EQCS-26 and EQCS-41 torpedoes. The EQCS-39 torpedo requires the
same parts as the EQCS-26.
Table 13-3: Parts Needing Replacement - EQCS-26 Torpedoes
Parts needing replacement - EQCS–26 Torpedoes

B022291 Set Screw for Ground Lead
E008587 Wire for Ground Lead
H032305 Wire Tube for Ground Lead
H115576 Socket for Ground Lead
H026246 Swage
Reusable parts
H029091 Boot for 0.8-in Bridle Cable
H031708 Boot for 0.5-in Bridle Cable
Table 13-4: Parts Needing Replacement - EQCS-41 Torpedoes
Parts needing replacement - EQCS-41 Torpedoes

B016112 Spirol Pin
B017249 Hex Screw for Ground Lead
H320219 Ground Lead Assembly
H320277 Swage
H320346 Tubing
Private
Parts needing replacement - EQCS-41 Torpedoes

E016359 0.051-in SS Safety Wire
Reusable parts
H320554 Upper Bridle Head
H239373 Spring Boot
13.7 Electrode TRIM

Remove the boots protecting the electrode ends and remove any dried mud or
other foreign matter. Be careful not to damage the electrode conductor splice.
Reassemble the boots with either Teflon™ cord or stainless steel wire, as desired.
If the electrode conductor splice is damaged, an electrode may be rebuilt in the

same location as the original by measuring towards the head end of the bridle in
step #3 of the electrode construction procedure. In other words, the location of
the splice may be moved to the head end of the electrode where the conductor
wire is intact.
13.8 BCC boot kits

Available BCC boot kits contain all necessary boots, insulators and contacts
necessary to replace the boots on both ends of the bridle. The following table
lists the various kits and the bridles for which they are used.
Table 13-5: Available BCC Boot Kits
Part No. Description

H701551 Kalrez kit for BRT–AQ/BA/BC
(LEH–Q Heads)
H701553 Viton kit for BRT–AQ/BA/BC (LEH–Q Heads)
H701965 Kalrez kit for BRT–BB/AB/AC
(EQCS–34 Heads)
H701966 Fluorel kit for BRT–BB/AB/AC
(EQCS–34 Heads)
H701967 Viton kit for BRT–BB/AB/AC
(EQCS–34 Heads)
Private
13.9 Bridle construction

Building a bridle from component parts can be broken down into the following
procedures.
13.9.1 Head end construction
13.9.1.1 Construction for the LEH-Q

1. Screw coil spring (H239373) onto the outer housing (H239360) and slide,
spring first, over the cable and out of the way.

2. Cut the bridle end off squarely and string tie the jacket 15.25-in from the
bridle end.
3. Remove 15-in of the jacket, unlay the conductors, and tape them back out of
the way. Be careful not to damage the conductor insulation while removing
the jacket.
4. Cut off the center support so that 8-in remains exposed beyond the end of
the outer jacket.
5. Remove the jacket so that 3.38-in of the center stress cable is exposed. This
leaves 4.62-in of the rubber jacket on the stress member as seen in Figure
13-1 Bridle cable ready for swaging-LEH-Q head.
Neoprene diameter smoothed to .36"

diameter
4-5/8" 3-3/8"
Figure 13-1: Bridle cable ready for swaging-LEH-Q head
6. Slide the Viton tubing (H320346) and mass isolation boot (H239338) up
to the end of the outer jacket. Orient the tubing so that the tapered end is
towards the head.
7. Dry fit the swage assembly, PEEK washers, and nut to the mass isolation
housing to ensure that they assemble properly. On some swage assemblies,
insulating coating residue may be in the last few threads. This prevents the
nut from holding the parts to the housing snugly. If that is the case, gently
Private
clean the threads with a 7/16-in 20 TPI die. Hold the die only by hand. Do
not cut new threads into the insulating coating - only clean out the threads
that are already there.
See Figure 13-2 Head end parts assembly for LEH-Q heads to see how the
head end parts assemble to the swage.
Mass Isolation Housing
Rotation Lock
Swage Assembly
Plug Seal
with O-rings
PEEK Washers Nut

Viton Lock Washer
Figure 13-2: Head end parts assembly for LEH-Q heads
8. Position the swage assembly (H320138) on the bridle stress member and
swage onto the cable. Use bridle swage adapter (H701557) to hold the
swage and ensure that it is straight. Make two (and only two) swaging
passes at 90 degrees. This can be seen in Figure 13-3 Swaging the head
end for LEH-Q heads.
Private
Bridle
Swage
Adapter Swage
H701557 Assembly
Figure 13-3: Swaging the head end for LEH-Q heads
9. Clean and lubricate the swage threads and assemble the mass isolation
housing (H239365) to the swage with two PEEK insulating washers
(H320028) on the swage (one on either side of the housing) secured with
the insulated nut (H320029).
10. Install the Viton lock washer (H320321) and rotation lock (H320311)
ensuring that the pins inside the housing properly engage the slots in the
rotation lock. The lock washer must properly nest in the end of the rotation
lock. Refer back to Figure 13-2 Head end parts assembly for LEH-Q heads.
11. Use 0.25-in Teflon™ tape (E019763) to gradually build the 0.36-in diameter
rubber jacket to the same diameter as the swaged terminal - approximately
0.5-in. See Figure 13-4 Swage assembly to mass isolation assembly.
Use 1/4" Teflon tape to smooth this transition
Figure 13-4: Swage assembly to mass isolation assembly
Private
12. Apply one layer of 0.5-in Teflon™ tape (E018735) or 0.75-in Teflon™ tape
(E016666) half-lapped over the exposed stress member jacket and swage.
Extend the tape over the joint where the swage meets the housing and up
to the large housing diameter. See Figure 13-5 Swage assembly with tape
applied.
1 layer, half-lapped 1/2" Teflon tape.

Smoothly applied with no gaps
Figure 13-5: Swage assembly with tape applied

13. Lubricate the Teflon™ taped swage with silicone grease and slide the Viton
tubing (H320346) so that the tapered end is approximately 1.0-in from the
shoulder on the swage terminal.
14. Using 0.5-in Teflon™ tape (E018735) or 0.75-in Teflon™ tape (E016666),
build the diameter of the swage up so that it is the same diameter as the
tubing, gradually covering the taper. See Figure 13-6 Viton tubing in place
with transition smoothed.
Apply tape smoothly

in this area
Viton tubing
Figure 13-6: Viton tubing in place with transition smoothed
15. Push the mass isolation boot (H239338) over the hump where the swage
assembly joins the housing and string tie the boot in three places.
16. String tie the exposed end of the Viton tubing.
17. Put the O-rings (B011404) on the plug seal (H320031) and insert the plug
seal. Secure it in place with two set screws (B018124).
18. Place the O-rings (B013124) on the fluid to air connector (H245813) and
install into the plug seal. See Figure 13-7 Head end assembly completed.
Private
String Ties Fluid to Air Connector
Figure 13-7: Head end assembly completed
19. Thread the bridle conductors through the passage in the housing and tape
them down near the end of the Viton tubing. This will help keep the wires
from getting snarled. TRIM the conductors as shown in Figure 13-8 Head
end assembly with conductors trimmed and ready for termination.
20. Terminate the conductors using the appropriate BCC boot kit.
1-1/2"
Figure 13-8: Head end assembly with conductors trimmed and ready for termination
13.9.2 Electrode construction

1. Locate and mark the center line of the lower electrode. The centerline of this
electrode should end up 20 feet from the head make-up ring. For an LEH-Q
head, this turns out to be 217.4-in measured from the head end of the bridle
head outer housing when it is in position. For a bridle used with EQCS-34
heads, this distance is 226.4-in as measured from the end of the lower
bridle swage assembly. Measure from the point shown on the appropriate
drawing. This is not a critical measurement as the measure point of the
electrodes should be physically measured following assembly of the bridle to
the head. In any event, the measure points need to be adjusted when the
head end of the bridle is reswaged.
2. Mark the centerline of the upper electrode 40 feet from the centerline of the
lower electrode. This places the electrode 60 feet from the head make-up
ring.
3. From the centerline of the electrode, measure towards the cable end of the
bridle 3.8-in and 6.8-in. See Figure 13-9 Electrode layout and dimensions for
measurement details.
Private
Wrap with E015157 then with E018735 Half Lapped

19.0
3.0 +/-0.5 3.8 +/-0.1
9.5
3.0
8.0
9.1
Figure 13-9: Electrode layout and dimensions
4. For opaque bridle cables, remove the jacket for this 3-in interval. Be very
careful not to damage the conductor insulation. When using the transparent
Tefzel™ bridle cable, the desired wire may be located without removing the
jacket. Score the jacket with a sharp blade on both sides of the wire for the
3-in length. Twisting the jacket back and forth will cause the jacket to break
along the scores allowing the jacket to be removed only over the wire of
choice.
5. Select the proper wire to splice to the electrode. For the lower electrode this
will be wire #8. For the upper electrode, select wire #9. Wires are numbered
clockwise looking down with the color coded wire being #1.
6. Cut the chosen wire about 0.5-in from the uphole end of the opening made in
step 4. This is about 6.3-in from the electrode centerline.
7. Remove 7/16-in of the lead from the lead covered electrode wire and 5/16-in
insulation from the bridle wire conductor. Untwist and straighten the strands
of each. See Figure 13-10 Lead and conductor wires stripped and trimmed.
7/16" 5/16"
Figure 13-10: Lead and conductor wires stripped and trimmed
Private
8. Insert the conductor strands into the parallel connector E021726. Twist the
conductors in order to mesh the wires. Move the parallel connector to the
lead wire, leaving about 1/8-in gap between the connector and the bridle
conductor insulation. See Figure 13-11 Insert wires into parallel connector.
Parallel
Connector
1/8" Gap
Figure 13-11: Insert wires into parallel connector
9. Crimp the parallel connector at its center with crimping tool (H033435). Use
the small cavity in the tool. Make two crimps at 90 degrees.
10. Fill the gaps between the connector and insulation and the connector and
the lead with 1/4-in Teflon™ tape (E019763). Smooth the joint as much as
possible, working the tape into the gaps and eliminating any void space.
Cover the connector so that the transition from lead to insulation is smooth.
See Figure 13-12 After crimping - smoothing the joint with lefton tape.
Level with Teflon Tape

Figure 13-12: After crimping - smoothing the joint with lefton tape
11. Complete the splice by wrapping the entire joint with four layers of 1/4-in
Teflon™ tape with 50% overlap as shown in Figure 13-13 Sealing the joint
with teflon tape. Lap about 1-in on the conductor and the lead. String tie
the free end of the tape for security.
Figure 13-13: Sealing the joint with teflon tape
12. Seal the unspliced (uphole) end of the conductor that was cut in step 6
with ½-in Teflon™ tape and replace in the original groove. Smooth out the
remainder of the groove with a Viton O-ring (B022872) or equal.
Private
13. Wrap the bridle first with fiberglass tape (E015157) and then with Teflon™
tape (E018735) or (E016666). Wrap the area from 9.5-in on both sides of
the electrode center line. Refer back to Figure 13-9 Electrode layout and
dimensions for details.
14. Carefully wrap the electrode wire around the bridle. Take care not to damage
the splice. Do not wrap the wire tightly over the area where the jacket was
removed. Wrap the wire so that the lead wrapped area is 8.1-in long and the
ends are equidistant from the electrode center line.
15. Spot solder the wire wraps together staggering the soldered areas by 180
degrees. Seal the open end of the electrode wire with solder.
16. Install the appropriate rubber electrode boots and secure with either wire
(E014911) or with Teflon™ lacing cord (E014911) as desired.
13.9.3 Torpedo end construction

Construction of the torpedo end depends on which torpedo assembly will be
used, the EQCS-26 or the EQCS-41.
13.9.3.1 Construction for EQCS-41

1. Screw the coil spring boot (H239373) onto the upper bridle head (H320554)
and slide, spring first, onto the bridle cable.
bridle end.
3. Remove 12.5-in of the jacket, unlay the conductors, and tape them back
out of the way. Be careful not to damage the conductor insulation while
removing the jacket.
4. Smooth out the neoprene jacket on the center stress member so that the
diameter is 0.36-in. Use coarse emery cloth first and 120 grit to finish. Hold
the cable taught between two vises while smoothing. A small hand-held
rotary tool (Dremel for example) with a fine grit sanding drum works well also.
5. Cut off the center support so that 8-in remains exposed. Remove the jacket
for 3.25-in from the end of the center support.
6. Cut the Viton tubing to 2.38-in (discard the tapered end) and slide onto the
smoothed stress member.
7. Swage the cable terminal (H320277) onto the cable. Be sure to swage the
blind end first so that the cable does not pull back while swaging. Make two
(and only two) swaging passes at 90 degrees on each end of the swage. See
SH033439 for swaging instructions.
Private
8. Use 0.25-in Teflon™ tape (E019763) to gradually build the 0.36-in diameter
0.5-in. Apply two layers 0.5-in Teflon™ tape, (E018735) or 0.75-in Teflon™
tape (E016666) half-lapped over the built up area and the lower swaged area.
9. Slide the Viton tubing into place over the Teflon™ tape and string tie both
ends with Teflon™ lacing cord E016830.
10. Cut conductors #8 and #9 1.3-in from the end of the outer jacket and seal
the ends with string tied Teflon™ tape. Wrap conductor #10 around the
center member and tape in place.
11. Install the grounding lead (H320219) with the set screw (B017249).
12. Insert the other seven conductors through the swage and terminate with the
desired BCC boots and connectors.

13. Position the upper bridle head with spring boot attached and secure with
pin (B016112).
14. Install the thread protector (H222822).
13.9.3.2 Construction for EQCS-26

1. Slide the rubber boot with the tapered end 5 down over the cable about 24-in.
See the BOM for the proper boot number.
bridle end.
3. Remove 12.5-in of the jacket, unlay the conductors, and tape them back
out of the way. Be careful not to damage the conductor insulation while
removing the jacket.
4. Smooth out the neoprene jacket on the center stress member so that the
diameter is 0.36-in. Use coarse emery cloth first and 120 grit to finish. Hold
the cable taught between two vises while smoothing. A small hand-held
rotary tool (Dremel for example) with a fine grit sanding drum works well also.
5. Cut off the center support so that 8-in remains exposed. Remove the jacket
for 3.2-in from the end of the center support.
6. Position the swage (H026246) on the bridle stress member so that the short
end is towards the head end of the bridle and so that 0.12-in of the strength
member protrudes beyond the long end of the swage. It is critical that the
short end be towards the head end of the bridle or else the bridle will have
a greatly reduced mechanical life. See Figure 13-14 Cable end prepared
for swaging.
Private
Figure 13-14: Cable end prepared for swaging
7. Swage the cable terminal onto the cable. Be sure to swage the downhole
end first. Make two (and only two) swaging passes at 90 degrees on each
end of the swage. See SH033439 for swaging details.
8. Grind the end of the stress member flush with the end of the swage and
seal with solder.
9. Use 0.25-in Teflon™ tape (EO19763) to gradually build the 0.36-in diameter
0.5-in. Apply four layers 0.5-in Teflon™ tape (E018735) or 0.75-in Teflon™
tape (E016666) half-lapped over the built up area and the short end of the
swage. String tie the end of the Teflon™ tape with two ties of Teflon™
lacing cord (EO16830) to keep it from unraveling. See Figures Figure 13-15
Smoothing the cable to swage junction and Figure 13-16 Bridle cable to
swage junction sealed with four layers of teflon tape and string-tied.
Use 1/4" Teflon tape to create a

smooth transition
Figure 13-15: Smoothing the cable to swage junction
Figure 13-16: Bridle cable to swage junction sealed with four layers
of teflon tape and string-tied
10. Cut conductors #8 and #9 1.3-in from the end of the outer jacket and seal
the ends with string tied Teflon™ tape. Seal conductor #10 and wrap around
the center member. Tape in place. See Figure 13-17 Conductors in place
and ready for termination.
Private
Figure 13-17: Conductors in place and ready for termination
11. Construct the grounding lead from 4-in of bare copper wire (E008584) and
socket (H115576). Install in the swage with wire tube (H032305) and socket
head screw (B022291).
12. Insert the other seven conductors through the swage and terminate with the
desired BCC boots and connectors.
13. Position and string tie the tapered boot and install the plug protector
(H031744).
13.10 Swaging terminal upper end (H026246)

1. Slide boot (H-029091) on cable.
2. Remove 13.5-in of jacket. Unlay the ten conductors and tape back out of
the way.
3. Smooth out the Neoprene rubber from jacket 7.75-in on the stress member
so the diameter is 0.36-in.
4. Cut off the center support so that 11-in remain.
5. Remove rubber 3.25-in from end of stress member. Leave no rubber on
steel line.
6. Swage the cable terminal (H–026246) on steel line. Swage short end first
toward head end. Make two swaging passes at 90 degrees.
7. Swage the long end torpedo side. Make two swaging passes at 90 degrees.
8. Using 0.25-in Teflon™ tape (E019763) gradually build the 0.36-in jacket to
the same diameter as the swaged terminal approximate 0.5-in.
9. Tape two layers of 0.5-in Teflon™ E–018735 half lapped over the build up
area an lower swaged area.
10. Tape one layer of electric tape over Teflon™ tape and tie end with cord
E–016830.
11. Cut 8 & 9 wires 1.3-in from end of jacket and seal end with Teflon tape and
tie ends.
12. Put wires 1–7 and wire 10 through holes in swage.
13. Install grounding lead with set screw B–017249.
Private
14. Cut wires 2.9-in from outside holes on swage.

15. Strip outside covering 2.7-in off of Teflon™ wire. Be careful not to nick wires.
16. Strip outside covering 2.7-in off of Teflon™ wire. Be careful not to nick wires.
17. Cut 0.25-in insulation off wire.
18. Set Winchester with 60-no-60 gauge H-123578.
19. Crimp socket H-115576 on wire.
20. Using H-208298 insertion tool screw into socket (H-115576). Pull liner in
place over socket. Slide boot in place.
21. Check with 500 volt Megger for insulation.
22. With Simpson on R x 1 check for continuity 1-7, check continuity to electrode
from head end 8 to lower electrode 9 to lower electrode.

23. Put dummy seal Fluorel (H-400320) to keep clean.
13.11 Bridle BCC’s

Please refer to the BCC Boots section in the Wireline Logging Heads Chapter of
this manual for proper boot and connector selection.
Use BCCs for 0.062-0.069 wire diameter:
• socket - H115576
• liner -H22637
• boot (Kalrez) - H231596 (500 degF)
• boot (SPC - Viton) - H2318170 (500 degF)
• boot (SRPC - Viton) - H274520 (500 degF)
• boot retainer - H245716.
Private
SRPC Doc-TBT\SRPC Doc-TBT\275253781\2.4\Release Date: 16-Nov-2006\EDMS UID: 275253781\Produced: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50 13-22 GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Bridles 13-22
Intentionally Blank
Private
14-i GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Integrated Depth Dual Wheel Spooler (IDW) 14-i
14 Integrated Depth Dual Wheel Spooler (IDW)

14.1 Content Overview _____________________________________________ 14-1
14.2 Description ____________________________________________________ 14-1
14.3 General information ___________________________________________ 14-3
14.4 Removal modules from an IDW ________________________________ 14-5
14.5 Disassembly of IDW modules _________________________________ 14-6
14.5.1 Track module _______________________________________________ 14-6
14.5.1.1 Roller sub-system (G1) __________________________________ 14-7
14.5.1.2 Cylinder assembly (IDW-B) _____________________________ 14-10
14.5.1.3 10-in wheel and support (G2) ___________________________ 14-11
14.5.2 Encoder and measuring wheel assembly ____________________ 14-15
14.5.2.1 Cross traverse removal _________________________________ 14-15
14.5.2.2 Encoder _______________________________________________ 14-17

14.5.3 Tubes-longitudinal and transversal __________________________ 14-19
14.5.3.1 Disassembly ___________________________________________ 14-19
14.5.3.2 Assembly ______________________________________________ 14-19
14.5.4 Disassembly and assembly of the anchoring device __________ 14-20
14.5.5 Pushing assembly _________________________________________ 14-21
14.6 RITE maintenance ____________________________________________ 14-23
14.6.1 FIT-1 mechanical __________________________________________ 14-23
Private
SRPC Doc-TBT\SRPC Doc-TBT\275253781\2.4\Release Date:16-Nov-2006\EDMS UID: 275253781\Produced: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50 14-ii GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Integrated Depth Dual Wheel Spooler (IDW) 14-ii
Intentionally Blank
Private
14-1 GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Integrated Depth Dual Wheel Spooler (IDW) 14-1
14 Integrated Depth Dual Wheel Spooler

(IDW) IDW, TOPS
This section describes the purpose of the integrated depth dual wheel spooler
known as IDW. Photographs and drawings are used to familiarize the operator
trainee with this very important asset. Covered in this section will be:
• a basic description of the IDW,

• disassembly and reassembly of the IDW and,

• a maintenance checklist for IDW.
Student objectives
the following:
1. Explain the basic theory behind the IDW measurement.

2. Explain the importance of line wipers and measuring wheel scrapers with
respect to the IDW measurement.
3. Disassemble and assemble an IDW.
4. Describe the proper RITE maintenance procedures for the IDW.
14.1 Content Overview
14.2 Description
The Integrated Depth Dual Wheel Spooler (IDW) is a precision device that
measures the length of wireline cable that passes through it. This surface
measurement, when corrected for cable tension, temperature, and other effects
applied in the appropriate procedure, provides a measure of downhole depth
along the borehole. The IDW is commonly installed along with the Cable
Mounted Tension Device (CMTD) on the spooling arm above the winch drum.
The completed assembly guides the wireline cable, under tension, as it reels on
and off the winch drum.
Private
The IDW has two horizontal measuring wheels in contact with the cable, with
each wheel driving a rotary encoder. See the major assemblies in Figure 14-1
and Figure 14-2. The wheels are mounted opposing each other and are held in
contact with the cable by spring force. There are track modules on both sides of
the horizontal wheels that serve to center the cable vertically on the edges or
rims of the measuring wheels.
Figure 14-1: IDW major assemblies
Figure 14-2: IDW bottom view
Private
14.3 General information

IDW-B/E and IDW-D spoolers are made out of modules strung over two sets of
parallel tubes. The tubes are secured to a rigid frame by means of a system of
half–round grooves as shown in Figure 14-3.
Figure 14-3: Longitudinal and transverse tubes - IDW-B
The two measuring wheel systems are mounted, on each side of the frame.
They slide along the transversal tubes. Refer to Figure 14-4.
Private
SRPC Doc-TBT\SRPC Doc-TBT\275253781\2.4\Release Date:16-Nov-2006\EDMS UID: 275253781\Produced: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50 14-4 GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Integrated Depth Dual Wheel Spooler (IDW) 14-4
Figure 14-4: Measuring wheel assemblies on traversal tubes (longitudinal tubes removed)
Note
Nut (P191879) will have to be removed from the end of the transversal tube
before disassembly.
There is one spring inside each tube with each end attached to one wheel
system. Therefore, the springs force tends to bring the two wheels together.
The other modules are mounted on the longitudinal tubes. Most of these are
arranged into two groups - one on each side of the frame.
The modules of a group, together with appropriate spacers, are strung in a row
over the tubes. The assembly is squeezed in place by means of end-caps
screwed at the tube ends.
The remaining modules are also strung over the longitudinal tubes but inside the
frame. They are clamped on the tubes by means of half-round grooves.
Private
14.4 Removal modules from an IDW

Modules mounted on the longitudinal tubes outside of the frame slide out once
the end-caps have been unscrewed. Refer to Figure 14-5 Removal of front end
modules and to Figure 14-6 Removal of rear (winch side) modules that shows
the components for removal.
Modules mounted on the longitudinal tubes inside the frame are obtained by
sliding the tubes out from them (and out from the frame). This must be done first:
1. Remove one group of end modules.

2. Loosen the half-round grooves on the inside modules and frame.
Figure 14-5: Removal of front end modules
Private
Figure 14-6: Removal of rear (winch side) modules
Note
The marking module may be replaced with an additional track module.
14.5 Disassembly of IDW modules
14.5.1 Track module

This section shows the disassembly of the track module. Figure 14-7, shows the
assembled unit while Figure 14-8 shows major components of the track module.
Private
Figure 14-7: Track module
Figure 14-8: Roller sub-system removed from track module
14.5.1.1 Roller sub-system (G1)

Figure 14-9 shows disassembly of the roller sub-assembly. According to the
logging cable diameter, the rollers are:
• P-192310 - (0.52-in)
Private
• P-192307 - (0.46-in)
• P-193948 - (0.38-in)
• P-195591 - (0.18-in and 0.22-in).
Disassembly
Figure 14-9: Disassembled roller sub-assembly
1. Remove the retaining rings (B024456) from the safety axle (P191845) and
the axle (P191833).
2. Remove the stop washers (P191974) and spacers (P195457). See Figure
14-9.
This will separate the roller assembly, cylinder assembly and lever handle
(G1) from the equipped roller support (P192303) and 10-in wheel (G2).
3. Remove axle (P191838) and axle (P191839) by removing retaining rings
(B024456). An exploded view in shown in Figure 14-9.
Private
Figure 14-10: Equipped roller support and cylinder assembly

Figure 14-11: Orientation of the lever handle
4. Note that the Figure 14-11 view shows the roller assembly (P192307, typical)
and edge bevelled nut (P191847) that must be changed according to cable
diameter. The complete list of roller sizes is given in Table 14-1. These
assemblies include roller, axle (P191859), bearing (B024457), and edge
beveled nut (P191547).
Table 14-1: Roller Assembly Selection
Roller assembly Roller only Cable dia. range (in)

P192310 P275260 0.52
P192307 P275261 0.46
P193948 P275262 0.38
P195951 P275263 0.18 - 0.23
Private
Note
The roller assemblies can be removed from a complete IDW. This can be
done by unscrewing the roller assembly from nut (P191847).
5. Use a 1-1/8-in wrench on the flats of axle (P191859) to remove these

assemblies directly from the roller support (P192303).
6. To reassemble, orient the edge beveled nut as shown in Figure 14-11. Using
axle (P191839), spacer (P195457), and stop washer (P191974), install the
equipped roller support (P192303) onto the cylinder assembly (P192308).
Note that the cylinder end with the retaining ring is turned toward the roller
support.
7. Assemble the equipped lever handle (P192306) to the cylinder assembly

using axle (P191838), spacer (P195457) and circlips or retaining ring
(B024456). Note the orientation of the lever handle in Figure 14-11.
14.5.1.2 Cylinder assembly (IDW-B)

Refer to Figure 14-12 Cylinder assembly. There are some mechanical
differences in the various IDW’s:
• IDW-B and IDW-D track modules differ only in the cylinder assembly
• IDW-B/E cylinder assembly (P-192305) features an equipped piston
(P-192304)
• IDW-D cylinder assembly (P-270466) features an equipped piston
(P-270476).
Private
Truarc Ring (B024454)
Equipped Piston (P192304)

Delrin Bearing
(P191840)
Spring Delrin Bearing

(P191898) (P191840)
Equipped Cylinder
(P192306 IDW-B)
(P270466 IWD-D)
Figure 14-12: Cylinder assembly
14.5.1.3 10-in wheel and support (G2)

The following notes should be considered when assembling and disassembling
the wheel and support.
Disassembly
1. Refer to the exploded view in Figure 14-13. Note that this is assembly G2
in Figure 14-8. To disassemble, remove the protective cap (B074777) and
grease fitting (A013623) from the greasing cap (P191850). Remove the outer
retaining rings (B024453) from each side of the equipped support (P192302).
Private
Figure 14-13: Disassembly of the roller sub-assembly
2. Remove the greasing cap. Push a rod with diameter less than 5-mm through
the center of axle (P276321) and punch out the cap (P191849).
3. Punch out the axle toward the side with the greasing cap using a rod with
10-mm diameter.
4. Remove the balance of the parts, as shown in Figure 14-13. The scrapers
(P191971) are held by screws (P189653) and washers (B020669).
5. To reassemble, install a retaining ring (B024453) into both sides of equipped
support (P192302). These are the inner rings nearest the wheel. See Figure
14-14.
Private
Figure 14-14: Intallation of the retaining ring (B024453)
6. Lightly grease the axle (P276321) and install the bearing (B024457) on the
short shoulder end of the axle. Secure it with retaining ring (B024445). Note
the orientation of the bearing in Figure 14-15. Slide shield (P191837) onto
the long shoulder end of the axle with the chamfered side toward the bearing.
Figure 14-15: Installation of the bearing (B024457)
7. Slide the long shoulder end of the axle into sleeve No. 1 (see Figure 14-16)
and then into wheel (P276317) and spacer (P191836). Push the axle and
bearing assembly to the bottom of sleeve No. 1.
Private
Figure 14-16: Installation of the bearing and axle assembly
8. Install grease fitting (A013623) in greasing cap (P191850) and install the
greasing cap onto the axle (P276321) on sleeve No. 1. Install retaining ring
(B024453) in sleeve No. 1 and then install the protective cap (B074777)
onto the grease fitting.
9. Turn the support (P192302) over, as in Figure 14-17. Place shield (P191837)
onto the axle with the chamfered side away from the wheel (toward the
bearing). Install bearing (B024457) onto the axle with the bearing shield
turned inside toward shield (P191837). Install cap (P191849) and then the
retaining ring (B024453).
Private
Figure 14-17: Installation of the bearing
Assembly
1. The shields (P191837) in Figure 14-15 should be mounted on the wheel

side of the ball-bearings. The hollow side of the shield should face the
ball-bearing.
2. When reassembling G1 and G2 of Figure 14-9, note that the safety axle
(P191845) is the lower axle in the assembly.
14.5.2 Encoder and measuring wheel assembly
Note
This step is done to free the measuring wheel assembly from the transversal
tubes for easier disassembly. Figure 14-3 shows measuring wheel assembly and
encoder removed from the transversal tubes.
14.5.2.1 Cross traverse removal

1. Remove two caps (P-191948). See Figure 14-18.
Private
Figure 14-18: Polyurethane caps on the cross traverse
2. Request someone to pull on spring (P-191920) Figure 14-19 by means of a

hooked wire engaged within ring (P-192034).
Figure 14-19: Axle and spring removal
3. Punch axle (P-191927) out. See Figure 14-19.

4. Slowly release the spring tension.
5. Go through steps 1 through 4 again to liberate the spring on the other side.
6. Unscrew nut (P-191897) Figure 14-20 from inside the winch side transversal
tube using a 1/2-in Allen wrench.
Private
Figure 14-20: Springs and components
7. The complete measuring wheel assembly can now be slid off the transversal
tubes.
14.5.2.2 Encoder
This is the disassembly procedure for the encoder and measuring wheel
assembly after removal of cross traverse from transversal tubes.
1. Place the IDW on a bench, encoder side down, and wheel side up.
Figure 14-21: Workbench view - bottom of measuring wheel assembly
2. Refer to Figure 14-22. Unlock the lock washer 1 (P-191998) that prevents
rotation of screw 2 (P-191999). The screw maintains the wheel on the
encoder’s shaft.
Private
Figure 14-22: Retainer screw removal
3. Prevent the wheel from rotating and unscrew P-191999.

4. Remove the lock washer.
5. Turn the IDW around with the encoders up. Be careful as the wheel will
fall down within its protecting frame.
6. Remove the four screws (P-189653) and four nuts (P-189654). See Figure
14-23.
Figure 14-23: Disassembly of measuring wheel assembly
Private
7. There is a small key in a keyway on the encoder shaft. DO NOT LOSE THIS!!
See Figure 4-19 in the IDW Maintenance Manual.
8. Rotating it around its axis, lift the encoder out. The measuring wheel can
be removed.
9. It may be necessary to remove the protector (P192716). Do so by removing
four (4) screws (P189653).
10. Screw P-191999 on and bend up the washer fin that faces one of the screw
slots.
To view cross traverse internal components refer to Figure 4-13 in the IDW
Maintenance Manual.
14.5.3 Tubes-longitudinal and transversal
14.5.3.1 Disassembly
Perform the following to remove one longitudinal tube:
1. Remove all modules exterior to the frame (measuring wheel Assemblies

excepted). Refer to Figure 14-3 Longitudinal and transverse tubes - IDW-B.
2. Loosen the clamps of all modules interior to the frame.
3. Loosen the tube clamp (screw P-189653).
4. Slide the tube out of the frame (and out of inner modules).
Perform the following to remove one transversal tube:
1. Remove the two measuring wheel assemblies.

2. Loosen the tube clamp (screw P-189653).
3. Slide the tube out of the frame.
14.5.3.2 Assembly
1. Mount the transversal tubes symmetrically with respect to the frame.
2. Mount longitudinal tubes in such a way that they protrude out from one of
the frame’s sides by about 145 mm.
3. Fasten the tube clamps only when all modules are in place.
Private
Transversal tube (P-191925), the one that houses nut (P-191897), can be
mounted indifferently on the winch or well side of the frame. It is factory
mounted on the winch side. (The nut is a safety device which insures that
the measuring wheel assemblies will not slide out of the transversal tubes in
case of spring breakdown.)
14.5.4 Disassembly and assembly of the anchoring device

The complete anchoring device (P191987) is shown in Figure 14-24.
Note
The complete removal of the anchoring device from the IDW requires that
the longitudinal tubes first be removed. See Figure 14-4 Measuring wheel
assemblies on traversal tubes (longitudinal tubes removed). Front side module(s)
can be left on for this step if desired.
Figure 14-24: Anchoring device
Private
Figure 14-25: Cable guide equipped end - parts and part numbers
Figure 14-26: Bridg equipped end - parts and part numbers
Note
For detailed roller guide disassembly and assembly instructions, see section
4.5.1 of the IDW Maintenance Manual.
14.5.5 Pushing assembly

Figure 14-27 shows the various components to the pushing assembly. Figure
14-1 shows pushing assembly installed.
Private
Note
The lever (P-192476) of early IDW-B has now been replaced with the much
shorter P-270534. The new lever equips IDW-B and IDW-D.
Figure 14-27: Exploded view of the pushing assembly
Note
Before inserting the spirol pin within the lever hole, rotate the lever 360 degrees
clockwise. This assures proper spring action.
Private
14.6 RITE maintenance
14.6.1 FIT-1 mechanical

Potential Loss: Information
Depth is the most important measurement Schlumberger provides for the client.
The depth measurement can and will be affected if the IDW is not properly
maintained. FIT should be made on the IDW after every trip to the wellsite. The
IDW is a precision instrument and should be treated as such.

Do not use water pressure or a steam cleaner near the electrical connectors.
Before cleaning, replace the protection caps to electrical connectors if cables
are not installed. See Figure 14-28.
1. Clean the IDW with water or degreaser as required.
Figure 14-28: Location of electrical connections and caps
2. Close the caps on the IDW encoder receptacles and protect the connectors
on the spooling arm cables from the weather. See Figure 14-28.
Private
3. Pump grease (B074520) or any ball bearing grease with an adequate

temperature rating in all eight wheels. See Figure 14-29.
Figure 14-29: IDW lubrication
4. Check that the plastic safety axles (P191845), retaining rings (B024456), and
the stop washers (P191974) on the steel axles of the track modules are all
present and in good condition. See Figure 14-30.
Figure 14-30: Track module inspection
Private
5. Check all eight scrapers (P191971 and P192017) for wear. Mud build up on
the measuring wheels will cause wheel slippage resulting in depth errors and
uneven wear on the wheels. See Figure 14-31 for scraper location. Replace
scrapers if they do not make contact with the measuring wheels.
Figure 14-31: Scraper and wheel lock inspection
6. Check all four (4) cable locks (P297012) for wear. See Figure 14-31.
7. Clean and inspect the CMTD Mounting Kit to ensure that all fasteners are
tight and that all quick release pins and extension springs are in place.
Inspect the bushings and axles for galling. If the kit is equipped with grease
fittings, lubricate these while lubricating the IDW.
8. On land units, secure the IDW properly for transport.
9. On offshore units, store the IDW in the doghouse, as applicable.
10. Check the condition of the line wiper to keep the cable properly clean. See
Figure 14-32.
Private
Figure 14-32: Line wiper assembly
11. Rotate the lever on the pushing assembly to close the measuring wheel
assemblies while there is no wireline cable installed in the IDW. Push the
measuring wheel assemblies from side to side to verify they are free to slide
on the transversal tubes without binding.
Note
TRIM Requirements are outlined in detail in Chapter 6 of the IDW Maintenance
Manual.
Note
For detailed IDW troubleshooting procedures please refer to Chapter 8 of the
IDW Maintenance Manual.
Private
15-i GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Fishing 15-i
15 Fishing
15.1 Safety _________________________________________________________ 15-2
15.1.1 Fishing with radioactive sources _____________________________ 15-2
15.2 Sticking causes _______________________________________________ 15-3
15.2.1 Differential sticking __________________________________________ 15-3
15.2.2 Keyseating _________________________________________________ 15-3
15.2.3 Hole restriction _____________________________________________ 15-3
15.2.4 Damaged casing ____________________________________________ 15-3
15.2.5 Damaged cable _____________________________________________ 15-3
15.2.6 Damaged tool ______________________________________________ 15-3
15.3 Avoiding getting stuck ________________________________________ 15-4
15.3.1 Keep the cable moving ______________________________________ 15-4
15.3.2 Spend as little time at the TD as possible _____________________ 15-4

15.3.3 Keep the cable under tension ________________________________ 15-4
15.3.4 Do not spud with logging tools _______________________________ 15-4
15.3.5 Use centralizers and standoffs _______________________________ 15-4
15.3.6 Approach casing / tubing shoes with caution __________________ 15-5
15.3.7 Weakpoint choice ___________________________________________ 15-5
15.4 Action to be taken when stuck ________________________________ 15-5
15.4.1 If at TD _____________________________________________________ 15-5
15.4.2 If coming up ________________________________________________ 15-5
15.4.3 If all else fails and the tool is stuck ___________________________ 15-5
15.5 Fishing equipment ____________________________________________ 15-6
15.6 Equipment Assembly ________________________________________ 15-10
15.7 Fishing procedure ____________________________________________ 15-19
15.7.1 Cut and thread technique ___________________________________ 15-19
15.7.1.1 Procedure highlights ____________________________________ 15-19
15.7.1.2 Potential accidents _____________________________________ 15-20
15.8 Side-door overshot technique ________________________________ 15-21
15.8.1 Advantages _______________________________________________ 15-21
15.8.1.1 Disadvantages _________________________________________ 15-21
15.8.1.2 Procedure _____________________________________________ 15-21
15.8.1.3 Procedure highlights ____________________________________ 15-23
15.9 Freeing at the weakpoint _____________________________________ 15-24
15.9.1 Advantages _______________________________________________ 15-24
15.9.1.1 Disadvantages _________________________________________ 15-25
15.10 Procedure ____________________________________________________ 15-25
Private
SRPC Doc-TBT\SRPC Doc-TBT\275253781\2.4\Release Date:16-Nov-2006\EDMS UID: 275253781\Produced: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50 15-ii GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Fishing 15-ii
Intentionally Blank
Private
15-1 GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Fishing 15-1
15 Fishing Cell Concept, Accountability, advanced interpretation,
Fishing is the operation by which any stuck tools are removed from the well
borehole.
This chapter gives information on how sticking may occur and how it may be
avoided. It also details the equipment required for a fishing job as well as the
technique involved.Fishing training book (M-072787).

Potential Loss: Information
This section is awaiting revision pending the release of new manuals. SFT- 157
(Fishing Kit) and SFT-404 (Slim Fishing Kit) are due to be replaced with the new
Fishing Kits SFT-644 and SFT- 651 respectively. Operations and Maintenance
Manuals for these new kits have yet to be released. For the latest information
on fishing please refer to InTouch Support: Wireline Fishing Reference Page
(Content ID-3876112).
Student objectives
the following:
1. Explain the method used for fishing when radioactive sources are in the
toolstring and why this method is used?
2. Describe causes of sticking in the bore hole.
3. Describe methods to avoid getting stuck in the borehole.
4. Explain the importance of proper weakpoint selection.
5. Describe procedures to be followed if the toolstring becomes stuck.
6. Identify all of the pieces of equipment in the fishing kit and their purpose.
7. List the different fishing techniques currently used in the field and when each
technique should be used.
Reference documents
http://www.austin.apc.slb.com/wth_tra/wireline/prod-services/fish/fish-shock-temp.html
Private
15.1 Safety
Before commencing any fishing job all safety aspects should be reviewed by
all concerned.
Note
The fishing operation can be very dangerous. Inattention to safety can lead to
equipment damage/loss, serious injury or death.
The following are important safety considerations.

• Unfamiliar Procedures: Some of the personnel involved in the operation

may have had little experience of fishing. It is important to explain fully the
procedure to all. Do not accept unsafe shortcuts.
• Communication: All instructions must be clear and easily understandable.
If possible a written procedure should be circulated. If in doubt, STOP the
operation and review the situation. Damage and loss to equipment (and
reputation) can be sustained because the client was not fully informed of
the circumstances and a wrong technique was used. Feel free to ask for
instructions to be repeated or re-explained.
• Haste: Fishing operations require calm and deliberate planning. Haste
during a fishing job will more likely lead to accidents and delays than any time
saving. Take your time to do a good job.
• Fatigue: Unfortunately, most fishing jobs take place when the crew is tired. If
you are too tired to think then DO NOT even try. Call for a relief and try and
get some rest. Ensure that the crew are relieved during the operation.
• Lack of Confidence: If you feel you are not competent to advise the client or
supervise the crew in a performance of a safe and effective fishing operation,
call for someone to give help.
• Choice of Equipment: Make sure the equipment you are using is designed
and rated for the job it is doing. The wrong equipment or wrong rating will be
a safety hazard.
15.1.1 Fishing with radioactive sources

1. Cut and thread must be used in open hole.
2. Mud returns must be monitored for radioactivity.
Private
15.2 Sticking causes
15.2.1 Differential sticking

Differential sticking occurs because of the force generated by the inequalities
in hydrostatic pressure and formation pressure. If the force generated by the
differential pressure is greater than the tension that may be safely pulled on
the cable then the tool becomes stuck.
15.2.2 Keyseating
Keyseating occurs when the cable wears a groove in some part of the borehole
wall. This might happen in a deviated or doglegged well. As the tool is pulled up,
the torpedo or head cannot pass into the groove and the tool becomes stuck.
15.2.3 Hole restriction

Sticking also occurs when the hole becomes physically too small for the tool
to pass through. Swelling shales, the collapse of unconsolidated formations,
wedging due to debris, etc., may cause hole restrictions.
15.2.4 Damaged casing

Sticking can occur in damaged or collapsed casing. The casing shoe is the most
vulnerable part of the casing string.
15.2.5 Damaged cable

Cable that has become knotted, birdcaged or has broken armor wires can easily
become stuck.
15.2.6 Damaged tool

If a tool is damaged in the well such that a caliper arm, centralizer or such
extension breaks, the tool may get stuck.
Private
15.3 Avoiding getting stuck
15.3.1 Keep the cable moving

As long as the cable is moving, it should not become differentially stuck. Should
the winch fail while the tool is in the hole then the driller should move the upper
sheave up and down with the drawworks. Note the position of the sheave
before commencing so that depth errors will not be introduced after resumption
of normal operations.
15.3.2 Spend as little time at the TD as possible

All the debris in the well will settle at the bottom of the hole, therefore there is a
good chance that the tool can be wedged. Approach TD slowly and start the tool
moving upward immediately after reaching it. If the bottom of the hole is sticky
make your repeat section further up the hole.
15.3.3 Keep the cable under tension

Slacking off tension on cable in the hole can put knots or birdcages in the cable.
While running in hole, monitor the tension closely and the engineer should
monitor his log curves to see if the tool has stopped moving.
15.3.4 Do not spud with logging tools

Spudding with logging tools can lead to tool damage or drive the tool into a
bridge or collection of debris. Resist the temptation to pile drive your tools past
any obstructions on the way down.
15.3.5 Use centralizers and standoffs

When possible centralize the tool. This will decrease the area of the tool in
contact with the borehole wall, thus reducing your chances of being differentially
stuck. A standoff close to the logging head will force the head away from grooves
formed by the cable (the standoff should be a minimum of 3 ft below the logging
head to allow enough gripping area for the grapple in the event of a fishing job).
Private
15.3.6 Approach casing / tubing shoes with caution

As the shoe may be damaged, always pull up into it with care.
15.3.7 Weakpoint choice

In order to try and free a stuck tool, as much tension as possible must be
applied on the wireline. The maximum safe overpull depends on the type of
cable in use as well as the weakpoint. The weakpoint should be chosen so
that it is the strongest available that can still be broken without exceeding the
maximum allowed tension on the cable. As a rule, the tension applied should
not exceed 50% of the cable rating or 75% of the weakpoint lower rating (plus
normal tension).
15.4 Action to be taken when stuck

If the tension builds up indicating that the cable or tool is sticking.
15.4.1 If at TD
Close any open caliper arms and apply maximum safe tension immediately.
15.4.2 If coming up
Close any open caliper arms and apply 1,000 lbs overpull. If this does not free
the tool, attempt to go down and then try coming back up again. Continue to
increase the overpull in increments of 1,000 lbs. after each attempt until the
maximum safe pull has been reached.
15.4.3 If all else fails and the tool is stuck

1. Set the brakes with the tension on the cable slightly above the normal
logging tension. Do not leave the cable at the maximum logging tension
for long periods.
2. Inform the client of the situation.
3. Inform your manager.
4. Do not break the weakpoint unless it has been agreed with the client and
your manager to do so.
Private
5. Do not break the cable. This is possibly the worst scenario you can have as
fishing a broken cable can take weeks.
6. Determine if it is the tool that is stuck or the cable.
This can be done by the following procedure:
a. Pickup the tension slightly above normal tension.

b. Flag the line at the rotary table with some friction tape.
c. Increase tension by, say, 1000 lbf.
d. Mark the cable at exactly the same elevation and measure accurately
the distance between the marks.
e. Enter this stretch and the associated tension increase on the appropriate
keyseat determination chart for the size and type of cable in use and read
off the amount of cable stretched.
For relatively straight holes, this will be:
i. The total length of cable in the hole; in which case, the tool is stuck.
ii. The top of the keyseat or stuck point, if the cable is stuck.
7. Prepare for fishing.
15.5 Fishing equipment

1. 2–5/16 in spiral grapples (2)
(H034888)
2. Grapple controls (1)

(H012983)
3. Bowen 3-1/2 in overshot (1)

(H012981)
4. Guide
shoes (3)
7 in to 7-1/2 in 5-1/2 in to 5 ¾ in 4–11/16 in

(H019579) (H019580) (H019581)
5. No – go sub 2–1/8 in I.D. (1)
(Can be incorporated in top sub)
Private
6. OPTIONAL: drain sub 1,500 –

2,000 psi
(Blow out disk could be incorporated
into top sub to eliminate drain sub)
7. OPTIONAL: extra
disk (4)
Cross – over sub to drillpipe (1)

(B020913)
9. 1-11/16 in O.D. spearhead

overshot (2)
(H039520)
10. Spearhead overshot swivel (1)
(H039528)
11. 2-1/8 in guide for spearhead

overshot (1)
(H039522)
12. 2 ¾ in guide for spearhead
overshot (1)
(H039523)
13. Roll pins for spearhead

guides (3)
(B013109)
14. Pliers for spearhead overshot
(2)
(H105640)
15. 1-11/16 in O.D. rope socket

housings (3)
(H113226)
16. Rope socket housing retainer

nuts (3)
(H113227)
17. Rope socket housing Allen

screws (3)
(B17687)
Private
18. 1-11/16 in O.D. spearheads (2)

(H105616)
19. 2-1/4 in O.D. hex adapter for

spearhead (1)
(H105617)
20. 1-11/16 in O.D. plain adapter for

spearhead (1)
(H105618)
21. C- Plates to tit 4-1/2 in drillpipe

(2)
(H028285)
22. Rope socket cones for .46 in

cable (4)
23. Circulating sub (with insert)

(B020914)
24. Long neck T – bar cable clamp

(2)
(H244873)
25. Extra 15/32 in T – bar liners (2)

(H026680)
26. Extra screws for T – bar liners

(4)
27. Turnbuckles and bolts for T -

bar clamp (2)
Private
28. 2-1/8 in sinker bar weight (2)

(H041948)
29. 1-11/16 in sinker bar weight (2)

(H041947)
30. Sinker bar pins (16)

(H039773)
31. Fishing sling (1)

(H045080)
Private
15.6 Equipment Assembly

3
10
5, 4
9
8
11
4 13, 14
10
15
Figure 15-1: Rope socket kit
Private
2 1
Figure 15-2: Circulating sub

Table 15-1: Rope Socket Kit (Including Circulating Sub)
Item Part number Description Quantity

10 H113238 Cone type rope socket 2
for cut & thread
9 H105587 Top sub 1
8 H039528 Wireline swivel 1
1-11/16 OD
4 H039520 Spear-head overshot 1
1-11/16 OD
5 H039522 Oversize guide 2-1/8 1
in
6 H039523 Oversize guide 2-¾in 1
7 B013109 Pin, roll 1/4 in x 7/8 in 2
SST
11 H039521 Spear head rope 1
socket make-up
3 H028285 C washer 1
15 H105640 Release tong 1
1 B020914 Sub, circulating; type 1
C-plate 4.5.I.F.
2 B020915 Plug, slotted 1
1a H012582 Sub, circulating; type 0
C-Plate 4.5 API FH
(optional)
2a H012583 Slotted plug for 0
H012582 (optional)
Private

13 H105617 Adapter, C-washer 0
HEX (2 in OD)
(optional, not
recom-mended)
14 H105616 Adapter, C-washer 0
HEX (1.6875 in OD)
11
2 5 7, 8, 9, 10
4 6 1
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18
Figure 15-3: Overshot kit
Table 15-2: Overshot Kit Parts
Item Part number Description Qty

1 H012981 Bowl 1
2 H034888 2.3125 Grapple, 1
multi-wick (2.25 in
to 2.375 in)
4 H012980 Outside thread 1
protector
5 H012983 Control 1
6 H028310 Bowen overshot 1
bushing
7 H012984 Guide, 3.5 in 1
8 H019581 Guide, 4.25 in 1
9 H019580 Guide, 5.75 in 1
10 H019579 Guide, 7 in 1
11 B020913 Sub, overshot top 4.5 1
API I.F. to 3.5 internal
thread DP
12 H012987 2.25 in Grapple 0
(optional: 2.188 in
to 2.313 in)
Private
Item Part number Description Qty

13 H012988 2.125 in Grapple 0
(optional: 2.063 in to
2.188 in)
14 H012989 2 in Grapple (optional: 0
1.938 in to 2.063 in)
15 H012990 1.875 in Grapple 0
1.938 in)
16 H012991 1.75 in Grapple 0
(optional: 1.688 in
to 1.813 in)
17 H012992 1.725 in Grapple 0
1.688 in)
18 H044260 1.375 in Grapple 0
1.438 in)
5a H031861 Control 0
11a H012979 Sub, overshot top 4.5 0
API F.H. to 3.5 API
I.U. DP
Private
1
2, 3
4
Cable Hanger K1
5
Optional Equipment
Figure 15-4: Cable hanger kit and optional equipment
Table 15-3: Bowen Wireline Swivel Parts

1 H349030 Collapsible cable 1
hanger
1 H039773 Sinker bar pin 8
2 H041947 1-11/16 Sinker bar 1
3 H041948 2-1/8 Sinker bar 1
4 H045080 Sling wire rope 1
5 H040482 Punch 1
6 H134360 Remote tension 1
device
Private
1 2 3 4 5
7 6
Figure 15-5: Bowen wireline swivel
Table 15-4: Bowen Wireline Swivel Parts
Item Bowen Part No. Description Quantity

1 No. 15713 Bottom sub 1
2 No. 13978 Garlock seal No.139 1
3 No. 15712 Bearing housing 1
4 No. 13993 Actna ball thrust 1
bearing
5 No. 13994 Connector bolt 1
6 No. 15711 Tap sub 1
7 PT #2696 Spring pin 1/4 in dia. 1
1/2 in long
Private
9 6
4
1 8 7 5 3 2
Figure 15-6: Bowen spear head overshot #11810 (H39520)
Table 15-5: Bowen Spear Head Overshot (H039520)

1 H105621 Bowen Body #11811 1
2 H105622 Bowen Release Arm 1
Nut #11820
3 H105623 Bowen Spring Washer 1
#11817
4 H105624 Bowen Release Arm 1
#11819
5 H105625 Bowen Release 1
Spring #11816
6 H105626 Bowen Latch Spring 1
#11815
7 H105627 Bowen Jaw Stop Pin 1
#11814
8 H105628 Bowen Pivot Pin 1
#11813
9 H105629 Bowen Jaw #11812 1
Private
3 4
2 5, 8, 11 6, 9, 12 7, 10, 13 1
Figure 15-7: Cone type rope socket (H113238)
Table 15-6: Cone Type Rope Socket Parts

1 H113226 Rope socket housing 1
2 H113227 Plug 1
3 H106910 Nylon plug 1
4 B017687 Screw 0.25 in - 20 NC 1
- 0.3125 in 1g Stl.
For 15/32 in and 3/8
in Cable
5 H712906 Inner cone 1
6 H27950 Intermediate cone 1
7 H27951 Outer cone 1
For 7/16 in Cable
For 5/16 in Cable
Private

7 in. 5-3/4 in.
3-5/32 in. 3-5/32 in.
2-15/32 4 in. 2-15/32 3-1/2 in.

in. in.
4-25/32 in. 4-1/4 in.
4074 - 7 in. OD 4074 - 5-3/4 in. OD
H19570 H19580
4-1/4 in. 3-1/2 in.
3-5/32 3-5/32
in. in.
2-15/32
2-15/32 3 in. in.
in. 3 in.
3-7/32 in. 3-1/4 in.

4074 - 4-1/4 in. OD 4074 - 3-1/2 in. OD
H19581 H19584
Figure 15-8: Guides for series 105 overshot
Private
Kelly
Box ?
Pin ?
Sub needed
Pin 4-1/2 API F
4-1/2 API IF box
Schlumberger
Circulating sub
Box 4-1/2 API F
4-1/2 API IF pin
Sub needed
Pin
Drill pipe box
Rotary table
Drill pipe pin ?

Box ?
Sub needed
Pin 4-1/2 API F
Box 4-1/2 API IF
Schlumberger sub
Box 3-1/2 API D.P. 8 rounds/in

Box ? (not tool joint thread)
or alternatively PIN 8-1/2 API D.P.8 rounds/in
Taper 3/4 in. Thread OD
3-1/2 in.
Box 5-1/2 D.P. Schlumberger overshot
8 rounds/in Box 2-3/8 n. EU Tubing
Figure 15-9: Adapters chart
15.7 Fishing procedure
15.7.1 Cut and thread technique
15.7.1.1 Procedure highlights

1. Do not break the cable.
2. Do not break the weakpoint until the client gives the order.
Private
3. Treat the cable gently. Slacking off quickly after a pull may put a knot in
the line.
4. The client is in charge of the operation. Give good advice and help but do not
carry out the operation in the absence of a client representative.
5. Give the client accurate and complete dimensions of the tools in the hole.
6. Use a large guide on the overshot appropriate for drill collar size.
7. For a cut and thread operation, cut the cable 5 to 7 ft above the rotary after
securing it in the cable hanger with the correct size bushings. Use local
experience to determine extra footage needed when the cable is keyseated.
8. Prepare the rope sockets according to all latest specifications. Pull test to
6,000 lbf with cable hanger in place. Remove the adapter sub and try to
dismantle it. If it is good, it cannot be dismantled without the ejector tool.

Pass the lower rope socket through the Bowen overshot before again putting
on the 2.25 in hex adapter since it can not pass the 2.1875 in bushing at
the top of the overshot.
9. Maintain cable tension at about 2,000 lbf above the normal tension. The
excess tension prevents the cable from doubling back under the overshot
leasing to broken armor strands.
10. Use the remote tension indicator and place it where the driller can see it.
11. Go in hole slowly. Any increase in tension requires prompt corrective action.
Stop at any increase in tension. Pull back up and advance slowly. Analyze
the situation for remedial action.
12. Any increase of tension at the depth of torpedo means that the overshot is
packed full of cuttings and junk. Clean it by circulation.
13. Circulate at the tool. This keeps the tool clean for proper grip by the grapple.
14. Prove by tension and by mud pump pressures that the tool is engaged.
15. Do not rotate the drill pipe while coming out of hole.
16. Remove the tool cautiously. Do not damage the tool in haste having spent
so much time and effort to retrieve it.
15.7.1.2 Potential accidents

1. Keep the point of the spear and the dogs in the overshot in good condition.
Watch for correct engagement each time. Dropping the top end of the cable
in the well can have tragic consequences.
2. If the lower rope socket and spear have been dropped in hole, there are
two means of recovery.
Private
a. The assembly is long enough so that it may be recovered by simply

running the overshot down to where it has come to rest in the drill pipe.
b. Pulling the pipe will recover the assembly and cable because of the
2.25 in hex nut and the 2.1875 in sleeve in the top of the overshot. This
second protection is lost where the I.D. of the pipe makes it necessary to
substitute the 1.6875 in adapter for the 2.25 in hex adapter.
3. If the cut and thread assembly unscrews at any joint then there is a serious
situation. Make sure that every joint is well made up.
15.8 Side-door overshot technique

The side door overshot method consists of threading the cable at surface into a
special overshot. The overshot is then run down, with the cable running outside,
until the fish is reached.
15.8.1 Advantages
1. Faster operation than cut and thread.
2. The cable is not cut.
3. The tool is attached to the cable at all times.
15.8.1.1 Disadvantages
1. The cable can easily be damaged or broken.
2. The hole size must be large enough to allow the torpedo to pass between the
drill pipe joints and the bore hole wall.
15.8.1.2 Procedure
1. Make certain that the hole is large enough. The side-door overshot is 4.5 in
OD therefore a minimum hole size of 5.5 in is required at the point where
the torpedo is to pass out through the side slot. For best results, hole size
should be at least 7 in.
2. Support the cable using the cable hanger in the rotary table.
3. Hang the sheave and tension device to one side in the derrick to provide
clearance for the block.
4. Do the follwing to prepare the side-door overshot to go in the hole:
Private
a. Loosen set screws and remove the grapple control ring.

b. Remove the grapple by rotating clockwise.
c. Remove the side plate by removing the four Allen screws and the sliding
plate toward the bottom of the tool.
d. Select the correct sub and connect the overshot to the drill pipe or tubing.
Tighten with tongs.
e. Lay the cable through the side plate opening, so it passes over the roller
and down through the lower center part of the overshot.
f. Replace the plate and the four Allen screws.
g. Select a good grapple of correct size. Thread it around the cable. Slide
grapple into lower end of overshot and rotate it counterclockwise into

the buttress thread of body.
h. Replace the control ring and tighten the set screws holding it.
5. Lock the rotary table. This is necessary since the cable rests on one side.
6. Apply about normal tension on the cable and set the winch brake.
7. Remove the cable clamp.
8. Lower the overshot and first joint of pipe into the hole and check the slips. A
segment may have to be removed to avoid damage to the cable.
9. Makeup second joint of pipe by hand. Do not rotate the portion of pipe
in the hole.
10. Descend slowly, watching the weight indicator for any increase of tension.
Stop promptly, pull up, advance cautiously in attempt to overcome any
obstacle.
11. Add subsequent joints of pipe.
12. Pipe measurements and tally indicate when the overshot approaches the
fish. Circulation of mud should be considered if there is any increase of
tension at the torpedo.
13. If there is no increase of tension at the depth of the tool, the cable has
become keyseated. Do not go deeper unless it has been agreed to break
the weak-point.
14. If there is an increase in tension at the depth of the head, the tool is moving
down and may be engaged.
15. When the attempt to engage the fish has been made, STOP, pull up without
rotation, observe the weight indicator, attempt to pick up slack in the cable.
16. If upward movement of the pipe does not decrease cable tension, the cable
may be keyseated or the tool is not recovered.
Private
17. If the tool is engaged but cable keyseated, upward travel with pipe and tool
will “peel” the cable from the keyseat. Special care will be necessary to
recover the cable without damaging knots.
18. If the cable is free, follow the drill pipe out of the hole by spooling up cable
as pipe is removed.
19. Remove the tool to avoid damage. Bump down to move grapple up, then
turn right one turn per inch of withdrawal.
15.8.1.3 Procedure highlights

1. Protect the cable. The hole must be large enough and the slips must be
placed carefully to allow cable in the rotary. The rotary must be locked.
2. Do not break the weakpoint by descending with pipe while cable is keyseated.
Private
H2173
H2174
3 - 1/2" API LINE PIPE
2" API EUE 8 RND
STR ACME THD.

2.654" - 6 T.P.I.
BOWL
BOWEN-ITCO "6401
COMPLETE ASS’Y
BOWEN ITCO "6400
4 - 1/2" O.D.
GRAPPLE
BOWEN ITCO "1448
MAX. CATCH SIZE 2-3/8"
GRAPPLE CONTROL CONTROL SCREW

BOWEN-ITCO "6403 BOWEN-ITCO "6459
Figure 15-10: Bowen side-door overshot
15.9 Freeing at the weakpoint

Freeing at the weakpoint consists of pulling on the weakpoint until it breaks. The
cable is then pulled out of the hole and the overshot run down to the fish.
15.9.1 Advantages
1. Fast operation.
2. The cable is not damaged.
3. Good recovery in cased hole.
Private
15.9.1.1 Disadvantages
1. The cable is not connected so the overshot has no guidance down to the fish.
2. Possibility of breaking the cable rather than the weakpoint.
3. The driller has no means of knowing accurately how much weight is applied
on the tool.
4. If the tool is not stuck at the bottom, then when the weakpoint is broken, the
tool may fall to the bottom.
15.10 Procedure
1. Pull off only when it has been determined that the cable is not keyseated or
stuck and the client has agreed to having the weakpoint broken.
2. Break the weakpoint with travelling block using a cable hanger, if possible.
3. If the weakpoint must be broken with the winch then check the rig up setup
carefully before commencing.
4. Clear the derrick floor and do not allow anyone close to the cable.
5. Increase tension slowly in steps of 500 lbf so that fatigue will help break
the weakpoint.
6. Record the surface tension and tension at which the weakpoint breaks.
7. In the event of failure of the cable, torpedo or bridle, determine the length
left in hole.
8. Give the client a complete description of equipment left in hole.
9. Dress the overshot and make up tight to drill pipe. Refer to the procedure
for cut and thread operation.
10. Approach the fish with mud circulating slowly to keep the overshot clean and
remove any bridge material surrounding the fishing bell.. Record the pump
rate and pressure.
11. Preferably do not rotate to engage the fish.
12. Increase in circulating pressure indicates the fish is engaged.
13. Give the driller tool compression and tensile strength ratings. Ensure the
ratings are respected.
14. Come out of hole without rotating the pipe.
Private
15. Remove the tool such as to avoid damage. When a Bowen overshot with
spiral grapple is used, bump down and then make one right turn per inch of
withdrawal.
Private
A-i GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Useful links A-i
A Useful links
A.1 InTouchSupport ________________________________________________ A-1
A.2 InTouch reference pages _______________________________________ A-2
A.3 Product Center web pages _____________________________________ A-3
Private
SRPC Doc-TBT\SRPC Doc-TBT\275253781\2.4\Release Date:16-Nov-2006\EDMS UID: 275253781\Produced: 05-Dec-2006 09:43:50 A-ii GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Useful links A-ii
Intentionally Blank
Private
A-1 GlobalTOPS. - Vol. 1 / Useful links A-1
A Useful links TOPS
Below is a table of links to websites and InTouch Reference Pages used in the
creation of this manual. The table is designed to aid in location of information for
field operations or fulfillment of Global TOPS training requirements, which may
be beyond the scope of this manual.
A.1 InTouchSupport
http://intouchsupport.com/intouch/login/login.cfm .
This is the single most useful reference source for Schlumberger field personnel
today.
Note
The Operator must have an active LDAP username and password to use
InTouch. See your local network administrator if you do not have a LDAP.

Potential Loss: Information, Personnel
It is extremely important that any and all local resources be exhausted before
submitting a ticket to InTouch Support.
InTouch Support is in place to link the field with the product centers on a GLOBAL
basis. As such, InTouch resources need to be focused on matters, which can
only be addressed by the product centers.
Information on InTouch Support comes in many forms:
• Help desk Tickets submitted by field personnel when all local reference
sources have been exhausted.
• Solutions provided by InTouch Support staff in answer to field submitted
Helpdesk tickets.
• Documentation - Information, such as maintenance manuals, posted by
InTouch staff for field reference.
• Best Practices - Approved procedures for Schlumberger operations.
Private
• Training Links for specific equipment or services run in the field.

• Technical Alerts - The latest technical information that field staff should be
aware of, such as mandatory recalls, updated maintenance procedures and
obsolete equipment listings.
• Case Histories and Lessons Learned through experience in the field.
• Reference Pages devoted to specific topics composed of compilations of
all of the above.
A.2 InTouch reference pages

Note
The operator must be logged into InTouch Support http://intouchsupport.com/into
uch/login/login.cfm. Then simply enter the Content ID number into the search
window.
Below is a list of useful Reference Pages used in the creation of this manual.
• QHSE Reference Page - Content ID: 3312250

• Injury Prevention Reference Page - Content ID: 3512143
• Land Transport Reference Page - Content ID: 3511706
• Wireline Units Reference Page - Content ID: 3264711
• Basic Equipment Reference Page - Content ID: 3264507
• Rig-Up Equipment Reference Page - Content ID: 3258434
• Armored Logging Cables (ALC) Reference Page - Content ID: 3258435
• Tool Adapters Reference Pages - Content ID: 3258462
• Logging Heads Reference Pages - Content ID: 3258451
• Wireline Fishing Reference Page - Content ID: 3876112
• TLCS Products Reference Pages - Content ID: 3258070
• ECRD & ERS Reference Pages - Content ID: 3296455
• Wireline Perforating Systems - Content ID: 3250896
• Offshore Units (OSU) Reference Pages - Content ID: 3258452
• Wireline Setting tools, Plugs, Packers Reference Pages - Content ID:
3250887
Private
A.3 Product Center web pages

• IPC Integrated Productivity and Conveyance Center
Headquartered in Sugar Land, Texas. IPC’s specific domains of expertise
include wellsite surface equipment, coiled tubing services, cables and
conveyance technologies. This web page is an excellent reference for the
latest specifications, ratings and revisions for cables, heads, BCC boots,
logging units and various basic equipment.
• SRC Technology Center Schlumberger Reservoir Completions
http://www.rosharon.oilfield.slb.com/
• SRPC Schlumberger Riboud Product Center
Private

Global TOP SLB

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Global TOP SLB

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GlobalTOPS Reference Manual

- Volume 1: Generalities and

Private TOPS, Wir eline Handbook

Copyright © 2006 Schlumberger, Unpublished Work. All rights reserved.

Private TOPS, Wir eline Handbook

Copyright © 2006 Sophia, Unpublished Work. All rights reserved.

Copyright © 2006 Schlumberger, Unpublished Work. All rights reserved.

Trademarks & Service marks

Schlumberger, the Schlumberger logotype, and other words or symbols used

A complete list of Schlumberger marks may be viewed at the Schlumberger

Author: SRPC Doc-TBT

Reviewer: SRPC Doc-TBT

Approver: SRPC Doc-TBT

FOREWORD ____________________________________________________ xvii

1 Health, safety, and environment

1.8 Explosive operations safety procedures ______________________ 1-25

2 Operation management system

5.6 Material properties __________________________________________ 5-10

12 Wireline logging heads

13.2 Standard bridles ____________________________________________ 13-4

14 Integrated Depth Dual Wheel Spooler (IDW)

14.3 General information _________________________________________ 14-3

1-1 Safety loop ________________________________________________________ 1-8

3-6 Measuring AC voltage _____________________________________________ 3-9

7-6 Installing gasket (460) ____________________________________________ 7-11

8-29 Female lifting cap_________________________________________________ 8-43

10-13 Preparing the conductor wires ____________________________________ 10-16

12-31 Completed male and female conductor terminations _______________ 12-49

14-27 Exploded view of the pushing assembly ___________________________ 14-22

15-9 Adapters chart___________________________________________________ 15-19

1-1 Explosives Training Requirements _________________________________ 1-25

6-6 AH-107 Electrical Checks _________________________________________ 6-21

9-14 Operating Specifications __________________________________________ 9-20

12-1 LEH-QT Failure Symptoms and Probable Causes __________________ 12-6

FOREWORD CMTD, TOPS

1 Health, safety, and environment

1.2.9 Redundant safety practices ___________________________________ 1-6

1.5.15 Grinding equipment _________________________________________ 1-21

1.7 Installation Hot Work - “Permit to Work” _______________________ 1-24

1 Health, safety, and environment safety precautions introduction

Schlumberger’s QHSE Policy objective is to prevent accidents. This policy

• Review of Schlumberger’s QHSE policy

• Safety training steps

1.1 Personnel safety

As an Operator, you will be exposed to several types of risk:

• Handling and stepping

1.1.1 Frontier situations

1.2 Schlumberger SLB-QHSE-POLICY

The long-term business success of Schlumberger depends on our ability to

• ensure the Quality of our products and services,

• protect the Environment in the communities where we work and live.

We are committed to the proactive integration of QHSE objectives into our

To enact this vision, we will:

• define and respond to customer expectations,

This zero defect culture shall be attained through:

• visible commitment, leadership and involvement of line management tied to

• maximized efficiency and synergy through sharing of resources,

1.2.5 QHSE management system

This QHSE philosophy shall be communicated to all employees, customers,

The QHSE Management System model comprises eight interrelated

• commitment and leadership,

• implementation and monitoring,

These are continuously improved by conformance verification checks:

• on day-to-day standards and procedures (controls),